PREPARED BY: CSCS(SW/AW) JAMES ANDERSON

Center for Service Support

Athens, GA

MISSION
Develop and implement human performance solutions that
satisfy validated Fleet individual performance
requirements while enhancing professional and personal
growth of officer and enlisted naval service.

VISION
To establish and maintain a continuum of personal and
professional growth of officer and enlisted naval service
personnel in an environment of proper alignment, overall
efficiency and continuing improvement.

2
Culinarian's Code
I pledge my professional knowledge and skill to the advancement of
our profession and to pass it on to those who are to follow.

I shall foster a spirit of courteous consideration and fraternal

cooperation within our profession.

I shall place honor and the standing of our profession before personal
advancement.

I shall not use unfair means to effect my professional advancement or

to injure the chances of another colleague to secure and hold
employment.

I shall be fair, courteous and considerate in my dealings with fellow

colleagues.

I shall conduct any necessary comment on, or criticism of, the work of
a fellow colleague with careful regard of the good name and dignity of
the culinary profession, and will scrupulously refrain from criticism to
gain personal advantage.

I shall never expect anyone to subject themselves to risks which I

would not be willing to assume myself.

I shall help to protect all members against one another from within our
profession.

I shall be just as enthusiastic about the success of others as I am about

my own.

I shall be too big for worry, too noble for anger, too strong for fear and
too happy to permit pressure of business to hurt anyone, within or
without the profession.

3
 Sailor’s Creed
“I am a United States Sailor.

I will support and defend the

Constitution of the United States of
America and I will obey the orders
of those appointed over me.

I represent the fighting spirit of the

Navy and those who have gone
before me to defend freedom and
democracy around the world.

I proudly serve my country’s Navy

combat team with honor, courage
and commitment.

I am committed to excellence and

the fair treatment of all.”

4
 Acknowledgements
We extend a grateful appreciation in the development of this Culinary Specialist Study
Guide to:

CSCS (SW/AW) James Anderson Center for Service Support

CSC(SW) Catina Harris Center for Service Support
CSC (SS) James Driscoll Center for Service Support
CSC (SW/AW) Paulette Williams Naval Station, Norfolk, VA

We gratefully appreciate the support from the culinary industry professional for the
fellowship in promoting professionalism in Navy food service. .

Mr. Michael Harants, CEC, CCE Certified Executive Chef

5
 References
During the development of this Study Guide, references cited were the latest available.
We encourage trainees to check naval publications and instructions to verify that Naval
publications and instructions are the most current available. Reference used in this Study
Guide include:

a. NAVSUP P-486, Food Service Management

b. The New Professional Chef, 6th Edition
c. The Professional Chef, 7th Edition
e. The Arts and Science of Culinary Preparation
f NAVMED P-5010-1, Manual of Naval Preventive Medicine

WEBSITES

www.navsup.navy.mil
www.dt.navy.mil
www.nehc.med.navy.mil
www.ifsea.com
www.acfchefs.org
www.starkeyintl.com
www.chefcertification.com
http://90machinery.navsses.navy.mil

6
 CONTENTS
CHAPTERS

1. Sanitation………………………………………………………………… 8

2. Receipt, Inspection, Expenditure, and Storage of Food Items………...51

3. Accounting……………………………………………………………….70

4. Foodservice Equipment…………………………………………………90

5. Food Preparation………………………………………………………129

6. Meat, Poultry, and Seafood……………………………………………168

7. Nutrition and Menu Planning…………………………………………188

8. Breads and Desserts……………………………………………………221

9. Foodservice……………………………………………………………..262

10. Foodservice Administration…………………………………………..291

11. Foodservice Management…………………………………….……….315

APPENDIX: Food Service Forms……………………………………………351

GLOSSARY OF TERMS…………………………………………………….372

7
 CHAPTER 1

SANITATION
In a foodservice operation nothing can rival the importance of the sanitary aspects of
food preparation and service. Carelessly handled food is easily contaminated with
pathogenic organisms that may lead to illness. This chapter provides guidance for all
military and nonmilitary personnel of the Navy, Marine Corps and the Military
Sealift Command involved with food safety/food service Sanitation. In addition to the
hazards of food contamination, which Culinary Specialist (CS) personnel have always
contended with, modern warfare has added other hazardous chemical, biological, and
radiological agents that may be used in any future war. Protection of the food supply and
decontamination measures in the galley and messing areas are vital to the defense of the
ship or station. This chapter prescribes the policies, procedures, and responsibilities for
implementing the Navy and Marine Corps Food Safety/Food Service Sanitation Program.
It applies to all food service operations within the Navy and Marine Corps, including the
Military Sealift Command, Naval Reserve and Marine Corps Reserve.
FOOD-BORNE ILLNESSES

Food-borne illnesses can incapacitate large numbers of personnel in a short period of

time. In addition to the toxins or poisons produced by bacterial growth, certain foods are
inherently or naturally poisonous. The poisons in these foods tend to attack the nervous
system resulting in such symptoms as weakness or paralysis, numbness, tingling of the
ears, apprehension, and even death.

Food-borne illnesses can be classified into the three following basic types: natural or
chemical food poisoning, food intoxication, and food infection.

NATURAL OR CHEMICAL FOOD POISONING

Both natural and chemical food poisonings are caused by man; man’s carelessness,
indifference, or ignorance. Natural and chemical food poisonings are grouped together as
one food-borne illness because they both occur naturally. The characteristics that
differentiate natural and chemical poisonings are discussed next. Natural Food Poisoning.
In this type of food-borne illness, the food in its natural state contains elements poisonous
to humans. As an CS, you will learn of many new foods that are not common to the
United States. Some of these foods are from plants and animals that can cause severe
illness and even death when consumed. Every effort is made to keep poisonous plants off
a ship. Some types of mushrooms also contain natural poisons. Only an expert can
decide whether or not a certain mushroom is fit to eat. The safest rule is to never use
unfamiliar foods unless your medical officer approves their use. Chemical Food
Poisoning. Some food-borne illnesses are caused by chemical poisons. In the case of
chemical food poisoning, the poisons are introduced into the food accidentally. The
following types of chemical poisoning may be experienced in foodservice operations.

8
Antimony Poisoning

Antimony poisoning is caused by eating food cooked in poorly coated or chipped

enameled cooking utensils.

Cyanide Poisoning

Cyanide poisoning may result if silverware is not properly washed and sanitized after
detarnishing.
Zinc Poisoning

Zinc poisoning in food is rare. It may occur when acid foods are cooked in galvanized
iron kettles. Outbreaks have occurred when apples have been cooked in this type of
kettle.

Lead and Arsenic Poisonings

Lead and arsenic sometimes used to spray vegetables may cause these foods to
become poisonous. Be sure all fresh fruits and vegetables are thoroughly washed before
you cook them, or before they are eaten raw. Lead poisoning may also result from the
ingestion of food or water that has been in contact with lead pipes, lead-plated equipment,
and lead-soldered pots and pans. Lead is a cumulative poison; the accumulation of small
doses in the body will eventually cause chronic lead poisoning.

Fluoride Poisoning

Fluoride poisoning is caused by sodium fluoride, a substance often used to get rid of
cockroaches. It is a white powder that can be easily mistaken for powdered milk. Keep
all containers of such poison out of the galley and bakeshop.
Methyl Chloride Poisoning

Methyl chloride poisoning is caused by leaking mechanical refrigerators. Check your

equipment for such leaks and request scheduled planned maintenance service (PMS)
from the engineering division to detect faulty equipment.
FOOD BORNE INTOXICATION

This type of illness is caused by toxins. Under favorable conditions certain bacteria
produce chemical compounds called toxins, which, if ingested, cause food intoxication.
Staphylococcus is the most commonly reported food intoxication.

Staphylococcus

The staphylococcus germ is found in the throat, on the skin in pimples and boils, and
in great abundance in the postnasal drip of people recovering from colds. Consequently,
the most prevalent carrier of food intoxication is foodservice personnel. People with any
of these symptoms must not be allowed to work in food preparation spaces in any

9
capacity. Foods most associated with outbreaks of staphylococcus are pork products and
fowl. Ham is also susceptible to staphylococcus poisoning and must not be sliced too far
in advance of serving unless properly refrigerated. Other foods commonly involved are
potted meats, fish, cheese, milk products (including cream- and custard-filled pastries),
and potato and macaroni salads. Foods can contain sufficient toxin to cause food
poisoning and yet have no odor of spoilage and no abnormal taste. Even when food has
been properly refrigerated, it can become contaminated by bacteria while it is being
prepared or while it is standing in the galley before it is served.

Botulism

Botulism is a second type of food intoxication. This disease, usually fatal, is caused by
the toxin produced by the rod-shaped bacterium called clostridium botulinum. Botulinum
organisms are found in the soil and gain access to foods through contact with soil, dust,
and possibly water. The foods most often responsible for botulism are either canned or
fermented foods in which the preserving process has not succeeded in destroying the
bacteria in the food. The botulinum grows and multiplies in an airtight container.
However, when cans are damaged, leak, bulge, or are sprung, the contents are presumed
to be unsafe. The botulinum organisms sometimes produce a gas and cheesy odor in
food, but the absence of these signs does not necessarily mean that the bacteria are not
present.
FOOD BORNE INFECTION

This type of food illness is caused by microorganisms such as the salmonella, shigella,
and clostridium species and the streptococcus, bacillus, and typhoid fever bacteria. A
large percentage of food infections are transmitted by foods that have been allowed to
remain at room temperature for a prolonged period of time. The great majority of
outbreaks of food infection is caused by meat (poultry, particularly turkey) and meat
mixtures. For this reason, poultry dressing should not be served as a leftover. Other
foods that may be involved are custards, milk cream, ice cream, seafood, meat, eggs,
meat products, shellfish, salads, mayonnaise, salad dressings, poultry dressing, bread
puddings, cream pies, éclairs, and filled pastries. These microorganisms are transmitted
to the food by personnel who are sick or carriers and who are allowed to handle food in
the food preparation area.
Salmonellosis

Salmonella bacteria are transmitted by foods, usually from undercooked or semi

cooked raw foods, or from foods that have become infected after cooking by persons who
are harboring the bacteria. Since salmonella bacilli leave the body through the intestinal
tract, the main source of salmonella infection is people who do not wash their hands after
leaving the head. Consequently, they contaminate all the food they handle. Also, mice,
rats, and cockroaches may contaminate food by dragging filth over food and food
utensils, or by intestinal deposits that are brushed off into food or containers. While no
specific foods may be said to be responsible for salmonellosis, the ones most likely to
harbor the salmonella bacilli are (1) those that are usually eaten raw such as salads and
greens; (2) cooked leftover foods that are not reheated thoroughly; (3) foods that are

10
undercooked, especially poultry and uninspected meats; and (4) infected eggs that are
eaten raw or undercooked. See “Safe Egg-Handling Guidelines” in chapter 1 of
NAVMED P-5010.
Streptococcus

Infections such as septic sore throat and scarlet fever are transmitted by contaminated
milk and by certain other foods, including meat, meat products, and dressings. One type
of this infection also causes a gastrointestinal disturbance. Floor dust is one of the modes
of transmission.

Typhoid Fever

Typhoid fever is transmitted by milk, shellfish, or water supplies that have become
polluted with the urine or feces of a person harboring the organism of this disease. It is
also spread by human carriers and flies that transport the typhoid bacteria from soiled
articles to foods, dishes, and cooking utensils.
Bacillus Dysentery

Bacillus dysentery is transmitted by contaminated foods or water, by human carriers,

or by flies. The bacilli of this disease are found in the bowel discharges of infected
persons.

Infectious Hepatitis

Infectious hepatitis is a form of liver disease with symptoms of general discomfort.

Jaundice, often characterized by skin yellowing, and other signs of liver injury are
sometimes present. The disease is highly contagious. Drinking water or unsanitary
conditions and flies or other biting insects may transmit the infectious material.
ANIMAL PARASITES

Animal parasites sometimes enter the body in food and produce infections. Some of
these forms of animal life are one-celled. All are so tiny that they are not visible when
the food is being prepared.

Amoebic Dysentery

This illness is caused by a one-celled animal, the amoeba. These organisms eat the
red blood corpuscles of the body and the cells that line the intestines. The dysentery-
producing amoeba is transmitted by foods served cold and moist, such as celery, lettuce,
other fresh vegetables, or fresh berries. These foods may be infected by human earners,
by flies, or by having been grown in fields where animal excreta was used as fertilizer.

Trichinosis

Eating infected pork that has not been thoroughly cooked is the most common cause
of trichinosis. All fresh pork products must be cooked to an internal temperature of

11
165°F or above to kill the trichinella worm. Since there is no way of knowing whether or
not this parasite is present, the pork must always be thoroughly cooked.

Beef Tapeworm Infection

Beef tapeworms are transmitted by infected beef that has not been cooked long
enough to kill the encysted larvae. To prevent ingesting the beef tapeworm, only
government-inspected beef should be used. If it is necessary to use beef that has not been
inspected, freeze it at 14°F or below for 5 days or longer, or pickle it in a 20- to 25-
percent salt solution for 5 days or longer. Cook it well-done; never serve it rare.

Fish Tapeworm Infection

Fish tapeworm is transmitted by infected fish that has not been thoroughly cooked.
For purposes of safety, always make sure fish is thoroughly cooked and is never tasted in
the raw state.

MOLDS AND YEASTS

Other types of cell life that may not be harmful are molds and yeasts.

Molds

Molds are composed of many cells and maybe very small or large enough to cover an
entire wall. They grow best in dark, damp places where temperatures are favorable.
Some molds are valuable in the production of medicines such as penicillin; other molds
may cause certain infections in human beings. Molds spoil the taste of food and
eventually destroy it. Molds may be removed from certain foods and the remainder of the
food used. Consult your medical department on the precautions to be taken.

Yeasts

Like bacteria, yeasts are single-celled. They reproduce by budding. When a bud
becomes sufficiently large, it separates from the original cell and becomes an
independent cell. Certain yeasts are used in breadmaking, vinegar fermentation, and the
manufacture of beverages.

12
 Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Staphylococcus Food Several Enterotoxins of Cream filled Pastries, 1 to 7 hours, usually 2
Poisoning Staphylococcus aureus custards, salad to 4 hours
dressings, meat, meat
products
Botulism Toxins produced by Home canned 12 to 36 hours, usually
Clostridium botulinum vegetables, fruits, 18 to 36 hours
types A, B and E; rarely meats, baked potatoes,
F and G pot pies, usually low
acid or alkaline
Clostridium Toxins elaborated by Meats, stews, meat pies, 8 to 22 hours, usually 10
perfringens Food Type A and C strains of gravies made of beef, to 12 hours
Poisoning Clostridium perfringens turkey or chicken and
beans
Vibrio Enterotoxins and Seafood, any food 4 to 96 hours, usually 12
parahaemolyticus Food hemolsis (responsible cross-contaminated with to 24 hours
Poisoning for a hemolytic reaction, raw seafood, food rinsed
the "kenagawa with contaminated sea
phenomenon" of Vibrio water
parahaemolyticus)
Bacillus cereus Food Two enterotoxins of Rice (such as fried rice), 30 minutes to 6 hours,
Poisoning Bacillus cereus, one vegetables and meat where vomiting is the
heat stable causing dishes symptom, 6 to 16 hours
vomiting and one heat where diarrhea is the
labile causing diarrhea. symptom.

13
 FOOD BORNE PARASITIC INFECTIONS
Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Amebiasis Entamoeba histolytica Contaminated raw A few days to several
vegetables; months or years.
contaminated water Commonly 2 to 4 weeks
Trichinosis Trichinella spiralis Raw or insufficiently 2 to 28 days; depending
(Trichiniasis, cooked flesh of animals; on number of larvae
Trichinellosis) animals containing ingested
viable encysted larvae,
chiefly pork and pork
products, and beef
products adulterated
with raw pork
Taeniasis due to Taenia solium Raw or uncooked 8 to 12 weeks
Taenia Solium infected pork
Intestinal Form (Pork
Tapeworm)
Cysticerosis (Infection Taenia solium Food or water A few months to 30
by Taenia solium contaminated with the years
cystericercus) eggs of Taenia solium
Taenia saginata Taenia saginata Raw or uncooked beef 10 to 14 weeks
Infection (Beef
Tapeworm)
Diphyllocothriasis Diphyllobothrium latum Raw or inadequately 3 to 6 weeks
(Broad or Fish cooked fresh water fish
Tapeworm infection)
Anisakiasis Larval nematodes of the Raw, undercooked, or A few hours to 1 week
family Anisakidae, improperly frozen
including the general seafood, especially cod,
Anisakis, Phocanema, haddock, fluke, Pacific
Contracaecum, and salmon, herring,
Terranova flounder, monkfish, and
fish used for sashimi

14
 CHEMICALS
Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Chinese Restaurant Monosodium glutamate Food containing large Few minutes to 1 hour
Syndrome quantities (5 gms) of
MSG
Arsenic Poisoning Insecticides and Unwashed fruits and 1 hour or less
rodenticides vegetables
Fluoride Poisoning Insecticides and Accidentally Few minutes to 2 hours
rodenticides contaminated foods
such as dry milk, flour,
baking powder, cake
mixes
Antimony Poisoning Antimony in gray High-acid foods and Few minutes to 1 hour
enamelware beverages
Lead Poisoning Lead in earthenware High-acid foods and 30 minutes or longer
vessels, pesticides, beverages stored in
paint, plaster, putty, lead-containing vessels,
soldered joints any accidentally
contaminated food
Copper Poisoning Copper in pipes and High-acid foods and Few minutes to a few
utensils beverages hours
Cyanide Poisoning Metal polishes (Silver Food accidentally 2 hours or less
polishes) containing contaminated with
cyanide detarnishers
Zinc Poisoning Zinc in galvanized High-acid foods and Few minutes to a few
containers beverages stored in hours
galvanized containers
Organophosphorous Organic phosphorous Any accidentally Few minutes to a few
Poisoning insecticides, e.g., contaminated food hours
parathion, TEPP,
diazinon malathion

15
 NATURAL POISONS
Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Mushroom Poisoning Muscarine group of Eating Muscarine group 15 minutes to 2 hours
mushrooms of mushrooms, eating
unknown varieties,
mistaking toxic
mushrooms for edible
types
Mushroom Poisoning Gastrointestina irritating Many varieties of wild 30 minutes to 2 hours
group of mushrooms mushrooms
Mushroom Poisoning Cyclopeptides and Certain species of 6 to 24 minutes
gyromitrin in some Amanita, Galerina, and
mushrooms Gyromitra mushrooms
Paralytic/Neurologic Saxitoxin and similar Shellfish from waters Few minutes to 30
Shellfish Poisoning toxins from with high concentration minutes
dinoflagellates of Protogonalulax or
Protoogonaulas and Gymnodinium species
Gymnodinium species (Red Tide)
Diarrhetic Shellfish Okadaic acid and others Shellfish from waters 1/2 hour to 12 hours,
Poisoning produced by with high concentration usually 4 hours
dinoflagellates of Dinophyses
Dinophyses acuminata
and D. forti
Ciguatera Poisoning Ciguatoxin in intestines, Liver, intestines, roe, 3 to 5 hours
roe, gonads, and flesh of gonads, or flesh of
tropical marine fish tropical reef fish;
usually large reef fish
are more commonly
toxic
Water Hemlock Resin and cicutoxin in Root of water hemlock 15 to 60 minutes
Poisoning hemlock root Citcuta virosa, C.
maculata, and C.
douglarii. May be
mistaken for wild
parsnip, sweet potato, or
carrot.
Jimsonweed Poisoning Tropane alkaloids Any part of plant, Less than 1 hour
tomatoes grafted to
Jimsonweed root stock
Solanine Poisoning Solanine Potato sprouts 1 hour or less

16
 FOOD BORNE INFECTIONS
Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Viral Hepatitis A Hepatitis A virus Contaminated water and 10 to 50 days, average
(Infectious Hepatitis) food, including milk, 30 days
sliced meats, salads, and
raw or undercooked
mollusks
Epidemic Viral Norwalk virus Clams, oysters, cockles, 24 to 48 hours, usually
Gastroenteropathy adenoviruses, green salads, pastry, and 12 to 36 hours
(Norwalk type disease) astroviruses, frostings
caliciviruses,
coronavirus, and others

Escherichia coli (E.coli Bacterium Escherichia Undercooked ground 1 to 10 days

0157:h7) coli beef, unpasteurized milk

Salmonellosis Numerous serotypes of Raw (especially 6 to 48 hours, range 12

Salmonella, e.g., cracked) eggs, egg to 36 hours
S enteritidis, S. products, raw milk and
typhimurium products, poultry, pet
turtles and chicks.
Typhoid Fever Salmonella typhi Food or water Usually 1 to 3 weeks
contaminated by feces
or urine of a patient or
carrier. Shellfish from
sewage contaminated
water. Flies can infect
foods.
Yersiniosis Yersinia enterocolitica, Meat (pork, beef and 1 to 7 days, usually 1 to
Y. pseudotuberculosis lamb), oysters, fish, raw 3 days
milk, contaminated
pasteurized milk and
raw unpasteurized milk
and tofu

17
 FOOD BORNE INFECTIONS (continued)
Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Shigellosis (Bacillary Four species or Food or water 1 to 7 days, usually 1 to
dysentery) subgenera of Shigella, contaminated by feces 3 days
e.g., from a patient or carrier.
S. dysenteriae, S. Any direct or indirect
flexneri, S. boydii, and fecal-oral transmission
S. sonnei. They are from a patient or carrier.
divided into groups A, Water, milk, cockroach
B, C, and D and some and fly-borne
40 serotypes identified transmission may occur
by arabic numbers from direct fecal
contamination.
Diarrhea caused by Campylobacter jejuni Food or unpasteurized 1 to 10 days, usually 3
campylobacteria (C. fetus subsp. jujuni) milk or water. Contact to 5 days
(Campylobacter and C. coli. A diversity with infected pets
enteritis, Vibrionic of biotypes and (especially puppies and
enteritis) serotypes occur kittens), wild animals,
or infected infants; and
possibly food cross-
contaminated with these
sources.
Brucellosis (Undulant Brucella abortus, Raw milk, daily 1 to 10 days, usually 3
fever, Malta fever) biotypes 1 to 7 and 9; B. products (cheese) from to 5 days
melitensis, biotypes 1 to infected animals.
3; B suis, biotypes 1 to Contact with infected
4; and B. canis animals or their tissues,
blood, urine, vaginal
discharges, aborted
fetuses, and placentas.
Leptospiros (Weil's Leptospira interrogans Food contaminated with 4 to 19 days, usually 10
disease, Hemorrhagic species which is urine of infected rats. days
jaundice) subdivided into more Abraded skin or mucous
than 170 serovars in the membrane contact with
U.S. are water moist soil or
icterohaemorrhagiae, vegetation contaminated
canicola, autumnalis, with urine of infected
and hebdomidis. animals.

18
 FOOD BORNE INFECTIONS (continued)
Table of Incubation Times

Name Etiologic Agent Foods usually involved Incubation Time

(Onset of Symptoms)
Streptococcal Diseases Stretococcus pyogenes, Milk, milk products, 1 to 3 days, rarely
caused by Group A Group A has about 75 egg salad, deviled hard longer
(Beta Hemolytic) serologically distinct boiled eggs.
Streptococci types. Occasionally
(Streptococcal sore groups B, C, and G can
throat) produce disease.
Tuberculosis (TB), Mycobacterium bovis Raw unpasteurized milk About 4 to 12 weeks,
Bovine or dairy products. the risk of infection
remains greatest for 1 to
2 years after infection.
Risk may persist for
lifetime as a latent
infection.
Tularemia (Rabbit Francisella tularensis Insufficiently cooked 2 to 10 days, usually 3
Fever) rabbit or hare meat; days
contaminated water.
Q Fever (Query Fever) Coxiella burnetii Raw milk from infected Usually 2 to 3 weeks
cows
Listerosis Listeria monocytogenes Inadequate cooking, 3 to 21 days, maybe
from soil, manure and failure to properly longer
silage pasteurize milk,
prolonged refrigeration.

FOOD PREPARATION

It is evident that the foodservice worker is the most important link in the transmission
of disease through food. The workers’ health, personal habits, understanding of bacteria,
and the methods of preparing and serving of food are of concern not only to themselves
but also to their shipmates as well.
BACTERIA

An understanding of bacteria is valuable to all personnel and essential to those who

work with food in any way. Bacteria are one-celled microorganisms; so small they are
visible only under a microscope. They are widely distributed in the air, water, soil, and in
animal and plant tissues. Bacteria are classified according to their shape. Those round in
shape are called cocci; the rod-shaped ones are called bacilli; and the spiral-shaped ones
are called spirilla. Since bacteria cannot be seen, our best defense against the harmful
bacteria is strict adherence to sanitation principles. Bacteria can move on their own
accord only in liquids and cannot leave a fluid surface unless transported as “passengers”
by other agents such as dust, food dishes, silverware, cooking utensils, dirty fingers or
fingernails, a common drinking cup, a hand towel, water, insects, or rodents.

19
 Bacteria reproduce themselves simply by dividing in half. On the average each
bacterium, under favorable conditions, will divide and become two bacteria every 20
minutes. The rate of multiplication or growth of bacteria is affected by heat or cold.
Certain types of bacteria, if allowed to grow and multiply, produce toxins that cause food
poisoning. Boiling will kill all bacteria, but it will not kill the toxins once they are
allowed to form. Certain strains of the staphylococcus bacteria will withstand boiling
temperature for long periods of time before they are killed and are virtually impossible to
kill by normal cooking methods. Once toxins have been allowed to form, no amount of
cooking will make the food safe. Refrigeration will prevent the bacteria from producing
toxins but will not kill the toxins once they are formed.
FOODSERVICE PERSONNEL

Since foodservice personnel are considered to be the most likely mode of transmission
of disease through food, certain requirements such as medical examinations, sanitation
training, and personal hygiene must be completed before such personnel can work in food
preparation areas.

Physical Examination

All foodservice personnel including personnel employed by civilian contract services

must be examined and determined to be free from communicable diseases before initial
assignment in foodservice. Subsequent physical examinations will be conducted
annually. The physical examination must be sufficiently comprehensive to detect acute
or chronic diseases. Laboratory tests and other diagnostic determinations are performed
at the discretion of the senior medical officer; however, all foodservice personnel must be
examined for evidence of tuberculosis. Employees of contract services must be
examined by either local or military medical departments to make sure a complete and
thorough physical examination has been done. Personnel having any open lesions,
particularly on the hands, face, or neck or acne on the face, are prohibited from
performing foodservice duty. Examination of personnel with questionable medical or
social histories must be comprehensive including X-ray of the chest, stool and urine
examinations for parasite and bacterial pathogens, and other such determinations as may
be indicated by international agreements. All personnel must repeat medical tests when
away from duty for 30 days or more. All personnel must submit to laboratory
examinations and other tests to detect and treat acute or chronic diseases and be relieved
from duty if they are infected.
Training

All foodservice personnel must be thoroughly indoctrinated in personal hygiene and

food sanitation, as well as in the methods and importance of preventing food-borne
illness. Temporary foodservice personnel must be indoctrinated as follows:

• All foodservice personnel will receive a minimum of 4 hours’ initial training

and 4 hours’ annual refresher training in foodservice sanitation principles.

20
 • All foodservice sanitation training will be conducted by environmental health
officers and/or preventive medicine technicians.

In those cases where it can be shown that environmental health officers or preventive
medicine technicians are not available to perform such training, medical department
representatives, CSs in paygrade E-5 and above, or civilian foodservice supervisors who
have received special training to qualify them as foodservice sanitation instructors
maybe used. Special instructor certification training may be taken at either a Navy
environmental and preventive medicine unit or naval regional medical center preventive
medicine service, and completion of training must be documented. Certified instructors
must use and maintain up-to-date, standard Navy lesson plans in their training programs.
Instructors must be recertified every 3 years and are authorized to sign the Foodservice
Training Certificate, NAVMED 4061/1.

Personal Hygiene

The group of principles and rules designed to promote personal health and cleanliness
is known as personal hygiene. The following procedures should be used to ensure
personal cleanliness.

TAKE DAILY SHOWER OR BATH.— Maintain a high degree of cleanliness by

thoroughly soaping and rinsing the body to remove dirt, perspiration, and bacteria. This
practice improves circulation, appearance, and health, and is the foundation of personal
hygiene. Frequent washing of hair is mandatory. Keep teeth clean by brushing at least
twice daily, but preferably after each meal.

WEAR CLEAN GARMENTS.— Wear clean inner and outer garments. Germs are
harbored in clothing as well as on skin surfaces, and diseases are likely to be transmitted.
Caps (or hairnets for women) completely covering the hair must be worn at all times
when working with food. Keep hair trimmed for neat appearance. Change clothing and
aprons soon after soiling.

WASH HANDS BEFORE STARTING AND AFTER FINISHING WORK WITH

FOOD.— Provide plenty of hot and cold running water under pressure. Soap and paper
towels with adequate waste receptacles must be available. Continuous rolled paper
toweling that is sanitary may be used if it is approved by the National Sanitation
Foundation Testing Laboratory or meets equivalent standards, but use of such toweling
must be supervised. Thorough washing of hands with hot soapy water to remove soil and
contamination before commencing work is mandatory. After each visit to the toilet, all
food handlers are required to scrub hands and nails. When interruptions occur during
routine duties in the galley, personnel are required to wash their hands before
resuming work. Frequent washing of soiled hands during work is also essential. Never
wear an apron to the toilet or washroom. Hands are probably the most common vehicle
for transmitting germs. Personnel should keep fingernails closely clipped, trimmed, and
cleaned underneath and around cuticle. Cleaning is effective only with soaps or
detergents and warm water. Unless clean towels or other satisfactory hand-drying
devices are provided, the benefits of frequent hand scrubbing are completely nullified.

21
 CLEANING CONDITION- Food employees shall keep their hands and exposed
portions of their arms clean.

CLEANING PROCEDURE-Food employees shall clean their hands and exposed

portions of their arms with a cleaning compound by vigorously rubbing together the
surfaces of their lathered hands and arms for at least 20 seconds and thoroughly rinsing
with clean water. Employees shall pay particular attention to the areas underneath the
fingernails and between the fingers.

PROHIBIT USE OF TOBACCO.— Smoking in food preparation, serving, or

dishwashing areas is prohibited. The use of tobacco while preparing or serving food
may contaminate the fingers and hands with saliva and may promote spitting and
coughing, which transmit disease organisms present in the saliva to food or food-contact
surfaces. If smoking areas away from the galley are provided, personnel should use these
designated areas, but thoroughly scrub hands before resuming work to prevent food
contamination.

DEVELOP SANITARY WORK HABITS.— A wide range of communicable diseases

and infections may be transmitted by food handlers to other personnel through
contaminated food and careless practices.

Some of the desirable work habits that personnel should develop to prevent personal
contamination areas follows:

• Spoons, knives, and forks should be picked up or touched only by their handles.
• Cups, glasses, and bowls should be handled so that fingers and thumb do not
contact inside surfaces or lip-contact surfaces.
• Portable- and fixed-food preparation equipment should be stored so that they
require minimum handling by personnel. Improper storage ruins the effect of
sanitizing, and excess handling will introduce contaminating material.
• Disposable dinnerware must be handled and dispensed to prevent contamination
of surfaces that come in contact with food or with the mouth of the user.
• Tongs, picks, spatulas, scoops, dipping spoons, and other suitable utensils must
be used in such a manner to keep manual contact with food at a minimum.

REPORT PERSONAL ILLNESS AND ALL MINOR INFECTIONS.— Boils and

sore throats are sources of bacteria that can cause severe food-borne diseases.
When ill, report it and make arrangements to be relieved of duty. Sores, rashes of any
kind, pimples, or other skin eruptions as well as cuts should be reported and medical aid
solicited as soon as possible. Both supervisory personnel and operators are responsible
for notifying medical personnel if a disease is suspected.

APPLY PROFESSIONAL TRAINING AND TECHNIQUES.— All personnel must

be alert to the hazards associated with speedup methods and shortcuts to washing and
sanitizing operations. Techniques of sanitizing— including times, temperatures, and

22
routines—should be memorized and applied. The effectiveness of sanitation is directly
related to the competence and cooperation of foodservice personnel.

COMPLY WITH SANITARY REGULATIONS.— Public health ordinances and

regulations imposed by the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery (BUMED) must be observed
in day-to-day foodservice operations. Recognized standards of sanitation embracing
accepted public health principles are prescribed by these sources and administration of
regulations at each activity will be enforced.

PRECAUTIONS

Most food-borne disease outbreaks are due to four factors: (1) preparation of food too
far in advance, (2) poor refrigeration of food, (3) careless handling of food, and (4)
failure of personnel to follow good personal hygiene habits.

The following precautions should be observed in preparing and serving food:

• Food should be served promptly after it is prepared.

• Any food that has been ground or chopped and is to be cooked later or
incorporated in a prepared dish must be refrigerated immediately. Such ground or
chopped food should be refrigerated until cooked; once cooked, they should never be
saved as leftovers. When food is ground, an increase in the area of contamination
and growth of harmful bacteria results. When chilled foods are ground, the grinding
process warms the food to the point where bacteria growth may start.
• Place meats that are cut, sliced, or diced in shallow containers, cover with lids or
with waxed paper, and refrigerate immediately. The temperature of the meat-cutting
room should be maintained at 50°F. Improper handling of meats can result in
spoilage as well as in the transmission of disease.
• If you are using individual serving containers, do not put ice on top of
containers.
• All fresh pork products must be cooked to an internal temperature of 165°F or
above. Never serve raw pork products.
• Keep foods covered at all times except during actual preparation and serving.
• Palletize all subsistence items in storage spaces to facilitate cleaning and air
circulation.
• Keep all worktables and benches clean at all times.
• Store food off the deck.
• Keep food preparation utensils, meat grinders, and other similar equipment clean
and handle them properly. Food that comes in contact with equipment that is
contaminated becomes contaminated also.
• Wash your hands before preparing food.
• Do not cough, sneeze, or talk over food while it is being prepared or served.
• Never smoke while you are preparing food. Saliva can be dropped on foods
very easily when you are smoking.
• Keep fingers away from the mouth, lips, and face.

23
 • Handle foods as little as possible.
• Use tongs to handle butter, doughnuts, bread, and other similar items of food. Do
not use your hands.

Inspections

To make sure all foodservice division rules and directed procedures are being
followed, the food service officer and/or designated assistants should make both
unexpected daily inspections and thorough weekly inspections of all foodservice
personnel, spaces, and operations. As an aid to conducting an inspection the following
items should be checked:

Food handlers. Clean personal appearance that includes clean working uniform
(including apron and cap), haircut, clean shave, close-clipped fingernails, head covering,
neatness in dress, and absence of cuts, sores, acne, or other indications of skin disorders
on exposed parts of head, hands, or arms.

Galley. Deck drains, sinks, and grease traps must be clean and free of any dirt and
food particles. Inspect for insect and rodent infestation.

Ranges and grills. Clean and free from grease (ovens, unit cover, drip pan, range
grease receptacles, hood and hood filters).

Can opener and base. Clean and free from accumulated grime and food particles.

Deep-fat fryers. Clean, coils clean, basket clean, and in good condition.

Steam-jacketed kettles. Clean under cover and cover-exhaust opening; lids and
spigots easily removable without tools for cleaning. Drain clean and free of food
particles.

Ovens. Clean and free of burned food and food particles.

Sinks and galley utensils. Clean and neatly stored; steel and plastic sponges (but not
steel wool) used for cleaning galley utensils are clean and free of food particles, air dried,
and neatly stored.

Mixing machines and attachments, ice-cream machine, meat and vegetable

grinders and attachments, and proof boxes. Clean and in good operating conditions.

Cutting boards. Clean and dry, no evidence of cracks or pitted surfaces.

Vegetable-preparation room. Inspect for cleanliness of deck, drains, traps, and

sinks. Look for any sign of insect and rodent infestation.

24
 Potato-peeling machine. Dismantled (cover and disk removed), wash-water strainer
clean and in good condition.

Slicing and dicing machine. Dismantled, clean (parts oiled if not in use), and in
good condition.

Dining area. Inspect for cleanliness of decks, tables, benches, serving tables, coffee
urns, milk dispensers, warming ovens, water fountains, and ice machines; all gear clean
and neatly stored. Look for insect and rodent infestation.

Scullery. Decks and gear must be clean. Dishwashing machine dismantled, clean and
free of odors, spray pipe clean, racks clean and in good condition, curtains clean and in
good condition, thermometers operating properly, and trash and garbage cans clean and
tightly covered

Garbage and trash room. Clean, orderly, and free from obnoxious odors; cans clean
and tightly covered. Inspect for insect and rodent infestation.

The 4-Hour Rule

Protein foods that are not served immediately after they are cooked should either be
chilled to temperatures of 41°F or lower (but not frozen) or held at 140°F or higher.
Protein foods include meats, fish, poultry, gravies, meat stocks, soups, eggs, custards,
cream fillings, and milk. Growth of harmful bacteria and the development of toxins
(poisons) formed by the bacteria occur rapidly in cooked protein foods during holding at
temperatures between 41°F and 140°F. Cooked protein foods that have been held at
temperatures between 41°F and 140°F for more than 4 hours will be considered unfit
for consumption and must be discarded. This principle is known as the 4-hour rule. If
the product is refrigerated at intervals and then permitted to warm up, the total time of the
various periods between 41°F and 140°F must not be more than 4 hours. Protein foods
composed of ingredients that are hand-peeled, hand-sliced, or hand-diced after they are
cooked should never be used as leftovers; the 4-hour limit between temperatures of 41°F
and 140°F is usually taken in preparing, chilling, and serving the food. These foods
include potato, chicken, macaroni, shrimp, and egg salads and similar items. Hand
preparation not only increases the chance of contamination, but generally increases the
length of time that these foods are held at room temperatures. It is also dangerous to
return opened jars or bowls of mayonnaise and cooked salad dressing from the salad bar
to the refrigerator for reuse at a later meal because of the danger of miscalculation as to
the total time that has elapsed from the time that been held at temperatures these salad
dressings have between 41°F and 140°F.
Holding Temperatures

Holding temperatures are of utmost importance. Food held at temperatures that are
too high or too low can ruin both the taste and the appearance of food as well as increase
the risks of food-borne disease.

25
 HOT FOODS.— The holding temperature of hot foods held on a serving line should
be maintained between 180°F and 200°F.

COLD FOODS.— Keep cold foods such as salads, potato salad combinations, and
ham plates cold by setting them on ice or on refrigerated salad bar units maintained
between 34°F and 40°F.

BEVERAGES.— Beverages should be served hot or cold as applicable. As with

food, the quality depends on proper preparation, holding, and dispensing.
Leftovers

When leftovers or warm foods are chilled, care must be taken to ensure prompt and
thorough chilling (41°F or below) to the center of the food mass. Foods that are to be
refrigerated should be placed in shallow pans to a depth of not more than 3 inches and
must be covered with lids or waxed paper. Do not put leftovers in large, deep pans as
chilling may take so long to get to the center of the food mass that sufficient time is
allowed for the growth of harmful bacteria and development of toxins. Guard against any
procedure that might delay cooling. Place foods to be chilled in the chill box
immediately. Leftover food must not be saved for more than 36 hours. Freezing of
leftovers is prohibited. Foods composed of ingredients that have been peeled, sliced, or
diced by hand after cooking must never be used as leftovers since the 4-hour limit
between temperatures of 41°F and 140°F is usually taken up in preparing, chilling, and
serving the food. To prevent miscalculations in the length of time leftovers have been
stored, all leftovers must be labeled with the date and time of preparation.

Frozen Foods

Frozen foods should be thawed in the refrigerator. Freezing breaks down tissue and,
therefore, foods can be invaded by germs more rapidly. Once foods are frozen and then
thawed, they must not be refrozen. If not eaten, they should be stored under 40°F.

Milk and Milk Products

Milk and milk products and other protein foods are frequent offenders in transmitting
infectious diseases because of their rapid rate of perishability. Strict surveillance of all
handling procedures from cow to man is necessary to prevent contamination and possible
milk-borne diseases. When procured by Navy and Marine Corps activities, milk and
milk products must conform in all respects to either federal or military specifications. The
perishability of such products is a most important factor, thus strict compliance with all
sanitary requirements is mandatory. Delivery inspections of dairy products are normally
conducted by personnel attached to the receiving activities. These inspectors must make
sure milk and milk products are from approved sources and delivered in containers that
are in good condition and properly sealed. They must make sure the temperature of the
product on delivery is 40°F or less or follows the current Defense Personnel Support
Center (DPSC) contract. Of prime importance to medical and foodservice personnel is

26
the maintenance of recommended temperatures in storing (40°F or less), dispensing
(32°F-40°F), and enforcing approved sanitary methods in the handling of such products.
Fresh Fruits and Vegetables

Fresh fruits and vegetables should be washed thoroughly under running water to
remove any particles of dirt or to remove poisonous insect sprays. Green vegetables of
uncertain origin should be suspected of being contaminated with pathogenic organisms.
They should be chemically sanitized by immersion for at least 15 minutes in a 100-ppm
(parts per million) available chlorine solution, or 30 minutes in a 50-ppm available
chlorine solution, or other approved method. Then they should be thoroughly rinsed with
potable water before they are cooked or served. Head items such as lettuce, cabbage, or
celery must be broken apart before they are sanitized.
Canned Products

Canned foods appearance should that appear abnormal in odor or never be eaten or
even tasted, but should be discarded. When you are inspecting canned meats, fish,
poultry, vegetables, fruit, and juices, the following factors should be considered.

CAN LABELS.— Check to make sure contents and processing date are stamped on
the end of the container or on the label.

CAN EXTERIOR.— The exterior of the can should be examined for general
appearance, dents, swelling, rust, and pinholes. Cans having severe dents that cross
either the side or end seams or that crinkle the metal to a point should not be used. Rusty
cans maybe used provided the rust does not penetrate the can. Rust that can be wiped off
is not penetrating.

CAN INTERIOR.— Contents should be removed, the can rinsed, and the interior
examined for pinholes against a strong light. If pinholes are present, contents should be
discarded.

CONTENTS.— Contents of can should be examined for characteristic odor and

appearance of the product.

REJECTION OR SURVEY.— Except for coffee and molasses, foods contained in

cans displaying the following conditions are unsatisfactory and should be
surveyed and disposed of:

-A Severely dented can in which the end seam is pulled out of position.
-Severe angularly dented can with crimping of body.
-Severe dent that buckles end seam of a can.
-Pinholes-tiny holes caused by action of food acids during prolonged storage.

Swells (or swellers)—both ends of cans bulge outward because of bacterial action and
gas production. Ends do not yield to finger pressure. (Molasses may bulge in tropical

27
areas, but this condition is not dangerous and the product need not be rejected for this
reason.)

Springers—one or both ends bulge outward because of bacterial action and gas.
However, this bulge will yield on pressure and spring back to bulge condition on release.
Springers or swellers of coffee containers, however, usually indicate a properly sealed
container that has merely retained natural coffee-bean gases.

Flippers—both ends are flat, but one end will bulge out ward when the opposite end
receives pressure. This condition is caused by either bacterial action or chemical action
resulting in gas production.
Spoiled or Damaged Food Products

Several precautions eliminate the factors that cause spoiled or damaged food items.
These precautions include inspection for quality upon receipt, proper storage and
handling, and maintenance of required temperatures relative to each respective phase of
the operation. The absence of any one of these precautions may encourage food spoilage
and damage. The following hazardous material should be disposed of accordingly, using
the applicable survey procedures outlined in NAVSUP P-486:

• Cans in unsatisfactory or surveyable condition

• Food products with spoilage or damage indicated by offensive odors,
presence of slime, abnormal color, or other evidence of deterioration
• Food items adulterated by easily recognizable foreign material such as metal,
glass, dirt, or insects Do not attempt to taste or cook food in these states. It is safe to
observe the old saying, “When in doubt, throw it out.” ‘The risk of food-borne illness
must be avoided. After any occurrences of spoiled or damaged food, corrective
actions must be provided and measures must be designed to prevent future
occurrences.
KEEPING UTENSILS AND EQUIPMENT CLEAN

All phases of sanitation in a general mess are important. However, one of the most
important is the proper cleaning and sanitizing of equipment (including trays, dishes, and
other dinnerware) used for preparing, handling, cooking, and serving food.

Dishes may be washed by hand or by machine. Whatever the method, the final results
may either be excellent or poor, depending upon how conscientiously you apply your
knowledge and skill in using the equipment and materials provided. The best equipment
and detergents will not do a good job of dishwashing if used improperly.
Types of Soil

Unless the galley equipment and utensils are thoroughly cleansed, food particles in which
bacteria may grow will remain on them. These food soils are divided into several distinct
types:

28
 Freshly deposited soil —the soil that remains immediately after the equipment or
utensil has been used.

Thin film—the soil that remains as the result of ineffective cleaning, following a
flushing with water. Thin films are not easily seen and they are capable of sustaining
germs.

Built-up deposits—the result of repeated ineffective cleaning methods causing a day-

by-day accumulation of soil.

Dried deposits—accumulations that result from drying action and formation of a

heavy crusty deposit.

Baked deposits—deposits that have been baked onto equipment and have become
difficult to remove.
Removing Stubborn Soils

The Navy procures the correct type of detergent to be used in washing food
preparation utensils and equipment. Hot water also provides temperatures that
increase the chemical activities of the various ingredients in properly compounded
detergents. Friction is an important part of cleaning. The required friction may be
applied by brushing with approved brushes or by strong flushing, as in dishwashing
machines. A hard abrasive should never be used on any metal surface. This results in
scratches that provide lodging places for soil. It is recommended that pots and pans,
cooking utensils, and other such items be presoaked to loosen any food clinging to the
utensil. Then, they should be washed using the proper detergent compound and hot
water. A detergent increases the effectiveness of the water as a cleaning agent. The
washed pots and pans must be rinsed with warm water at 120°F to 140°F, then sanitized
for 30 seconds in hot water of 170°F or for at least 1 minute in an approved chemical
sanitizing solution such as the standard stock chlorine-iodine type. Once washed and
sanitized, the clean pots and pans should be stored, bottoms up, in clean racks.
Otherwise, the effort spent in washing and sanitizing them is a wasted.
Hand Dishwashing

The equipment provided for manual dishwashing varies from a one-compartment sink
to the preferred three-component sink. A remote dial thermometer and booster heater
should be installed under the final rinse compartment.

Machine Dishwashing

High-standard dishwashing demands that the machine be kept clean inside and out.
Lime deposits from water should not be allowed to accumulate inside the tanks even to
slightest degree. The machine must look and smell clean. Machines properly maintained
will operate with efficient service over a long period of time. If neglected, dishwashing
machines, like any piece of mechanical equipment, will bring on costly repairs and

29
decreased efficiency in cleaning and sanitizing. Preflushing of dishes will help avoid
clogging of spray nozzles with food particles. Clean wash water will prevent a buildup of
bacterial population and subsequent contamination. Do not let wash water enter the rinse
tanks. A dishwashing machine is not a garbage disposal, and an accumulation of food
scraps and grease greatly hampers the washing operation. Check the water flow pressure,
using a proper gauge. On spray-type machines, flow should not be less than 15 pounds
per square inch nor more than 25 pounds per square inch for the final rinse.

The procedure for racking gear for washing is equally as important as preflushing. All
items should be racked to permit washing solutions and spray rinses to contact the
surfaces of the articles. Overloading as well as improper placement of items on racks
will impede the operation.

SANITATION OF FOODSERVICE SPACES

Galleys, the bakeshop, vegetable preparation areas, food storage and refrigeration
facilities, and any other facilities or equipment in which food is prepared, served, or
dispensed constitute the total physical plant of the foodservice operations. It is
mandatory to keep these spaces in sanitary condition at all times.
Decks, Bulkheads, and Overheads

Regular after-meal cleanup is necessary to prevent an accumulation of filth, and

frequent in-between cleaning is required if deck cleanliness is to be maintained at a peak
standard. When food is spilled, it should be wiped up immediately. No attempt should
be made to sweep down decks and dining areas during food preparation and service, as
dust rises in the air and will fall on foods and worktables. Pick up wastes and deposit
them in proper receptacles.

Vacuum cleaning is the recommended method for dry cleaning bulkheads and
overheads.

Ventilation System

Good air circulation is a basic requirement of proper sanitation because it reduces

condensation of steam and minimizes heat, vapors, smoke, fumes, odors, and soiling.
Mold and bacterial growth are inhibited whenever there is ample, dry, clean air.

Prevent grease from accumulating on hood appliances. Accumulations of grease can

drip either into food being prepared or onto surfaces of equipment where contamination
of food is possible. Filters should be removed and soaked in a hot (180°F), strong
detergent solution. Scrub with a brush. Rinse under running water or by applying steam
from a hose. Removable filters may be run through the dishwashing machine.

30
Lighting System

Sufficient lighting in all areas of food storage, preparation, and service, and in scullery
operations is a fundamental requirement of proper sanitation and safe working conditions.
Grease, dirt, and vermin can be more easily detected and corrected where there is ample
light. Routine cleaning of light fixtures and light bulbs will contribute to adequate
lighting and eliminate the accumulation of dirt and grease film. At least 10-foot candles
of lighting must be available at any time in all food service areas and rooms including
walk-in units. The lighting on food preparation and ware washing work surfaces must be
at least 50 foot candles. The lighting in packaged food and fresh produce sales areas,
hand washing areas, ware washing areas, equipment and utensil storage areas, and toilet
areas must be at least 20 foot candles at a distance of 30 inches from the floor. Shielding
to protect food from broken glass must be provided for all artificial lighting fixtures
located over, by, or within food storage preparation, service, and display facilities and
areas where food service equipment is cleaned and stored.

Storage Areas

Fresh and frozen food items are perishable and must receive proper handling in transit
and storage to reduce risk to the health and welfare of personnel who prepare and eat
foods. During loading and unloading on docks, piers, or on board, you should keep areas
as clean as possible. Long exposure to weather will hasten spoilage. Daily checks on the
sanitation of dry, freeze, and chill spaces are essential. Mold and decay go hand in hand
with poor housekeeping. Decks, deck gratings, bulkheads, and overheads should be
cleaned, sanitized, and aired as often as possible. Cleaning and defrosting of refrigerated
spaces should proceed when stocks are low. Cleaning gear (for example, swabs and
brooms) and cleaning supplies (for example, detergents, disinfectants, and other toxic
materials) should be stored in areas specifically designated for their purpose. These items
should not be stored in food storage cabinets or on food storage shelves.
Dressing Rooms, Lockers, and Toilet Facilities

Street clothes should never be worn in the galley. Adequate, clean, and orderly
facilities should be provided for personnel to keep and change clothing to be worn when
performing routine duties in foodservice operations. Adequate space should be provided
for hanging up these pieces of clothing because they can contaminate food, food
equipment, and food preparation surfaces. Dressing rooms or designated areas for
changing and storing clothing must be located outside the areas where food is stored,
prepared, and served. Dressing rooms and lockers must be clean and orderly at all times.
Conveniently located toilet facilities must be accessible to personnel at all times. These
areas must be adequately equipped with proper waste receptacles, toilet paper, and an
approved hand-drying device or sufficient disposable towels. Heads should be located
within or immediately adjacent to toilet areas as well as within food preparation areas.
These heads must be kept in a clean and orderly appearance. An authorized soap
dispensing system and hot and cold running water are also required for use by personnel.

31
Garbage and Trash Disposal

The method of collection and disposal of garbage may differ on various ships or
stations, but the basic requirements are the same. Garbage must be disposed of promptly
to prevent contamination of spaces and to eliminate a possible fire hazard. Garbage and
refuse must be kept in leak proof, nonabsorbent containers and a sufficient number
should be provided to prevent overfilling. Containers will be emptied as necessary
during operations and at the close of each workday. After being emptied, each container
should be thoroughly cleaned, inside and outside, in a manner that will not cause
contamination of food, equipment, utensils, or food preparation areas. Suitable facilities,
including hot water and detergent, should be provided and used for washing the
containers. Ashore galleys and outside refuse and garbage storage areas or enclosures
should not be located within 100 feet of the foodservice facility. They should be placed
on or above a smooth surface of nonabsorbent material such as concrete or machine-laid
asphalt. These surfaces must be kept clean and in good condition. Food waste disposers
or grinders may be used for garbage disposal provided they are designed and/or located in
a reamer that prevents contamination of food contact surfaces as a result of a splash and
aerosol generation. Potable water should be used as a flushing medium unless otherwise
indicated by BUMED.
Insect and Rodent Control

According to BUMED, the term vector is used to refer to all insects, rodents, and
related animals that are significantly related to the transmission of disease to man, act as
intermediate hosts or reservoirs of disease, present problems of sanitary or hygienic
significance, or otherwise affect the health and efficiency of personnel. Programs for
controlling vectors are command responsibilities coordinated through public works
programs and medical departments. Because the first and most important step in control
is to destroy breeding grounds, basic sanitation measures for which foodservice personnel
are responsible must be strictly enforced. The foodservice facility and its adjacent
grounds must be kept clean and free of litter and debris. Openings to the outside should
be effectively protected against the entrance of rodents and insects by use of self-closing
doors, closed windows, screens, air curtains, or other means. Screens should be tight-
fitting, free of breaks or tears, and not less than 16 to 1 mesh. However, screens are not
required in air-conditioned foodservice spaces where windows or portholes are sealed
closed.
Space Cleanliness

In most foodservice operations, a space inspection is conducted before securing. At

most commands the inspection is conducted by the duty supply officer or a senior CS.
Areas of concern are sanitation, fire, safety, and security. Always remember that strict
sanitation procedures should be followed in all areas of foodservice operations.
Cleanliness can never be overemphasized.

FOOD SERVING AREAS.— All serving lines should be equipped with a functional
sneeze shield. It must present a barrier between the oral zone of patrons within the
normal range of stature and the food displayed for service. Proper cleaning and

32
sanitizing procedures for foodservice equipment on the line and around the serving area
are equally important in the galley. A number of regulations attendant to serving food
must be observed to reduce the possibility of food infection. All pans, serving utensils,
and counters must be kept immaculately clean and sanitized. Self-service salad bars must
be carefully supervised to prevent contamination of food items by patrons, thereby
preventing the transmissions of pathogenic organisms from one person to another.

FOOD PREPARATION AREAS.— High standards of sanitation and cleanliness must

be maintained at all times in these areas. As an CS, you will practice and enforce the
“clean as you go” policy for every foodservice person. Cleaning in this way helps
maintain high sanitation standards as well as cut down on the cleanup time after the meal
and at end of the workday. Wash your hands and equipment first before starting to
prepare food items. Contaminated hands or equipment leads to contaminated food. Keep
worktables sanitized and immaculate y clean. Do not use steel wool for cleaning.
Smoking is not permitted in any foodservice areas.

RECEIVING AND FOOD STORAGE AREAS.— Before receiving and storing food
items, it is very important that loading docks, piers, or areas where foods are received and
stored must be thoroughly cleaned to avoid food contamination. Stores must be inspected
for the presence of cockroaches and other insect pests before they are stored. Correct
storage procedures play a major role in preventing food-borne illnesses and increasing the
storage life of food. High levels of sanitation and safety must be maintained in all food
storage facilities. Food items should be safely palletized or placed on shelves in an
appropriate manner. This proper storage allows proper cleaning and prevents insect and
rodent infestation.

DEFENSE AGAINST RADIOLOGICAL,BIOLOGICAL, AND

CHEMICALAGENTS

The nature of the radiological, biological, and chemical contamination problem and
the basic procedures to be followed when decontaminating food, galleys, spaces, and
equipment are discussed in the following paragraphs.
DEFENSE AGAINST RADIOLOGICAL AGENTS

Radiological defense includes all such measures to minimize personnel and material
damage from radioactivity. The basic responsibility for this function resides with the
damage control organization of the ship or station. Your basic guidance in radiological
defense matters will come from them. Supply department personnel are normally
assigned appropriate duties according to the damage control plan. You should be aware
of the plans and procedures to be followed on board your ship or station. Emergency
operations are those that immediately follow the blast. During this period, a realistic
evaluation of the disaster is made and initial steps toward recovery are taken. Protective
clothing monitoring equipment and decontamination gear will also be needed.

33
RADIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

Blast damage and thermal radiation may result in partial or complete destruction of
messing facilities and food items. Radioactivity is important because of the effect it has
on the human body. Because of its ability to penetrate matter deeply, gamma radiation is
usually considered to be the most hazardous. Since the principal source of alpha particles
would be the unfissioned nuclear material of the weapon, the probability of significant
alpha contamination from nuclear detonation is small. Beta particles have poor
penetrating ability. Ordinary clothing will stop beta particles. They enter the skin only to
a depth of about one-fifth of an inch, but their ionizing power is about 100 times that of
gamma rays. When ingested with food, inhaled, or admitted into the body through cuts
or open wounds, beta particles meet no barriers and become particularly destructive if
they are retained in the body for sometime. Therefore, in food preparation and service,
all forms of radioactivity should be regarded as hazardous. Radioactivity may be
introduced into exposed materials that are close to the burst. Such items as soap, table
salt, copper, or brass may become radioactive as a result of radiation (the action of
neutrons). Radioactivity may also be carried by blast residues, the principal one being
dust particles. A person contaminated by radioactive materials can easily contaminate an
otherwise safe object or area. If the person handles foods, the foods can become
contaminated. Radioactivity cannot be destroyed by cooking or sterilization; neither can
it be neutralized by chemical treatment. It must be removed as completely as possible to
a limit of radioactivity set by the command authority in the light of existing
circumstances.
MONITORING TO DETERMINE EXTENT OF RADIOACTIVITY

Radioactive materials can only be removed by physical means. The extent of

radioactivity existing in any food preparation or serving area should be determined by a
survey with radiac monitoring equipment. This includes the galley utensils, food for
preparation, dinnerware, the scullery, and all personnel involved in food preparation and
service. If the survey so indicates, it may be necessary to reestablish the mess in another
area designated as safe by the commanding officer. The supply officer is responsible for
taking the necessary precautions to make sure the food served is free from radioactive
contamination. Galleys and other food preparation spaces, food, equipment, utensils,
dinnerware, and personnel engaged in the foodservice operation should be carefully
monitored by qualified persons with appropriate monitoring equipment to learn the
presence and the extent of radioactive contamination.

Decontamination operations should be carried out as required. Food items in glass or

metal containers or sealed in barrier-wrap packages are the least likely to be
contaminated. These should, nevertheless, be monitored, and care should be exercised
upon opening such packages to avoid contamination. The fresh water supply should be
monitored. Food items should be monitored in their dry state because dilution with water
will substantially lower the beta readings and the presence of alpha particles may not
even show up on radiac instruments. All food items, when they have been monitored,
must be clearly marked as Contaminated or Safe for Use. All food items should be

34
cleared for use after monitoring if found to be within acceptable limits established by the
local command according to the Radiation Health Protection Manual, NAVMED P-5055.

RADIOLOGICAL DECONTAMINATION

There are various methods of removing contamination. They differ ineffectiveness in

removing the contaminant, in applicability to given surfaces, and in the rate of operation.
These, in general, fall into two classes, gross or rough decontamination and detailed
decontamination. Gross decontamination consists of a rapid washing down with large
quantities of uncontaminated water from a fire hose or nozzle system. This class is
generally not suitable for use in galley and messing areas except for decks. Detailed
decontamination procedures are more thorough. These procedures use more time,
manpower, and material, but they are also more effective. Detailed decontamination
will be necessary in galley and messing areas. Efforts to decontaminate with heavily
contaminated water will obviously be ineffective. However, water contaminated to a
lesser degree than the surface contamination to be removed may still be used. Water used
for decontamination must be allowed to drain freely from contaminated areas. Water
from tightly covered storage tanks should be safe and potable, provided the circulating
system is tight. Water from open reservoirs cannot be relied upon to be free from
contamination. Seawater in the neighborhood of an aerial burst to windward will be
contaminated at the surface. A subsurface burst will heavily contaminate seawater in the
vicinity. General knowledge of the local situation and a monitor survey should provide
data on which a decision regarding the water supply will be based.

When materials (cleaning agents) specifically designed for the removal of radioactive
contaminants are available, they should be used according to instructions and the material
safety data sheet (MSDS).
Decontaminating Foods

All food should be carefully monitored. Foods in metal or glass packages may be
safe. Contamination is best removed from the external surfaces by washing. Food items
in sealed, dustproof packages may also be safe, provided the wrapper is not broken. To
remove the contamination from these packages, vacuum them and carefully remove the
outer wrap. Some vegetables can also be decontaminated if they are carefully washed,
dried, monitored, and peeled-if monitoring shows contamination is not above specified
limits. When surface contamination cannot be physically removed, the food should be
condemned. All foods must be inspected and approved by the medical officer.
Decontaminating Spaces and Equipment

Thorough cleaning of all surfaces is vital. Work should commence overhead and
continue downward in the direction of the liquid flow. When feasible, the first step
should consist of flushing the surfaces with safe water. Do not get water on electrical
controls that are not waterproofed. The second step involves systematic scrubbing with
chemical cleaning agents. Piping, ductwork, stanchions, bulkheads, coamings, and decks
should be repeatedly scrubbed until monitoring indicates that a safe condition exists.
Bare metal surfaces should be given an initial scrubbing with alkaline detergents to

35
remove grease film. When available, citric acid solution should then be applied and
allowed to remain for a minimum period of 10 minutes. Rinse the surface with safe,
fresh water, allow to dry, and monitor. In the absence of citric acid, vinegar may be used,
but it is less effective.
Decontaminating Utensils and Dinnerware

Treat metal utensils and dinnerware such as metal tableware and cutlery in the same
manner as other metal surfaces. Wash with a detergent followed by an acid treatment.
When possible, immerse utensils and dinnerware in the acid solution. Crockery and glass
present no particular cleaning problem, provided the glazed surfaces are without
scratches or foreign deposits such as stains or hard water scale. Plastic ware may present
some difficulty because of the relatively porous character of the surface, scratches, and
the presence of foreign deposits. Both glassware and plastic ware should be machine
washed, rinsed, dried, and each item monitored. Those that do not pass should be
inspected for cracks and surface defects. Cracked and badly scratched items should be
disposed of immediately. The other items still showing contamination should be given
repeated washings until safe, or they should be segregated to await natural decay of
contamination or disposal of the item.
Protection of Personnel

When you are engaged in decontamination, wear protective clothing as prescribed by

the ship’s damage control bill. If protective clothing is not available, similar garments
may be substituted. Care must be taken to make sure substitute clothing adequately
prevents radioactive particles from coming in contact with the skin or gaining entry to the
body by ingestion, inhalation, or through breaks in the skin. Masks should be worn. In
the absence of regulation masks, chemical goggles should be worn to protect the eyes. A
high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter respirator also can be used to protect the
lungs. Spaces that were not contaminated, or that have been decontaminated, must be
carefully protected. All personnel and material must be carefully monitored
(decontaminated if needed) before anyone is permitted to enter these spaces. Cleaning
gear, items of protective clothing, and so forth, used in decontamination procedures
should be segregated and disposed of as contaminated according to their level of
contamination.
Preventing Recontamination

Contaminated items brought accidentally into spaces should be removed and, pending
decontamination of the affected areas, these areas should be roped off. Personnel who
may have walked through these areas or who may have otherwise come in contact with
radioactive particles should be sent to the decontamination station.

DEFENSE AGAINST BIOLOGICAL AGENTS

The United States has renounced all use of biological agents in warfare, but the need
still exists to be prepared to defend ourselves against these agents if other countries
should use them. The following section, therefore, discusses the nature of biological
agents and the measures you should use to decontaminate the galley, messing areas, and

36
food storage spaces in the event of enemy biological attack. A biological agent is defined
as a microorganism that either causes disease in man, plants, and animals or causes the
deterioration of material. The chief objective of biological agents is mass infection that
results in the incapacitation or death of large numbers of individuals or in the destruction
of their sources of food, both animal and plant. The biological agents, unlike most other
weapons, act on living matter only and are limited in use to these objectives. In case of a
biological attack there are certain instructions that should be carried out for the protection
and decontamination of eating, drinking, and galley utensils; galley and foodservice
equipment; and messing areas contaminated by biological agents. Good sanitary and
hygienic practices are the best defense against many aspects of biological warfare. A
close examination of the cleanliness of the mess and strict adherence to the applicable
instructions will improve biological defense greatly. The problems of biological agents
differ from ordinary military hygiene problems only in that hardier types of organisms
may be present in other than their normal environment and in higher levels of
contamination.
BIOLOGICAL CONTAMINATION

In treating the problem of biological attack, it is assumed that there could be

contamination of personnel, of all exposed surfaces, and of circulating air. Because of
the current difficulties in rapidly detecting biological agents, knowledge of contamination
might (although not necessarily) be based on the occurrence of widespread or unusual
sickness. This sickness could be caused by contamination that had occurred several days
or weeks before. A situation could exist also whereby extensive use of biological agents
would require additional precautions in the operation of all messes. These instructions
are intended for use in the event of suspected or known biological attack. The problem is
to decontaminate and prevent recontamination.

BIOLOGICAL DECONTAMINATION METHODS

Use calcium hypochlorite (bleach) solutions for biological decontamination. Scrub

the interior surfaces of contaminated spaces with 200-ppm chlorine solution to remove
dust and grease. Then, hose spaces with fresh, safe water and repeat the process. You
may also use iodine solutions prepared by the medical department. Large equipment
(those items too large to be immersed in sinks or run through dishwashing machines)
should be washed, rinsed, and decontaminated in the same manner as prescribed for
interior surfaces of messes. Small items of equipment that will not suffer damage by
immersion should be washed, rinsed, and sanitized in the dishwashing machine or by
hand dishwashing as described earlier in this chapter.

Before eating and drinking utensils are brought to the scullery for decontamination,
the interior bulkheads, all working surfaces (tables, dish carts, and sinks), the interior and
exterior of the dishwashing machine, and all other equipment used in the washing and
sanitizing of eating and drinking utensils should be thoroughly washed, rinsed, and
decontaminated as appropriate.

37
 Eating and drinking utensils should be decontaminated by machine or hand washing.
A person who has handled contaminated utensils should not handle decontaminated
utensils until the person has been decontaminated. Decontaminated articles should not be
placed in contact with any surface that has been exposed to contamination. If possible,
use baskets or containers designed to hold silverware in a vertical position, handles down,
during the washing and sanitizing processes, and additional containers of similar
construction into which the silverware may be inverted without being handled by
workers. If such containers are not available, lay the silverware flat in the racks, not
exceeding two utensils, with the handles extending in the same direction. Do not exceed
a depth of two utensils. Take care when removing utensils from the racks after
decontamination to prevent recontamination.

Sterilization by hypochlorite solution should be used only when dishwashing

machines do not operate correctly. The utensils should be soaked, while still in the wash
rack, for 1 full minute at 100°F to 140°F in a solution of 1 part hypochlorite and 50 parts
water in a single-tank machine, or 1 part hypochlorite and 500 parts water in a double-
tank machine; one-fifth of 1 percent of a detergent must be added to either solution. This
solution may be mixed from nonionic detergent and any one of several chlorine
containing compounds such as calcium hypochlorite, or laundry bleach.

In storage, compounds containing chlorine have been known to deteriorate. It will be

necessary, therefore, to have a qualified person from the ship’s company analyze the
soaking solution for chlorine content to make sure the proper concentration of available
chlorine is attained and continued at sufficient strength.

After the sterilization, soak and water rinse, cover the wash racks containing the
utensils with a cloth that has been sterilized by boiling. Do not transfer utensils to
another rack. Make sure personnel in the serving line pick up utensils from the wash
racks by touching only the handles. Large equipment may be decontaminated by the use
of hypochlorite. Hypochlorite is corrosive to all metals that will rust and should not be
allowed to come in contact with motors and other electrical equipment from which
hypochlorite could not be thoroughly wiped off. After decontamination, cover as much
of the equipment as possible with clean cloths to prevent recontamination.
Avoidance of Recontamination

Recontamination may be caused by secondary aerosols that resettle organisms on

surfaces or contaminate the air that is breathed. Secondary aerosols are clouds formed
from particles (bacteria or other organisms) that, having been deposited on a surface, are
stirred up into the air again by scuffing, shaking, or other mechanical action. Secondary
aerosols may be suppressed by wetting surfaces with oil or water. If oil is used as a
suppressant, it must not generate harmful vapors and it must not be applied to walking
surfaces which may create slippery conditions. It is important to make sure, before
entering the messing area, CS personnel and all personnel eating in the messing areas are
as free as possible from contamination. The medical officer should be consulted on the
decontamination of foodservice personnel. In cold weather, personnel in the serving line
should be required to remove outer garments and leave them outside the messing area

38
before entering the mess. It has been found that removing clothing will shake off
organisms that have come in contact with the surfaces, thereby setting up secondary
aerosols. Do not permit unauthorized personnel in foodservice spaces.

Hypochlorite is a strong oxidizer and, in powdered form, reacts violently with oils and
greases. Use hypochlorite in a well-ventilated area. Always wear goggles and protective
gloves, and consult the MSDS for additional precautions.
Decontaminating Food Items

The advice of the medical officer must be sought before any attempt is made to
decontaminate food suspected of biological contamination.

Semi perishable Food Items

Food packed in containers that are resistant to the passage of biological agents (sealed
containers made of metal, plastic, glass, or porcelain) requires only proper exterior
decontamination be performed. Paper labels and paper covers must be removed from the
container and one of the following methods of decontamination should be used:

1. Immerse the containers for 15 minutes in a solution of water to which 200-ppm

available chlorine has been added and then rinse them with potable water.

2. Soak the containers for a minimum of 15 minutes in effective detergent solution as a

quick method to reduce contamination to a safe level (see formula 1 discussed under the
heading Radiological Decontamination); then rinse them with potable water.

3. The exterior surfaces of stacks of food packed in impermeable packages can be

sterilized using any of the standard chemical methods such as bleach solution, sodium
carbonate, or DS2 followed by rinsing in potable water.

Food packages that will not stand immersion must be wiped off with a solution of
water to which 200-ppm available chlorine has been added and the food thoroughly
cooked before it is eaten.

Fresh or Chill Items

Food that can be peeled or pared may be decontaminated by soaking for 15 minutes in
water to which 200-ppm available chlorine has been added before it is peeled. The food
must then be thoroughly rinsed in potable water. It can then be peeled or pared and
should be rinsed again with potable water. This method has been applied satisfactorily to
apples, potatoes, and eggs.

For other fresh or chill items, the use of heat is the most practical means of
decontaminating foods. Thorough cooking will reduce contamination to a safe
level so that food can be consumed.

39
Frozen Items

Food items stored in the freeze space in impermeable containers (tamed frozen
strawberries, for example) may be decontaminated by immersing the containers for 15
minutes in a solution of water to which 200-ppm available chlorine has been added; the
containers are then rinsed with potable water. Food items stored in the freeze space in
permeable containers (frozen vegetables, for example) may be decontaminated as
outlined earlier for food packaged in sacks or other permeable containers. Food items
stored in the freeze space, but not contained in outer packaging (meat, for example), must
be completely thawed and thoroughly cooked before they are eaten.

Additional Precautions

Hands should be free of contamination during the opening operations to make sure the
contents are not contaminated. Opened cans of fruit jam, jelly, or similar foods must be
destroyed. Opened cans of vegetables may be decontaminated by boiling the vegetables
for a minimum of 15 minutes in a steam-jacketed kettle.

Biological Decontamination in Food Preparation

The use of heat is the most practical means of decontaminating biologically

contaminated foods. In no case should decontaminated food be consumed until
it is pronounced safe by a medical officer. It is recommended that, insofar as possible,
only foods contained in impermeable packages (cans, bottles, jars) be decontaminated
and used for meal preparation. Food items that are not packaged or that are packaged in
permeable containers may be cooked by either cooking in a pressure-type cooker at 15
pounds of pressure at 250°F (or 121°C) for 15 minutes or boiling for a minimum of 15
minutes. Certain contaminated items may be decontaminated by baking. Only those
recipes listed in the Armed Forces Recipe Service (AFRS) that specify an oven
temperature of 400°F and above, for a cooking period of 30 minutes or longer, should be
used to prepare baked items from contaminated ingredients. All meats except those
contained in decontaminated impermeable containers (canned meat items) must be
cooked to the well-done stage. Guidance cards in the AFRS include information on
internal temperatures indicating the well-done state.

Biological Decontamination of Water

The detection of water contamination and requisite laboratory analysis are

responsibilities of the medical department. Biological decontamination of water is not
difficult when regular water treatment facilities exist. However, more chlorine probably
will need to be added during the ordinary processing of the water. If no water treatment
facilities are available, water can be decontaminated by any of the following methods:

1. By boiling for 20 minutes

2. By using iodine tablets coupled with boiling

40
 A medical officer should approve the method of decontaminating; after the
decontamination process, the officer should determine whether or not the water is fit to
be used. Water that has been decontaminated must be protected against further
contamination.
DEFENSE AGAINST CHEMICAL AGENTS

The United States has committed itself against initiating the use of chemical agents.
However, it is necessary to be prepared against attack by an enemy using this type of
warfare.

A chemical agent is defined as a solid, liquid, or gas that, through its chemical
properties, produces lethal or damaging effects on man, animals, plants, or material, or
produces a screening or signaling smoke.

Chemical warfare agents, like the biological warfare agents, are used mainly because
of their effect on personnel, although some agents will have a corrosive effect on specific
materials, and incendiary devices will burn most materials. These agents produce a
harmful physiological reaction when applied to the body externally, inhaled, or ingested.
Most chemical agents cause disorganization of the functioning of the body.

The degree of contamination of the messing area and equipment depends on the
chemical agent used and the factors involved, such as the method of delivery (vapor, light
liquid, and heavy liquid), the weather, and the various strengths of contamination.

The following paragraphs prescribe the methods to be used in decontaminating eating,

drinking, and galley utensils; galley and foodservice equipment; and messing areas that
are contaminated by chemical agents.
Vapor Contamination

After the surrounding areas have been decontaminated, the entire general mess should
be aerated thoroughly and the entire area washed down inside and out with safe water.
All equipment and utensils used in the preparation and service of food should be washed
carefully using normal procedures. Spaces, utensils, and equipment should then be tested
with the chemical agent detector kit and, if necessary, any of the prescribed procedures
should be repeated.
Light Liquid Contamination

The messing area inside and out should be washed with hot water. You may add an
alkaline detergent, such as a standard general-purpose detergent, and if applied at high
pressure, it will increase the water’s effectiveness. As an alternative method, for mustard
gas, you may apply a bleach solution to all surfaces. After washing down, aerate the
entire area. If slight contamination remains, the area should be heated to as high a
temperature as possible for about 1 to 2 hours. Then the spaces should be opened and
ventilated for 15 minutes. Repeat the procedure as necessary, testing at intervals with a
chemical agent detector kit. Porous objects, such as meat blocks and wooden benches,

41
may absorb liquid contamination to the extent that they will have to be destroyed. Metal,
glass, or china utensils or any equipment that is not damaged by water should be
immersed for 30 minutes in actively boiling water. Add 1 cupful of alkaline detergent to
each 5 gallons of water. Upon completion of the boiling process, you should follow
normal dishwashing procedures. Plastics generally cannot withstand boiling water and
should be destroyed.

Heavy Contamination of Liquid

Heavy contamination of liquid is unlikely, except from a direct hit, in which case
recovery of the space and contents will be a major undertaking. However, when such is
the case, the following procedures are recommended.

Space should be roped off or abandoned as unsalvageable, as no amount of washing or

scrubbing of a porous surface that is heavily contaminated by a liquid chemical agent
(particularly mustard gas) is likely to do much good.

Metal, glass, or china utensils or any equipment that is not damaged by water should
be decontaminated in the same manner as prescribed for light contamination of liquid
discussed earlier.

Large equipment unsuited for immersion in boiling water should be scrubbed

vigorously with DS2 solution or hot water and an alkaline detergent, rinsed,
disassembled, and scrubbed again paying particular attention to any parts not reached in
the assembled state that are reachable in the disassembled state. Then, the equipment
should be rinsed, dried, oiled, greased, and reassembled. Wooden items should be
removed and destroyed.

On electrical equipment, unless the electrical unit is enclosed in a watertight seal,

water must not be used in the decontamination process. Electrical equipment should be
cleaned with trichloroethane or DS2 solution. All greases must be removed, bearings
cleaned, and the equipment regressed.

Trichloroethane and DS2 are toxic chemicals. Protective clothing and respirators
should be worn when they are used, and the MSDSs should be consulted for additional
precautions.

Careful inspection must be made of the general situation before large quantities of
food or water suspected of chemical agent contamination are destroyed. Contaminated
food and water must be destroyed in some cases; in other cases, they may be salvaged by
special decontamination procedures. In any event, the responsibility belongs to the
medical department to determine whether food or water contaminated by chemical agents
should be decontaminated or destroyed.

42
 QUESTIONS:
“Sanitation” Assignment 1

1-1. Which of the following new problems in the prevention of foodborne illness
have new types of warfare presented?

1. Protection of food supplies from bacterial agents used as weapons

2. Decontamination of foods subjected to nuclear fallout
3. Decontamination of food supplies affected by chemical warfare agents
4. Each of the above

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 1-2 THROUGH 1-5, SELECT THE

CLASSIFICATION OF FOODBORNE ILLNESS THAT MATCHES THE
DESCRIPTION GIVEN AS THE QUESTION.

1-2. In this type of foodborne illness, the food in its natural state contains elements
poisonous to humans.

1. Chemical food poisoning

2. Food infection
3. Natural food poisoning
4. Food intoxication

1-3. Serving lemonade that has stood in metal-plated pitchers for several hours.

1. Chemical food poisoning

2. Food infection
3. Natural food poisoning
4. Food intoxication

1-4. This type of illness is caused by poisonous toxins.

1. Chemical food poisoning

2. Food infection
3. Natural food poisoning
4. Food intoxication

1-5. This type of food illness is caused by microorganisms such as salmonella.

1. Chemical food poisoning

2. Food infection
3. Natural food poisoning
4. Food intoxication

43
1-6. When you are using unfamiliar foods, which of the following statements is the
rule that applies?

1. Prepare according to the instructions that accompany the food item

2. Cook the food to the well-done state
3. Use a local recipe approved by the food service officer
4. Use food only if the medical officer gives approval

1-7. After silverware has been detarnished, which of the following chemical
poisonings may result if improperly washed and sanitized?

1. Cyanide poisoning
2. Zinc poisoning
3. Lead and arsenic poisoning
4. Fluoride poisoning

1-8. Which of the following chemical poisonings may result from eating improperly
washed raw fruits or vegetables?

1. Fluoride poisoning
2. Lead poisoning
3. Methyl chloride poisoning
4. Zinc poisoning

1-9. Most food poisoning is caused by bacteria called staphylococcus. This bacteria
is found in which of the following areas?

1. Pimples only
2. Pimples and nasal discharge only
3. Pimples, nasal discharge, and throat
4. Nasal discharge and infected cuts

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 1-10 THROUGH 1-13, SELECT THE ILLNESS

THAT MATCHES THE DESCRIPTION GIVEN AS THE QUESTION.

1-10. May be present in improperly preserved canned food.

1. Trichinosis
2. Bacillus dysentery
3. Botulism
4. Salmonellosis

44
1-11. The main source of this infection is personnel who do not wash their hands
after leaving the head.

1. Amoebic dysentery
2. Bacillus dysentery
3. Botulism
4. Salmonellosis

1-12. Some fresh fruits or vegetables served chilled and moist may carry this
infection.

1. Amoebic dysentery
2. Bacillus dysentery
3. Botulism
4. Salmonellosis

1-13. Most likely to occur from serving rare pork.

1. Amoebic dysentery
2. Bacillus dysentery
3. Trichinosis
4. Salmonellosis

1-14. The greatest majority of food infection outbreaks is caused by what meat?

1. Turkey
2. Beef
3. Ham
4. Lamb

1-15. You can best prevent a case of beef tapeworm infection from occurring in
prepared beef products by following what procedure?

1. Cook the beef until well-done

2. Pickle the beef in a 25-percent salt solution for 5 days
3. Freeze the beef at 14°F or below for at least 5 days
4. Use only government–inspected beef

1–16. Bacteria is classified in which of the following manners?

1. By the damage they cause

2. By the symptoms they produce
3. By the number of times they multiply
4. By their shape

45
1-17. Under favorable conditions, how many bacteria will be produced by one
bacterium in a 2-hour period?

1. 12
2. 18
3. 36
4. 64

1-18. Boiling will kill all bacteria and their toxins once they are allowed to form.

1. True
2. False

1-19. What temperature range will kill bacteria in the shortest time?

1. 0°F and below

2. 41°F to 140°F
3. 175°F to 180°F
4. 212°F and up

1-20. Which of the following carriers of bacteria is/are most likely to transmit
disease to food?

1. Flies
2. Rodents
3. Soil
4. Foodservice personnel

1-21. You must first receive a personal medical examination and sanitation
training before you are permitted to work in food preparation areas.

1. True
2. False

1–22. In addition to the required physical examination, all personnel must be tested
for which of the following diseases?

1. Tuberculosis
2. Hepatitis
3. Typhoid fever
4. Shigellosis

46
1-23. All foodservice personnel must repeat medical tests when away from work for
what minimum number of days?

1. 30
2. 45
3. 60
4. 75

1-24. In cases where environmental health officers or preventive medicine

technicians are not available to perform the initial sanitation training, who may
conduct the training?

1. An CS3
2. Any corpsman
3. Food service officer
4. Any qualified foodservice sanitation instructor

1-25. When you are working in food preparation areas, you should change clothing
and aprons at which of the following times?

1. At the end of the meal being prepared

2. At the end of the day
3 When returning from the restroom
4. As soon as clothing or apron gets soiled

1-26. The use of tobacco while preparing or serving food is prohibited for which of
the following reasons?

1. Smoking contaminates the fingers and hands with saliva

2. Smoking promotes spitting and coughing
3. Smoking is a means of transmitting disease organisms to food
4. Each of the above

1–27. Which of the following offices or officials imposes public health ordinances
and regulations on the military?

1. Surgeon General
2. The U.S. Department of Agriculture
3. The Bureau of Medicine and Surgery
4. The National Sanitation Foundation

1–28. The majority of foodborne disease outbreaks are due to what total number of
different factors?

1. Six
2. Seven

47
3. Three
4. Four

1-29. Which of the following types of food should never be saved as leftovers?

1. Meats that are cut or sliced

2. Unopened individual serving containers
3. Ground or chopped foods
4. Cooked pork products

1–30. After what specific number of hours should protein foods that have been held
at temperatures between 41°F and 140°F be considered unsafe for consumption?

1. 5
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

1–31. For which of the following reasons should foods that are to be refrigerated be
placed in shallow pans to a depth of not more than 3 inches?

1. To make sure the pan does not spill while in chilled storage
2. Because more than 3 inches will make the pan too heavy to carry
3. To allow the food to cool faster
4. Because 3 inches is the maximum allowable amount of food that you can save as
leftovers

1–32. For which of the following reasons will bacteria spread rapidly through frozen
meat that has been thawed?

1. Freezing hardens the tissue

2. Freezing breaks down the tissue
3. Freezing strengthens the bacteria
4. Freezing dries out the tissue

1-33. Milk should be no more than what maximum temperature at the time of
delivery?

1. 40°F
2. 44°F
3. 45°F
4. 50°F

48
1-34. When you have a problem with insects or rodents, what is the first and most
important pest control measure you should take?

1. Destroy breeding grounds

2. Set out insect and rodent traps
3. Notify the medical department
4. Install screens and seal unnecessary openings

1-35. Radiological defense includes all such measures used to minimize personnel
and material damage from radioactivity. The basic responsibility for this function
belongs to what person?

1. Executive officer
2. Damage control officer
3. Food service officer
4. Medical officer

1-36. Radioactivity can only be removed by using what process?

1. Chemical neutralization
2. Physical removal
3. Sterilization
4. Cooking

1-37. Contaminated food items should be monitored in their dry states because
dilution with water yields what result?

1. Lowers the beta readings

2. Raises the alpha readings
3. Damages the radiac instruments
4. Provides additional contamination

1-38. In what case, if any, may you use water already contaminated by radioactivity
in the process of decontamination?

1. It can be used only to wash decks

2. It can be used for all gross decontamination procedures
3. It can be used to wash surfaces more heavily contaminated than the water
4. None; it cannot be used for any decontamination purposes

49
1-39. In what order should the steps used in decontaminating spaces and equipment
be performed?

1. Flush with water, scrub with alkaline detergents, rinse with water, and apply acid
solution
2. Flush with water, scrub with alkaline detergents, apply acid solution, and rinse with
water
3. Apply acid solution, rinse with water, scrub with alkaline detergents, and flush with
water
4. Scrub with alkaline detergents, flush with water, apply acid solution, and rinse with
water

1–40. Which of the following statements pertaining to biological agents is NOT

correct?

1. Biological agents destroy both living matter and inorganic matter

2. Good sanitary and hygienic practices do not defend against biological warfare
3. Sickness could be caused by contamination that occurred weeks before
4. Hardier organisms are present in higher levels of contamination

50
 CHAPTER 2

RECEIPT, INSPECTION, EXPENDITURE, AND

STORAGE OF FOOD ITEMS
As a Culinary Specialist (CS), you may be assigned as the jack-of-the-dust or as the
subsistence bulk storeroom storekeeper, responsible for the proper receipt and storage of
food items and making breakouts to the general mess, officers’ mess, and chief petty
officers’ mess. It is also your responsibility to keep these spaces clean, safe, and orderly
and to keep the leading CS up to date on stock levels.
RECEIPT

Deliveries can usually be anticipated because of shipment notices, delivery dates on

requisitions, or other notifications, and preparations should consequently be made to
receive the material. Receiving personnel should be ready to inspect the material,
storerooms should be ready to receive the material, and the necessary arrangements for
working parties should be made well in advance so that once the anticipated material
arrives, it maybe stored immediately to prevent temperature fluctuations. Such
fluctuations will reduce the quality and storage life of food items. Subsistence items
received aboard a ship or shore activity are accompanied by a variety of receipt
documents depending upon the method of request and the issuing activity. Certain
certifications are common to all receipt documents. Receiving personnel must do the
following:

• Inventory all food items

• Circle the quantity accepted
• Date the document upon receipt
• Have items inspected by a medical representative
• Have the documents stamped by a medical representative as passing medical
inspection
• Sign the document to indicate receipt
UNLOAD SHIPMENT

Always remember that safety, sanitation, and security of food items should not be
compromised when unloading and loading stores. Careful planning and preparation will
minimize, if not prevent, this problem. Receiving procedures will be issued and routes
established. This will facilitate unloading and loading stores and definitely eliminate
wandering food items that could be lost or stolen. Working parties should be requested
well in advance and requirements are established from each department. Get the request
for working parties and requirement lists including the day of delivery published in the
plan of the day a few days before the day of delivery. When there is a sufficient number
of personnel from other departments, use supply personnel as checkers, spotters, and
supervisors to the greatest extent possible. Unload and load as fast as possible to avoid

51
prolonged exposure to less than ideal temperatures and to not diminish the average shelf
life of food items and to prevent spoilage.

Safety

All personnel involved in receiving and storing food items must receive instructions
on the following safety precautions:

• The proper method of lifting heavy objects

• Wearing of protective hats, safety shoes, and gloves
• Operation of materials-handling equipment such as forklifts, pallet jacks, and
portable conveyors
• Removal of hatch covers and ladders
Designated Receiver

When food items are received, the food service officer (FSO) or a designated assistant
inspects the food items to verify the exact quantity received and signs the receiving
documents to acknowledge receipt.

Custody

The bulk storeroom storekeeper having custody of the food items delivered accepts
responsibility by signing a statement on the invoice that normally reads, “I accept
responsibility for these items and hold myself accountable to the United States
Government.”
Date Stamping

Food items must be date-stamped or color-coded to make sure the oldest stock is used
first.
INSPECTION

Regardless of the source from which food items are obtained and regardless of any
prior inspection, it may be your responsibility to inspect them as they arrive to determine
that the specified quantities have been received.

A designated member of the medical department should perform a fitness-for-human-

consumption inspection upon receipt of food items that have been purchased from a local
market or under contracts that require inspection at destination. The receipt document
showing that this inspection has been done must be signed by the medical representative.
Inspection of Food Items Received From Naval Sources and Other Government Agencies

An ashore supply activity will perform a quality inspection of food items upon
acceptance from the original supplier. Before storing, the receiving individual will
coordinate inspection procedures to detect any deterioration, contamination, or infestation
that may have occurred since the quality inspection at the supply activity. Contaminated
or infested foods received via underway replenishment should be immediately separated
and disposed of according to the NAVSUP P-486. Government-owned subsistence items

52
received in usable condition but unfit for storage should be used promptly and any loss
surveyed.

Inspection of Food Items Received From Commercial Sources

Subsistence items received from commercial vendors will be inspected at origin and
destination for conformance to all terms and conditions quoted or referred to in the
contract or purchase order. However, inspection at origin may be waived if lack of time
or other justifying circumstances exist. The supply officer will make sure the commercial
vendor has certified that the food items delivered are in conformance with the
requirements of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act. Meat, poultry, fish, and their
by-products delivered under contract within the United States will be accepted only if
they bear the appropriate stamps from the respective government agencies. In addition
they should also have the special Department of Defense stamp.

Inspection by the Medical Department

A designated representative of the medical department will perform a fitness-for-

human-consumption inspection upon receipt of food items that have been purchased on
the local market or under contracts that require inspection at destination. The receipt
document showing that a fitness-for-human-consumption inspection has been performed
should be signed by the medical representative. Suspected items in which there is doubt
as to fitness are not accepted and are referred to a local Army veterinarian or
environmental preventive medicine unit (EPMU) for analysis.

Unsatisfactory Food Items

The subsistence supply system has quality assurance provisions designed to guarantee
the receipt of wholesome, satisfactory food products. However, the system does
experience breakdowns in specification standards is allowing some unsatisfactory
products to filter into the supply pipeline.

NONHAZARDOUS.— These food items do not meet expected or desired standards,

but do not constitute a health hazard to personnel if consumed. A good example of this
would be chicken wings in a box labeled breasts.

HAZARDOUS.— These food items would possibly cause, or are suspected to have
already caused, harm after being consumed. Determination of fitness for human
consumption is the responsibility of the medical officer. Examples of hazardous food
item characteristics are widespread presence of swollen or leaking cans and products with
either offensive or unusual odors and colors or any other evidence of deterioration. Refer
to the NAVSUP P-486, for more information regarding the reporting and handling of
nonhazardous and hazardous food items.
Discrepancies in Shipment

It is always possible that several discrepancies can occur during shipment and receipt.
All of these can be discovered during careful inspection and verification of receipts. The
following actions will be taken when these discrepancies are found.

53
 SHORTAGES IN SHIPMENT.— A shortage occurs when the quantity received is
less than the quantity shown on the receipt, regardless of the quantity on the original
requisition. If a shortage exists, contact the issuer or shipper, either in person or by
message, to try to resolve the discrepancy. Refer to NAVSUP P-723 for further
guidance. Shortages due to transportation discrepancies will be reported according with
DLA Regulation 4500.15. Receiving activities will notify the supply/transportation
officer of all transportation discrepancies upon their discovery. For all types of
discrepancies, the receipt inspector and the bulk storeroom custodian will indicate on the
receipt document the actual quantity physically received by drawing a single line through
the invoice quantity and recording and circling the actual quantity. Both will then sign
and date the receipt documents. Forward the documents to the FSO.

When substantial shortages are found in shipments received from Navy supply
activities (Navy supply centers [NSCs] or Navy supply depots [NSDs]) or combat
logistics force ships (AFSs, AFs or AORs), you should immediately contact the
issuer/shipper in person or by message to resolve the discrepancies. In the event
shortages do exist after investigation, the full quantity and dollar value of the invoice will
be posted to the Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP Form 335; the Record of Receipts and
Expenditures, NAVSUP Form 367; and the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336. The
quantity and dollar value of the loss of $50 or more per line item will also be posted to
the records according to the survey procedures found in the NAVSUP P-486. Losses of
less than $50 per line item will be documented as a loss without survey.

OVERAGES IN SHIPMENT.— An overage occurs when the quantity physically

received exceeds the quantity stated on the receipt document regardless of the quantity on
the original requisition or purchase order. When this occurs, immediate liaison is to be
established with the issuer to resolve the discrepancies.

Overages From a Navy Source.— When discrepancies from a Navy source are not
resolved, the receipt inspector and bulk storeroom storekeeper should indicate the actual
quantity physically received on the receipt document by drawing a single line through the
invoiced quantity. Then both sign and date the receipt examples of these documents.
Forward this document to the FSO. A dummy receipt document should then be prepared
to document the excess quantity received. This dummy receipt document can be a DoD
Single Line Item Release/Receipt Document, DD Form 1348-1-A, or a Requisition and
Invoice Shipping Document, DD Form 1149. In addition, mark on the document.
Dummy Invoice to Cover Excess Shipment to distinguish the dummy invoice from a
normal receipt. It will also be used as the source document for posting the excess receipt.
After the preparation of the dummy invoice document, the receipt inspector and bulk
storeroom storekeeper will circle the excess quantity received, then both will sign and
date the document. Forward the documents to the FSO.

Overages From a Commercial Source.— When an overage occurs from a commercial

vendor, the receipt inspector and bulk storeroom custodian will sign only for the

54
requested quantities on the receipt documents and forward the documents to the FSO.
Any excess quantities will be returned to the vendor.

RECEIPTS WITHOUT INVOICES.— When food items are received without

invoices or unpriced invoices, a dummy invoice will be prepared and the food items will
be taken up at the last receipt price as shown on your current NAVSUP Form 335. When
the price invoice is received, the receipt unit price rounded off to the nearest cent will be
the unit price for the item. A cross-reference will be made on the priced invoice to its
related dummy invoice and, if required, an additional line entry will be posted on the
NAVSUP Form 367 for any difference.

ERRONEOUS INVOICES.— An erroneous invoice is an invoice where the invoice

quantity times the unit price does not equal the total dollar value.

Erroneous Invoice From a Navy Source.— When an invoice is received containing an

error of $5 or more, a corrected or credit invoice will be requested from the issuing
activity. The error is lined through on the original receipt document, without erasing the
erroneous figure and the correct amount will be inserted and posted to the NAVSUP
Form 1336 and the NAVSUP Form 367. Upon receipt, the corrected or credit invoice
will be filed with the retained records. Errors of less than $50 will be posted as is to the
NAVSUP Form 1336 and the NAVSUP Form 367. The difference will be absorbed in
the price adjustment at the end of the accounting period.

Erroneous Invoice From Commercial Sources.— When an invoice is received

containing an error of any dollar value, a corrected invoice should be requested from the
commercial vendor. The error will be lined through without erasing the erroneous figure
and the correct amount will be inserted and posted to the NAVSUP Form 1336 and the
NAVSUP Form 367.
Posting Receipts

When you are corrected invoice will be filed with posting receipts, there are two
pieces of information that must be transcribed to general mess records. They are the
quantity received and the value of the receipt. Receipts are posted to the Record of
Receipts and Expenditures, NAVSUP Form 367; the Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP
Form 335, and the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336.

The total money value of each receipt document is posted to the NAVSUP Form 367.
The first entry is always the inventory value carried forward from the previous quarter.
Next, each receipt document is posted to the applicable page of the NAVSUP Form 335.
A separate page of the NAVSUP Form 335 is prepared for each item carried in stock.
One difference you should notice is the unit price. Stock food items have two unit prices,
the fixed price and the last receipt price. Since the purchase price for food items on the
commercial market fluctuates and the general mess (GM) must operate on a fixed ration
allowance, the NAVSUP 51 establishes a fixed price for most items that are used in the
GM. Thus, the same charge is made throughout the accounting period for an item with a
fixed price regardless of the current market or last receipt price. On the other hand, the

55
last receipt price and the date an item is received are entered in the spaces provided to
allow this price to be used to survey, transfer, or sell items to private messes. Also, this
price is used to charge out items that do not have fixed prices to the GM and to extend the
inventory value.
Distribution of Receipt Documents From Naval Supply Activities

The DoD Single Line Item Release/Receipt Document, DD Form 1348-1-A-, or the
local receipts document required by the supplying activity is used for the receipt
document except during underway replenishment. During such replenishment, receipt is
documented by the DD Form 1149. At Least three copies of a receipt document are
received. The copies are distributed as follow:

• Original, signed by the inspector, acknowledge that receipts were

inspected for quantity and condition and filed in the FSO’s accountability file.
• One copy, signed by the storeroom storekeeper acknowledging responsibility for
the items received and filed in the FSO’s accountability file.
• One copy, extended, to one of two files; receipts with charge or receipts without
charge. This copy is used by the records keeper to post to the NAVSUP Form 335,
NAVSUP Form 367, and the NAVSUP Form 1336, and then filed in the appropriate
receipts file.
• All remaining copies are attached to the outstanding requisition copy taken from
the outstanding requisition file.

Distribution of Receipt Documents From Commercial Sources

Receipts from purchase and indefinite delivery-type contracts are handled in much the
same manner as receipts from Navy activities. When an order is placed, one copy of the
Order for Supplies or Services/Request for Quotation, DD Form 1155, will be given to
the storeroom storekeeper for the incoming material file. Upon receipt of the material,
the inspector will remove all copies (minimum of three) from the outstanding purchase
order file, inspect the material, circle the quantity received, and then sign and date block
26 of the DD Form 1155. The copies are distributed as follows:

a. Copy signed by the inspector and one additional copy are placed under lock and key
by the FSO until receipt of the dealer’s bill.

b. One copy is delivered to the records storekeeper for posting to the NAVSUP Forms
335 and 367 and placed in the appropriate receipt file.

c. All remaining copies are returned to the outstanding purchase order file pending
receipt of the dealer’s bill.

d. The storeroom storekeeper should remove the copy of the applicable DD Form
1155 from the incoming material file, circle the quantity accepted, and sign it (accepting
responsibility), and deliver it to the FSO who will place it in his or her accountability file.

56
 An exception to these procedures occurs when orders are placed for delivery over an
extended period. In this case, after the storeroom storekeeper has signed each delivery
ticket, assuming responsibility for the food items, the ticket is filed in the accountability
file and the amount of the delivery noted on the DD Form 1155 at the end of the month.
When final delivery has been made, the distribution of the DD Form 1155 will follow
procedures as shown in items a through d.

FOOD STORAGE

All areas in which food items are stored must be kept lean and clear of unnecessary
traffic and unpleasant odors. Care should be taken to keep food items away from areas
where asphalt, fuel, creosote, or lubricating oils are present. Smoking in food storage
spaces is prohibited to avoid fire and prevent certain food items from absorbing the odor
or smoke. Items in damaged containers or bags will be issued immediate if they are fit
for human consumption; otherwise, they will be surveyed. Inspect the food items
regularly for signs of damage, spoilage, and insect or rodent infestation.
PRINCIPLES OF STORAGE

Certain basic storage principles and procedures must be observed regardless of the
type of items. Organized storage spaces help facilitate storing, issuing, counting,
cleaning, and safety. This organization will result in a quicker determination of items
that are low and thereby avoid unplanned replenishment. Applying these principles will
save you headaches and future problems.

Safety

Materials must be stored properly to prevent injury to the ship and the crew and to
prevent damage to the material itself. Items that are stored overhead and on top of bins
must be secured with particular care because the lashing or other means of securing
maybe subjected to heavy strain while the ship is underway.
Accessibility

Supplies must be arranged in storage to facilitate breakouts. Items that are issued most
frequently should be located nearest to the breakout area. Whenever possible, avoid
storing an item on top of or behind a totally different kind of material. Failure to observe
this rule causes slow breakouts and slow and inaccurate inventories. Items must be
stored so that, under ordinary conditions, the oldest stock will be the first issued; this
process is the first in/first out (FI/FO) rule.

Orderliness

Case goods should be stored neatly in the storage area so that they can be counted by
sight without being moved.

Safety, accessibility, and orderliness are closely interrelated and must be considered
together. For instance, if for the sake of accessibility, you leave cases of canned goods

57
stacked in the passageway, or if you do not secure them properly, you will violate rules of
safety and orderliness. If such a practice were carried to an extreme, you would
eventually have such confusion that accessibility would suffer also.

SEMIPERISHABLE FOOD ITEMS

The term semi perishable refers to food items that are canned, dried, dehydrated, or
otherwise processed to the extent that such items may, under normal conditions, be stored
in a non refrigerated space. While semi perishable food items are not nearly as prone to
spoilage as perishable food items, spoilage can and will occur if the items are
mishandled, improperly stored, or stored too long. Always remember the length of
storage should be based on the packing date of the product and not the date of receipt.
Storage Principles of Semi perishable Food Items

When possible, store semi perishable food items in clean, cool, dry, well-ventilated
storerooms. Check all items at regular intervals for signs of damage. Keep your
storerooms clean to prevent the contamination of bagged foods by dirt and dust.

Separate and clearly mark shipments so that the oldest lots-as packed, not as
received—are issued first. However, if newer lots show signs of deterioration or spoilage,
they should be issued first.

Methods of storage depend on the size and the contents of the container and the
bursting or breaking strength of the bottom layers. Care must be taken not to stack items
too high because of the danger of bursting or crushing the bottom layers.

Do not stack items near steam or other heated pipes. Use pallets or deck grating to
raise the items off the deck and stack individual lots so as to permit proper circulation of
air and facilitate cleaning. Bagged items and those requiring insect control should not be
stored in large lots in corners of the storeroom or directly against the bulkhead. This type
of storage will not permit sufficient room for cleaning and inspecting. When possible,
palletized storage should be used to ease the handling of the stores and reduce losses
through breakage in handling.

The safe storage period for dry food items varies greatly, depending on such elements
as temperature, humidity, care in handling, protection from the weather, quality of the
food when received, and the packing. Food items that have been on hand beyond the safe
storage limit should be inspected for spoilage, leakage, or other damage. If such items
are in good condition, use them as promptly as possible. Survey all items unfit for human
consumption according to the NAVSUP P-486.
PERISHABLE FOODS

All foods are perishable. The term perishable as applied here refers to food items
requiring refrigeration and special handling.

58
 All fresh and frozen food items are highly perishable and subject to rapid deterioration
when improperly stored. They require accurate temperatures, controlled humidity, air
circulation, and special care in keeping the storage space sanitary. Failure to maintain
any one of these conditions will result in rapid spoilage and eventual loss. Most spoilage
in fresh and frozen food items is caused by bacteria and fungi and spreads rapidly from
the decayed items to the sound food items. You may be assigned as the CS in charge of
the cold storage area. When such is the case, your duties regarding storage and care of
fresh and frozen food items are as follows:

• Make frequent inspections, sort, and remove any decayed items or portions. This
will keep losses and surveys to a minimum.
• Separate and mark shipments to make clear their relative ages. This allows the
issue of oldest food items first unless there is some reason (such as the condition) for
giving a newer lot priority.
• Inspect food items to make sure Department of Defense (DOD) requirements are
met. In the event frozen stores are received in a thawed or partially thawed condition,
seek medical advice and refer to the NAVSUP P-486, for survey procedures.
Fresh Fruits and Vegetables

Raise the containers off the deck with pallets or gratings away from bulkheads and
cooling coils and provide space between stacks, and at least 6 inches of clearance
between tops of stacks and the opening of the air ducts to permit the circulation of air. In
some cases it may be necessary to use a fan to maintain adequate circulation of all parts
of the storeroom.

SAFETY PRECAUTION: When fresh fruits and vegetables are stored in a tight
compartment at temperatures of 41°F or higher, the concentration of the carbon dioxide
produced by respiration may reach a level in which it is unsafe to work. One way to
check the amount of carbon dioxide present in a room is to light a match or candle. If the
light is extinguished, do not work in the space until fresh air has been introduced.
Meat and Meat Products

Proper circulation of air is of prime importance in keeping the desired temperature in

all parts of the meat storage space. Do not stack cases directly on the deck; use pallets or
deck gratings to allow free circulation of air under all items stored in the space. Stacks
should be at least 4 inches from the bulkhead or refrigeration coils. Generally, when the
recommended temperature in all parts of the refrigerated space is uniform within the
stacks, the circulation of air in the space is considered adequate.

Frozen Fruits and Vegetables

Frozen fruits and vegetables are highly perishable unless properly stored. Upon
delivery, they must be transferred promptly to a low-temperature storage space. Check
the temperature of the load upon arrival by taking temperature readings of cartons
selected from top layers inside of shipping cases.

59
 When the temperature is found to be higher than that of the freezer room, scatter the
shipping cases loosely about the room on hand trucks or on the deck with adequate space
between individual cases to permit rapid lowering of the product temperature to the
freezer room temperature. Use of a portable fan to create an air current over the items
will speed up temperature equalization. When the temperature of the items has been
lowered sufficiently, stack the cases compactly at once. Stack from the bulkhead toward
the center of the room, starting about 4 inches from the bulkhead or bulkhead coils. Stack
the cases on pallets to permit the circulation of air under them. The use of pallets will also
improve the sanitary conditions. In rooms where cold air is expelled directly from
blower units at the ends of the rooms, the cases should be stacked low enough to permit
air circulation. Allow at least 2 feet between the top of the stack and the overhead or air
ducts.
Dairy Products and Eggs

Keep the cold storage room for dairy products and eggs fresh by keeping it clean and
by circulating the air slowly. Air circulation can be increased by the use of pallets or deck
gratings and by the proper stacking of the various lots.
REFRIGERATION UNITS

Three factors affect the rate at which frost and ice accumulate on refrigerator coils: (1)
door traffic, (2) excessive temperature difference between the coils and the box, and (3)
moisture from the stored materials. In each case the buildup can be reduced by properly
planned and executed breakout procedures. Measures discussed in the following
paragraphs may be used to prevent excessive icing of coils.

Door Traffic

Breakouts should be planned for a full day’s requirements. All messes must draw
their frozen subsistence items at a predetermined time, usually in the morning. Any items
withdrawn at this single daily breakout from the freeze box, if not intended for immediate
use, should be stored temporarily in the chill box.

This one breakout per day should be strictly enforced. With a little planning on the
part of the various messes, it should not be too difficult. In this way, the reefer
temperature will remain constant and excessive icing from too much door traffic will be
57kept to a minimum.
Temperature Controls

A difference in the temperature of the refrigerated spaces and the refrigeration coils
will cause vapor to form on the coils and the refrigeration coils will turn the vapor into
ice. This ice formation continues until the temperatures of the coils and the refrigerated
spaces equalize. The temperatures of the coils and the refrigerated spaces are likely to
differ most during the period when the freeze box is being restocked. The higher
temperature of the food items being stored will cause a rise in temperature in the
refrigerated space and produce vapors. There is no way to prevent this condition, since
the work of storing must go on. However, once the storage has been completed, the box

60
should remain closed until the normal temperature level of the freeze box has been
reached.
Air Circulation

Proper storage and adequate air circulation help prevent excessive ice formation.
Continuous circulation by electric blowers is necessary at all times. Storage
arrangements should allow free circulation of air throughout the box. Adequate aisles
and overhead space should be provided to permit the free circulation of air from the
blowers. Blowers should be inspected each day to ensure proper operation. Any
malfunction in the circulating unit should be reported to the duty engineer immediately.
Defrosting and Cleaning Refrigerators

The refrigeration coils and units in cold storage spaces should be defrosted as often as
possible. A layer of frost or ice 1/4 or more inches thick will reduce the efficiency of the
refrigeration system and may result in overloading the compressors. Always consult the
engineering department regarding the defrosting of the refrigeration system.

Most refrigeration units are so equipped that hot gas can be run through the cooling
coil to melt the ice. Then the bulkheads, the overhead, and the deck remain cold because
of the speed with which the coils are defrosted, and there is no necessity for moving the
feud. This method of defrosting should be used on all ships equipped with such a hot gas
capability, since refrigeration is not interrupted.

Once defrosting is completed by a non-hot gas method, scrub and wash the box
thoroughly with hot soapy water. Rinse, dry, and air the box and return the
food to its place immediately.
Refrigerator Log

A refrigerator (or reefer) log must be maintained by the person responsible for the
refrigerated spaces. Temperature readings must be taken twice daily and at other times as
necessary. The reefer log is presented daily to the leading CS and the FSO for review
and initialing. Temperature irregularities must be reported to the leading CS and the FSO
immediately.

EXPENDITURES

Food items may be expended by issue, transfer, sale, or survey.

ISSUES

Issues (or breakouts) of food items to the GM must be made on pre-approved breakout
documents and follow established procedures.

61
Bulk Storeroom to Issue Storeroom Procedures Afloat

Breakouts of food items from the bulk storeroom to the issue room must not be made
without an approved issue document, such as a Food-Item Request/Issue Document,
NAVSUP Form 1282.

ISSUING PROCEDURE.— Requests for breakouts from the bulk storeroom must be
made on a NAVSUP Form 1282 prepared in triplicate.

DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION AND POSTING.— The completed form is signed by

both the bulk storeroom and issue storeroom storekeepers and distributed as follows:

• The original is retained under lock and key by the FSO.

• The duplicate is retained by the bulk storeroom storekeeper for posting to the
NAVSUP Form 335.
• The triplicate is retained by the issue room storekeeper for posting to the
NAVSUP Form 335.

Issue Storeroom to Galley Procedure

Breakouts to the galley from the issue storeroom are made on an approved NAVSUP
Form 1282.

DOCUMENT PREPARATION.— The FSO establishes controls to account for each

breakout document. When dry, fresh, and frozen items are in the custody of different
individuals, separate breakout documents must be prepared.

When the NAVSUP Form 1282 is used, care must be taken to list items in the order in
which they appear on the NAVSUP Form 1059. The food item code number from the
NAVSUP Form 1059 must be entered to assist with posting to the NAVSUP Form 335.

REQUIRED SIGNATURES.— Signatures on breakout documents serve as

authorization and transfer accountability. Therefore, the importance of following
established procedures cannot be overemphasized.

ISSUES.— The jack-of-the-dust (issue room storekeeper) issues the food items
requested using a NAVSUP Form 1282, enters the actual quantities furnished, and
delivers the items to the senior CS on duty. The jack-of-the-dust and the individual
accepting the material sign in the Issued By and Received By
blocks respectively.

RETURN OF FOOD ITEMS.— Strict accountability must be exercised over food

items at all times to minimize waste and to make sure items are used for the purpose
intended. Unused food items that are being returned must not be kept in the galley.
These items (often referred to as breakbacks or returns) must be promptly returned to the
storeroom so that accountability can be reestablished. Returns may be made on the
original issue document, NAVSUP Form 1282. This form is signed in the Issued by
block by the senior CS on duty and in the Received By block by the jack-of-the-dust.

62
 DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION AND POSTING.— The jack-of-the dust retains one
copy of the issue document for posting to the NAVSUP Form 335 and then delivers the
original and the remaining copy to the GM keeper.
Issues From Combined Bulk and Issue Storerooms

On some ships, the bulk storeroom storekeeper is accountable for both the bulk and
issue storerooms. Under this type of combined operation, the issue room becomes an
extension of the bulk storeroom for accountability purposes. Thus, the same issue
documents may be used for breakouts from the bulk storeroom to the galley and for
reporting issues to the GM drawn from the issue room. When you are using this
procedure, only items for immediate use are to be requested from the bulk storeroom or
drawn from the issue room. Care must be taken to make sure no excesses are drawn and
stored in the galley causing the issues to the GM to be overstated. Any food items
remaining in the issue room under the combined accountability procedure must be
counted and reported with the bulk storeroom items when inventory is taken.

RETURNS OR TURN-INS.— Unprepared food items remaining in the galley after

completion of meal periods in which the items were intended to be used must be returned
to the storeroom on a daily basis. The NAVSUP Form 1282 containing daily issues must
be modified to document items and quantities returned and thereby show the new issues
to the GM. Procedures for turn-ins are the same as explained earlier under the Issue
Storeroom to Galley Procedures heading.

DOCUMENT DISTRIBUTION AND POSTING.— The bulk storeroom storekeeper

retains one copy of the issue document for posting to the NAVSUP Form 335 and then
delivers the original and the remaining copy to the GM records keeper.
TRANSFERS

Occasionally, the need to transfer food items between GMs is necessary. You may be
told by the leading CS or FSO to estimate the quantities of the requested food items that
may be spared for transfer to another GM. In reviewing your stocks of the requested
items, you should make a complete check against the planned menu and consider the
length of time before replenishment of the requested food items. Then, you should make
your recommendation. This recommendation should not jeopardize the operating
capability of your GM.

Transfer Documents

Transfers of food items between ships and GMs ashore must be covered by a DD
Form 1149 or a DD Form 1348-1-A or some other document required by the
transferring activity. These documents must be prepared with an original and five copies.
Distribution and Posting

The copies of the transfer document are distributed to the receiving activity and three
copies are kept at the transferring activity. The subsistence bulk storeroom storekeeper

63
posts issues to the NAVSUP Forms 335 in the other column and then gives the copies to
the GM records keeper.
SALE OF FOOD ITEMS

Food items may be sold to private messes afloat and Navy/Marine Corps officer and
enlisted clubs ashore if approved by the commanding officer.

Sales to Afloat Private Messes

When food items are sold directly from the GM to a private mess, the authorized
representative of the private mess will prepare a NAVSUP Form 1282. The NAVSUP
Form 1282 will be signed by the private mess manager or treasurer, or an authorized
representative. If a person other than the private mess manager or treasurer is authorized
to sign requisitions, such authority will be furnished to the FSO in writing. The signed
requisition will be forwarded for approval by the FSO or the designated representative.
The approved requisition will be priced and extended at the last receipt unit price in
effect at the time of issue with the exception of donated dairy products that will be sold at
fixed prices. The GM representative and the jack-of-the-dust will sign for receipt and
issue of the material and the NAVSUP Form 1282 will be distributed as follows:

• Signed original to the FSO to be held under lock pending preparation of the
billing document.
• Signed duplicate to the mess treasurer.
• Signed triplicate, forward to the GM records keeper used for posting to the
NAVSUP Form 335. After posting is completed, this copy is placed in the cash sales
file.

Sales to authorized private messes will be posted to the NAVSUP Form 335 as they
occur. The value of sales to the private messes will be posted to the NAVSUP Form 367
monthly from a copy of the billing document. Under no circumstances will unprepared
food items furnished from the GM to a private mess be billed on the basis of meals
consumed.
Sale of Galley Bakery Products

NAVSUP 51 will issue a price list that will be used in pricing the galley-produced
bakery products sold to private messes. This price list is revised on a quarterly cycle or
as required by changes in prices of the basic ingredients. The cost of galley-produced
bakery products that do not appear in the price list is established at the local level based
on the last receipt invoice prices for the basic ingredients. At the option of the FSO, a
quarterly price list based on the last receipt prices of basic ingredients and approved by
the commanding officer or the commanding officer’s designated representative may be
established for all galley-produced bakery products. In no case will locally established
prices be less than the current prices issued by NAVSUP 51.

A separate issue document, NAVSUP Form 1282 is used for galley-produced bakery
products. This form is submitted in triplicate, listing the items and quantities required,
and is signed by the mess treasurer or the mess treasurer’s designated representative. The

64
approved document is presented to the baker for issue of the products. When issues are
made, the authorized representative of the private mess will sign the original and two
copies of the NAVSUP Form 1282 for receipt of the items and the issue document will be
distributed as follows:

• Original, priced and extended, to the FSO to be kept under lock and key until used
for preparation of the monthly billing document. (Galley-baked products should be
listed separately on the monthly billing document to facilitate deduction from the
quarterly recap of issues to the GM part of the retained returns.)

• Duplicate to the mess treasurer of the private mess.

• Triplicate to the GM records keeper to be subtracted from the daily value of
issues to the NAVSUP Form 1282 for the GM.

The value of galley-produced bakery products sold will be deducted from the total
value of issues to the GM before posting to the General Mess Control Record, NAVSUP
Form 338. At the end of the accounting period the total value of galley-baked products
sold to each private mess will be subtracted from the stores consumed.

Posting

The quantity of each item must be posted to the other column of either the NAVSUP
Form 335 by the subsistence bulk storeroom storekeeper or the jack-of-the-dust. Then
this information is forwarded to the GM records keeper for completion of the posting and
accounting processes.

SURVEYS

The Navy term survey means the disposition of material after a loss situation has been
investigated.

Purpose

The purpose is to expend materials from the records that are damaged, obsolete,
deteriorated, lost, or stolen. The purpose also includes a review of the existing condition
of the materials, the cause and responsibility for this condition, and the recommendation
for the final disposition of the materials.

Document

The document used depends on the reason for the survey. Refer to the NAVSUP P-
486 for guidance on document usage and preparation.
Loss Without Survey

Food items accounted for in appropriations, Military Personnel, Navy, may be

expended with the Loss without Survey, NAVSUP Form 1334, when culpable
responsibility is not involved and in either of the following instances:

65
 • Material is short or lost in shipment, and the value of the loss is less than $50 per
line item.
• Food items lost as a result of physical deterioration; veterinary sampling; damage
in handling, fire, water, or similar circumstances; and the value of the loss is $500 or
less per line item.

A NAVSUP Form 1334 is used to expend food items under these conditions.
Repetitive entries of the same item for the purpose of circumventing maximum dollar
limitations will not be allowed.

When the total loss of several items expended for the same reason—replenishment
evolution, periodic shelf-life review, flood, fire, and so forth—exceeds $1,000, a DD
Form 200 will be completed as required.
MAINTENANCE OF RECEIPT AND EXPENDITURE RECORDS

Although the supply officer or FSO is responsible for requisitioning and procuring
food items, in some instances, you may be required to perform these duties. In either
case, you will need to maintain receipt and expenditure records. The following
paragraphs explain the use of the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336, and the Record
of Receipts and Expenditures, NAVSUP Form 367.
Requisition Log

Maintaining the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336, is optional for all ashore and
afloat activities. The requisition log provides requisition documentation control and
information on outstanding requisition documents and receipts. It also provides a
breakdown of receipts with and without charge. Outstanding requisitions that are brought
forward to the current month’s requisition log should carry the same requisition
document numbers assigned on the previous month’s log.

Instead of maintaining the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336, all receipts without
charge will be annotated with W/O in the left-hand margin on the NAVSUP Form 367.
At the end of each month, the receipts with charge file will be used as the source file for
determining the dollar value of the Receipts With Charge block for the General Mess
Summary Document (NAVSUP Form 1359) This value can also be verified using the
NAVSUP Form 367 by totaling all receipts not annotated W/O. Receipt document filing
requirements are as follows:

• The original will be signed by the bulk storeroom custodian and filed in the
accountability file.
• A copy will be signed by the receipt inspector and filed in the receipts with charge
file or receipts without charge file.
• No other copies need be retained. Only the records keeper is required to maintain
completed requisition or purchase order files for accountability.

66
Record of Receipts and Expenditures

The NAVSUP Form 367 will be used to record receipt transactions and also
expenditure transactions by total money value for the accounting period. This
record will be maintained in the records office and transactions will be posted as
explained next.

RECEIPT TRANSACTIONS.— Receipt transactions recorded will include value of

inventory carried forward, receipts from transfers, and receipts from purchases. All
receipt transactions are posted as they occur.

EXPENDITURE TRANSACTIONS.— Expenditure transactions recorded will

include the following:

Transfers. The money value (extended at last receipt price) of each transfer will be
posted to the NAVSUP Form 367 as occurring.

Special meals. The value of food items used in preparing special meals will be posted
from the Special Meals Report, NAVSUP Form 1340.

Surveys. The money value of each Report of Survey, DD Form 200, will be posted as
it occurs. Losses without survey will be posted when summarized from the Expenditure
Log (Loss Without Survey), NAVSUP Form 1334, and posted to the NAVSUP Form 367
at the end of the accounting period and/or upon the relief of the FSO.

Sales to private messes. The money value of sales to private messes will be posted
monthly to NAVSUP Form 367 from the billing document.

Issues to the GM. The money value (extended at fixed price) of issues to the GM will
be posted at the end of each accounting period from the Food Item Report/Master Food
Code List, NAVSUP Form 1059. This is a summary of issues to the GM for the
accounting period it summarizes.

Inventory. The money value (extended at last receipt price) of the inventory, at the
end of the accounting period, will be posted from the NAVSUP Form 1059.

Price adjustment. The value of the Receipts and Expenditures side of the NAVSUP
Form 367 will be totaled. The difference between the totals will be posted as an
expenditure captioned Price Adjustment, thus bringing the receipts and expenditures into
balance.

A copy of the NAVSUP Form 367 will be included as part of the subsistence returns
to NAVSUP 51 at the end of the accounting period.

67
INVENTORY

Inventory is conducted in the GM on a monthly basis. Special inventories are

conducted as required. The types of inventories and the inventory requirements are
explained next.

Requirements
GM food items must be inventoried by the FSO on the last day of each month and
before being relieved. Special inventory requirements are as follows:

• At the end of each patrol period of fleet ballistic submarines and upon relief of
either the blue or the gold crew.
• Aboard ships without Supply Corps officers, an inventory must be taken before
the relief of the commanding officer if an accountable FSO has not been named.

As an CS, you will often be directed to conduct a spot inventories, which may be quite
unfamiliar to you.

Spot inventory. This type involves frequent (twice weekly) counting of a small
number of fast-moving, high-cost items.

Relief of accountable officer. When the FSO is relieved, a complete inventory is

taken to establish the new FSO’s accountability.
Preparation for Inventory

In preparation for the inventory, all receipts and expenditure documents should be
posted to the NAVSUP Form 335, and NAVSUP Form 367. All GM food items should
be arranged by case lots with labels facing out and in NAVSUP Form 1059 sequence, if
possible.
Physical Inventory

When the FSO is being relieved, both the present and the relieving FSOs should take
the inventory. Personnel assigned responsibility for GM stock should be present and
participate in the inventory of their respective spaces. Separate rough inventories should
be taken of areas assigned to different individuals. Food items should not be moved from
one storage area to another during the inventory. The FSO should make sure no issue,
transfer, or sale of food items is made from GM stocks except in an emergency. When
such expenditures occur, the inventory should be adjusted and initialed by the persons
taking the inventory.

RECORDING INVENTORY DISCREPANCIES.— The rough inventory should be

recorded on the NAVSUP Form 1059 or other appropriate recording document.
Regardless of the form used, the rough inventory must be recorded in ink. Only an
original rough inventory will be prepared. Errors and adjustments should be lined out,
but not obliterated. Corrections must be initialed by the persons responsible for the

68
inventory. Each page of the rough inventory must be signed by the FSO and the persons
responsible for the storage areas.

RECONCILING INVENTORY DISCREPANCIES.— The quantities on the rough

inventory will be compared with the balances on the NAVSUP Form 335. A list should
be made of discrepancies between inventory quantities and on-hand balances. These
discrepancies will rechecked by the persons conducting the inventory. All discrepancies
greater than 5 percent of total expenditures will be investigated and initialed by the FSO.
If the inventory is initially correct, it may be posted at that time. However, if there are
discrepancies, these discrepancies should be resolved before posting. If a discrepancy
cannot be resolved, an inventory adjustment should be made. Required corrections will
be made to the rough inventory and initialed by each person involved with the inventory.

AFTER THE INVENTORY.— After all the corrections have been made, the
inventory should be recapped in duplicate on a NAVSUP Form 1059. The FSO should
compare the smooth recapped inventory with the rough inventory before signing the
smooth inventory. The rough inventory in the accountability file until sheets should be
placed the next inventory has been completed, after which they may be destroyed. The
original and duplicate of the smooth inventory should be priced at the last receipt prices,
extended, and totaled. The original should be retained by the FSO and filed with the
retained returns.

The duplicate copy should be used for posting to the NAVSUP Forms 335, and 367.
Inventory quantities should be posted to the NAVSUP Form 335. The total value of the
inventory should be posted to the Expenditures side of the NAVSUP Form 367. After
posting is completed, the duplicate copy should be used to prepare returns and then
destroyed except for a copy to be retained by the relieving accountable officer.

Optional Inventory Posting Procedure

Upon completion of the inventory, quantities on hand are posted to the NAVSUP Form
335. Quantity differences (either plus or minus) between the inventory and NAVSUP
Form 335 balances are posted to the Issued to General Mess column of the NAVSUP
Form 335 and or the NAVSUP Form 1282, on which each item is priced using fixed
prices, extended, and totaled. The total value of the differences is posted to the General
Mess Control Record, NAVSUP Form 338, to reflect the actual food cost. At the end of
the month, the quantities on hand, as shown on the NAVSUP Forms 335, are posted to
the NAVSUP Form 1059. These forms should be priced at last receipt prices, extended,
totaled, and signed by the FSO.

69
 CHAPTER 3

ACCOUNTING
The objective of any system of records maintained by a messing facility is to provide a
source of data to be used in the preparation of the required financial statements for that
messing facility. When properly maintained, these records will also provide information
that allows a more efficient operation of a messing facility. Improperly kept records tend
to support practices that will lead to inefficiency and cause losses of money and material.
The types of financial records and reports that are

GENERAL MESS ACCOUNTINGSYSTEMS

All general messes use end-use accounting procedures, whereby activities account for
receipts and expenditures of food items under the subsistence appropriation. Under this
authority, the general mess will submit financial returns using the General Mess
Summary Document (NAVSUP Form 1359) monthly. Aboard Trident submarines, the
NAVSUP Form 1359 will be prepared monthly and submitted to NAVSUP 51 at the end
of each patrol period. All monetary values will be rounded to the nearest dollar, except
the rates for computing allowances. Financial returns serve the following purposes:
• Establishes accountability
• Basis for analyzing, separating, and presenting appropriation and cost accounting
charges
• Presents vouchers substantiating entries in the account of Food Service Officers
for review by the Navy Department and the General Accounting Office
• Ensures compliance with government budgetary control measures
• Makes it easier to compile statistics for logistic planning in various offices,
commands, or bureaus
• Provides statistical information necessary for future ration allowances.
SUBMISSION OF RETURNS

A General Mess Summary Document (NAVSUP Form 1359) will be submitted to

NAVSUP 51 by the Food Service Officer as follows:
• Within 5 days following the end of each regular monthly accounting period
• When the return of one period is merged with a previous or following period, but
not later than 5 days following the latter merged period.
For automated activities, no paperwork is forwarded to NAVSUP. The only reports
required are the NAVSUP Form 1359, Inventory Extract File, and Summary of Issues to
the General Mess (NAVSUP Form 1059). These documents are downloaded to diskette
in Automated Data Transfer module, and transmitted to NAVSUP via SALTS to
COMNAVSUPSYSCOM FSM RETURNS(VSS) or emailed to
[email protected] within the same time frames. Two copies of the

70
NAVSUP form will be printed.
Trident submarines will prepare the NAVSUP Form 1359 on a monthly basis. The
report(s) will be submitted Within 5 days following the end of each regular monthly
accounting period. If unable to transmit, reports will be submitted as soon as an open
transmission allows. An alphabetic suffix “B” or “G” will be added to the unit
identification code to indicate blue or gold crew. For example, SSBN 598 will render
subsistence returns under unit identification code 05106(B) or 05106(G), as applicable.
For manual activities the original monthly General Mess Summary Document
(NAVSUP Form 1359), the original Summary of Issues to the General Mess (NAVSUP
Form 1059), and a copy of the full inventory conducted every 90 days will be submitted
to the following address within the prescribed timeframes listed in NAVSUP P 486.
NOTE: Hard copy Certification Letters, Orders, NAVSUP Form 1334s and DD Form
200s are required when applicable.

Relief of the Accountable Food Service Officer

Upon relief of the accountable food service officer, an inventory will be taken by both
the relieved and relieving officers, and stock records will be balanced but not closed out.
The accounts receivable of the relieved officer will be transferred to the relieving officer.
The relieving officer will receipt for the monetary value of the inventory by preparing
two NAVSUP Form 1359s signed by both the relieved and relieving FSOs, and submit
returns at the end of the regular monthly accounting period. Do not forward a copy of
the relieving inventory to NAVSUP 51. If the relieving officer is not satisfied that
accountability is within prescribed limits, the Commanding Officer directs, the officer
being relieved closes the records and submits returns for the period of his/her
accountability, i.e., a fractional period of the regular monthly accounting period. The
relieving officer will then render a return for the remainder of the monthly accounting
period. This is the only situation when a fractional return is required upon the relief of an
accountable Food Service Officer. Notification of new accountable Food Service Officer
and dollar amount of the relieving inventory will be submitted to NAVSUP 51 at the first
available opportunity via electronic means.
Delay and Delinquency

When returns cannot be submitted on or before the date they are required to be
submitted, a letter/message from the commanding officer explaining the reason for the
delay and the anticipated mailing date is to be forwarded to NAVSUP before the normal
submission date. A copy of the letter is forwarded to the administrative/area/type
commander via the military chain of command.

Merged Returns

To reduce the administrative work involved with preparing returns, general mess
returns for 10 days or less of one monthly accounting period may be merged with the
previous or following monthly accounting period except at the end of the fiscal year. For
example, a ship or activity being disestablished on 08 January may merge that period
with the return rendered for 1 December through 31 December. Merged returns will be
approved in writing by the Commanding Officer. NAVSUP 51 will be notified as soon

71
as possible. The letter of notification will include the reason(s) for the merged returns.
No general mess returns will be merged between two fiscal years unless specifically
authorized by NAVSUP 51.
Temporary Closure

When it is anticipated that a Navy General Mess will be temporarily closed or in an

inactive status (for more than 30 days) for overhaul, remodeling, or renovation, a SALTS
must be forwarded to NAVSUP 51 via the TYCOM, that advises the closure date, reason
for closure, and expected reopening date at least 30 days prior to closure. If the
reopening date is delayed, advise NAVSUP 51, via the TYCOM, of the revised reopening
date. This action ensures that activities receive the appropriate Special Food Allowance
as listed in the NAVSUPNOTE 7330. The mess will continue to submit monthly returns
in the usual manner, entering yes (Y) in the appropriate block provided on NAVSUP
Form 1359 for temporary closure and reporting any receipts, expenditures or surveys,
during the shutdown period. Activities that will be closed for more than one year will not
be required to submit reports, once submission of returns shows 0 inventory, 0
undeposited sales and they have been verified audit error free by the NAVSUP 51
auditor.
Final Returns

When it is anticipated that a Navy General Mess will be permanently closed due to
deactivation or decommissioning, a SALTS (COMNAVSUPSYSCOM FSM RETURNS
(VSS)) or email ([email protected]) must be sent to NAVSUP 51, via the
TYCOM, to ensure that the next submission of the NAVSUP Form 1359 is recorded as
the final return. The “Inventory Balance on Hand” entry on the NAVSUP Form 1359
will have a zero balance after all transfers have been completed. Transferred stock
balances will be included in entries opposite the captions “Transfers with
Reimbursement” or “Transfers without Reimbursement,” as appropriate. Enter YES in
the appropriate block of the NAVSUP Form 1359.
RETENTION OF RECORDS AND DOCUMENTS

In order to resolve billing discrepancies with the Subsistence Prime Vendor and to
support audits and inspections it is essential for the Food Service Officer to retain twelve
monthly accounting periods plus the current month’s worth of files, accounting records
and substantiating documents for the purpose of future audits and inspections.
Disposition of retained records, after twelve months, will be in accordance with Type
Commander and Major Claimant instructions. The following original records and
documents are retained:
• Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP Form 335
• Record of Receipts and Expenditures, NAVSUP Form 367
• Food-Item Request/Issue Document, NAVSUP Form 1282 (when used as issue
documents supporting sales to private messes and GMs)
• Food-Item Request/Issue Document, NAVSUP Form 1282 (when used as
inventory quantity adjustment sheets)
• Monthly Recapitulation of Meal Record, NAVSUP Form 1292

72
 • Food-Preparation Worksheet, NAVSUP Form 1090
• Cash Meal Payment Book, DD Form 1544
• General Mess Summary Document, NAVSUP Form 1359.
• General Mess Control Record NAVSUP Form338
• Smooth Inventory Sheets
• Order for Supplies or Service/Request DD Form 1155
• Sale of General Mess Meals NAVSUP Form 1046
• Requisiton and Invoice/Shipping document DD Form 1149
• Meal Signature Record NAVSUP Form 1291
• Recapitulation of Meal Record NAVSUP 1292
RECORDS AND REPORTS IN A PRIVATE MESS AFLOAT

The extent to which the records are maintained in private messes afloat and their
complexity are determined largely by the commanding officer and the mess treasurer.
Small messes generally have fewer records than larger messes, simply because they have
fewer transactions to record. However, records must be maintained in all afloat private
messes, even the very smallest, so that the mess treasurer can easily and quickly
determine the financial condition of the mess. The records, reports, and procedures
explained are most common to most private messes afloat. Additional records may be
required by the private mess treasurer or the commanding officer. Private messes afloat
include the following types: flag officers’ messes, unit commanders’ messes,
commanding officers’ messes, wardroom messes, warrant officers’ messes, and chief
petty officers’ messes.
FINANCIAL RECORDS

Keep in mind that all financial transactions affecting a mess must be supported by the
proper documents. The omission of a single transaction will make it impossible for the
mess treasurer to balance the accounts or to prepare the reports properly.

Financial transactions are supported by documents or vouchers that support receipts

and expenditures for which the mess treasurer is responsible. As a Culinary Specialist
(CS) assigned to a private mess, you will be directly or indirectly involved in the
financial transaction of the mess; therefore, you must be familiar with the various
vouchers and documents that support receipts and expenditures of private messes afloat.
All mess records must be retained for a period of 2 years.
PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS

Most items consumed by private messes afloat are procured from the supply
department. Therefore, the greatest number of procurement documents are
requisitions to the supply department for food items from the GM.

Messes afloat may also purchase items from approved commercial sources. The
methods by which items are purchased may vary, depending on the particular mess. But,
whatever the method, the transactions must be supported by the proper documents.

73
 All documents authorizing purchases paid for with mess funds must be signed by the
treasurer or someone authorized in writing by the mess treasurer to incur indebtedness in
the name of the mess.

Purchases From the General Mess

All food items purchased directly from the GM are supported by a NAVSUP Form
1282. The GM representative and the CS assigned as the issuing storeroom storekeeper
should sign for the receipt and issue of the provisions respectively.
Purchases From Commercial Sources

Purchases from approved commercial sources are supported by purchase orders,

dealers’ invoices, or cash register receipts. Purchase orders should be issued for all
purchases from approved commercial sources, including cash purchases authorized by
the mess treasurer. A Purchase Order, NAVCOMPT Form 2213, or a locally prepared
form may be used. The form must be prenumbered by the mess treasurer or an
authorized representative. The original is sent to the dealer, and the copies are distributed
and filed as directed by the mess treasurer. The dealer’s invoice that accompanies
deliveries must be checked against and attached to the applicable purchase order.

Cash purchases are supported by cash register receipts or an itemized receipt bill. If a
cashbook or market book is maintained by the leading CS, all entries must be supported
by receipts or receipted bills.

BILLING FROM THE GENERAL MESS

On or before the 5th day of the month the FSO prepares a bill for the amount due for
food items (including galley-produced bakery products) issued to a private mess during
the previous month. The FSO uses the following format: “I certify that the food items in
the amount of $400 (or actual amount for your mess) were sold to the wardroom mess
during the month of April 1991.”

When galley-produced bakery products are received during the month the bill includes
this statement: “The $400 total includes galley-produced bakery products in the amount
of $25.60.” Applicable issue document numbers are listed on the bill. Within 15 days
following the month in which items were purchased, the mess treasurer must pay the
amount due to the FSO and obtain a signature for receipt of the cash in a Cash Receipt
Book, NAVSUP Form 470.
COMMUTED RATIONS/BASIC ALLOWANCE FOR SUBSISTENCE

The term commuted rations/basic allowance for subsistence (BAS) is defined as a

cash allowance payable to enlisted personnel who are permitted to mess separately in lieu
of rations-in-kind when messing facilities are available. Each month the mess treasurer
submits a list of enlisted personnel subsisted in the mess on a locally prepared form in
triplicate to the disbursing officer. The form will show the social security number, name,
and period subsisted if different than that stated for the period reported for each member
whose rations are being commuted.

74
 On the basis of the information furnished on the locally prepared form, the disbursing
officer prepares a Public Voucher, Standard Form 1034, that supports payment of enlisted
personnel commuted rations to the mess. Rations commuted to the private mess are used
only for subsisting the enlisted personnel. Commuted rations are not to be used in any
manner whatsoever to support members’ mess bills, increase the value of mess shares,
or any other mess operation except the direct cost of feeding the enlisted personnel whose
rations are commuted to the mess.
CASH RECEIPTS

Prenumbered receipts, issued in numerical sequence, must be given for each payment
of any kind being received by a mess account. When prenumbered receipts are not
currently available in the supply system they are to be procured locally. Plain receipts
maybe prenumbered using a numbering machine; however, if this method is used, the
numbering machine and all unnumbered receipts must be in the custody of a person not
receiving cash into the mess account. Duplicate copies are to be retained by the mess
treasurer for 2 years, and each numbered receipt must be accounted for. A receipt should
be obtained from each member at the time a mess rebate is paid to the individual.

Normally, a safe is provided for the mess treasurer. when provided, it should be
located in a place where adequate security can be maintained. If a safe is not available,
the funds must be placed with the disbursing officer for safekeeping. When practical,
messes should establish bank accounts. Normally, the maximum amount of cash funds
that the mess treasurer is authorized to have on hand is established by the commanding
officer. A separate bank account should be established for each mess aboard ship. Joint
accounts are prohibited.

When petty cash funds are provided to an CS or a mess member to make purchases for
the mess, a memorandum cash receipt must be issued and maintained by the mess
treasurer as cash on hand. This receipt is held until it is replaced by a cash register tape
receipt or similar type of document that substantiates the expenditure and any cash
change totaling the entire amount of the funds issued.
Checks and Bank Statements

Canceled checks support payments for purchases and other expenditures of the mess.
They must be retained and filed so as to be readily available to auditing and inspecting
officers. Bank balances support entries of cash assets in mess accounts.
Control of Safe Combinations

Every person responsible for mess funds must be provided with a safe or a separate
locked compartment in a large safe. The rules in the Navy Comptroller Manual, volume
4, are applicable. One important rule is that the responsible individual is not to reveal the
combination of the safe to any person. Placing the combination in a sealed envelope to
be kept in the custody of the commanding officer or any other officer is prohibited. Safe
combinations must be changed every 6 months and whenever a new custodian takes over.

75
Control of Keys

To pinpoint responsibility, it is essential that only one person has an active key to any
storerooms or other secured spaces. If considered necessary, a duplicate key may be
placed in a sealed envelope in the mess treasurer’s safe or inside a glass-fronted, locked
cupboard. In the absence of the custodian for a particular store or storage space,
emergency entrance may be accomplished by the mess treasurer who should open the
storeroom or space in the presence of two witnesses. After entry, the space is to be
sealed, in the presence of the two witnesses, until the custodian returns.
INVENTORIES

All provisions on hand that have been procured from mess funds are inventoried on
the last day of each month. The inventory is taken by the mess treasurer and at least one
member of the audit board. The leading mess petty officer assists in the inventory. The
inventory is prepared in duplicate, using either a locally prepared form or a NAVSUP
Form 1059. All provisions procured from the supply department or from approved
commercial vendors must be priced for inventory purposes at the latest price paid for
each item.

As soon as the listing of items and prices on the inventory sheets are completed, the
mess treasurer completes the extensions and totals the original sheets. The senior
member of the audit board arranges to have the duplicate copy extended and totaled. If
these totals are not in agreement, differences must be reconciled. It is best to complete
this work the same day as the inventory, so that stores may be reinventoried if necessary.
The original inventory is retained in the mess records. The duplicate copy is retained by
the senior member of the audit board. This duplicate copy is used to make sure no
alterations are made to the original inventory.

ACCOUNTING PROCEDURES

The mess treasurer is required by Navy Regulations to keep an accurate account of all
receipts (collections) and expenditures of the mess from which the financial condition of
the mess can be determined at any time. The treasurer must submit a statement of the
accounts of the mess to the commanding officer at the end of the month. The statement
must show in detail the money owed by or to the mess, mess receipts and expenditures,
and any contracts entered into for future deliveries of supplies.

The Nonappropriated Fund Accounting Procedures, NAVSO P-3520, prescribes

general financial management policies and principles governing nonappropriated fund
activities and the applicable portions governing the financial management of private
messes afloat. Additional local controls may be established if desired.

ACCOUNTING RECORDS

It is necessary to keep accounting records to be able to account for every transaction

that has occurred. These records are also used in the preparation of the monthly financial

76
operating statement for messes afloat at the end of the quarter. All mess records are
retained for a period of 2 years.

Records of Collections and Expenditures

These records reflect all collections (or receipts) and expenditures of cash and checks.
They are not used to record funds due or owed or the dollar value of materials received or
expended.

Records of Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable

These records reflect the monies owed to the mess and the unpaid debts of the mess.
These are closed monthly. All unsettled accounts are carried forward to the following
month.

Records of Mess Members

A record must be maintained of members of the mess by member’s name, date of

membership, and the amount paid for the membership. Upon redemption of the
membership the record should show the date the membership was redeemed and the
amount for which it was redeemed. A locally prepared form may be used for this
purpose.

Petty Cash Vouchers

When needed, the commanding officer can authorize in writing the establishment of a
petty cash fund. The authorization specifies the amount of cash authorized for the petty
cash fund. Payments setting up petty cash funds and the replenishment of such funds are
made by check or cash transfer voucher if the mess does not have a checking account.
The replenishment of petty cash funds must be substantiated by a signed Petty Cash
Voucher, NAVCOMPT Form 743, and by the dealer’s sales slip or receipt.
Food Cost Control Record

Often messes afloat operate without the benefit of a central storeroom where
provisions are received and stored before issue to the private mess or wardroom galley.
Since messes afloat have limited storage facilities, most food used is requisitioned from
the GM on a regular basis. Food procurement records are limited generally to those
covering receipts of subsistence items from the GM. This simplifies food cost accounting
and consequently, food cost control. The use of the food cost control record is optional
for messes with less than 20 members.
Meals Served Record Sheet

This record reflects a summary of all meals that were consumed in the mess, broken
down by category (officers, enlisted, or guests), and further broken down by breakfast,
lunch, and dinner. The document used to support these figures is the Sale of General
Mess Meals, NAVSUP Form 1046, that is used to record meal consumption. This record
will be used in the preparation of the Computation of Commuted Rations form.

77
Monthly Voucher Folders

All private mess itemized and certified receipts and tapes of provisions purchased
locally, copies of vouchers covering transactions with the disbursing officer, and any
other vouchers substantiating entries on the mess statement will be filed in monthly
voucher folders. These folders are submitted to the audit board and eventually retained
by the mess treasurer.

PREPARATION OF MONTHLY FINANCIAL OPERATING STATEMENT

The mess treasurer is responsible for the preparation of the monthly financial
operating statement consisting of a cash account that shows cash received (income) and
cash spent (expenses), and a balance sheet that shows the financial condition of the mess
and provides useful statistical data for the operation of the mess, using the Monthly
Financial Operating Statement for Messes Afloat, NAVSUP Form 1367. An original and
one copy are prepared as of the last day of the month that the mess was in operation. The
original must be signed by the mess treasurer, the audit board, and the commanding
officer. Then the original should be returned to the mess treasurer for his or her records.
Finally, the copy is then posted for the information of all members of the mess.
CREDIT SALES

If the sale of meals from a GM has been authorized and is considered practical, the
commanding officer may authorize the sale of meals on a credit basis to officers, enlisted,
and the other categories subsisted on a daily basis.

When meals are sold on a credit basis, the Sale of General Mess Meals, NAVSUP
Form 1046, is used completed by the FSO or at the option of the commanding officer.
An CS is assigned the duty of maintaining these NAVSUP Forms 1046. The CS places a
check mark or maintains a running total in the appropriate block opposite each name to
indicate consumption of meals. The form is posted in a noticeable location where it can
be inspected visually by private mess members. At the end of each month, each member
signs in the Name block to acknowledge approval of the meal tally.

Payment for all meals sold on a credit basis is required no later than 15 days following
the end of the month in which the meals were sold. Individuals concerned are to make
payment before detachment. The FSO furnishes a receipt for the cash paid. The Cash
Receipt Certificate, NAVCOMPT Form 2114, may be used by marking out the line “for
which I hold myself accountable to the Treasurer of the United States of America.”
Collections for unpaid bills due to death, transfer, and refusal to pay are made according
to the Navy Comptroller Manual.

COMPUTATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING THE COST OF SUBSISTENCE IN MESSES AFLOAT

At the end of the month, a comparison of the total value of ration allowances that are
commuted to the mess with the value of the provisions consumed by the enlisted
personnel is required. This is necessary to determine the commuted ration amount

78
payable to the mess. The value of the provisions consumed by the enlisted personnel is
computed by determining the percentage of all meals served in the mess that were eaten
by the enlisted personnel and multiplying the total value of the provisions consumed by
this percentage. When the value of the total commuted ration allowance exceeds the
value of the total provisions consumed by the enlisted personnel, the monetary difference
is to be credited to the Operation and Maintenance, Navy (O&M,N) fund code.

DETERMINATION OF MEALS SERVED

Messes must establish a method whereby the total number of meals served is
categorically recorded daily. This includes meals served to mess members, guests of the
mess, and the number of meals eaten by enlisted personnel. To get the total percentage of
meals consumed by each category, divide the number of meals consumed by the enlisted
personnel by the total number of meals served; for example:

Mess member and guest meals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784

Enlisted personnel meals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403

Total meals served . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1,187

Dividing 403 by 1,187 = 33.9%, which is the percentage of meals eaten by enlisted
personnel.
DETERMINATION OF VALUE OF PROVISIONS CONSUMED

Determine the total value of provisions consumed by subtracting the money value of the
closing inventory from the sum of the opening inventory and the total receipts during the
month; for example:

Opening inventory value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$50.00

Plus value of receipts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +410.00

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460.00

Minus value of closing inventor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-40.00

Value of provisions consumed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420.00

COMPARISON

Multiply the value of provisions consumed by the enlisted personnel meal percentage
and compare the product with the value of the total commuted rations. The amount
payable to the mess is the lesser of the two amounts; for example:

Provisions consumed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$420.00

79
 Enlisted personnel meal percentage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x33.9%

1. Cost of provisions for enlisted personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . ....$142.38

2. Enlisted total commuted rations value . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . $214.42

Thus, the lesser amount of 1 and 2 is ($142.38 in this case) paid to the mess
treasurer by the disbursing officer.
COMPUTATION OF A PARTIAL MESS BILL FOR A NEW MEMBER BEING PERMANENTLY ASSIGNED

Members are charged for the day they report aboard unless reporting after 1800.
Multiply the actual number of inclusive days for which a mess bill is payable (all days of
the month that the member is aboard including the 31st day, when applicable) by the
month’s mess bill, then divide by the actual number of days in the month and round off to
the nearest cent; for example:

Member reports for duty at 0900 12 August.

Mess bill for August is $45.00.

Inclusive dates chargeable: 12-31 August (20 days).

20 x $45.00 = $900.00.

$900.00
31 = $29.03 (charge due plus September’s mess share).
MESS BILL REBATE FOR MEMBER BEING PERMANETLY DETACHED

Members are not charged for the day unless they depart after 1800; for example:

Member being detached at 1200 22 April.

Mess bill for April is $42.00, which the member paid on 3/30.

Inclusive dates not chargeable: 22-30 April (9 days).

9 x $42.00 = $378.00.

$378.00

$378.00
30 = $12.60 (rebate due)

80
 To summarize rebate rules from previous paragraphs, there is no charge for the day of
departure if the member leaves before 1800 and no charge for the day a member arrives if
he or she arrives after 1800. Otherwise either day is charged.

MESS BILL REBATE FOR MEMBER ON TAD

Compute the actual mess bill rebate by determining the inclusive number of days the
member is not eating in the mess; for example:

Member goes on TAD at 0800 on 5 February to 1630 on 9 February.

Mess bill for February is $47.00, which member paid on 1/30.

Inclusive dates not chargeable: 5 through 8 February (4 days).

4 x $47.00 = $188.00.

$188.00
28 = $6.714 = $6.71 (rebate due).

No mess share rebate is given for 9 February since the member has returned to the
mess before the time of the evening meal (1800).

MESS BILL REBATE FOR MEMBER ON LEAVE

The day of departure on leave is counted as a day of duty. However, for mess
purposes this day is the first day of absence if the member does not eat any meals in the
mess on that day. If a member returns before 1800, the day before the day of return is the
last day of the absence. When a member goes on leave, he or she is entitled to a mess bill
rebate for the entire period of absence; for example:

Member is on leave from 0001 on 20 June to 0730 on 5 July.

Mess bill for June is $51.00, which member paid on 5/30.

Mess bill for July is $48.00.

Period of absence: 6/20 to 7/4 (inclusive days).

Rebate for June.

Inclusive dates not chargeable: 6/20 to 6/30 (11 days).

11 x $51.00 = $561.00.

$561.00
30 = $18.70

81
Rebate for July.

Inclusive dates not chargeable: 7/1 to 7/4 (4 days).

4 x $48.00 = $192.00.

$192.00
31 = $6.19

$18.70 + $6.19 = $24.89 (total rebate due).

Mess bill for July: $48.00

Rebate due: -$24.89

Net mess bill owed for month of July: $23.11

82
 QUESTIONS:
“Receipt, Inspection, Expenditure, and Storage of Food Items” and
“Accounting” Assignment 2
2-1. When food items are received from commercial sources, what person must sign
a statement on the invoice that reads “I accept responsibility for these items and
hold myself accountable to the United States Government?”

1. Commanding officer of the receiving activity

2. Food service officer of the receiving activity
3. Mess treasurer, having made payment of received food items
4. Bulk storeroom storekeeper having custody of food items delivered

2-2. Under normal conditions, subsistence items received from commercial vendors
are inspected at which of the following points?

1. Origin only
2. Destination only
3. Origin and destination only
4. Origin, DPSC supply point, and destination

2-3. In what manner should food items be classified that do not meet expected or
desired standards, but do not constitute a health hazard to personnel if consumed?

1. Satisfactory nonhazardous food items

2. Satisfactory hazardous food items
3. Unsatisfactory hazardous food items
4. Unsatisfactory nonhazardous food items

2–4. An example of a nonhazardous food item received under unsatisfactory

conditions is described by which of the following cases?

1. Chicken wings in a box labeled breasts

2. Ice cream received on a hot day
3. Fresh fish packed in ice
4. A case of jarred pickles with loose lids and seepage

2-5. What publication describes the procedures regarding the reporting and
handling of nonhazardous and hazardous food items?

1. NAVSUP P-476
2. NAVSUP P-486
3. NAVSUP P–487
4. NAVSUP P-580

83
2-6. When a nonsubstantial shortage in shipment of food items occurs, which of the
following actions should be performed?

1. Refuse receipt of food items being delivered

2. Document the actual quantity physically received
3. Survey the quantity that the shortage represents
4. Absorb the shortage as part of the stores consumed

2–7. When an overage in shipment occurs from a commercial vendor, you should
take which of the following actions?

1. Record the actual quantity received on all applicable documents

2. Record only the requested quantity but accept all items
3. Prepare a dummy invoice to reflect the actual amount received
4. Return any excess quantities to the vendor

2-8. When you are posting receipts, which of the following pieces of information
must be transcribed to the GM records?

1. Date and value of receipt

2. Source and quantity of receipt
3. Source and date of receipt
4. Value and quantity of receipt

2-9. The total dollar money value of each receipt document is posted to what GM
record?

1. NAVSUP Form 209

2. NAVSUP Form 335
3. NAVSUP Form 367
4. NAVSUP Form 1046

2-10. What dollar value does the first entry on the NAVSUP Form 367 represent?

1. Outstanding requisitions
2. Total of previous quarters’ receipts
3. Total of initial receipts for the period
4. Inventory carried forward

2-11. Which of the following prices should you use to survey, transfer, or sell food
items to private messes?

1. The price established by NAVSUP quarterly

2. The item price at the time of receipt
3. The item price plus the applicable surcharge
4. The price representing the current market value

84
2-12. What form is used to purchase food items from commercial sources?

1. DD Form 1348m
2. DD Form 1348-1-A
3. DD Form 1155
4. DD Form 1149

2-13. When orders are placed for delivery of an item over an extended period, the
amount of the delivery is noted on the DD Form 1155 at what time?

1. When the orders are placed

2. When each order is received
3. At the end of the week
4. At the end of the month

2-14. What storage principle is used when you place items that are issued most
frequently nearest to the breakout area?

1. Orderliness
2. Accessibility
3. Cleanliness
4. Safety

2-15. You should base the length of storage for your semi perishable food items
upon what factor?

1. The moisture content of the product

2. The percent of humidity in the storage space
3. The actual date of receipt of the product
4. The packing date of the product

2-16 What immediate action should you take with food items that have been
stored beyond the safe storage limit?

1. Conduct an investigation to determine the cause

2. Inspect for spoilage, leakage, or other damage
3. Promptly issue for use
4. Survey and expend from the records

2–17. When storing fresh fruits and vegetables, you should allow what minimum
clearance between the tops of stacks and the openings of air ducts to permit air
circulation?

1. 6 inches
2. 8 inches

85
3. 12 inches
4. 24 inches

2-18. When you store cases of frozen meats in refrigerated spaces, you should stack
them on pallets at least how many inches from the bulkhead or refrigerator coils?

1. 10
2. 8
3. 6
4. 4

2-19. Upon receipt of frozen fruit and vegetables, you should take the temperatures
of select cartons. What should you do if the temperatures taken are higher than that
of the frozen storage space?

1. Refuse receipt of the frozen product

2. Immediately issue to the galley for use
3. Scatter the shipping cases loosely about the deck of the freezer
4. Store items to the back of the freezer near fans

2-20. Which of the following statements is NOT correct regarding breaking out
frozen food items from refrigerated spaces?

1. Breakouts should be planned for a full day’s requirements

2. All items should be stored temporarily in the chill box if not intended for immediate
use
3. All messes must draw their frozen subsistence items at different times
4. All messes must draw their frozen subsistence items at a predetermined time

2-21. Who should you notify first if a refrigerated unit malfunctions?

1. Duty engineer
2. Duty supply petty officer
3. Galley watch captain
4. Supply officer

2-22. Which of the following persons is required to maintain a refrigerator log?

1. An engineering department representative

2. Each person responsible for maintaining a refrigerated space
3. The leading CS
4. Each of the above

86
2-23. What type of inventory involves frequent counting of a small number of fast-
moving, high–cost items?

1. Optional
2. Accountability
3. Physical
4. Spot

2-24. What persons or organization determines the extent and complexity to which
the financial records are maintained in private messes afloat?

1. Supply officer and leading CS

2. Commanding officer and mess treasurer
3. The Defense Finance Accounting Service
4. The Navy Food Service Systems Office

2–25. Private mess financial records should be retained for what specific time
period?

1. 1 year
2. 2 years
3. 3 years
4. Until after the next audit

2-26. All documents that authorize purchases to be paid with mess funds must be
signed by what person?

1. Mess president
2. Supply officer
3. Disbursing officer
4. Mess treasurer

2-27. When payment is made for items purchased from the GM, the mess
treasurer should obtain a signature from the food service officer on what form?

1. NAVSUP Form 338

2. NAVSUP Form 340
3. NAVSUP Form 470
4. NAVSUP Form 1046

2-28. What person or organization establishes the maximum amount of cash funds a
mess treasurer is authorized to have on hand?

1. Disbursing officer
2. Commanding officer
3. The Defense Finance Accounting Service

87
4. NAVSUP 51

2-29. The rules concerning the control of safe combinations should be found in what
reference?

1. SECNAVINST 5212.5
2. NAVSUP P-486
3. NAVSUP P-421
4. NAVCOMPT Manual, volume 4

2-30. At which of the following times must the combination be changed to the safe
that is provided to the person responsible for mess funds?

1. Upon the relief of the supply officer or quarterly

2. Upon the relief of the mess president or every 6 months
3. Every 6 months or whenever a new custodian takes over
4. Every quarter or whenever a new custodian takes over

2-31. The first entry on the record of collections represents the dollar value of what
item?

1. Inventory brought forward from the preceding month

2. Cash balance carried forward from the preceding month
3. Commuted rations received for the current month
4. Net worth of the mess

2-32. What publication prescribes general financial management policies and

principles governing the management of private messes afloat?

1. NAVSO P-3520
2. NAVSUP P-486
3. Navy Regulations
4. Navy Comptroller Manual, volume 4

2-33. Which of the following transactions is NOT recorded on the accounts payable
record sheet?

1. Rebates due to mess members

2. Charges for provisions from the GM
3. Rations commuted to the mess
4. Costs of commercially procured provisions owed

88
2-34. Who is responsible for maintaining the NAVSUP Form 1046 for meals sold
from a GM to a private mess?

1. A designated GM CS
2. The messdeck master–at-arms
3. The records keeper
4. The mess treasurer

TO answer questions 2-35 through 2-37, consider the following information. For a
given month, the total number of meals consumed in a private mess totaled 1,437.
Mess members and their guests consumed 874 meals. Enlisted personnel consumed
563 meals. The total value of provisions consumed in this mess was $1,863.77. The
value of commuted rations totaled $936.00.

2–35. What is the value of the meals consumed by the enlisted personnel?

1. $594.54
2. $631.81
3. $711.96
4. $730.60

2-36. What dollar value of rations commuted must be credited to the Operation and
Maintenance, Navy (O&M,N) fund code?

1. $205.40
2. $224.04
3. $304.19
4. $341.46

2-37. What percentage of the meals were consumed by enlisted personnel?

1. 31.9%
2. 33.9%
3. 38.2%
4. 39.2%

89
 CHAPTER 4

FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
The foodservice equipment located in the galley and dining areas at naval shore
stations and aboard Navy ships is designed specifically for serving large quantities of
food. To make sure of the safe, sanitary, and efficient operation of this equipment, it
must be maintained in proper working order and used correctly.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

Before attempting to operate any foodservice equipment, you should observe the
following general precautions:

• Check for and determine the location of emergency materials such as fire
extinguishers, emergency switches, first aid boxes, and telephone emergency numbers
to make sure they are available should an accident occur. Report any deficiencies or
malfunctioning materials to the supervisor.
• Make sure the area around the equipment is clear of obstructions and thoroughly
dry. All spills must be cleaned up immediately to ensure a clean, dry, nonslippery
working surface.
• Make sure the working area has ample lighting.
• If there is any doubt about the operating procedures or safety precautions, report
to the supervisor.
• No unauthorized personnel should attempt to operate equipment in any
foodservice space.
• Be certain no loose gear is in the vicinity of moving parts of machines. Before
starting, you should make sure all safety guards, screens, and devices are in place.
• When operating a machine, you should make sure you maintain a safe distance
from all moving parts. Never use your hands or body to stop moving blades and
parts even though power has been turned off.
• Never lean against a machine while it is operating.
• If ship movement is severe, exercise caution; if severe movement continues,
nonessential machine operation should be discontinued and equipment turned off.
• Use safety equipment such as rubber protective gloves, safety goggles, and dip
baskets while handling chemicals or hot water. Consult the material safety data
sheets (MSDSs) for additional precautions before using cleaners and detergents.
• Keep your hands, body, and clothing away from moving machine parts.
• Never leave moving machinery unattended.
• Do not distract the attention of personnel who are operating the machines.
• Do not attempt to clean or service a machine while it is in operation. Before
cleaning, adjusting, oiling, greasing, and so forth, you should be sure the power is
turned off and the equipment is de-energized and properly tagged out of service.
• All repairs, tag-outs, and servicing should be made only by authorized personnel.

90
 • Make sure safety devices such as safety interlocks on covers of vegetable peelers
and bread slicer safety cutoffs are maintained in proper working condition at all
times. If removed for any reason, such devices must be replaced before the machine
is put into operation.
• Remove rings and watches and eliminate any loose clothing such as unbuttoned
sleeve cuffs, oversized gloves, and ill-fitting coats or jackets.
• Make sure all permanently mounted equipments are hardwired.
• Make sure any rubber safety covers over electrical switches are in place and have
no holes or cracks.
TYPES OF EQUIPMENT

Foodservice equipment is used for the cooking and preparation of food and the
cleaning of utensils and dinnerware. This consists of all equipment located in
foodservice spaces like the general mess (GM), bakeshop, meat preparation room, private
mess galleys, dining areas, and sculleries.

Numerous items of foodservice equipment such as vegetable peelers, meat choppers,

dough mixers, and refrigerators are either driven by electric motors or are heated
electrically (such as ranges, broilers, griddles, and fry kettles). Safety precautions must
be observed around all electrical equipment to avoid injury from shock. Major cleaning
requires the equipment to be tagged out according to the tag-out bill.

Negligence in carrying out routine operating instructions and preventive maintenance

introduces an undue health hazard among the people served. Therefore, it is vital that the
correct operating procedures be followed, that a cleaning schedule be carefully adhered
to, and that the machine be given adequate preventive maintenance to make sure of
satisfactory cleaning and sanitizing of eating utensils.

It is necessary to know all the foodservice equipment needed, whether it is for

cooking, serving, cleaning, mixing, cutting, or storing. Understanding
their basic operation and cleaning is a must for every foodservice personnel.
STEAM-JACKETED KETTLES

There are two different types of steam-jacketed kettles in use afloat as well as ashore.
It is important to know which type your command uses. The following are basic
principles to follow for each type of kettle:

• Steam-jacketed kettle (steam supplied): Steam is supplied to foodservice

spaces for the use of the steam-jacketed kettles. The foodservice division is required to
make sure the operating procedures are closely monitored; the steam potential lethal
instrument. To maintained properly, follow maintenance system (PMS) instructions.
• Steam-jacketed kettle (electric): Steam is internally supplied through a sealed
“vacuum” system. It is the responsibility of the galley watch captain to make sure the
level of water does not go below the minimum level on the sight glass. To recharge the
system you must add distilled water obtained from either the ship’s distilling plant or

91
from sources of supply. If tap water is used, it can cause a buildup of mineral deposits
on the heating coils and decrease the effectiveness of the kettles.

Steam-jacketed kettles are used to prepare a variety of food items such as soups,
sauces, vegetables, meat, and beverages. This equipment is very important and should be
handled with great care. The kettles vary in size from 5 to 80 gallons. Approximately
the lower two-thirds of each kettle is surrounded by a jacket that is offset from the main
kettle body to provide space for steam to circulate and heat the contents of the kettle. The
kettles are permanently mounted on a pedestal or three legs and have a hinged lid or
cover. They also have a tube at the bottom of the kettle with a faucet at the outer end for
drawing liquids instead of dipping them out, and a steam inlet connection, a steam outlet
connection, and a safety valve. Some steam-jacketed kettles (or trunnions) have a handle
on the side making it possible to tilt the kettle and pour contents into a service container.
This type of kettle is usually used to prepare gravies and sauces. Kettles now in use are
made of three types of material: corrosion-resisting steel, aluminum, and single-clad
corrosion-resisting steel. Never fill the kettle completely full. When the lid is closed while
cooking, make sure you are extremely careful in opening the lid because hot steam
trapped in the kettle could burst out and cause a serious injury. If it is necessary to stir
the contents, use a metal paddle; never leave the paddle in the kettle while cooking.

Operation

The kettles are constructed to operate on a maximum steam pressure of 45 pounds per
square inch. When the pressure in the galley steam line exceeds 45 psi, a pressure
regulating valve (safety valve) installed in the steam line leading to the kettles is set to
release pressure at 45 psi. Do not tamper with the safety valve or tie it closed. It is there
to prevent the kettle from exploding. When operating a cold kettle, turn the steam on
gradually, allowing the shell to become thoroughly warm before full pressure is applied.
After the shell has become warm, and before applying full pressure, open the safety valve
by pulling the lever. Opening the safety valve when enough pressure is within the shell
removes air from within the jacket and prevents the kettle from becoming air-bound.

Cleaning

Kettles (or coppers) must be cleaned after each use. General cleaning instructions are
as follows:

1. Rinse kettle immediately after cooking. Open draft faucet and flush with water.

2. Soak. Close drain valve. Fill with water above cooking level. If greasy, apply heat.
Use a scrub brush to loosen food particles. Drain soak water.

3. Refill and clean. Add detergent, using 1 ounce to 1 gallon of water. Clean interior,
hinges, under surfaces of lids, and frame with brush. Drain. Flush out.

4. Remove drain-off faucet and fittings and disassemble drain line. Scrub draw off
faucet and fittings with a flexible-handled brush. Pull back and forth through tube under
running hot water. Thoroughly clean in detergent water. Carefully rinse with 180°F

92
water to sanitize. Drain valves and tubing should also be cleaned and sanitized in a
similar way.

5. Scrub exterior and frame. Use hot detergent water and brush.

6. Resterilize interior. Before using kettle, you should carefully rinse with 180°F
water.
NOTE: The previous procedures are recommended for stainless steel kettles. If
metals are aluminum, brightening or whitening is required. Boil with vinegar water for a
short time period or use a product recommended for cleaning aluminum following the
manufacturer’s directions. Do not use caustic cleaners or steel pads. If kettles are
stainless steel, clean as directed earlier.

SAFETY NOTE: Make sure the safety valve is in proper working order before using
a kettle
ELECTRIC GRIDDLE

The griddle consists of cooking surfaces of various sizes up to 34 inches deep by 72

inches wide. Each has a readily removable grease receptacle in the front of the griddle
and a splash guard at least 3 inches high at the rear of the griddle which is tapered at the
sides. All thermostat dial knobs are conveniently located on the front panel. Each
thermostat dial knob has a signal light that indicates the griddle is turned on until the
griddle has reached the dialed temperature.

Operation

To operate an electric griddle, proceed as follows:

1. Carefully read the operating instructions posted near the griddle.

2. Preheat the griddle by turning the thermostat dial knob to the recommended
preheating temperature according to the manufacturer’s technical manual.

3. Set the thermostat dial knobs at the desired temperature listed on the recipe card of
the food to be grilled. A red light will turn on automatically when the griddle dial is
initially set and will turn off when the griddle has reached the dialed temperature. The
signal will flash on and off during the cooking process to show the correct temperature is
being maintained. You are now ready to load the griddle.

4. Turn the griddle off or to the lowest temperature setting during idle periods.
Care and Cleaning

Keep the cooking surface scraped and wiped clean at all times. The grease gutters
should always be kept clean to help in draining off excess grease and thereby reduce
smoke. The grease receptacle should be emptied frequently and thoroughly cleaned at
the end of the workday. Before starting the griddle cleaning procedure, always make sure

93
the electrical power is turned off at the main power panel and the correct tag-out
procedures have been followed. The cooking surface of most griddles can be
satisfactorily cleaned with a pumice stone. NEVER POUR WATER ON HOT PLATE.
However, before cleaning, you should read the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning
instructions for that particular griddle surface. After each thorough cleaning, the griddle
should be seasoned. Seasoning is done by preheating the griddle to 400°F. When the
signal light goes off, spread a light film of cooking oil or fat over the entire surface of the
griddle. In 2 minutes, wipe the surface clean of excess oil. Repeat this operation. The
griddle is now ready for use.
TILTING SKILLET

Tilting skillets are large frying pans with deep sides and an attached lid. They are
used to grill, fry, simmer, and braise large quantities of food. They can be mounted on a
wall or on a stand and can be tilted at least 90 degrees from the normal horizontal
position for emptying cooked foods and cleaning. Skillets are either gas or electric, have
an electric thermostat, and have a temperature range of 100°F to 450°F. There is also a
secondary thermostat that is a high-limit cutoff that disables the power circuit when the
temperature exceeds 460°F. Gas skillets are also furnished with a pressure regulator,
connector, quick-disconnect, and a 100-percent shutoff device for the pilot (automatic
ignition of gas). Most skillets will also have a faucet directly attached to the skillet to
aid in cooking and cleaning.
Operation

The skillet is heated from the bottom by either resistant heating elements or a series of
gas burners. Usually, the tilting mechanism can be locked in any position. On some
models, the tilting feature may have a safety switch to be engaged if the skillet is HOT or
ON. If the skillet is provided with a faucet, it may be connected directly to a water
supply.

NOTES: (1) Keep the tilting mechanism thoroughly lubricated for ease of
operation.
(2) Always turn off the heating element before tilting.
Care in Cleaning

The tilting skillet should be cleaned after each use. Before cleaning you must turn off
the heating element and scrape off the hardened food from the inside of the skillet with a
spatula or scraper and flush down the sediment with a small amount of water. If the
skillet has become very dirty, fill it to the level with hot water containing a mild hand
dishwashing detergent. Turn on the heating element and allow the water to come to a
boil. Boil the water for at least 5 to 10 minutes. Turn off the heating element, drain,
rinse with warm vinegar water, then rinse thoroughly with clear water, and dry the skillet
well. Clean the outside of the skillet with a grease-cutting detergent. Do not leave
heating element turned on when the skillet is empty.

94
DEEP-FAT FRYER

Sizes of deep-fat fryers are expressed in the number of pounds of french fries that can
be cooked in an hour and range from 30 to 125 pounds. Some deep-fat fryers are
manually loaded. Others have automatic basket lowering and raising capabilities
controlled by a timer.

Operation

Before filling the deep fat fryer, you should always check three things:

1. Master switch must be in the OFF position.

2. Thermostatic switch must be in the OFF position.

3. Drain valve must be closed tightly.

Fill the fryer with fat using the amount specified in the technical manual furnished
with the fryer. Fats should be kept at least 2 inches below the fryer top. If possible, the
fat should be heated and melted before placing it in the fry kettle. Cold solid fat may
have moisture pockets that will explode, casting hot melted fat over a wide area. The
temperature should not be more than 200°F while the fat is melting. Also, if the cold fat
is not uniformly distributed around the heating element, the bare portions may heat up to
a point where a sudden splash of fat on the overheated element will cause the fat to ignite.
Fat ignites at 475°F. The fat should cover the uppermost coil at all times when the deep-
fat fryer is in operation so as not to overheat the element and cause a fire. After the fat
has been added, operate the deep-fat fryer as follows:

1. Turn on the master switch located outside the galley.

2. Set the thermostat at the cooking temperature prescribed in the Armed Forces
Recipe Service (AFRS), NAVSUP P-7, for the recipe you are using.

3. Check the temperature of the fat with a hand thermometer frequently during the
cooking process. Compare this hand reading with the thermostat reading to determine if
the thermostat is accurate. The temperature should never, under any circumstances, go
above 400°F. A safety requirement on all Navy fryers includes a second or over-
temperature thermostat. This is a nonadjustable, manual, resetting type installed to limit
the maximum temperature to 460°F. In case of failure of the adjustable automatic
thermostat, the over-temperature thermostat disconnects the electric power to the heater
elements.

4. Have foods as free from moisture as possible before frying. Excess moisture causes
the fat to foam, sputter, and boil over. It also causes fat to break down and its useful life
is shortened.

95
 5. Do not fry bacon in the deep-fat fryer, as the fat from the bacon causes the fat level
to rise above the safe level. It also contains salt that will shorten the life of the fat.

6. Follow instructions furnished with the fryer. Do not exceed the capacity of the
fryer indicated on the instruction plate.

7. Never let the fat level fall below the point marked in the fat container, and never
leave the deep-fat fryer unattended while in use.

8. In the event a fire should occur in the deep-fat fryer, do not attempt to smother the
fire with a cover of any sort. Call the emergency number for reporting a fire at your
command and shut off the electrical source, which is the main power switch outside the
space, to the fryer. If the fryer is provided with an automatic fire extinguishing unit and
does not set off automatically, pull the manual release. If that does not function, use PKP
portable extinguishers.
Cleaning

The deep-fat fryer should be cleaned after each use. Before cleaning the deep-fat fryer,
you must turn off the heating element and allow the fat to cool to about 150°F. Drain the
fat out of the fryer. Then remove the basket support screen, scrape off the oxidized fat
from the sides of the kettle with a spatula or scraper, and flush down the sediment with a
small amount of fat. If the kettle has become very dirty, fill it to the level with hot water
containing dishwashing machine detergent. Turn on the heating element and allow the
water to come to a boil. Boil the water for at least 5 to 10 minutes. Turn off the heating
element, drain, rinse with warm vinegar water, then rinse thoroughly with clear water,
and dry the fryer well. Clean the outside of the fry kettle with a grease solvent. Do not
leave heating element turned on when the deep-fat fryer is empty.
ELECTRIC OVEN

Electric ovens have two to six compartments with two heating units in each
compartment, one located below the bottom deck of the compartment. Each
heating unit is controlled by a separate three-heat switch, and the temperature of each
section is regulated by a thermostat.

Operating Instructions

The oven should be preheated before it is used by turning both upper and lower units
to high until the desired temperature is reached. Then, the thermostat control will
automatically cut off the current and will supply only enough heat to keep the
temperature constant. After the oven has been heated, set the two three-heat oven
switches at the top and bottom to the heat setting necessary to bake the product. In
roasting meat, avoid spilling grease on the heating elements or thermostat, as damage to
this equipment may result.

96
Care and Cleaning

Turn off heat. Scrape interior. Sprinkle salt on hardened spillage on oven floor. Turn
thermostat to 500°F. When spillage has carbonized completely, turn off oven and let it
cool thoroughly. Scrape the floor with a long-handled metal scraper. Use a metal sponge
or hand scraper on inside of doors, including handles and edges. Brush out scraped
carbon and loose foods. Begin with the top deck if stacked. Brush out with a stiff-
bristled brush and use a dustpan to collect. Wash doors with hot detergent solution on
enameled surfaces only, rinse, and wipe dry. Brush combustion chamber using a small
broom, and brush to clean everyday. Wash top, back, hinges, and feet with warm hand-
detergent solution, rinse, and wipe dry. Clean and polish stainless steel exterior.
CONVECTION OVEN

A convection oven has a blower fan that circulates hot air throughout the oven,
eliminating cold spots and promoting rapid cooking. Overall, cooking temperatures in
convection ovens are lower and cooking time is shorter than in conventional ovens. The
size, thickness, type of food, and the amount loaded into the oven at one time will
influence the cooking time.

General Operation of Convection Ovens

The general operating procedures for convection ovens are as follows:

1. Select and make the proper rack arrangement for the product to be cooked.

2. Turn or push the main power switch on (gas oven—turn burner valve on). Set the
thermostat to the recommended temperature. The thermostat signal light will light when
the power goes on. If possible, adjust the fan speed on the two-speed blower.

3. Preheat oven until the thermostat signal light goes out indicating that the oven has
reached the desired temperature. The oven should preheat to 350°F within 10 to 15
minutes. (NOTE: To conserve energy, do not turn on the oven until absolutely
necessary— approximately 15 minutes before actual cooking is to start.)

4. Open the oven doors and load the oven quickly to prevent excessive loss of heat.
Load the oven from the top, centering the pans on the rack toward the front of the oven.
Place partial loads in the center of the oven. Allow 1 to 2 inches of space between the
pans and along the oven sides to permit good air circulation. Remember—overloading is
the major cause of nonuniform baking and roasting.

5. Close the oven doors and set the timer for the desired cooking time. Check
periodically until the product is ready for removal.

TEMPERATURE SETTINGS.— Follow the recommended temperature guidelines

provided either in the manufacturer’s operating manual or those furnished in the AFRS,
NAVSUP P-7, or reduce the temperatures specified on the recipe cards by 50°F. If food
is cooked around the edges, but the center is still raw or not thoroughly cooked, or if

97
there is too much color variation (some is normal), reduce the heat by 15°F to 25°F and
return food to the oven. If necessary, continue to reduce the heat on successive loads
until the desired results are achieved. Record the most successful temperature on the
recipe card for future reference.

TIME SETTINGS.— Follow the recommended times provided in the manufacturer’s

operating manual, or follow the guidelines in the AFRS. Check progress halfway
through the cooking cycle since time will vary with the quality of food loaded, the
temperature, and the type of pan used. Remember, the use of meat thermometers for
roasting and the visual examination of baked products are the most accurate methods of
determining the desired cooking times, both in convection and conventional ovens.

VENT DAMPER CONTROL SETTING.— The vent damper control is located on or

near the control panel. The damper should be kept closed for most foods of low moisture
content such as roasts. Leaving the vent open during roasting will produce a dry meat
and result in excessive shrinkage.

The damper should be kept open when baking items with high moisture content
(cakes, muffins, yeast bread, and so forth). Leaving the damper closed throughout a
baking cycle will produce cakes that are too moist and ones that will not rise. A “cloud”
of water droplets on the oven window indicates excessive moisture that should be vented
out of the oven through the open damper.

INTERIOR OVEN LIGHTS.— Turn on lights only when loading, unloading, or

checking the product. The continual burning of lights will result in a shortened
bulb life.

TIMER.— The oven timer will ring only as a reminder; it has no control over the
functioning of the oven. To assure proper operation, you should wind the timer to the
maximum setting, then turn it back to the setting desired for the particular product.
Care and Cleaning

Keep the inside of the oven and racks clean. If food particles or carbon accumulates
so that doors cannot be tightly closed, heat is wasted and the oven will not operate
properly. Poorly closed doors permit a constant escape of steam and vapor around the
door. The vapor will condense and deteriorate the finish around the oven front and door
lining.

The rule for all electrical appliances is to make sure the proper tag-out procedures
have been followed.

When cleaning the interior of the oven, it is important to bear in mind that the
aluminum coating, though tightly adherent, is still a coating. To preserve the coating and
to make maintenance easier, clean the interior daily when the oven is cold with a mild
detergent or soap and water. This will prevent food and dirt from “baking on” and will
frequently be all the cleaning that is necessary.

98
 If soil resists soap and water cleaning, use a wooden tool to loosen spillage from the
cold oven. Follow with a nonetching cleaner that is specifically recommended for
aluminized steel. Use clear water to rinse; dry with a soft clean cloth. Avoid using wire
brushes and caustic solutions such as lye, soda ash, or ammonia.

• When the oven liner features stainless steel the following rules apply:

In general, the principles detailed previously apply. Soap or detergent and water will
usually take care of routine cleaning. Drying should be done with a soft clean cloth.

For burnt-on foods and grease that resist simple soap and water cleaning, an abrasive
cleaner mixed into a paste may be used. Apply with a sponge, always rubbing with the
grain. This treatment is usually effective for heat tint (slightly darkened areas caused by
oxidation). Again, remember to rub in the direction of the polish lines. Rinse with clear
water and dry with a soft cloth.

• When Teflon panels are featured, the following rules apply:

To protect the easy-care properties of Teflon-coated oven panels, frequent cleaning,

dependent on oven usage, is recommended. Panels should be cleaned as soon as soil
begins to turn brown. This will minimize the possibility of Teflon discoloration. Do not
use sharp instruments, abrasive materials, or oven cleaners on a Teflon surface, otherwise
the warranty is void. Should the surface be accidentally scratched, the performance and
cleanability features would be adversely affected.

To clean the Teflon panels, remove panels and wash thoroughly with hot sudsy water
using a sponge or web pad that is supplied with the oven. Do not use harsh abrasives.
Rinse well and dry. Between these cleanings, everyday oven spatters can be easily
sponged off with a sudsy sponge or a cloth, rinsed, and dried. With Teflon, there is never
a need for oven cleaner. The step-by-step sequence for removing panels is as follows:

1. Remove tray racks by pulling straight out.

2. Remove right and left rack guides by lifting straight out.

3. Right- and left-hand panels may now be removed by moving toward the center and
pulling out. To avoid scratching, do not rest panels on bottom panel.

4. Remove bottom panel by pulling straight out.

5. Remove blower baffle by lifting straight up and pulling out toward the front. Care
should be exercised to clear brackets on the side.

6. Blower wheel can now be cleaned in place.

99
 7. Top panel and interior door panels can be cleaned while in place.

8. If removal of top panel is desired, unscrew three screws from the front top edge of
top and two screws from rear flange of top.

9. Slide out toward front.

To reassemble, reverse these procedures.

To keep the stainless steel front bright and gleaming at all times, just clean it regularly
with a damp cloth and polish with a soft dry cloth. To remove discolorations that may
have formed when regular cleaning was neglected, use any detergent or plain soap and
water.

Wash all exterior surfaces daily. Use a cloth wet with warm water and a mild soap or
detergent. Where surfaces have been polished, rub lightly with a cloth-hard rubbing will
remove polish. Follow with a clean damp cloth, then dry. This simple beauty treatment
not only keeps your equipment dirt-free and sparkling, but virtually eliminates the danger
of grease accumulation that may form a stubborn stain if left on too long. (NOTE: Do
not sprinkle or pour water over oven as it may cause an electrical short.)
General Notes

Most convection ovens are equipped with an electric interlock that energizes/de-
energizes both the heating elements and the fan motor when the doors are closed/open.
Therefore, the heating elements and fan will not operate independently and will only
operate with the doors closed. Some convection ovens are equipped with single-speed
fan motors while others are equipped with two-speed fan motors. This information is
particularly important to note when baking cakes, muffins, meringue or custard pies, or
similar products, and when oven-frying bacon. High-speed air circulation may cause
damage to the food (for example, cakes slope to one side of the pan) or blow melted fat
throughout the oven. Read the manufacturers’ manuals and determine exactly what
features you have and then, for the previous products, proceed as follows:

• On two-speed interlocked fan motor: set fan speed to low.

• On single-speed interlocked fan motor: preheat oven 50°F higher than
the recommended cooking temperature. Load oven quickly, close doors, and
reduce thermostat to recommended cooking temperature. (This action will allow the
product to be baked to setup before the fan/heating elements come on again.)
• On single-speed independent fan motor: preheat oven 25°F above
temperature specified in recipe. Turn the fan off. Reduce heat 25°F. Load oven quickly
and close doors. Turn fan on after 7 to 10 minutes and keep it on for remaining cooking
time. (EXCEPTION: Leave fan off for bacon to eliminate fat from blowing throughout
the oven.)

Read and understand the manufacturers’ manuals. They will make your job easier and
safer.

100
ELECTRIC FOOD MIXER

Electric food mixers are used for an infinite number of jobs including beating batters
for cakes, mixing bread dough, beating eggs, and mashing and whipping potatoes.

Operation

Before operating the machine make sure the bowl, paddles, and beaters are thoroughly
clean. If necessary, wash them in hot soapy water and rinse with hot water (170°F).

Place the ingredients in the bowl as specified on the AFRS recipe card. Do not fill the
bowl more than half full. Place the bowl on a castered dolly when moving across the
deck. Insert the bowl in the mixing machine, making sure the bowl ears are on the
supporting pins and both sides are locked in place.

Select the proper attachment machine. The L-shaped notch in the beater is to be
inserted over the pin in the shaft. On the smaller models the shaft will be grooved. The
attachment is inserted into these grooves and slipped into the lock. Raise the bowl to the
proper height by turning the wheel or crank.

Start the motor at no load and with clutch release shift to low speed; release the clutch
each time the speed is changed. The speed to be used is indicated on the recipe card and
on the instructions furnished by the manufacturer. Watch mixing times and mixing
speeds carefully. Often blended ingredients revert to separate ingredients if mixed too
long or at an improper speed. If, during the process of mixing, some of the batter has
piled up on the sides of the bowl, stop the machine. Using a long-handled spoon or
spatula, scrape down the sides of the bowl. Never put spoons, spatulas, or your hands in
the bowl while the machine is in operation.

When the mixing is completed, move the control switch to the OFF position and stop
the motor. Lower the bowl by the lever with which you raised it and remove the beater by
turning the sleeve to the left. Remove any food left on the beater with a spatula. Then,
place the bowl on the castered dolly and move it to the place of use.
Care and Cleaning

The electric mixer, beaters, whips, and bowls all require care. Beaters, paddles, and
bowls should be washed immediately after each use. Use hot soapy water and rinse with
hot water ( 170°F). Hang beaters and paddles upside down to air dry. Clean the body of
the machine after each meal. Use a damp cloth or wash with water as necessary for
proper sanitation. Be sure the beater shaft is free of all dirt and food particles. The motor
and mechanical parts of the mixer should be inspected and maintained by the engineering
department once a week.

101
ELECTRIC MEAT-SLICING MACHINE

The meat-slicing machine is motor operated and is used for slicing hard or soft foods
such as roasts, cheese, bacon, luncheon meats, and ham.

The machine has a carriage on which the meat is placed. A swiftly revolving disk
knife slices the meat as the carriage is moved across the face of the revolving knife.

Operating the Meat Slicer

Meat slicers may be either manual or automatic feed. To use the slicer, place the meat
on the carriage and adjust the clamp to hold the meat firmly. Next, set the dial for the
desired thickness of the slices. Set the machine on automatic or manual. Turn on power
to the machine. If manual mode was selected, move carriage back and forth with the
hand lever.

The meat-slicing machine must be hardwired (permanently attached) and have a

backup electric switch. The switch will be equipped with a guard to prevent accidental
starting. The meat slicer is a very dangerous piece of equipment. Never operate it with
the blade guard off or put your hands anywhere near the blade while the blade is turning.
The blade is very sharp, so extreme caution should be used when sharpening or cleaning
it.
Care and Cleaning

The meat-slicing machine must be cleaned after each use. Before dismantling the
slicer, you must make sure the electric power is secured. Remove all cutting and meat-
handling attachments. Wash the attachments with soap and hot water; rinse with hot
water. The attachments may be run through the dishwashing machine. Clean the knife
and the body of the slicer by following the manufacturer’s recommended cleaning
instructions or the instructions posted by the machine. Reassemble the slicer
immediately so that the bare blade will not be exposed and apply a thin coating of salad
oil
on the blade. Do not forget to clean the counter top under the slicer.
VENTILATOR HOODS

Ventilator hoods, like people, come in a variety of shapes, sizes, and appearances, and
vary in their effectiveness from barely acceptable to highly efficient. The filter-type
hoods fall into the barely acceptable category, and the filterless grease extractors–mostly
known as Gaylord ventilators–are the most efficient. Filter type hoods are the hardest to
keep clean and are gradually being re-placed as funds allow. They generally have no
built-in fire protection system. If the filters are not replaced after cleaning, a buildup of
grease deposits in the exhaust duct system could lead to a fire! Depending upon the type
of fumes exhausted and the amount of use, the filter should be removed and washed in
the dishwasher or deep sink daily, or no less than once a week. The hood chamber
behind the filters should be cleaned while the filters are out and you should be sure the
filters are then put back. Also, remember, with all ventilators, to remove the access cover

102
plates on the exhaust ducts, inspect for grease buildup in the ducts, and clean as
necessary.

The hood, generally referred to as the Gaylord (named after the original
manufacturer), is the type that uses an arrangement of internal baffles to cause the
exhaust air to quickly change direction several times before it enters the exhaust duct. In
so doing, the air slings the grease out into the grease trough that is built into the bottom
part of the hood. This action is what gives the hood the name of centrifugal grease
extractor. Other than the air, the only moving part in this system is the fire damper that is
spring-loaded to close the throat or inlet air slot in case of fire, and this damper, when
open, also serves as the first of the air baffles. All the action up to this point is carried
out automatically by the hood as long as the exhaust blower is operating correctly.

Another automatic feature is the fire-sensing thermostat located in the exhaust

ductwork close to the hood. From the outside, this looks like an aluminum box about 2
1/2 inches wide by 4 inches long by 1 1/2 inches deep. On the back of this, and
projecting inside the duct, is a thermostat probe that is constantly checking air
temperature in the exhaust duct. If a fire starts, and the air going by the thermostat
reaches 250°F, the thermostat switch operates a magnetic trip inside the fire damper
control box (the one with the plunger mounted above the hood), the fire damper slams
shut, and the blower shuts down. In later model hoods with automatic cleaning (more
about this later), this condition also will cause the automatic water washdown system to
come on and spray water into the hood until the temperature at the thermostat is less than
250°F. On earlier models, the water or steam must be turned on manually. All
shipboard model grease extractor hoods are fail-safe in that power failure or thermostat
failure will cause the fire damper to close. This information will also be found on the
nameplate on the damper control box.

All centrifugal grease extractor hoods require at least daily cleaning. You may find
three different types of cleaning systems, all having a look-alike appearance but slightly
different in method:

• Steam cleaning (manual)

• Hot water cleaning (manual)
• Detergent washdown system (automatic and manual)

In both steam cleaning and hot water cleaning, you must shut off the exhaust blower
motor at the control panel, turn on the steam or hot water valve in the line leading to the
upper part of the hood and allow it to run for 5 minutes or more, depending on how dirty
the inside of the hood gets. If hot water is used, the temperature should be between
130°F and 180°F, and the closer to 180°F the better. After shutting off the steam or
water, open the inspection doors on the ventilator and see if the grease and dirt have been
flushed away. If the entire hood interior is still dirty, you need to leave the valve open
longer. If only a certain area is dirty, you may have a clogged spray nozzle.

103
 During the washdown, watch the drain line from the bottom of the hood. It should run
freely and should be dumping through an air gap to a deck drain. No shutoff valves are
allowed in the drain line and the line should never be directly connected to a drain.
Otherwise, a stopped-up drain could allow sewage to backup into the hood and spill into
food and food equipment. Hand-clean all exposed surfaces of the hood including the
front surface of the fire damper baffle. Watch your fingers when cleaning the damper. If
the damper is accidentally tripped, it could pinch your fingers against the back of the
hood.

Automatic cleaning is a timed, push-button cleaning system. A dishwasher scrubbing

action with detergent and hot water is obtained by directed spray nozzle action. The
nozzles are located on 8- to 10-inch centers on the cleaning pipes mounted on the interior
back wall of the ventilator. The cleaning cycle is activated each time the blower serving
the ventilator is stopped by pushing the STOP button on the exhaust control and cleaning
station. This shuts off the blower and releases detergent and hot water into the ventilator
for a preselected and preset time on the adjustable timer in the exhaust control and
cleaning station.

After the cleaning cycle has been completed, follow the same steps as previously
explained in manual cleaning, except clean the detergent tank and refill, if needed, with
the correct detergent. Note that the timer for the automatic wash cycle is located in the
stainless steel cabinet that houses the exhaust control and cleaning station. The length of
the automatic wash cycle is adjustable and should be adjusted for the minimum time that
will satisfactorily clean the hood. This will conserve utilities and detergent.

The hot water shutoff valve, usually located in the cleaning station cabinet, should
always be left on unless plumbing repairs are necessary. On some ships, where low
water pressure or the amount of hot water available is a problem and where all galley
hoods are connected to a single automatic wash system, installing activities have found it
necessary to install individual shutoff valves in the hot water/detergent line at each
ventilator hood. In these cases, be sure only the valve at the hood to be cleaned is turned
on. If you have an arrangement like this, for fire protection purposes, leave the valve to
the hood serving deep-fat fryers turned on and all others off, except when they are
actually being washed.
DOUGH TROUGH

A dough trough is the container in which dough is placed during the fermentation
period. It is an oblong boxlike trough of steel construction equipped with four casters to
permit easy movement in the bakeshop area. Dough troughs are of various lengths and
are designed to hold approximately 90 pounds of dough to a foot, or 50 pounds of flour to
a foot. If the trough is too long for the amount of dough to be fermented properly, dam
boards maybe inserted so that the correct amount of space is available.
DOUGH PROOFERS

Dough proofers or fermentation rooms are used for conditioning dough and cooling
baked bread. The air temperature and air moisture (humidity) in a dough proofer are kept

104
at preset levels by automatic controls. Dough proofers are thermally insulated enclosures
and vary in size from a small box with shelving to a room with space for many portable
bread racks. The dough proofer is heated by steam coils or electric heating elements
located inside the enclosure, or by self-contained air-conditioning units connected to the
proofer by air ducts. For shipboard use, steam-heated dough proofers are furnished in
various sizes; the number and size of the proofers depend on the capacity of the bake
ovens installed in the bakery on board ship.
Operation

The operation of all dough proofers is basically the same regardless of the size of the
proofer. Air within a proofer should be kept at a preset temperature and moisture level.
Dough proofers require at least 30 to 45 minutes to attain the proper atmosphere; the unit
should be started well in advance of anticipated use.

The time and temperature used to proof bread dough in the proofer should be as
specified on the recipe card. Turn the steam valve on full and open the petcock to
provide the necessary amount of steam for humidity. Adjust the steam inlet valve to
obtain the desired temperature. When the temperature and humidity are correct, place the
pans of dough into the proofer and close the door.

Watch the time closely and test the dough periodically by pressing the fingers into it.
If the depression is filled by rising dough, fermentation is progressing properly. To
reduce fermentation, cover the bread pans with cloths and reduce the proofer temperature.
At no time should there be more than 35 pounds of steam pressure allowed to pass
through the steam coils of the proofer. Drain the condensation from the drip pan at
regular intervals by opening the petcock.
Care and Cleaning

Proofers should be maintained in a safe, sanitary, dust-free, rust-free, nonleaking, and

economical operating condition. The enclosures and accessories should be kept free of
flies, ants, cockroaches, mice, and rats.

Clean the floor, walls, top, and inside of the door. Scrape sides, corners, and guide
rails with a putty knife. Scrub the floor with along-handled scrub brush and hot machine-
detergent solution; rinse and dry. Wipe guide rails and ledges thoroughly. Remove and
clean water pan; rinse and wipe dry. Scrub exterior and underneath if space permits;
flush with hot water.
BREAD SLICER

The bread slicer is a machine with small thin blades. The platform on which the bread
is placed is at about a 45-degree angle so that the weight of the bread will force the loaf
down on the cutting blade when the machine is turned on. The cutting blades are
attached to a cam shaft that has half the blades going in one direction and the other half
going in the opposite direction. The reason for this is so that it will not tear the loaf while
it is being sliced. Never use your hand to push the load through the machine.

105
VEGETABLE PEELERS

Vegetable peelers have capacities of 10, 15, 30, or 50 pounds and have a
cylindrical hopper with an abrasive-covered wall and an abrasive-covered rotary disk in
the bottom. The disk has a wavy surface. This surface agitates the vegetables in such a
manner that they continually present new surfaces for action by the abrasive material.
Operation

Before loading the machine, sort the vegetables so that those in any one load are of the
same size and free of stones, sticks, and other hard objects. The machine should be
started and the water turned into it before any vegetables are added. Do not overload the
machine. The quantity of vegetables loaded should not exceed approximately 66 percent
of the total hopper capacity. A larger quantity will not be thoroughly agitated.

If the abrasive surfaces of the machine are kept reasonably clean, a load of vegetables
should be satisfactorily peeled in about 1 minute. Deep eyes or depressions in potatoes
should be removed and the peeling finished with a hand peeler or small knife. It is
wasteful to allow vegetables to remain in the machine longer than necessary because
valuable nutrients will be lost.
Cleaning

At the end of each day’s use, secure the power and dismantle the machine. Lift the
cover off and take out the abrasive disks; remove the peel trap and strainers; wash the
removable parts, the interior, and the exterior of the machine with hot soapy water, and
rinse with hot water (170°F). Be sure all food particles are washed out. Allow all parts to
air dry before reassembling the unit.

ELECTRIC VEGETABLE CUTTERS

Vegetable cutters are machines that, without the use of attachments or removable
parts, make three classes of cuts of vegetables—shredded, sliced, and grated. A dial
control on the side of the machine allows instant changing of the thickness of the cut,
even while the machine is in operation.

The entire front of the machine swings open to provide complete access to the interior
for the purpose of cleaning and changing the blade. The machine should be washed with
hot water immediately after it is used. The knurled knob holds the front of the machine
securely when it is in operation.

Clean and scrub the knives and bowl with hot, soapy water and a very stiff brush.
Rinse them well with hot water (170°F) and allow them to air dry thoroughly before
reassembling.
VEGETABLE CUTTER AND SLICER

The vegetable cutter and slicer is used to cut vegetables that are to be used for cooking
and for salads. The machine may be used to do as many as three different cutting jobs at

106
once. It maybe used for slicing either bias or horizontal french fries and julienne strips,
and for coarse and fine chopping. The machine has a slicer adjustment for thicknesses up
to one-fourth of an inch. The adjustment can be made while the machine is in motion.
To make french fries or diced potatoes, the potatoes must be sized so that they will go
into the machine.

When the machine is turned on, put a pan underneath the outlet to catch the water and
vegetable particles and flush with water. This should be done after each use.

At the end of the day disassemble the machine and thoroughly clean the cutting plates
and disks. Carefully inspect each part for strings of vegetables that may not have washed
off.

This machine has parts that must be oiled daily to prolong the life and efficiency of
the machine.

Before operating the saw, you must tighten the blade using only one hand to apply just
enough tension to keep it from slipping. Feed the meat straight through giving the blade a
chance to cut. Do not force. Use only sharp blades. Dull blades may heat up, twist, and
break.

The electric meat cutter is a dangerous piece of equipment. A great deal of care is
necessary to avoid injury when you operate this machine. There are seven safety
precautions that should be observed when you are operating the meat saw:
MEAT CHOPPER

The electric meat chopper is used to chop or grind all meats (cooked or raw) and to
prepare bread crumbs from leftover bread and toast. The meat chopper is portable and
maybe placed where it is needed most. It should be placed on a sturdy stand within easy
reach of an electric outlet.
Operation

Usually a 3/8-inch plate is used for grinding meat. The use of a 3/16-inch plate for
such grinding puts too much pressure on the grinder. The cutting edge of the knife must
go next to the plate. Never forcibly tighten the adjustment ring on the chopping end, but
tighten it snugly. Excess pressure will wear the chopper parts.

Start the motor, then feed the material into the chopper. Turn the motor off after the
material is ground. Feed the material into the machine with the tools intended for that
purpose—never with your hands.
Care and Cleaning

After meat has been chopped, take the grinder apart and wash each part thoroughly
with soap and water, rinse with hot water (170°F), and allow to air dry. Do not allow
food to dry on the surfaces of the chopper before you wash it. A grinder can be a

107
breeding place for bacteria that might cause food poisoning. Great care should be
exercised in keeping the parts of the grinder free from contamination.

Knives and plates should be sharpened before they get dull, but do not attempt this
yourself. The engineering department should be consulted. It is a good idea to keep the
same knife and plate together as they wear to fit each other.

Keep the motor dry. Do not grind juicy foods, such as onions, because the juice will
be forced back into the gear housing, causing a loss of oil and consequent wearing of
gears.

If you are grinding foods such as crackers, grind a very small amount at a time or the
machine will jam. When the chopper is hot, do not run raw meat through it. Remember
that bits of bones can break the warm gears and knives.
MEAT TENDERIZER

The meat tenderizer is used to tenderize all sorts of tough meats. The machine is
about 20 inches long and about 1 foot wide.

To operate, turn the motor on, insert the meat to be tenderized into the opening at the
top of the machine. The meat will pass through two sets of revolving rollers that contain
many small blades and will be made tender. If further tenderizing is required, insert the
meat again after first giving it a one-quarter turn (90 degrees).

Meat-tenderizing machines are equipped with a safety device that automatically stops
the machine when the cover (shield) is raised. Never attempt to raise the top with the
machine running or to operate the machine with the cover raised because of the danger of
catching your fingers in the machine. Take the machine apart and clean it after each use.
Oil the parts often.
KNIVES

Many different sizes and shapes of knives are required for meat-cutting jobs. You
must understand which knife to use for each job and make sure to use it for the job it was
intended. You should never use the thin-bladed knife that is designed for carving cooked
meats to bone a roast. It is quicker and more efficient to use the boning knife that has a
stiff, narrow, short blade to cut close around bones. The knives with the long, wide
blades are used to cut steaks and roasts before they are cooked.

Sharpening Knives

To get the most use out of the knives in the galley, they must be sharp. A dull knife is
a hazard and makes extra work for you. A boning knife has a comparatively narrow
bevel and will stand more hard use than a steak knife that has a wide bevel and a thin
edge. But no matter what tool you use, you cannot do a good job unless the tool is sharp.
The butcher’s steel is used only to keep the edges of knives straight and not to sharpen
them. Nor should you sharpen knives on a power- or hand-driven stone, since this

108
removes the temper from the cutting edge. The best things to use for sharpening are a
waterstone and a carborundum oilstone. If you use the entire stone when sharpening
tools the stone will not hollow out at any one point. Draw the full blade, from heel to tip,
across the length of the stone and then turn the knife over and pull it back from the
opposite end of the stone. This sharpens the knife evenly and smoothly and causes the
stone to wear uniformly. Always clean the blade and handle thoroughly after sharpening.

Steeling

In steeling, there is a definite technique. Specific types of steels should be used to true
certain edges. Never use a rough steel. A smooth steel should be used to keep the blade
in perfect condition and to maintain a keen edge. The steel should have good magnetism
in order to hold steel particles. The easiest and most effective methods of steeling a knife
are as follows:

• Hold the steel firmly in the left hand, thumb on the top of the handle
under the guard, with the point upward and slightly away from the body.
• Place the heel of the blade against the top side of the tip of the steel.
The steel and the blade should meet at an angle of about 25 degrees.
• With a quick swinging motion bring the blade down across the steel
toward the left hand. This should pass the entire edge lightly over the steel.
• Bring the knife into position again but with the blade against the
bottom side of the steel. Then, repeat the same motion of passing the blade over the steel.
• Repeat the motion, alternating the knife from side to side; a dozen strokes will
true the edge. Steel your knives as often as necessary to keep their edges straight.
Care of Knives

Never throw knives into a drawer with other cutlery or tools. It is a good idea to have
a knife rack for each watch fastened to some convenient place in the galley. Do not use
knives to open cans, cut wire bands, or open cases of foodstuffs.
DISHWASHING MACHINES

Proper operation and care of dishwashing machines are vital to the sanitation, safety,
and efficiency of your activity, so you must know your machines and follow directions
for their use and maintenance.

Dishwashing machines used in the Navy are classified as one-tank, two-tank or three-
tank machines. The three-tank machine is a fully automatic, continuous racking machine
that scrapes, brushes, and provides two rinses. It is used at major recruit installations and
other large activities.

Single-tank Dishwashing Machine

Single-tank machines are used in small ships or small messes whereby installation of
larger dishwashing machines is not feasible and practical. Wash and rinse sprays are
controlled separately by automatic, self-opening, and self-closing valves in the automatic

109
machine, or by handles in the manually operated machine. The automatic machine
provides for a 40-second wash and a 10-second rinse; for manually operated machines,
wash and rinse intervals are controlled by the operator who should allow a 40-second
wash and a 10-second rinse.

To control the bacteria to a satisfactory minimum in single-tank machines, it is

necessary that the temperature of the wash water in the tank be 140°F to 160°F.
Therefore, a thermostat is provided in the automatic machines to prevent operation when
the temperature of the water falls below 140°F. Rinsing is done by means of spraying hot
water on the dishes from an outside source and is controlled by an adjustable automatic
steam-mixing valve that maintains the temperature of the rinse water between 180°F to
195°F.
Double-tank Method

Double-tank machines are available with several different capacities and are used
when more than 150 persons are to be served. These machines are provided with
separate wash and rinse tanks. They also have a final rinse of hot water that is sprayed on
the dishes from an outside source. This spray is opened by the racks passing through the
machine. The spray automatically closes when the rinse cycle is completed. The final
rinse is controlled by an adjustable automatic steam-mixing valve that maintains the
temperature between 180°F to 195°F. Double-tank machines are also equipped with a
thermostatically operated switch in the rinse tank that prevents operation of the machine
if the temperature of the rinse water falls below 180°F. The racks pass through the
machine automatically by means of conveyor chains. The two-tank dishwashing machine
should be timed so that the utensils are exposed to the machine sprays for not less than 40
seconds (20-second wash, 20-second rinse).

Triple-tank Dishwashing Machines

Some shore activities have triple-tank dishwashing machines installed. The procedures
of operation are basically the same as with double-tank machines with the following
exceptions:

• The dishwashing machine consists of prewash, wash, and rinse sections

with a final rinse.
• Refer to the manufacturer’s operating and instruction manual for the
preset temperatures of the prewash, wash, and rinse sections. The final rinse
should always remain the same (180°F to 195°F).
OPERATING THE DISHWASHER

The first thing you should do is to read and become familiar with the operating
instructions included on the instruction plate that is mounted on the hood of the machine
you are operating. Always follow these instructions. Otherwise, you may damage the
equipment or injure yourself and others.

110
 The following detailed instructions are given for double-tank machines since most
machines in service are of this type. These directions are also generally applicable to
single-tank units, except for wash and rinse time intervals and temperatures.

1. Inspect the machine to make sure the scrap screens are in place, spray arms are
capped and adjusted so that the spray hits the utensils directly, and splash curtains are in
place and not hanging closer than 5 inches to the conveyor.

2. Close the drain valves to the wash and rinse sections of the machine. Open the hot
water fill valves and fill the tanks to the full mark on the water level indicator.

3. Open the steam valves and allow the temperature of the water to reach 180°F.
Adjust the mixing valve to the HOT position to maintain a temperature range of 180°F to
195°F. On machines with hot water booster heaters installed, open the hot water and
steam valve to the booster heater.

4. On machines without automatic detergent dispensers, add the prescribed amount of

detergent.

5. Push the START button to start the pumps and conveyor and run the machine for 2
minutes to thoroughly mix the detergent and bring the temperature of the wash tank up to
140°F or above.

6. Look inside the ends of the machine to make sure the power sprays are operating
properly.

7. During the operation of the machine keep a close check on the temperature gauges
and make sure they are within the following temperature ranges:

• Wash: 150°F - 160°F

• Rinse: 160°F-180°F
• Final rinse: 180°F - 195°F

8. Place the dish rack on the conveyor carefully and allow the conveyor to push the
rack through the machine. If the conveyor is properly set, the utensils will receive a 20-
second wash and a 20-second rinse.

9. As the dish rack approaches the end of the machine, it will pass a lever that will
actuate the final rinse. Observe the final rinse temperature gauge for correct temperature
(180°F- 195°F).

10. Allow all dinnerware and silverware to air dry for at least 1 minute after passing
through the machine.

11. Place the clean, air-dried dinnerware and trays bottom side up in a clean storage
cabinet or dispenser.

111
 12. Place an empty cylinder over clean, air-dried silverware; invert and place in a
clean storage cabinet.

13. For every 30 to 45 minutes of continuous machine operation, the wash tank should
be drained and the scrap trays cleaned. Check the machine temperatures frequently using
a pocket thermometer (0°F-200°F) to assure the accuracy of the temperature gauges.

The washing of silverware is often unsatisfactory because too much silverware is

placed in the rack to be thoroughly cleaned. The proper procedure for washing the
silverware is to sort the silver and place 15 to 20 pieces in each cylinder-shaped
compartment; run the silverware through the dishwashing machine with the service end
up. When the wash-rinse cycle is complete, the sanitized silver should be stored by
inverting it in the cylinder-shaped containers; thereby the washing and sanitizing is done
without having to touch the utensils.
CLEANING THE DISHWASHING MACHINE

The dishwashing machine must be thoroughly cleaned after each meal or use. The
following procedures are to be followed:

1. Turn the machine off.

2. Secure the steam and hot water valves to the final rinse mixing valve, or the steam
and hot water valves to the hot water booster heater.

3. Add 3/4 to 1 1/2 cups of dishwashing machine detergent to the rinse tank,
depending on the capacity of the rinse tank.

4. Turn the machine on and allow it to operate for 5 minutes.

5. Turn the machine off and secure the steam valve to the rinse tank.

6. Open the drain valves to the wash and rinse tanks; open the doors and allow the
machine to cool.

7. Remove the doors, scrap screens, metal frames, wash and rinse spray arms, pump
intake strainer, drain strainer, and splash curtains. Wash thoroughly in the utensils wash
sink and rinse.

8. Using hand-dishwashing detergent and water with a nylon-bristled brush,

thoroughly clean the inside and outside of the machine. Rinse with clean water to
remove all loosened dirt and detergent.

9. Reassemble the machine, close the drain valve to the wash and rinse tanks.

112
 10. Fill the tanks one-half full of water, open the steam valve to the rinse tank and
allow the temperature to reach 180°F.

11. Turn the machine on and operate for 5 minutes without detergent.

12. Turn the machine off, close the steam valve to the rinse tank, and open the drain
valves to the wash and rinse tanks.

NOTE: Follow the same basic procedures for the single-tank dishwashing machine
with the exception of steps 1 through 4.
DESCALING DISHWASHING MACHINES

The interior of the dishwashing machine and manifold(s) should be inspected monthly
for accumulation of calcium or lime deposits. If deposits are evident, the machine must
be descaled.

Descaling the machine should be a part of the PMS and is the responsibility of the
foodservice division. The descaling operation must be closely supervised from start to
finish, and personnel must wear face shields, chemical safety goggles, rubber gloves, and
rubber aprons when handling acid. These descaling procedures should be followed:

1. Drain wash/rinse tanks, if applicable.

2. Install overflow pipes, scrap trays, screens, spray manifolds (except final rinse), and
curtains (inlet and discharge ends only). Place final rinse spray manifold on top of scrap
tray in wash tank.

3. Shut drain valves.

4. Fill tanks to within 2 inches of top of overflow pipes with clean hot water.

5. Add 7 fluid ounces of orthophosphoric acid and 1 fluid ounce of rinse additive for
each gallon of water per tank. These items can be obtained through the supply system.

6. Complete filling the tanks and close the doors.

7. Start the machine and operate for 1 hour maintaining normal operating temperatures
(150°F- 160°F wash and 160°F-180°F rinse).

8. Stop the machine and open the drain valves. Completely drain acid solution from
machine.

9. Inspect the interior of the machine. All the parts should be free of calcium or lime
deposits and metal should be shiny.

10. Repeat steps 3 through 8 if necessary.

113
 11. Close drain valves and fill tanks with clean hot water. Add 2 cups of dishwashing
compound per tank.

12. Close doors, start machine, and operate for 5 minutes at operating temperatures.

13. Stop machine and completely drain tanks.

14. Refill and flush tanks with clean water to remove all traces of acid and detergent.

NOTES: (1) In the absence of orthophosphoric acid, only USDA-approved chemicals

for descaling machine should be used, follow manufacturer’s
instruction.

(2) If tank capacity in gallons is unknown, multiply length (inches) times width
(inches) times depth to overflow (inches) and divide by 231.

(3) Acid drained from the machine should be disposed of according to local
regulations (shore stations and ships in port).
GARBAGE GRINDER

Garbage grinders are found in sculleries and deep sinks. They are used to dispose of
food from plates, unused food items, and other wet garbage. Always read the operating
instructions posted near the grinder before using.

To clean the tank, dump a bucket of strong, hot detergent solution into the tank and
scrub the interior. Rinse by flushing the interior walls with hot water. Clean exterior by
scrubbing with hot detergent solution, then rinse.
STEAM TABLE

Steam tables are used for serving hot foods. There are several types: (a) those with
water compartments heated by steam coils at 40 psi of pressure or less; (b) those with
steam-heated water compartments and dish warmers; (c) those with water compartments
heated by immersion-electric heating elements; and (d) dish warmers.

Operation

Do not overload food pans. An excessive amount of food makes it difficult to

maintain the correct water compartment temperature which is between 180°F to 200°F.
If, on the other hand, water in the steam table is allowed to become hotter than 200°F, the
food will dry rapidly and continue cooking from the excess heat. You can correct this by
adding more water to reduce the heat. Because food tastes best if served within 30
minutes (preferably within 15 minutes) after being placed on the steam table, do not place
food pans on the steam table too early.

114
Care and Cleaning

After each meal, drain the steam table, wash the tanks with hot soapy water, and rinse
with very hot fresh water of at least 180°F. Wash the top and front of the steam table to
make it bright, clean, and sterile; then wipe it dry with a clean cloth.

ELECTRIC TOASTERS

Electric toasters used in the galley and dining area are the intermittent and rotary
types. The intermittent type is composed of chrome-plated steel and has a vertical oven
with two to four openings for inserting the bread slices. The continuous type has a
chrome-plated heavy-duty conveyor with motor-driven trays for the bread.

Rotary toasters are cleaned by first disconnecting the power. After toaster is cooled,
remove pan, slide, and baskets. Use soft brush to remove crumbs from front surface and
behind bread racks. Wipe clean frame as far as is accessible with warm hand-detergent
solution. Use a nonabrasive cleaner to remove stubborn spots. Clean baskets by boiling
in hot detergent water, rinse, and air dry. Then, clean and replace all parts.

REFRIGERATORS

Refrigerators are designed for storing foods for short periods of time. Most
refrigerators installed aboard ship have movable bars that fit in front of each
shelf to keep the contents of the refrigerator from moving or falling out when the door is
opened. At sea, food must be stored in such a way that it will not move around when the
ship rolls. To keep a refrigerator operating at top efficiency, three things are important:

• Keep it clean.
• Do not overload it.
• Defrost it regularly and properly.
Defrosting

You may defrost the refrigerator on a schedule or when the frost accumulation
requires it. The number of times that a refrigerator requires defrosting depends, of
course, on the rate at which frost builds up on the cooling unit. Ice formations should
never be more than one-fourth of an inch thick because ice and frost act as insulators and
reduce efficiency.

Defrosting is done by turning off the refrigerator; removing all food, and blocking the
doors open. Defrosting may be speeded up, however, by placing pans of hot water in the
freezer compartment. Do not scrape or chip the ice from the cooling coils as they are
easily damaged, and do not pour hot water over the ice accumulation to melt it.
Cleaning the Refrigerator

A refrigerator that is not thoroughly clean will quickly develop a bad odor and the
foods in it will spoil. Cleanliness avoids the growth of mold and bacteria that often cause
food poisoning. A refrigerator should be cleaned at least once a week and after each

115
defrosting. Never use a water hose in cleaning a refrigerator. The fluid may seep into the
insulation and cause permanent damage. The proper cleaning procedures are as follows:

1. Wipe the gaskets around the door of the refrigerator to remove any oil or grease.

2. Wash the inside surfaces and food shelves with a hot detergent solution of water.

3. Rinse them with a warm solution of baking soda, using 1 tablespoon of soda to 4
quarts of water.

4. Dry all surfaces thoroughly after flushing out the drain with hot water.

5. Clean the outside with warm water, rinse, and dry.

Avoid Overloading

Never overload a refrigerator. An overloaded refrigerator cuts down air circulation

and is hard to clean. To prevent overloading, limit the amount of food you draw from
bulk storage at any one time. When you draw food that must be kept in the refrigerator,
do not ask for more than you can store in your ready-service refrigerator.

REFRIGERATED SALAD BAR

Mechanically refrigerated self-service cold food counters with refrigerated (salad bars)
storage compartments are procured in various sizes from three to six-pan compartment
capacity with either a single door or double doors underneath storage areas.
Operation

Usually the refrigeration to the top section of the salad bar is controlled by a separate
switch. This switch should be turned on approximately 1 hour before putting the salads
on the salad bar to allow the temperature to drop below 40°F.

Defrosting and Cleaning

The refrigerated salad bar should be defrosted and thoroughly cleaned after each meal.
Steps in defrosting and cleaning are as follows:

1. Turn off the switch of the top unit and allow it to defrost freely. Do not use any
metal objects to remove ice as it may puncture the coils.

2. To clean, remove all inserts of salad and dressings and return them to the vegetable
preparation room.

3. Discard the ice.

116
 4. Using the two-pan method, you should clean and rinse the salad bar and allow it to
air dry. Special attention should be given to the drain to make sure it is free of food
particles and is draining properly.

5. To clean the storage section of refrigerated salad bars, follow the same procedures
as for the top unit, paying particular attention to the drains and door gaskets.

6. Clean the sneeze shield, legs, and metal frame.

7. Clean the exterior of the salad bar as recommended by the manufacturer’s technical
manual.

REFRIGERATED MILK DISPENSERS

Refrigerated milk dispensers are used to dispense bulk milk. They are available with
one, two, or three dispensing units. The size of the mess and the number of personnel fed
will determine which milk dispensing unit is installed.

Operation of the Milk Dispenser

Before loading the machine, you should make sure the temperature range is from 32°F
to 40°F. Fill the milk dispenser. Cut the milk dispensing tubes with a clean, sharp,
disposable plastic knife at a point one-fourth of an inch below the dispensing valve
opening.
Care and Cleaning

After each meal, clean the exterior with a mild solution of hot detergent water, making
sure the base of the machine around the legs, metal seams, and the edges under the
dispenser opening and door are thoroughly cleaned. Remove and disassemble the metal
dispensing valve and run it through the dishwashing machine.

Defrost the milk dispenser when the ice reaches a thickness of one-fourth of an inch
using the procedures that follow:

1. Remove milk containers and place them under refrigeration while defrosting.

2. Turn off electric power supply; open the door and allow the machine to defrost
freely.

3. Do not use metal objects to dislodge ice.

4. After defrosting, clean the interior of the machine using the two-pan method. One
pan contains 2 tablespoons of liquid detergent to each gallon of hot water which is
applied with a nylon-bristled brush. Pan number two contains hot clean water or a
sanitizing solution which is applied with a clean sponge.

117
 5. Special attention should be given to the door gaskets to prevent damage and
deterioration.

6. After defrosting, cleaning, and wiping dry, you should turn the electric supply back
on.
SOFT-SERVE ICE-CREAM MACHINE

This machine is usually located in the messing area and the patrons serve themselves.
The CSs are responsible for preparing the ice-cream mix and cleaning and sanitizing the
machine. It is a must that the machine be sanitized before and after each use. Follow the
procedures of operation according to the technical manual or the operation procedures
posted next to the machine.

Cleaning After Each Use

Soft-serve ice-cream machines are very susceptible to a rapid bacterial growth of even
a little amount of ice-cream mix left in the machine or on any area the mix contacted.
Therefore, following the procedures in cleaning the machine are very important. The
procedures are as follows:

1. Empty freezer and flush with cold water until water runs clear.

2. Rinse again with warm water (120°F).

3. Place 1 gallon of hand-dishwashing detergent and water (140°F) solution into the
hopper. Move the switch to the WASH position and operate for 2 minutes. Draw off
water solution.

4. Rinse the interior of the machine with clean water.

5. Remove all detachable parts, freezer door assembly, and draw off plunger, beater,
blades, and beater drive shaft, mix feed assembly, and hopper cover assembly.

6. Wash all parts in detergent solution and brush all surfaces. Brush inside of freezing
cylinder; pay particular attention to the back wall and shaft connection. Rinse all parts
thoroughly and allow them to air dry.

7. Store all clean parts in a clean storage area until next use.
Sanitize the Machine Before Use

Prepare sanitizing solution according to package directions on calcium hypochlorite or

disinfectant foodservice. Wear disposable gloves when assembling the machine. Dip
each part in solution as machine is assembled. Pour remaining solution into the hopper
and brush solution over entire inside and lid. Let the machine runs for 1 minute to allow
the solution to run through the mixer. Drain completely and the machine is ready for use.
COFFEE MAKERS

118
 Coffee makers used in the GM are normally electric and may be of different types.
The automatic twin coffee urn and the automatic coffee maker are the types used most
often in general and private messes.
Operation of the Automatic Twin Coffee Urn

To brew coffee, turn thermostat dial to the BREW position. Observe dial thermometer
on front of the urn. When brewing temperature is at the high end of brew zone on dial,
the urn is ready to brew coffee.

Place paper filter or muslin leecher bag in brew basket. Place desired amount of
coffee in filter (use urn grind coffee in 3-gallon urn and regular grind in larger urns),
replace cover, and place brew basket in position over coffee liner. When using muslin
bag, be sure bag is soaked with cold water before using, and, if a new bag, be sure to
wash out all sizing with warm water. Swing spray arm from the PARK position over
brew basket and center spray nozzle over brew basket. Push timer knob. After the timer
has completed its cycle, the orange brewing light will go out, showing that the proper
amount of water has been sprayed. Within 3 minutes the brew basket with spent coffee
grounds should be removed from urn. To do so, swing spray arm back to center PARK
position. The spray arm should always be parked in this center position so expansion
drippage will go back into tank. Do not leave the brew basket in liner over 5 minutes, if
possible. Remove cover and brew basket and then always replace cover over coffee liner.
Rinse out muslin leecher bag and store in cold water until ready to use.

Keep the thermostat dial at the HOLD position during all standby periods so that the
urn is ready to brew coffee at any time, with no waiting. Merely turn thermostat to the
BREW position so the pilot light lights up during brewing. During shutoff periods, turn
thermostat to OFF. After all night or weekend shutoff, a minimum of at least 55 minutes
is required to obtain the proper brewing temperature. On twin models, water for tea may
be drawn from center faucet. Manual refill is required unless equipped with auto refill.

Care and Cleaning of a Coffee Urn

The procedures used in caring for and cleaning a coffee urn are as follows:
1. Always rinse urn immediately after each use.

2. Add small quantity of hot water, brush sides, and rinse with hot water until it runs
clean. Urn is now ready for next batch.

3. At end of each day clean and brush urn several times and then rinse thoroughly with
hot water.

4. Remove cleanout cap at end of coffee faucet (or take apart faucets that have no
caps) and scrub pipe leading to center of urn. Clean urn gauge glass with brush and urn
cleaner. Rinse thoroughly.

119
 5. Scrub the faucet and then rinse it thoroughly with hot water.

6. Place a gallon or more of fresh water in urn until next use.

7. Remove cover and clean. Replace cover and leave partly open.

8. Always remember to empty and rinse the urn with hot water before using again.

NOTE: On automatic urns, use any of the BREW, START, STOP, or RINSE
switches to spray scalding hot water into the liner for cleaning and rinsing. On
Pour-over urns, draw hot water directly from urn. Make sure urn water tank is kept nearly
full and the heat is on. Destaining a Coffee Urn The procedures for destaining coffee urns
are as follows:

1. Fill urn with destaining compound solution. Fill urn with water 175°F. Add
destaining compound (stain remover, tableware, in this ratio: 2 tablespoons per 5 gallons
of water or as directed by manufacturer).

2. Draw off mixture and repour. Open spigot and draw off 1 gallon; thoroughly remix
to allow mixture to come into faucet. Allow solution to stand for 1 hour at 170°F to
180°F. Stir occasionally.

3. Scrub urn liner and gauge glass. Use long-handled brush to loosen scales.

4. Clean faucet. Take faucet valve apart and clean all components. Soak in hot water
until reassembled.

5. Rinse and reassemble faucet valve. Rinse urn liner three or four times carefully
with hot water. Repeat until all traces of compound are removed.
Operation and Care of an Automatic Coffee Maker

The automatic coffee maker is designed to brew fresh coffee under strict, sanitary
conditions. Each coffee maker is made in units, and each unit may contain four or five
burners set in a single or double deck. The coffee maker has the ON/OFF switches and
the head control switches on the front. Glass or metal bowl containers are supplied for
the actual brewing of the coffee.

Automatic coffee makers let you pour fresh water into a reservoir at the top of the
device to obtain the same amount of hot coffee. In some models, gravity displacement of
preheated hot water by cold water is the working rule. In others, water is brought to a
boil before brewing a batch of coffee.

In using an automatic coffee maker, there are two phases in making coffee, preheating
and brewing. The preheating phase consists of the following steps. Slide the brewing
chamber under the spray head and place an empty decanter under it. Then open the top
cover and pour two decanters of cold water in the reservoir. Replace cover. Make sure

120
to plug into electric outlet of the correct voltage (specified on the nameplate of device).
It should be noted that the two decanters of cold water should be poured in before
connecting the plug. Preheat time is usually 18 minutes, and a signal light will turn on
when the water reaches the proper brewing temperature.

Brewing good coffee requires skill, technique, and the experience of the skilled
foodservice specialist. To properly brew coffee, remove the brewing chamber and place
one paper filter in it. Add required amount of the recommended coffee grind. Check to
be sure the coffee is evenly leveled before replacing brewing chamber. After the
preheating phase, add a decanter of cold water to the reservoir. Coffee will immediately
start to brew and flow into the decanter under the brewing chamber. When the flow
stops, you are ready to serve.

The simple care of your equipment makes an important contribution to the excellence
of your coffee service and efficient use of energy. All parts of the brewer that come into
contact with the coffee and coffee vapor should be kept immaculately clean. Decanters,
for example, should be thoroughly cleansed and rinsed free of detergent after each use.
Spray heads should be checked regularly for traces of lime or other deposits in or around
the holes. It is important to keep them clean. Paper filters should never be reused as they
can pick up odors from other foods. Discard after each brewing process. Be careful
where you store them.

Cloth filters should be rinsed after each brew and stored overnight in a vessel of fresh
cold water. Replace cloth filters often to ensure good-tasting coffee. A simple sniff test
should tell you when it is time to change. New cloth filters should be cleaned and rinsed
in very hot water to remove sizing (starch) and cloth odors. Do not use soap, bleaches, or
detergents since they transfer flavors.

If you brew in sealed filter bags with a stainless steel filter screen, rinse out the
holding cartridge and screen daily. Once a week soak the screen overnight in a solution
of urn cleaner and rinse thoroughly before reusing.
NONCARBONATED BEVERAGE DISPENSER

Noncarbonated beverage dispensers are usually located in the dining area to dispense
fruit juices, lemonade, iced tea, and other popular beverages. These dispensers have a
self-contained refrigeration unit and a circulating pump to keep the beverages thoroughly
mixed and to promote uniform cooling. The beverages are dispensed from a clear plastic
tank.
Operation

Fill the tank well in advance of the meal to assure a properly chilled beverage. To
facilitate chilling, beverages should be prepared in advance and prechilled. Ice should not
be used to chill the beverage at the time of preparation. As a beverage is being
dispensed, make sure to empty and clean the drip pans as necessary and wipe up any
spillage immediately. Turn off the refrigeration unit and circulating pump when the
machine is not in use or the tank is empty.

121
Cleaning

The dispenser should be disassembled and thoroughly cleaned after each meal or
when used. Use the following procedures:

1. Turn off the electric power supply to the machine.

2. Drain the beverage from the dispenser.

3. Disassemble the dispenser. Clean the exterior of the exposed dispenser using the
two-pan method. Make sure the base of the dispenser (legs) and the dispensing valve
openings are also cleaned.

4. Wash the removed items in warm detergent and water, rinse with clear hot water to
remove all traces of detergent, place in a sanitizing solution, and allow to air dry. Do not
use any abrasive cleaners and do not place in the dishwashing machine. Reassemble the
dispenser after it has air dried. An extensive weekly cleaning at the base of the dispenser
should be done that includes vacuuming inside the unit and wiping the exposed areas of
the dispenser. Make sure the power is off and exercise extreme caution when doing this
procedure.

BULK ICE-MAKING MACHINE

This machine requires little maintenance by foodservice personnel, but should be

closely monitored. Ice is easily contaminated; therefore, the following strict measures
should be taken:

• Only authorized personnel should have access to the machine. The ice
bin should be locked.
• The ice scoop should be stored dry outside the ice bin or inside the bin
at a height above maximum ice level.

A monthly cleaning is required. Thoroughly clean the interior of the bin with a mild
detergent and water solution using a nylon-bristled brush, then flush with clean water
until all traces of detergent have been removed. Adequate rinsing with water containing
2-ppm chlorine should be used to eliminate bad odors and the accumulation of film
deposits from detergents.

ICE-DISPENSING MACHINE

These machines are highly appreciated by the dining patrons, particularly during the
hot months of the year. It is recommended that the machine be secured except during
meals to make sure a sufficient supply of ice is available. If the machine becomes empty
during service, it should be immediately disconnected or turned off to prevent damage to
the dispensing assembly. To clean the machine without disassembling the unit, you must
shut off water, then pour 1 quart of mild detergent solution slowly into water reservoir
and let ice form from cleaning solution. Discard ice and shut off the machine. Flush the

122
ice-making system by adding 1 quart of clean water to the reservoir. Discard the ice.
Wash down the storage bin with a mild detergent solution and rinse thoroughly with
clean water containing 2-ppm chlorine. Areas in and around motor, insulation panels,
and condenser coils should be vacuumed to free them of lint and dust. Periodic weekly
checks for cockroach infestation should be made.
BENCH-TYPE CAN OPENER

Can openers are often neglected in foodservice. They are used so much that when
neglected they could be a ready source of food contamination. Therefore, keeping them
in good operating condition and in a high degree of cleanliness is a must. You must clean
the shaft daily and after every use. Simply, lift the vertical shaft out of the base and then
soak in hot detergent solution of 1 ounce to 1 gallon of water. Scrub with a stiff-bristled
brush. Rinse under hot running water. Let it air-dry. The equipment is now ready for
reuse or storing in clean drawer.

123
 QUESTIONS:
“Foodservice Equipment” Assignment 3

3-1. You should observe which of the following general precautions before
attempting to operate any foodservice equipment?

1. Know the telephone numbers and methods of reporting emergencies

2. Know the location of all safety and emergency switches
3. Determine the location of the fire extinguishers
4. Each of the above

3-2. As a general precaution, how should nonessential equipment operation be

handled in the event of continuous ship movement?

1. Caution should be exercised during operation

2. Rings and watches should be removed and any loose clothing eliminated
3. Equipment should only be operated if it is permanently mounted
4. Machine operation should be discontinued and equipment turned off

3-3. You are required to perform which of the following tasks before any major
cleaning evolution involving electrical equipment?

1. Tag-out the equipment according to the tag-out bill

2. Notify the medical department so that they can supervise the evolution
3. Notify your supervisor of the scheduled evolution
4. Attend safety training provided by the ship’s safety officer

3-4. Undue health hazards may be avoided when using foodservice equipment by
carrying out which of the following measures?

1. Follow correct operating procedures

2. Adhere to proper cleaning schedules
3. Give equipment adequate preventive maintenance
4. Each of the above

3-5. The size of steam-jacketed kettles varies over what specific gallon capacity
range?

1. 4 to 45
2. 4 to 80
3. 5 to 45
4. 5 to 80

124
3-6. When you are operating a steam-jacketed kettle, which of the following actions
can have dangerous consequences?

1. Filling the kettle three-fourths full

2. Closing the safety valve when you are turning on the steam
3. Cleaning the kettle with boiling water
4. Using the faucet at the bottom of the kettle to remove gravies or sauces

3-7. The safety valve on the steam-jacketed kettle is installed to accomplish what
purpose?

1. Add more heat to the kettle during cooking

2. Remove residual water from the steam within the kettle
3. Prevent the kettle from overheating
4. Keep the kettle from exploding by releasing excess steam pressure

3–8. Before starting griddle cleaning procedures, you must perform which of the
following preparation tasks?

1. Use a cellulose sponge to dry up any liquid

2. Remove grease traps and empty any grease
3. Get a container of hot soapy water for cleaning
4. Secure electrical power at the main source of power

3-9. The tilting skillet has a secondary thermostat that acts as a high-limit cutoff. It
disables the power circuit when the temperature exceeds what level?

1. 400°F
2. 425°F
3. 450°F
4. 460°F

3-10. The temperature of a deep-fat fryer should never exceed what maximum
level?

1. 380°F
2. 400°F
3. 425°F
4. 450°F

3-11. Frying foods containing excess moisture in a deep-fat fryer will produce which
of the following results?

1. Cause the grease to overheat

2. Cause the grease to smoke heavily
3. Cause the grease to boil over

125
4. Cause the grease to become rancid

3-12. How should you extinguish a fire in the deep-fat fryer when the automatic fire
extinguisher fails to set off automatically or manually?

1. Use water
2. Smother the fire with the deep-fat fryer cover
3. Use a CO extinguisher
4. Use a PKP extinguisher

3–13. Which of the following attachments for the electric food mixer should you use
for lightweight mixing?

1. Wire whip
2. Flat beater
3. Churn paddle
4. Dough hook

3-14. When mixing ingredients, you should never fill the mixing bowl beyond what
level?

1. 3/8 full
2. 1/2 full
3. 2/3 full
4. 3/4 full

3-15. When you mix ingredients too long after they are already properly blended,
you risk obtaining what result?

1. Excessive moisture due to the breakdown of the ingredients

2. A higher finished temperature than the desired temperature
3. Blended ingredients becoming separated
4. Excessive heat from mixing that reduces the moisture content of the blended
ingredients

3-16 Which of the following procedures should you perform first when operating the
automatic feed meat-slicing machine?

1. Set the dial for the desired thickness

2. Set the machine on automatic
3. Place the meat in the carriage and adjust the clamp
4. Turn on the power to the machine

126
3-17. All EXCEPT which of the following statements describe a safety feature of the
meat-slicing machine?

1. It is hard wired
2. It has a backup electric switch
3. It has a revolving disk knife
4. It should not be operated without the blade guard

3-18. Dough troughs are of various lengths and are designed to hold approximately
how many pounds of dough per foot of space?

1. 50
2. 70
3. 90
4. 100

3-19. How much time is required for a dough proofer to attain the proper
atmosphere for proofing?

1. 15 minutes
2. 30 minutes
3. 45 minutes
4. 60 minutes

3-20. For what reason is the platform on the bread slicer where the bread is placed
angled at 45 degrees?

1. So that bread will not be torn while being sliced

2. To guard your fingers from the blades
3. To allow half of the blades to go in the opposite direction
4. To force the bread down on the cutting blade

3-21. For which of the following meat-cutting jobs should you use a knife having a
long, wide blade?

1. Boning beef
2. Slicing raw steak
3. Carving cooked roasts
4. Slicing bread

3-22. You must maintain the wash water in single-tank dishwashing machines
within what specific temperature range?

1. 95°F to 125°F
2. 110°F to 125°F
3. 130°F to 140°F

127
4. 150°F to 160°F

3-23. For a double–tank dishwashing machine, what are the minimum (a) wash and
(b) rinse time intervals?

1. (a) 20 seconds: (b) 10 seconds

2. (a) 20 seconds: (b) 20 seconds
3. (a) 40 seconds: (b) 10 seconds
4. (a) 40 seconds: (b) 20 seconds

3-24. The majority of dishwashing machines in service in the Navy are what type?

1. Single-tank
2. Double-tank
3. Triple-tank
4. Manual, three-sinks

3-25. Steam tables most commonly found in most general and private messes today
are what type?

1. Those with water compartments heated by steam coils at 40 pounds of pressure or less
2. Those with steam-heated water compartments and dish warmers
3. Those with water compartments heated by immersion-electric heating elements
4. Those with water compartments and dish warmers

3-26. To keep a refrigerator operating at maximum efficiency, you must observe

which of the following rules?

1. Keep it clean
2. Do not overload it
3. Defrost it regularly and properly
4. Each of the above

3-27. What is the specific holding temperature range for the refrigerated milk
dispenser?

1. 38°F to 44°F
2. 36°F to 45°F
3. 32°F to 45°F
4. 32°F to 40°F

128
 CHAPTER 5

FOOD PREPARATION
The objectives of good food preparation are to conserve the nutritive value of the
food, to improve the digestibility, to enhance flavor, to develop attractiveness of the
original color, shape, form, and texture, and also to free the food from injurious
organisms and substances.

Remember that your job as a Culinary Specialist (CS) is of vital importance to your
organization; people must eat to perform their assigned jobs. The end result of your work
is for the food to be enjoyed by the patrons of your mess. To achieve this you must
continually strive for perfection in providing palatable, wholesome, and attractive food.

BASIC GUIDES

The quality of food prepared in the general mess (GM) and private messes can be
controlled to a great extent by the use of management tools. These tools provide
guidance for the CSs assigned by giving them a clear understanding of why they are there
and how they promote efficiency and quality. These tools are the General Mess Menu,
NAVSUP Form 1080, Armed Forces Recipe Service (AFRS), NAVSUP P-7, and the
Food-Preparation Worksheet, NAVSUP Form 1090.

FOOD-PREPARATION WORKSHEET

The first requisite to good cooking is an accurate knowledge of the items to be prepared.
CS personnel have specific instructions on which foods to prepare, the recipe card
number, the number of portions to prepare, time to start preparations, special instructions
from the leading CS, and serving instructions. These instructions are furnished on the
Food-Preparation Worksheet, NAVSUP Form 1090.
Required Use

This worksheet is required for all GMs; however, GMs having fewer than eight CSs
may use a modified food-preparation worksheet. GMs with only one CS are not required
to use the worksheet.
Preparation

The information listed on the food-preparation worksheet becomes a written directive

for passing information from the leading CS to the watch captains and other personnel
involved in the preparation of the food. The reverse side of the worksheet maybe used to
record temperature readings, meat breakout requirements, serving line and scullery
temperatures, and any additional information required by the food service officer. The
food-preparation worksheet is also a valuable record of the menu for the day. Information
that is a “must know” for any person supervising a GM can be posted on it. This
information includes the number of persons actually fed and the acceptability of specific
menu items. Also, this information is useful when the leading CS prepares future menus

129
and food-preparation worksheets. Refer to NAVSUP P-486, for detailed instructions on
preparing the NAVSUP Form 1090.

The food-preparation worksheet is retained for a period of 1 year for afloat activities
and 2 years for ashore activities.
Separate Worksheet

At most large GMs, food-preparation worksheets for each work center are prepared.
This eliminates the necessity to include the vegetable preparation room, bakeshop, and
meat preparation room on the reverse side of the food-preparation worksheet.

Modified Worksheet

GMs having fewer than eight CSs may use the modified NAVSUP Form 1090. GMs
with only one CS are not required to use the worksheet. The modified worksheet is
explained in detail in the NAVSUP P-486.

ARMED FORCES RECIPE SERVICE

The AFRS was developed as a joint effort of all branches of the armed forces with the
cooperation of the food industry. It consists of approximately 1,300 recipes and
variations that have been tested and proven. The AFRS also contains the following:

1. Guidance cards with product usage and preparation information

2. Color photographs of finished products and some stages of preparation

3. How-to-do-it line drawings

Standardized Recipes

All food should be prepared according to the recipes published in the AFRS or the
recipes that have been approved by the food service officer. Recipes in the AFRS are
printed on 5-inch by 8-inch colored cards.

The use of standardized recipes ensures high quality in food preparation. It also
eliminates guesswork and prevents variations in quality and quantity. The use of exact
amounts of the various ingredients produces accurate yields, prevents leftovers, and
promotes food cost control. The food items needed for the day’s menu are requisitioned
from the bulk issue room storekeeper by the watch captain.

YIELD.— Each recipe in the AFRS is designed to yield 100 portions; however, the
yield of some recipes is given in numbers or volume; for example, 2 pans, 8 loaves, and 6
1/2 gallons, depending upon the food to be prepared.

lNGREDIENTS.— Ingredients are listed in the order used. The specific form or
variety of each ingredient is indicated; for example:

130
 Flour, general-purpose

Flour, bread

The shape, size, or form of an ingredient is specified; for example:

Ham. cooked, 1/2-inch cubes

Onions, dry, sliced

Nuts, unsalted, chopped

Temperatures of ingredients are specified in many recipes. Descriptive terms are also
used; for example:

Egg whites (room temperature)

Liver, sliced, partially thawed

Water, warm (110°F)

MEASURES AND WEIGHTS.— Measures and weights are the exact amount of each
ingredient needed for 100 portions. Amounts are listed parallel to the list of ingredients.
Quantities of dry ingredients weighing more than 1/2 ounce usually are given as both
weights and measures. Most liquid ingredients are measured, not weighed.

On the right side of the Measures column, a blank space has been reserved for
inserting the actual amounts of ingredients needed to prepare the number of portions the
individual galley needs. These quantities may be inserted in pencil directly on the recipe
card and then changed as necessary.

METHOD.— Method describes how the ingredients are to be combined and cooked
and represents the best accepted cooking procedures. For example, the method will
describe the best way to sift dry ingredients together, to thicken a sauce, or to fold in
beaten egg whites. Methods are standardized since the same terms are used wherever the
same technique appears. The method contains directions for the most efficient order of
work, and eliminating unnecessary tools and equipment and unnecessary steps in
preparation.

The directions are stated in simple, clear terms for incorporating the ingredients. Each
step begins with an action verb such as dissolve, divide, drain, sift, flatten, cover, pour,
sprinkle, or bake. These words are the keys to proper procedures and should be closely
followed. Included under method are specific details such as cooking time.

131
 If certain ingredients are to be set aside for later use, this is so stated. For example,
“Gradually add sugar, beat to light, firm peak. Set aside for use in step 6.”

In a few instances, serving suggestions are included under method. For example,
“Serve with lemon sauce (Recipe No. K-9) or, if desired, top with whipped cream
(Recipe No. K-15).”

ABBREVIATIONS.— The basic abbreviations used in the AFRS are as follows:

Volume:

tsp = teaspoon(s)

tbsp = tablespoon(s)

c = cup(s)

pt = pint(s)

qt = quart(s)

gal = gallon(s)

Ingredients:

A.P. = as purchased

E.P. = edible portion (for example, potatoes, peeled, prepared for cooking)

Temperature:

F = degrees Fahrenheit

Weights:

oz = ounce(s)

lb = pound(s)

Containers:

cn = can(s)

cyl = cylinder(s)

jr = jar(s)

132
NOTES.— Notes appearing below the recipe contain supplemental information such as
possible substitutions for ingredients. Specific techniques are included to supplement
information contained in the Method column; for example, “If a candy thermometer is
not available, heat mixture in step 1 until it forms a soft ball in cold water.” Serving tips
also may be included as notes; for example, “If desired, top with whipped cream (Recipe
No. K-15) before serving.” “In step 3, if convection oven is used, bake at 350°F for 20 to
25 minutes.”

VARIATIONS.— Variations are included on many recipes. They describe different

ways to prepare the product and constitute a major addition to the total number of recipes
contained in the AFRS. Each variation is listed as a separate recipe in the index. For
example, the recipe for yellow cake includes these variations: (1) banana-filled layer, (2)
Boston cream pie, and (3) chocolate cream. The variations in this instance are named
according to the principal ingredient that alters the basic recipe. In other recipes where
different cooking techniques are used, these may determine the name of the variation.
Recipe Supplements

Recipe supplements are the written source that explains how to prepare certain types
of basic food. Included as recipe supplements are guideline cards, index cards, and index
of recipes.

GUIDELINE CARDS.— Guideline cards found in some of the recipe sections are
directions for preparing a basic type of food. For instance, a guideline card is used for
the makeup of piecrust for a one-crust pie and a two-crust pie. This guideline card
eliminates the need to repeat this information on the many different recipes using
piecrust.

Guideline cards in the salad, fish, poultry, and vegetable sections include breakout
information and the size, count, and recommended use of products. In other instances, a
guideline card is used instead of, or as a summary of, recipe information. For instance, in
the Vegetable section guideline cards are included for preparing canned, fresh, and frozen
vegetables.

INDEX CARDS.— Index cards are found at the beginning of each section and give a
complete listing in alphabetical order by type of food or dish of all recipes contained in
that section. An additional breakdown of the index is given for recipe variations. For
example, under Yellow Cake, nine variations are listed alphabetically. Indexes are
valuable tools for finding and using appropriate recipes.

INDEX OF RECIPES.— The separate, consolidated index of recipes in the AFRS is a

valuable reference for menu planners. The recipes in this index are grouped conveniently
as follows:

A. General Information

133
B. Appetizers
C. Beverages
D. Breads and Sweet Doughs
E. Cereals and Pasta Products
F. Cheese and Eggs
G. Cakes, and Frostings
H. Cookies
l. Pastry and Pies
J. Puddings and Other Desserts
K Desserts (Sauces and Toppings)
L. Meat
L. Fish
L. Poultry
M. Salad Dressings and Relishes
N. Sandwiches
O. Sauces, Gravies, and Dressings
P. Soups
Q. Vegetables
R. Meatless Entrée Alternatives

The General Information section of the AFRS has guidelines for basic information.
One of the first things you should do is become familiar with this section.
Recipe Adjustments

All the recipes contained in the AFRS are based on a standard of 100 portions.
However, the number of patrons served per day (or per meal) changes constantly,
requiring changes in the quantities of food being prepared. There are various types of
recipe adjustments.

YIELD ADJUSTMENT.— To increase or decrease a recipe to obtain the desired

number of portions, it is necessary to obtain a working factor. Multiply the quantity of
each ingredient by the working factor and convert the quantity into a workable unit as
follows:

Step 1. To obtain a working factor, divide the number of portions desired by 100.

Example:

348 (number portions desired) = 3.48 (working factor) or 348 ÷ 100 = 3.48.
100

Step 2. To determine the quantity of each ingredient to use, multiply the quantity of
each ingredient listed in the recipe by the working factor obtained in step 1.

134
Example:

1.25 cornstarch (quantity in recipe) x 3.48 (working factor) = 4.35 lb cornstarch

(quantity to use).

QUANTITY ADJUSTMENT.— A recipe maybe adjusted on the basis of the quantity

of an ingredient to be used. To obtain a working factor, divide the number of pounds you
have to use by the number of pounds required to yield 100 portions:

102 lb (quantity to be used)

30 (number pounds to yield 100 portions) = (3.40 working factor) or 102 ÷ 30 = 3.40.

SERVING SIZE ADJUSTMENT.— Recipes may be adjusted to yield a specific

number of portions of a specific size as follows:

Step 1. Divide the desired portion size by standard portion of the recipe.

Example:

3 oz (desired size)
4 oz (standard portion size) = 0.75 (size factor) or 3 ÷ 4 = 0.75.

Step 2. Multiply the number of portions needed by the size factor and divide the
answer by 100 to obtain the working factor.

Example:

348 (number portions desired) x 0.75 (size factor) = 261.

261 = 2.61 (working factor) or 261 ÷ 100 = 2.61.

100

Step 3. Multiply the quantity of each ingredient in recipe by the working factor to
determine the quantity to use.

Example:

2 lb cornstarch (quantity in recipe) x 2.61 (working factor) = 5.22 lb cornstarch

(quantity to use).

135
Volume Adjustment

First obtain a working factor by dividing the number of servings needed by 100 as
shown in step 2.

333 ÷ 100= 3.33.

Then multiply the quantity of each ingredient by the working factor. You will round
off to the nearest 1/4 teaspoon. For example, the recipe calls for 6 gallons of water per
100 portions. Portions to prepare are 333.

333 ÷ 100= 3.33 working factor (w/f).

Step 1. w/f x gallons (recipe)= gallons to use 3.33 w/f x 6 gl = 19.98 gl

Step 2. Decimal (of gal) x 4 = quart .98 gl x 4 qt = 3.92 qt

Step 3. Decimal (of quart) x 2 = pint .92 qt x 2 pt = 1.84 pt

Step 4. Decimal (of pint) x 2 = cup .84 pt x 2 c = 1.68 c

Step 5. Decimal (of cup) x 16= tablespoon .68 c x 16 tbsp = 10.88 tbsp

Step 6. Decimal (of tbsp) x 3 = teaspoon .88 tbsp x 3 tsp = 2.64 tsp

Step 7. Round off tsp decimal portion .64 tsp is equal to 3/4 tsp

Thus, the amount of water needed for 333 portions is 19 gl, 3 qt, 1 pt, 1 c, 10 tbsp, and 2
3/4 tsp.

CONVERTING AND ROUNDING CALCULATED QUANTITIES.— When a

recipe is increased or decreased or ingredient quantities are altered it is usually necessary
to convert the amount calculated to another unit of measure because, in most instances, a
part of a pound or a partial measure results. To obtain a usable figure, (a) round off the
calculated figure given in decimal pounds or measures to a whole figure or (b) convert
partial pounds into ounces and the partial measures into smaller units; for example,
partial quarts into cups.

CONVERTING FRACTIONAL WEIGHTS.— When increasing or decreasing

recipes, the division or multiplication of pounds and ounces is expressed as decimals to
simplify cumbersome fractions. For example, if the quantity of an ingredient is
multiplied by a working factor, the calculation is as follows:

1.25 lb x 3.48 (working factor)= 4.35 lb.

The quantity, 4.35 pounds, could be expressed by converting the fractional part of the
pound into ounces. Another means of converting fractional parts of a pound is to make

136
the calculation instead of consulting the conversion table. The part of the pound is
converted to ounces by multiplying the figure by 16 ounces.

For example: 0.35 x 16 oz = 5.60 oz.

ROUNDING OFF WEIGHTS.— After the part of the pound has been converted to
ounces (0.60), as indicated in the Recipe Conversion Card A-1(1), decimals may be
rounded off to provide whole units of weights or measure. Round off decimal weights as
follows:

Decimal Round to

0.01 to 0.12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0.00 or oz

0.13 to 0.37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 or 1/4 oz
0.38 to 0.62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 or 1/2 oz
0.63 to 0.87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75 or 3/4 oz
0.88 to 0.99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.00 or 1 oz

Using the previous example, the 4.35 pounds (or 4 pounds 5.60 ounces) would be
rounded to 4 pounds 5 1/2 ounces.

ROUNDING OFF VOLUME MEASURES.— When converting volume measures,

rounding off is also necessary. Round off volume measures as follows:

Calculated volume

Measure Round to

5 gal or more. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Closest full qt

5 1/4 qt to 4 3/4 gal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closest full cup
5 1/4 cups to 5 qt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closest full 1/2 cup
2 3/4 to 5 CUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closest full 1/4 cup

If the quantity being measured is less than a quart, it is more practical to adjust the
volume to tablespoon and teaspoon measures as follows:

Calculated volume

measure Round to

1 1/4 to 2 1/2 cups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Closest tbsp

9 tbsp to 1 cup 3 tbsp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closest tsp
5 to 8 tbsp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Closest 1/2 tsp
Under 5 tbsp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closest 1/4 tsp

To convert volume measures from gallons, quarts, cups, tablespoons, and teaspoons.

137
 Measuring Utensils.— Measuring utensils include both measuring spoons and volume
measuring pitchers. Measuring spoons are used for both liquid and dry ingredients and
come in four basic sizes. Measuring pitchers also come in four basic sizes (gallon, quart,
pint, and cup) and are described as follows:

1. The 1-gallon measure is used mostly for liquids. Markings go completely around the
utensil in 1-quart increments.

2. The 1-quart measure is used mostly for liquids. Markings go completely around the
utensil in 1-cup increments.

3. The 1-pint measure is used mostly for liquids. Measurement markings go completely
around the utensil in 1/2-cup increments.

4. The 1-cup measure is used for both liquid and dry ingredients. Measurement markings
are on both sides.

a. One side is marked in 1/4-cup, 1/2-cup, 3/4-cup, and 1-cup increments.

b. The other side is marked in 1/3-cup, 2/3-cup, and 1-cup increments.

Measuring utensils are accurate and easy to use. However, they must be used properly
to obtain high-quality products. utensils.

Even Balance Scale.— The even balance scale is normally used to weigh solid and dry
ingredients before mixing. It may also be used to weigh products shaped or formed
during preparation to ensure portion control. These parts are explained as follows:

1. The stand (or base) supports the entire mechanism.

2. The weight plate is where the counterweights are placed for weighing ingredients.

3. The location of the slide bar and the scoop plate.

4. The scoop holds ingredients being weighed. The scale must be balanced to the scoop
(as explained later).

5. The slide bar is divided into 1/4-ounce increments.

6. The basic scale, with scoop, can weigh amounts from 1/4 ounce to 16 ounces.

7. Counterweights placed on the weight plate weighing more than 16 ounces come in 1-,
2-, and 4-pound sizes. Maximum capacity of the scale with counterweights is 8 pounds.

138
 BALANCING THE SCALE.— The procedures used to balance the scale are as
follows:

1. Place scale on a level surface; then add scoop.

2. Move the slide bar weight completely to the left.

3. Balance the scale to the scoop. If the scale is badly out of balance, lead pellets
should be added beneath the weight plate.

USING THE EVEN BALANCE SCALE.— To use the scale proceed as follows:

1. Place wax paper in scoop.

2. Add weights, as required, to weight plate of scale.

3. Adjust slide as required.

4. Place ingredients on wax paper until scale balances.

5. Remove wax paper with ingredients from the scoop and set it aside.

CARE OF THE SCALE.— Wipe the scale with a damp cloth or sponge. Never put
the entire scale into the deep sink because it will eventually rust.
BASIC FOOD PREPARATION

Cooking is the art of preparing food in such away during the preparing and that it will
appeal to the eye, be tasty, be easily digested, and furnish nourishment. This section
provides information on food types, methods of cooking, and specific preparation
techniques that may be used to produce high-quality products. The sanitary aspects of
food preparation will be considered first.
SANITARY ASPECTS

Every precaution should be taken in the handling of food to prevent contamination.

The following paragraphs explain the procedures that must be followed during the
preparing and handling of food.
Safe Holding Temperatures for Cooked Foods

Protein foods that are not served immediately after they are cooked must be either
chilled to temperatures of 41°F and lower (but not frozen) or held at 140°F and higher.
Protein foods include meats, fish, poultry, gravies, meat stock, soups, eggs, custards,
cream fillings, and milk.

139
 Cooked protein foods that have been held at temperatures between 41°F and 140°F for
more than 4 hours should be considered unsafe for consumption and discarded. The
exception to this rule is reconstituted dehydrated egg mix. Reconstituted egg mix, if not
used immediately, must be placed in a tightly covered container in the refrigerator and
used within 1 hour. If foods are refrigerated at intervals and then intermittently permitted
to warm up, the total time of the various periods between 41°F and 140°F must not
exceed 4 hours. Protein foods composed of ingredients that are hand-peeled, hand-sliced,
or hand-diced after they are cooked should never be used as leftovers. The 4-hour limit
between temperatures of 41°F and 140°F is usually taken up in preparing, chilling, and
serving these foods. Such foods include, but are not necessarily limited to, potato,
chicken, turkey, macaroni, shrimp, and egg salads. Hand preparation not only increases
the chances of contamination, but also increases the length of time that these foods have
been held at room temperature.

You should not return opened jars or bowls of mayonnaise and cooked salad dressings
from salad bars to refrigerators for reuse at a later meal because of the danger of
miscalculation of total lapsed time that these salad dressings have been held at
temperatures between 41°F and 140°F. Instead, mayonnaise and cooked salad dressings
should be placed on the salad bar in small quantities and must not be returned from the
salad bar for reuse. If economically feasible, individual packets or servings of items such
as catsup, mustard, and mayonnaise should be used on the salad bar. This will
prevent waste and be more sanitary.
Care of Leftovers

When leftovers or warm foods are chilled, care should be taken to ensure prompt and
thorough chilling (41°F or below) to the center of the food mass. Foods that are to be
refrigerated should be placed in shallow pans to a depth of not more than 3 inches and
should be covered with lids or waxed paper. Large deep pans must not be used since the
center of the food may remain warm long enough to permit the growth of harmful
bacteria. Foods to be chilled must be placed in the chill box immediately and the
containers labeled with the time and date of preparation. Do not save leftovers for more
than 36 hours. Freezing leftovers is prohibited.

Nonpotentially hazardous leftovers are such items as individual commercially

packaged crackers, condiments, etc., which may be recovered from the serving line, but
not dining tables or trays, and be retained for reuse. Bottled condiments that do not
require refrigeration (e.g. mustard, catsup/ketchup, steak sauce, etc.) may be retained for
reuse. Unsliced, hard skinned fruits may be retained from serving lines for reuse
provided they are washed.

Leftover foods may be retained for 24 hours chilled (41°F or below) or for 5 hours if
maintained hot (140° F or above). The time limit(s) for leftovers begins when the food is
removed from hot holding. No temperature logs are required but foods must not be in the
“danger zone” between 41° F and 140° F for more than four total hours from time of
preparation until discarded.

140
EGGS

Eggs are a valuable food. They contain minerals, vitamins, and protein that build new
body tissues, repair old tissues, and regenerate the blood. Eggs are easily digested and, if
properly cared for and properly prepared, are delicate in flavor.

Forms of Eggs

The Navy procures eggs in the following forms:

• Fresh eggs are procured in two types, those that are no more than 30 days old and
those that have been treated with oil or other processing fluids so they have a storage
life of up to 6 months when refrigerated. Both types should be stored at 36°F to 38°F
in a dry, well-ventilated place away from strong odors such as onions.
• When several fresh eggs are to be used, break each one separately into a
small dish. Thus any egg that may have a strong odor or poor appearance can be
discarded without spoiling the others.
• Three kinds of frozen eggs are available: whole table, whole bakery, and
frozen egg whites. To thaw frozen eggs, place them in a chill or thaw box at 36°F to
38°F, or place them in a sink and cover the container with cold water. Thirty-pound cans
will take 2 days or more to thaw. A day or more is required to thaw 10-pound cans or
cartons at 36°F to 38°F. Do not thaw frozen eggs at room temperature. The outer edges
will reach a temperature where bacteria can grow, while the center of the container will
remain frozen.

Once the eggs are thawed, they are very perishable. Any leftover thawed eggs should
be placed in a tightly covered container in a refrigerator and used within 24 hours. Do
not refreeze thawed eggs.

Frozen whole table-type eggs should be used for scrambled eggs and omelets. The
bakery-type frozen eggs and frozen egg whites should be used only in baking. Egg
whites that are used in pie meringues must be baked as a precaution against food-borne
illness.

• Dehydrated egg mix is prepared from fresh whole eggs, nonfat milk, vegetable
oil, coloring material, and salt. The mix may be used to make scrambled eggs and
omelets, French toast, griddle cakes, and can be used in place of fresh eggs in baked
foods, Reconstituted egg mix, if not used immediately, must be placed in a tightly
covered container in the refrigerator and used within 1 hour. Dehydrated egg mix
cannot be used in uncooked dishes.

Egg Preparation

Guidelines for preparation of raw (fresh) eggs are contained in the NAVSUP P-486.
These guidelines are provided because fresh eggs that have been contaminated with
salmonella cause outbreaks of food-borne illness. The concern remains for batch
preparation of whole, fresh eggs for recipes that are uncooked or almost cooked.

141
 Principal policies for preparing eggs are summarized next:

• Eggs not cooked to heat all parts to 165°F or above will be individually cooked
and served only upon the request of a patron. Break no more than six eggs per
holding bowl. Use a clean sanitized bowl for each six eggs.
• Serving raw eggs and foods containing raw eggs is prohibited.
• Recipes requiring uncooked eggs such as mayonnaise, eggnog, and ice cream,
will be prepared using only pasteurized frozen table eggs.
• French toast will be prepared using only pasteurized frozen table eggs or
pasteurized dehydrated egg mix.
• Scrambled eggs in bulk amounts may be prepared using pasteurized frozen table
eggs, pasteurized dehydrated egg mix, or fresh shell eggs. If fresh shell eggs are
used, the following provisions are required:

Cook bulk amount of scrambled eggs in small batches, no more than 3 quarts, until
there is no visible liquid egg.

Hold until served at 140°F or higher, such as on a hot food table.

Do not add a batch of just cooked scrambled eggs to the batch held on a hot food
table. A clean sanitized container is required for each 3 quarts of scrambled eggs.

Cooking Methods

The AFRS has recipes with detailed procedures for cooking omelets and for fried
scrambled, poached, and soft- and hard-cooked eggs. Key steps for each of these are
summarized as follows.

FRIED EGGS.— Fried eggs are made using only fresh shell eggs. Cook them gently
until the white is firm. Fried eggs must be cooked at low temperatures. High
temperatures will cause them to be tough.

SCRAMBLED EGGS.— Scrambled eggs maybe made from fresh eggs, frozen whole
table eggs, or dehydrated egg mix. Chopped ham or shredded cheese can be added for
variety. If scrambled eggs are prepared in bulk for service from steam table inserts, you
must follow the provisions set forth in the Safe Egg-Handling Guidelines contained in
NAVMED P-5010.

HARD-COOKED EGGS.— Hard-cooked eggs may be served whole and unpeeled for
box or bag lunches, sliced or quartered in salads, as a garnish, or as an ingredient in
dishes such as potato salad. Simmer 10 to 15 minutes.

Place hard-cooked eggs in cold water immediately after cooking. This will prevent
the yolk from discoloring. Leave them in their shells if they are to be stored in the
refrigerator after cooking. They may darken if peeled ahead of time. Leftover, hard-

142
cooked egg yolks may be used to garnish green salads, potato salad, macaroni salad, or
cooked vegetables. To prevent the yolk from crumbling when slicing hard-cooked eggs,
dip the knife into cold water before slicing.

OMELETS.— Omelets are prepared from fresh whole eggs, frozen whole table eggs,
or dehydrated egg mix. The eggs are beaten just enough to blend the yolks and whites.
Crumbled bacon, shredded or ground cheese, chopped ham, mushrooms, or vegetables
may be added for variety. Individual portions of the eggs are poured onto a greased
griddle. The omelet is not stirred during cooking, but is lifted to allow the uncooked
portion to flow onto the hot griddle. When the omelet is set, it is folded in half or into
thirds, then must be allowed to fully cook.

FRUITS AND VEGETABLES

Fruits and vegetables are complex carbohydrates that provide important vitamins,
minerals, and dietary fiber. Additionally, they provide pleasant contrasts in flavor,
texture, and color to meals.
Fruits

Fruit is procured by the Navy in the fresh, frozen, canned, dehydrated, and dried
states. Fresh and processed fruits may be combined to vary the flavor and texture.

Every daily menu should include some fruit. It adds color, variety, food value, and a
refreshing flavor to any meal. Fruit is among the least expensive and the most nutritious
of all foods and has the distinction of being the most versatile. At breakfast fruit can be
served alone or in combination with cereal. It can be prepared as appetizers, salads, main
dishes, relishes, desserts, or snacks. It is excellent as a garnish and sometimes acts as
seasoning. Fruit is an active partner in many meat dishes. Baked ham and pineapple are
often teamed together, as are pork and applesauce, or turkey and cranberry sauce.

FRESH FRUITS.— Fresh fruits are highly perishable and must be handled carefully
to maintain quality. Some fruits are available year-round. Others are available
seasonally, such as melons and berries.

Before fresh fruits are used, wash them thoroughly to remove any insect spray that
may be present. If possible, pare fresh fruits immediately before they are used. When
pared and left exposed to the air, some fresh fruits become discolored. Discoloration may
be prevented by covering the fruit with lemon juice, or by dipping the fruit in a
antibrowning agent. Follow the directions on the guideline cards for antibrowning agents
or those on the actual container.

FROZEN FRUITS.— Frozen fruits are convenient and available year-round. Little
preparation is needed, there is no waste, and less storage space is required than for fresh
fruit. Most frozen fruits are packed with sugar or syrup. Thaw them in the unopened
container and use immediately to maintain quality.

143
 The Navy procures frozen fruits such as berries (strawberries, boysenberries), cherries,
and peaches. Frozen fruits are closest to the fresh counterpart in flavor and appearance.
They may be thawed by placing the
unopened container in the chill space 24 hours before they are to be used. This allows the
frozen fruit to thaw completely and more evenly throughout.

CANNED FRUITS.— Canned fruits require no refrigeration and are available all
year. They may be packed in water, syrup, or natural juices. All canned fruits should be
served chilled.

DRIED FRUITS.— Dried fruits, such as raisins, apricots, prunes, and dates, can be
used for pastry and pie fillings and as ingredients in cakes, cookies, breads, sweet doughs,
and salads. Wash dried fruits thoroughly before they are used. They may be soaked to
reduce cooking time, but avoid a long soaking period because it produces a watery,
asteless fruit. Cook raisins and dates without soaking. If sugar is to be added, it should
be at the end of the cooking period. If it is added at the beginning, it interferes with the
absorption of water.

DEHYDRATED FRUITS.— Dehydrated fruit, such as applesauce, maybe used in

some recipes when fresh or canned fruit is not available. Check the AFRS for directions.

Dehydrated fruits, such as instant applesauce, apple slices, and diced apricots, are
readily reconstituted by adding a proportionate volume of water to a specified weight of
the particular dehydrated fruit. Like the dehydrated vegetables discussed earlier,
dehydrated fruits because of their small weight and volume are convenient to store.
Dehydrated fruits maybe used for desserts such as puddings, pies, and cakes, or they may
be reconstituted and served at any meal.

Vegetables

Vegetables of all types are nutritional necessities in a well-balanced diet. In addition

to the contribution of important minerals and vitamins, vegetables add color, flavor, and
interest to meals. All too frequently vegetables are rejected or left uneaten when they are
poorly cooked; consequently, they are not pleasing in appearance or flavor. A vegetable
can become unpopular simply from being overcooked, watery, or poorly seasoned.
Furthermore, the food value may be lost or diminished by improper handling and
cooking. Vegetables are bought by the Navy in the following forms: fresh, frozen,
canned, dried, and dehydrated.

FRESH VEGETABLES.— Most raw fresh vegetables have waste or portions that are
not edible. When you peel, scrape, brush, trim, or cut these vegetables, it is important not
to destroy or damage edible portions and especially not to lose the valuable nutritional
elements that are usually contained close to the outer skin or peel. Select vegetables
about equal in size, or cut them into pieces of equal size. Then all the pieces will be
cooked uniformly in the same length of time. Plan for cooking vegetables with the peel
on whenever possible, especially potatoes. If potatoes must be peeled, do it very carefully
so as to make thin peelings. Much of the food value in a potato lies close to the skin.

144
 Washing.— Wash all fresh vegetables thoroughly. Use a brush to clean celery,
carrots, beets, potatoes, turnips, parsnips, or any vegetable that is pulled or dug from the
soil. Tightly grown blossoms, heads, or stem-type vegetables such as asparagus,
broccoli, cabbage, cauliflower, and brussels sprouts will harbor worms and insects that
may not be dislodged by casual washing. Soak vegetables of this type in cold saltwater
(1 tablespoon salt to 1 quart of water) for 1/2 to 1 hour and then rinse thoroughly. Turn
cauliflower blossoms end down in the soaking water; cut cabbages in halves or quarters
and remove the cores.

Wash leaf-type vegetables such as spinach, collards, kale, and turnip greens in several
changes of cold water to remove dirt and sand particles. Lift these vegetables from the
water instead of draining the water off. The dirt and grit will remain in the washing pan
or sink. If this water is drained or poured off, the dirt will remain on the vegetables.

Retaining or Restoring Freshness.— After vegetables have been washed clean, keep
them in a cool storage place until they are to be prepared. Wilted vegetables can be
refreshened by placing them in ice-cold water to which one-half cup of vinegar per gallon
of water has been added.

Keep the time between preparation and cooking as short as possible. Valuable
vitamins are lost when vegetables are soaked too long or are allowed to remain at warm
temperatures for several hours.

FROZEN VEGETABLES.— Frozen vegetables have the appearance and very nearly
the flavor of fresh vegetables. Like the dehydrated vegetables discussed previously, they
are easy to prepare; the precooking tasks have been done. Frozen vegetables have been
cleaned and trimmed and are ready to use.

CANNED VEGETABLES.— Vegetables that are canned have been cooked in the
container and need only to be brought to the boiling temperature just before they are
served. Never boil a canned vegetable; always avoid overheating or overcooking. The
liquid from tamed vegetables should be saved and used in soups, sauces, or gravies.
Follow the AFRS guidelines for heating canned vegetables.

DRIED VEGETABLES.— A variety of dried vegetables are used in Navy messes.

Dried beans and peas are used in soups and entreés (supplemented with meats such as
ham, bacon, or ground beef as in chili con came). Dried garlic is used as seasoning.
Dried onions are used extensively in salads and cooking.

DEHYDRATED VEGETABLES.— Dehydrated vegetables are now widely used and

popular in Navy messes. Their small weight and volume make them convenient to store.
They are easy to prepare. All the precooking tasks associated with raw vegetables have
been done for you. They are peeled, diced, sliced, or chopped, and ready to use. They
eliminate waste and ensure portion control.

145
 Precooked potato granules, sliced raw potatoes, raw cabbage, chopped onions, and
green peppers are some of the dehydrated vegetables used by the Navy. They are
reconstituted by adding a measured quantity of the vegetable to a measured volume of
water. The temperature of the water will vary (lukewarm or cool) with the specific
dehydrated vegetable being reconstituted as will the length of time required for the
reconstituting process (15 to 30 minutes). Recipes in the Q (vegetable) section of the
AFRS give more detailed instructions for reconstituting dehydrated vegetables.
Cooking Methods

Vegetables may be baked or sautéed they may be simmered or steamed; they may be
served with butter or covered with an appropriate sauce; or, after they are simmered or
steamed, they may be creamed, mashed, or sautéed.

The basic methods of cooking vegetables are baking, steaming, and simmering.

SIMMERING.— Vegetables are simmered in water with seasonings in steam-jacketed

kettles or covered stockpots. Vegetables will lose their fresh appearance, flavor, and
nutritive value if they are overcooked.

STEAMING.— Steaming is an excellent method of cooking most fresh vegetables. It

is faster than other methods and helps to preserve the fresh appearance and nutritive value
of the vegetables. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for cooking time and methods for
each kind of vegetable. Guidelines for steam cooking are given in the AFRS.

BAKING.— Cook the vegetables in dry heat in an oven with the addition of little or
no water. Dry baking is usually limited to potatoes and squash.

OVEN FRYING.— Some vegetables may be parboiled and then placed in a well-
greased roasting pan in the oven to complete cooking. Hash browned and home fried
potatoes may be oven fried.

DEEP FAT FRYING AND PANFRYING.— Potatoes, onions, and other vegetables
such as eggplant, cauliflower, and okra may be french fried. Vegetables that are deep
fried and pan-fried should be tender and cut into uniform size pieces. Pan-fried
vegetables are cooked in a small amount of fat on top of the range. Sautéing is another
term for pan-frying.

STIR-FRYING.— Carrots, celery, cabbage, sweet peppers, mushrooms, dried and

green onions, broccoli, and cauliflower may be stir-fried. Stir-frying is sautéing in hot
salad oil or shortening in progressive steps. The cooked vegetables are crisp and crunchy
in texture.

PROGRESSIVE VEGETABLE COOKERY.— To make sure a continuous supply of

freshly cooked vegetables is available on the serving line, cooking periods must be
staggered so that several small batches of vegetables will be cooked one after another.
This also helps control waste because a new batch will be started only if it is needed.

146
 Short cooking time is best. Cook only a small quantity of vegetables at a time.
Vegetables must be cooked in the shortest time possible and in a small amount of water.
Never use baking soda to preserve color. Overcooking, cooking in too much water, or
using soda in the water destroys the nutrients you are trying to conserve.

In fact, undercook rather than overcook vegetables. This is especially applicable

when you know the cooked vegetable is to be placed on the steam table or is to have a
second heating or cooking period, such as creaming, scalloping, or baking.

To determine if the vegetable is done, press pieces of the vegetable between the thumb
and forefinger and taste the sample. If it is done, the vegetable should be tender but have
a definite bite quality.

SALADS

Salads have an important place on the menu. They contribute something both
nutritious and refreshing to the lunch or dinner meal. Fruit salads and vegetable salads
are the most popular. They also introduce valuable vitamins, necessary minerals, and
color into the meal.

Salads can be made quickly and easily if a few simple rules are followed. This is
equally true for individual salads that often seem more appetizing and receive greater
acceptance than a large dish of salad. After a crisp, refreshing, and attractive salad is
produced, it should be served so that none of this attractiveness is lost. Select a cool
place for assembling and serving the salad. Bring individual salads from the refrigerator,
a few at a time, so that they will remain crisp.
Nearly all salads contain some fresh, crisp greens, at least as a garnish; beyond that,
however, the range of ingredients is very wide. A salad may consist of greens tossed
with dressing, or it may consist of a combination of vegetables or fruits (or both). There
are also hearty salads that may be used as the main dish of the meal.

SALAD GREENS.— Select your salad greens carefully. You have a wide choice of
greens that are suitable for a salad foundation—lettuce, endive, escarole, young spinach,
and cabbage. These may also be used as one of the main ingredients of the salad itself.
Parsley and the inner tender leaves of curly endive are good for a garnish.

Sort, trim, wash, and crisp the greens before making the salad. Wash them carefully
to free them of sand and earth particles. Drain them well. Hand cut the lettuce and
cabbage into strips or pieces. Place the prepared greens in pans, cover them with wax
paper or a damp cloth, and refrigerate. They should be drained thoroughly and be free of
excess water before they are placed in the serving line. They should be one of the very
last parts of the meal to be prepared.

SALAD VEGETABLES.— Fresh, canned, or dehydrated vegetables may be used for

salads. Select the fresh vegetables with care. Wash them thoroughly.

147
 Trim and peel them, if necessary, and cut them into uniform sizes. Cook those that
need cooking. When canned vegetables are to be used in a salad, the liquid drained from
the cans should be reserved and used in soups, sauces, or gravies. The canned vegetables
may be marinated in French dressing before being used in a salad. Dehydrated cabbage,
green peppers, onions, and string beans may be reconstituted and used in salads. Salads
used for the main course for lunch or dinner should be substantial and provide the food
values comparable to any other main dish.
Salad Dressings

The salad dressing is as important as the salad itself. Each type of dressing can take
on a new flavor by the addition of different seasonings and herbs.

SALAD DRESSING INGREDIENTS.— A variety of seasonings can be added to the

oil and acid basic ingredients (usually lemon juice or vinegar) of a salad dressing to
produce different kinds of dressings that complement a specific type of salad.

Salad Oil.— Salad oil is an important ingredient in salad dressings. It must be fresh.
Salad oil can become rancid and have an unpleasant taste if it is exposed to light, air, and
heat. Oil will mix temporarily with liquid after being shaken or beaten, but if the mixture
allowed to stand, it will separate again into layers.

Acid.— Fruit juices or vinegar are the acid ingredients in salad dressings. Pineapple
or lemon juice can be used instead of vinegar in some recipes.

Seasonings.— Salt, pepper, and sugar are the usual seasonings in salad dressings.
Other seasoning such as mustard, ground red pepper, and herbs add color and flavor.

SALAD DRESSING PREPARATION.— The basic rule in making salad dressings is

to make them in advance so that the seasoning will be well blended. Galley-prepared
mayonnaise tends to separate if it is not properly made. Some important things to
remember are the following:

• Have ingredients at room temperature before mixing

• Combine ingredients exactly as directed in the AFRS
• Make sure the oil is incorporated each time it is added before adding more oil
• Use a bowl that is deep enough to allow the mixture to be well beaten

Mayonnaise should not be stored where it could freeze, nor should it be kept at warm
temperatures. The container should be covered and refrigerated when not in use.
Mayonnaise will curdle or separate if the oil is added too fast or if the mixture is beaten
too little after each addition of oil. If mayonnaise separates, it may be reformed by
adding it very gradually to egg yolks (use one egg yolk per gallon of mayonnaise).

NOTE: Only pasteurized frozen eggs are to be used in galley-prepared mayonnaise or

salad dressings.

148
 As a rule, salad dressing should be added to a fruit or raw vegetable salad not more
than a few minutes before you are ready to serve the salad. If you are preparing salads to
be set out on the salad bar, place the various types of salad dressings in separate
containers so that each patron may have a choice. Remember to use small-sized
containers for the dressings. Any salad dressing that is left over after the meal has been
served should be discarded.

RELISHES

Relishes may be used in place of, or with, a salad. The AFRS contains guidelines for
relish preparation. Raw carrots sliced lengthwise, celery, radishes, cauliflower flowerets,
green pepper rings, olives, and pickles make excellent relishes and increase the
attractiveness of a meal. All raw vegetables, except leafy varieties, should be refrigerated
in icy cold water for an hour or more. This should be done before they are served. This
process makes the vegetables crisp and tender.

HORS D’OEUVRES

Hors d’oeuvres are appetizers that are nippy, high-flavored mixtures of various foods
designed to be eaten from the fingers or from toothpicks. Preparation and service of hors
d’oeuvres are customarily associated with private messes.

When hors d’oeuvres are served, they are normally served before formal or informal
meals. Hors d’oeuvres are also served at elaborate functions where, as a rule, a meal is
not served

Generally, there are two types of hors d’oeuvres: cold and hot. Some examples of cold
hors d’oeuvres are ham rolls, fish balls, deviled eggs or shrimp, cheese carrots, or stuffed
celery. Hot hors d’oeuvres are usually broiled, baked, or fried in deep fat and served fresh
from the broiler, oven, fryer, or a chafing dish.

Dips and spreads are sometimes offered with hors d’oeuvres. They can accompany
them or be used to complement various crackers or vegetables. Most of the different dips
and spreads resemble salad dressings in their composition. Therefore, the same
precautions should be followed during preparation, serving, and storing.

SANDWICHES

Sandwiches make satisfying meals and are especially convenient to serve in case of an
emergency. This is true under battle feeding conditions when personnel are isolated from
regular messing areas, or under similar circumstances. When sandwiches are prepared,
remember that they will probably be the primary item of that particular meal and should
be substantial. Whenever possible, sandwiches should be served with a beverage, fruit or
fruit juice, and raw vegetables that can be eaten from the hand. There is no limit to the
interesting and tasty food combinations that can be used for filling sandwiches. Many
good recipes are listed in the AFRS.

149
Sandwich Ingredients

All sandwiches will have a bread of some sort. In addition to the bread, a sandwich
will include one or more of the following: a sandwich filling such as egg salad; sliced
cold meats; or a spread such as deviled ham; and individual condiments such as catsup.

BREADS AND ROLLS.— Sandwiches may be made with any kind of bread.
Varying the bread helps to avoid monotony. The kind of bread used should be
appropriate for the type and flavor of the filling to be used. There is no set rule for such
combinations as the choice is determined by individual taste. Sandwiches may be served
hot or cold.

Breads that are used most often include white, rye, pumpernickel, and whole wheat as
well as various types of rolls and buns.

When you are making sandwiches, use slightly firm bread. Day-old bread is preferable
because it is more easily handled than freshly baked bread. Bread requires special
handling to prevent it from becoming stale. To prevent moisture loss or absorption,
observe the tips listed next on wrapping and storing bread and rolls:

• Store bread in a moisture proof wrapper.

• Store bread at moderate temperatures (75°F to 85°F) in a clean, dry
space away from food.
• Maintain a clean, dry storage place for the bread and rolls. Separate
from other stores to prevent absorption of odors and flavors.
• Bread should not be stored in chill spaces because it will stale rapidly.
However, freshly baked and cooled bread and rolls may be wrapped in moisture proof
material and frozen for later use.

SANDWICH FILLINGS.— The choice of fillings should be determined either by

when the corresponding sandwiches with be eaten or by how the filling is used.
For example, they may be served in sandwich meals (box lunches), as appetizers, or as a
food item on a regular menu or fast-food serving line.

Some of the types of fillings are salad mixtures such as tuna, egg, and ham. Such
mixtures as ground meat, chopped egg, fish or shellfish, or any filling containing
mayonnaise or salad dressing should never be made for sandwich meals. These foods are
likely to be contaminated with bacteria that will grow rapidly at room temperature and
can cause illness.

When used as fillings, these meats should be cooked according to AFRS recipes.
After being cooked, the meat should be covered and refrigerated without slicing until just
before the sandwiches are to be prepared. If the meat is sliced ahead of time, it will dry
out even if it is covered and refrigerated. When you are ready to prepare sandwiches,
slice the meat thinly and remove gristle and excess fat. Thinly sliced sandwich meats are
more tender and juicy than thickly sliced meats. Slice only enough for immediate use.

150
Sandwich Production

Have all sandwich material ready, allow ample work space. Sanitary procedures and
precautions must be strictly followed in the preparation and serving of sandwiches. Some
of these procedures and precautions are listed next.

• Fillings for cold sandwiches are highly susceptible to bacterial contamination, and
every precaution should be taken when preparing and serving sandwiches. Never
allow sandwiches to stand at room temperature for more than 4 cumulative hours.
This 4-hour period includes the time spent chopping or dicing food after it has been
cooked. If the sandwiches will not be consumed immediately, they must be held at
temperatures below 41°F.

When you are refrigerating fillings, they should be placed in shallow pans so that the
contents will be quickly and completely chilled. Whenever possible, sandwiches should
be made to order. Sandwiches intended to be eaten hot, such as a reuben or hot roast
beef, must be prepared upon customer request or immediate before serving in a feeding
operation such as a GM.

• Never place or prepare sandwiches on a cutting board or surface that has been
used to prepare raw chicken or turkey.
• Keep sandwich counter and equipment thoroughly clean and sanitized.
• Clean chill boxes and accessories frequently to avoid mold and undesirable odors.
• Use sanitized utensils instead of hands whenever possible.
• Requisition and prepare food in the quantities needed so that there will be a rapid
turnover and as few leftovers as possible.
• Keep the time between preparation and consumption to a minimum.
• Pack or serve lettuce, tomatoes, and spreads used in bag or box lunches
separately.
• Keep the filled sandwiches at a temperature of 41°F or lower if possible.
• Avoid leftovers. Do not use any foods for sandwich fillings, including leftover
meat and eggs, that have been held at 40°F or over for more than 30 minutes. Bacteria
grow more rapidly in some foods than in others.
• Immediately following the preparation, wrap each sandwich separately and
refrigerate. Never use a dampened cloth or towel to keep bread or sandwiches moist.
• Avoid stacking a large number of sandwiches or placing sandwiches in cardboard
boxes. This method actually insulates the food and prevents it from cooling as fast as
it should to the desired storage temperature.
• When sandwich meals are prepared for box lunches, the boxes should be marked
in the following manner to make sure customers know the safe time limit within
which the meals should be eaten:

Date and time issued:

Keep under refrigeration or eat by:

(within 4 hours after time of issue)

151
Prepared by:
(initials/time/date)

Box Lunch Assembly

For efficient assembly of box lunches, devise a checklist of all items to be included
and post where it is plainly visible to those responsible for filling the orders. Be sure to
list items to be served with the meals, such as salt and pepper, cream substitute and sugar,
and other appropriate condiments and spreads.

Because choices of food items for box meals are limited, menu planners may find it
difficult to include a wide variety of food. The AFRS has many recipes for sandwiches,
breads and rolls, desserts, and relishes that will help give variety to menus. Selections
from the following food items are suggested for inclusion in breakfast, lunch, or dinner
box or bag meals:

a. Fruit

b. Juice

c. Cereal, ready-to-eat, instant or cold

d. Breads, pastries, rolls, butter, or jam

e. Eggs (especially hard-boiled)

f. Soup

g. Cheese

h. Meat

i. Relishes (raw vegetables, pickles, or olives)

j. Condiments and salad dressings

k. Accompaniments (cranberry sauce or applesauce)

l. Desserts (pudding, yogurt, or bakery items)

m. Milk

n. Beverages (cold or hot)

o. Raisins, nuts, or granola-type bars

Suggested menu patterns for box meal menus can be found in NAVSUP P-486.

152
Soups

Soup is a tasty, popular food. It is nutritious, wholesome, and stimulates the appetite.
Soup should be served at least once a day in cold weather, if practical, and at least every
few days regardless of the weather. A key rule in serving soup is that it be served as hot
as possible.

GALLEY-PREPARED SOUPS.— There are four basic kinds of soup:

1. Light soups are made from clear, unthickened stock.

2. Heavy soups are made from stock vegetables, rice, or pasta such as noodles,
macaroni, and spaghetti.

3. Cream soups are made with milk, stock, or vegetables and lightly thickened. They
should be heated to serving temperature, but never allowed to boil.

4. Chowders are made with fish, shellfish, or vegetables.

Stock.— Stock is made by cooking meat bones, poultry bones and trimmings,
vegetables, and seasonings in water. Alternately, it is made by using dehydrated soup
and gravy bases, which saves time, labor, and space. These various bases contain salt;
therefore, the amount of salt added should be determined by careful tasting during the
cooking process.

The standard stock items, instant beef, chicken, or ham soup and gravy base, may be
reconstituted for use in any soup recipe. These powdered bases are seasoned and when
they are reconstituted in boiling water they have the characteristic flavor of beef, ham, or
chicken broth. The proportions that should be used to reconstitute these bases are
included in the A (miscellaneous) section of the AFRS.

Vegetables.— The vegetables most commonly used for soups are celery, carrots, peas,
beans, onions, green peppers, and tomatoes. Vegetables are cut into small cubes, or into
match like strips that are called julienne. Vegetables used in soups should be cooked
according to the instructions given in the AFRS for soup.

Thickeners.— Soups are thickened by adding a roux or a paste. A roux is a mixture of

fat and flour. A cold, light roux is usually added to soups that are to be thickened. In
onion soup, for example, the cold roux is stirred into the hot soup stock and the soup is
cooked until no taste of raw starch remains. Roux may be prepared ahead of time and
refrigerated. A roux maybe prepared by two methods: the cold roux method or the warm
roux method. Cold roux is prepared by combining flour with liquid fat, then stirring until
a smooth paste is formed. In the warm roux method the fat is first melted over low heat
and then the flour is added.

153
 A paste is prepared by whipping flour or cornstarch into a cold liquid (usually water)
and then adding it to hot liquid that is cooked until it thickens. In the final step of
preparing bean soup, for example, a flour and water paste is stirred into the soup that is
then cooked for 10 minutes.

GALLEY PREPARED SOUPS.— The individual recipe in the soup section of the
AFRS specifies the types and amounts of seasonings that should be used. When meat or
chicken stock is made, the flavor from the ingredients used is very concentrated;
therefore, it is essential to use accurate amounts of the ingredients. Just before the soup is
to be served, check it again for proper seasoning. It is better to add more seasoning to
the stock or soup a short time before it is served, rather than have a soup so highly
seasoned it is unpalatable. If the taste check indicates that the soup is too salty, add
sliced raw potatoes to the soup, bring soup to a simmer for a few minutes, then remove
the potatoes.

COMMERCIALLY PREPARED SOUPS.— Dehydrated, instant, condensed, and

ready-to-serve soups are not only easy to prepare but they are also time and space-savers.
Dehydrated soups such as chicken noodle, green pea, and tomato vegetable are prepared
by merely adding the specified amount of boiling water. Then the mixture is covered and
allowed to simmer for the length of time specified on the container. The finished product
is similar in appearance and flavor to the same type of soup made with raw food items.
Sauces

Sauces add to the appearance and flavor of food, but they should never be
overpowering. Sauces should be handled carefully to avoid contamination and
food-borne illness. Store in a chill space and never hold them longer than 4 cumulative
hours at temperatures between 40°F and 140°F.

CREAM OR WHITE SAUCE.— Cream or white sauces are made with butter or
margarine, flour, and milk and have many variations. These sauces must be
cooked over low heat. They require constant stirring to avoid scorching. The sauce is
cooked until it coats the back of the spoon. Thin and medium white sauces are used to
bind ingredients together in scalloped meat, fish, egg, and
vegetable dishes. Medium white sauce may also be served over food.

BUTTER SAUCES.— A white sauce with a high percentage of butter and little or no
seasoning other than salt is considered a butter sauce. This sauce is used
principally with green vegetables, such as asparagus and broccoli, and with fish and
shellfish.

OTHER SAUCES.— Sauces served with meat, chicken, seafood, omelets, and
spaghetti are prepared according to recipes in the AFRS. Also, commercially
prepared sauce mixes are available. These include basic tomato, sweet and sour, cheese,
barbecue, taco, and enchilada sauces. Directions for use are found on the containers.

154
Gravies

Any gravy served should go with the food it is intended to compliment. The O section
of the AFRS contains many recipes to be served with meat and poultry. Thickened
gravies are made by adding flour to the pan drippings left after roasting and browning
meats. This flour mixture forms a roux that is then
added to stock. The gravy is stirred and simmered until the mixture thickens. There are
numerous types of gravies. A good gravy should be as smooth as
cream.

CREAM GRAVY.— Cream gravies are made by adding milk to the roux instead of
stock or water. Cream gravy is usually served with chicken or ham.

NATURAL PAN GRAVY.— Natural pan gravy (au jus) is unthickened gravy that is
usually served with roast beef. Water or stock is added to the meat drippings and the
gravy is allowed to simmer until hot. BROWN GRAVY.— Brown gravy is prepared by
cooking the flour and fat mixture (roux) until it is brown. Brown gravy is the basic gravy
used to make giblet, mushroom, onion, and vegetable gravies. Brown gravy mix is a dry
mix that requires only the addition of hot water.
Gravy Preparation

Thickeners, liquids, fats, and seasonings are combined to form gravies. Certain tips
will assist you in preparing and serving gravies.

THICKENERS.— To make smooth gravy, a roux must be used for thickening. Flour
or other starch will form lumps if added directly to hot liquid. To make brown gravy, the
flour and fat mixture (roux) is cooked until it is a rich, brown color. The roux is added to
the hot stock and the mixture is simmered until it is thickened. To make cream gravy, the
roux is cooked, but not browned. The roux is added to milk or light stock and cooked
until thickened and no taste of the starch remains.

LIQUIDS.— If a large amount of gravy is prepared, there should be enough stock to

ensure a good flavored gravy. Tomato juice or the liquid saved from mild-flavored
cooked or canned vegetables (beans, peas, carrots) can be substituted for part of the
water. Reconstituted soup and gravy base can be substituted for all or part of the stock.
Since salt is an ingredient in these bases, no additional salt is added until cooking is
completed. The gravy should then be tasted and salt added only if necessary.

SEASONINGS.— Seasoning the gravy is important. Avoid overseasoning. Add salt

and pepper in moderate amounts and taste the gravy during preparation to see if more is
needed.

PREPARATION AND SERVICE TIPS.— If lumps should occur when you are
making gravy, strain the gravy or whip vigorously with a wire whip. If gravy is not to be
served immediately, cover the pan and keep it hot; or it may be refrigerated and reheated
when ready to use. Gravy should be handled carefully to avoid contamination and food-

155
borne illness. Store it in a chill space and never hold gravy longer than 4 cumulative
hours at temperatures between 41°F and 140°F.

Dressings

Dressings are usually served as the starch addition of a lunch or dinner meal when the
entreé consists of a poultry product such as turkey. The terms dressing and stuffing are
often used interchangeably, but they both actually refer to dressing. If the dressing is
cooked inside the poultry, it is referred to as stuffing.

Excellent dressings can be prepared that are not cooked inside the birds. Pan-baked
dressing requires more moisture and is less firm than stuffing, but is easier to prepare and
easier to serve. Good dressing is light and moist, not heavy and pasty. Poultry stuffed
with dressing is not recommended for large-scale food operations such as GMs because it
increases cooking time, imposes a larger workload on foodservice personnel, and it does
not improve or enhance the flavor of the meat. Most importantly, stuffing paltry is a
sanitation risk and increases the possibility of food-borne illness.

The AFRS includes the basic bread dressing recipe and its many variations that may
be served with either chicken or turkey.

CEREALS, PASTA, AND RICE - rice are all grain products that are used as the
starch portion of a meal.

Cereals

Cereals are foods made from grains of wheat, oats, corn, rice, rye, and barley. Cereals
are often referred to as breakfast foods, but are not limited to the breakfast meal. Cereals
can be used in many types of recipes. The types include instant, quick-cooking, and cold
ready-to-eat cereals.
Instant cereals do not require further cooking. They are simply mixed with boiling water
before serving.

Quick-cooking cereals require a shorter cooking time than regular cereals. To prevent
quick-cooking cereals from forming lumps, they should be stirred slowly into rapidly
boiling water. Quick-cooking farina is mixed with cold water and then added to boiling
water. These cereals should be stirred constantly until they boil. After they begin to boil,
reduce to a simmer and stir them occasionally. Overstirring and overcooking will cause
cereal to be sticky and gummy.

Ready-to-eat cold cereals require no cooking and are served with cold milk and sugar.
No added sugar is needed for the coated or frosted cereals. For variety, sliced peaches,
strawberries, prunes, or bananas maybe added.
Pastas
Pastas (macaroni, spaghetti, vermicelli, and noodles) are produced from semolina
durum wheat flour, farina, or hard wheat flour (other than durum wheat flour) and water.
Egg noodles also contain eggs. The mixtures are rolled, shaped, and dried in various

156
forms. The only difference between vermicelli and spaghetti is that the individual strands
of vermicelli are finer and require less cooking. They may be used interchangeably in
recipes specifying spaghetti or vermicelli.

Pastas should be added to vigorously boiling, salted water and stirred so that they will
not stick together or to the bottom of the kettle. A small amount of salad oil is added to
the water to help to prevent sticking. Pastas should be drained as soon as they have
finished cooking. If pastas are overcooked, they become soft and gummy.

Rice and Barley

The rice products used in the military feeding programs are parboiled, long-grain, and
medium-grain rice. They need not be washed before cooking. Cooked long-grain rice
should appear light textured and the individual grains should stand apart. Medium-grain
rice, when cooked, will clump together. This type of rice is preferred in Oriental dishes.
Directions for proper cooking by steaming, simmering, and baking are contained in the
AFRS. Rice may be served plain, as a potato substitute, combined with other ingredients
in a main dish, added to salads, or topped with highly seasoned sauce. For variety,
combine rice with herbs, spices, chopped onions, or nuts. Rice pudding can be served for
dessert.
Popcorn

Popcorn is a snack food that usually is served during periods of relaxation such as
watching movies or playing board or card games. Popping popcorn is simple. You will
either use a popcorn popper or use a large pot. For either method, just follow the
instructions provided by the manufacturer. Salt and butter or margarine should be
provided separately when serving popcorn to comply with today’s fat and cholesterol
health standards.

BEVERAGES

Beverages are an important part of Navy meals. The preparation of high-quality

beverages requires the skill, technique, and experience of an accomplished CS. The types
of hot and cold beverages used in the GM include milk, coffee, tea, cocoa, fruit and
vegetables juices, fruit-flavored drinks, and soft drinks. Good quality drinking water also
should be available.
Milk

Milk is one of the most important and most frequently used foods, as well as popular
beverage. It is important to keep in mind that milk, served as a beverage or used in
cooking, is a potentially hazardous food. To ensure safe, high-quality milk, follow these
practices:

• Know the characteristics and recommended use of each type of milk.

157
 • Select the proper types of milk to meet your foodservice operation’s requirements
and storage capacities.
• Handle milk according to safe, sanitary procedures.
Coffee

The preparation of coffee demands as much detailed attention as does any other part
of the meal. Tastes for coffee vary widely. Some people prefer a weak brew while others
enjoy a strong one. The AFRS contains directions for brewing various strengths. Good
coffee will smell fragrant and mellow. The color will be a deep brown but not black.
The taste will not be rancid, oily, or bitter. The strength of the coffee depends on the
proportion of water used in relation to coffee grounds. A milder brew results from using
either more water or less coffee than normally. Bitterness results from brewing the
coffee too long.

Several suggestions that will help you produce brewed coffee of consistent quality
follow:

• Store roasted coffee in an airtight metal container because coffee loses its flavor
and aroma rapidly when exposed to air. Also, it will also absorb odors that lower its
taste quality.
• Use older stocks first. Within 3 days after opening, vacuum coffee has lost much
of its flavor.
• Always measure both the coffee and the water.
• Use fresh coffee at all times, and keep the coffee covered while it is brewing.
• Never allow coffee to remain in contact with boiling water as the flavor and
aroma will boil off.
• Remove the grounds as soon as the coffee is made. Seepage from the grounds will
ruin the flavor of the best coffee.
• Brewed coffee should not be held for more than 1 hour as it deteriorates in flavor
and loses its aroma.
• Most important of all, keep the coffee-making equipment absolutely clean. Wash
the urn with clear, hot water immediately after you have used it, and at the end of the
day clean it with hot water and urn cleaner. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Never
use soap or soap powder
Tea

Normally, two forms of tea are used; bulk tea and tea bags. Instant, powdered tea
however, also has special uses in the military services.

The quality of brewed tea depends upon how fast the boiling water extracts flavor and
color from the tea leaves; it is the tannin present in the leaves that gives the tea a bitter
taste. Improper temperatures, brewing too long, and holding tea too long for service will
bring out the bitterness of the extracted tannin. The proper quantities of both water and
tea should be measured carefully. Never guess at the amounts,

158
 HOT TEA.— You will not have any trouble making excellent tea if you follow a few
simple rules:

• When loose tea (not enclosed in a cloth bag) is placed in the urn or kettle, the
tea should be strained after it has steeped for 5 minutes.
• Tea should be made just before serving.
• Do not boil; this brings out the bitter taste.
• Schedule preparation so that not more than 15 minutes will elapse between its
preparation and service; hold prepared tea at 175°F to 185°F.

ICED TEA.— The following points should be observed when preparing tea to be
served iced:

• A stronger brew is required for iced tea than for hot tea because of the diluting
action of the ice.
• A tea concentrate may be brewed and chilled, then diluted before serving.
• Do not add cold water to the concentrate; this may produce cloudy tea. The
concentrate should be poured into the cold water.
• The tea may be presweetened by dissolving sugar in the hot concentrate
before diluting it with cold water.
• If desired, cut lemons into eighths to serve with tea

159
 QUESTIONS:
“Food Preparation” Assignment 4

4-1. The use of standardized recipes by all branches of the military accomplishes
which of the following objectives?

1. Prevents variation in food quality and quantity

2. Accommodates the use of government provisions
3. Promotes uniformity in food costs throughout the military
4. Facilitates transfer of food items from one activity to another

4-2. Each recipe in the AFRS is designed to yield 100 portions; however, the yield of
some recipes may be given in numbers of the product or volume.

1. True
2. False

4-3. Ingredients are listed on each recipe card in which of the following orders?

1. From dry to liquid

2. From liquid to dry
3. From the largest to the smallest quantity
4. From the first needed to the last

4-4. Under what circumstance are the quantities of dry ingredients on a recipe card
usually given as both weights and measures?

1. When the recipe is for a bakery item

2. When the recipe calls for a large amount of liquid
3. When the recipe includes a small amount of dry ingredients
4. When the quantities of dry ingredients weigh more than one-half of an ounce

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 4-5 THROUGH 4-8, SELECT THE SECTION OF

THE AFRS RECIPE CARD THAT IS DESCRIBED BY THE QUESTION.

4-5. Explains how the ingredients are to be combined and cooked and represents the
best accepted cooking procedures.

1. Yield
2. Method
3. Notes
4. Variations

160
4-6. Contains supplemental information such as possible substitutions for
ingredients.

1. Abbreviations
2. Notes
3. Variations
4. Ingredients

4-7. Includes specific techniques to supplement information contained in the Method

column.

1. Notes
2. Variations
3. Ingredients
4. Yield

4-8. Constitutes a major addition to the total number of recipes contained in the
AFRS.

1. Variations
2. Ingredients
3. Method
4. Notes

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 4-9 THROUGH 4-12, SELECT THE AFRS

RECIPE SUPPLEMENT THAT IS DESCRIBED BY THE QUESTION.

4-9. Located in some of the recipe sections as directions for preparing a basic type of
food.

1. Index of recipes
2. General information cards
3. Guideline cards
4. Index cards

4-10. Used as a valuable reference for menu planners.

1. Index cards
2. General information cards
3. Guideline cards
4. Index of recipes

161
4-11. You should become familiar with this section first. It provides basic
information.

1. Index of recipes
2. General information cards
3. Guideline cards
4. Index cards

4-12. The M section of the AFRS contains what category of recipes?

1. Soups
2. Sandwiches
3. Sauces, gravies, and dressings
4. Salad dressings and relishes

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 4-13 THROUGH 4-15, SELECT THE TYPE OF

RECIPE ADJUSTMENT THAT MATCHES THE DESCRIPTION GIVEN AS
THE QUESTION.

4-13. Used to increase or decrease a recipe to obtain the desired number of portions.

1. Volume
2. Serving size
3. Yield
4. Quantity

4-14. Used to adjust a recipe based upon the amount of an ingredient to be used.

1. Volume
2. Serving size
3. Yield
4. Quantity

4-15. Used to adjust recipes to yield a specific number of portions of a specific size.

1. Volume
2. Serving size
3. Yield
4. Quantity

162
4-16. Thirty pounds of ground beef is required to prepare 100 portions of chili and
150 portions must be prepared. Fifty-five pounds of ground beef was mistakenly
thawed for this purpose. You are instructed to adjust the recipe based upon the
amount of meat thawed. How many additional pounds will you have to make extra
portions?

1. 10
2. 33
3. 34
4. 45

4-17. You are preparing Salisbury steak for 320 people and are instructed by the
leading CS to make 3-ounce portions. What specific amount of ground beef is
required to make these 3-ounce portions if the recipe calls for 30 pounds per 100 4-
ounce portions?

1. 22 pounds
2. 22 pounds 8 ounces
3. 72 pounds
4. 72 pounds 8 ounces

4-18. If a recipe calls for 4 gallons of water per 100 portions, how much water would
be needed to prepare 333 portions of this recipe?

1. 13 gal, 1 qt, 1 cup, 1 1/2 tbsp

2. 13 gal, 2 qt, 1 cup, 1 tbsp, 2 3/4 tsp
3. 13 gal, 1 qt, 1 cup, 1 tbsp, 2 3/4 tsp
4. 13 gal, 2 qt, 1 cup, 2 tbsp

4-19. You are measuring water needed to prepare minestrone soup and you only
have a 8-ounce measuring cup. What specific number of cups is equal to 3 1/2
gallons?

1. 54
2. 56
3. 58
4. 60

4-20. Reconstituted egg mix must be handled in what manner if you do not use it
immediately?

1. Discarded after being at room temperature for 1 hour

2. Discarded 4 hours after preparation
3. Refrigerated in a tightly covered container and discarded after 24 hours
4. Refrigerated in a tightly covered container and used within 1 hour

163
4-21. When properly refrigerated, eggs that have been treated with processing fluids
will have what maximum storage life?

1. 1 month
2. 2 months
3. 6 months
4. 4 months

4-22. Which, if any, of the following food items are you authorized to prepare using
raw (fresh) eggs?

1. French toast batter

2. Mayonnaise
3. Salad dressings
4. None of the above

4-23. When fresh eggs are used in preparing scrambled eggs, you should comply
with all EXCEPT which of the following requirements?

1. DO not use egg breaking machines

2. Prepare 5-quart batches to meet excess demands
3. Cook until there is no liquid egg visible
4. Cook in small batches

4-24. You should cook canned vegetables using which of the following methods?

1. Discard the liquid and steam the vegetables for 10 minutes

2. Boil for 5 minutes in the liquid that was in the can
3. Simmer in a covered stockpot for 20 minutes
4. Bring to a boil just before they are to be served

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 4-25 THROUGH 4-28, SELECT THE METHOD

FOR COOKING VEGETABLES THAT MATCHES THE DESCRIPTION GIVEN
AS THE QUESTION.

4-25. This method is faster than other methods and helps to preserve the fresh
appearance and nutritive value of the vegetables.

1. Baking
2. Simmering
3. Steaming
4. Roasting

164
4-26. Use of dry heat with the addition of little or no water.

1. Deep-fat frying
2. Simmering
3. Baking
4. Oven frying

4-27. The vegetables should be tender and cut in uniformly sized pieces.

1. Oven frying
2. Deep-fat frying
3. Stir-frying
4. Baking

4-28. This method of cooking is also referred to as sautéing.

1. Searing
2. Stir-frying
3. Deep-fat frying
4. Pan-frying

4-29. Progressive vegetable cookery accomplishes all EXCEPT which of the

following objectives?

1. Ensures a continuous supply of freshly cooked vegetables is available

2. Helps control waste
3. Diminishes the flavor of vegetables
4. Allows cooking of several small batches

4-30. For which of the following reasons is it better for you to undercook vegetables
rather than overcook them?

1. To preserve color
2. To maintain the crisp or crunchy texture
3. To shorten the cooking time
4. To conserve the nutrient content

4-31. Which of the following vegetable salads would be suitable for you to serve as a
main course for lunch or dinner?

1. Potato
2. Garden
3. Chef’s
4. Waldorf

165
4-32. When you prepare sandwiches to be the primary item of a meal, what
requirement should you meet?

1. An assortment of bread should be provided

2. The sandwich should be served with a soup
3. The type of sandwich must be a hot one
4. The sandwich should be substantial

4-33. When you are preparing sandwiches, which of the following types of bread is
preferable?

1. Day-old
2. Freshly baked
3. Commercial
4. White

4-34. All EXCEPT which of the following statements describe a sanitary precaution
used in preparing sandwiches?

1. Never allow sandwiches to stand at room temperature for more than 4 cumulative
hours
2. Keep time between preparation and consumption to a minimum
3. Serve lettuce, tomatoes, and spreads used for sandwiches separately
4. Hold sandwiches containing hand-prepared ground meat below 40°F if not to be
consumed immediately

4-35. When you use dehydrated soup and gravy bases to prepare stock for soups,
what ingredient should you adjust or eliminate?

1. Water
2. Meat
3. Salt
4. Herbs

4-36. Which of the following sauces should you use to bind the ingredients together
in a scalloped dish?

1. Butter
2. Medium white
3. Thin cream
4. Sweet thickened

166
4-37. Stuffing poultry with dressing in GMs is not recommended for which of the
following reasons?

1. The loss of the nutritional value if prepared this way

2. Stuffing requires more moisture and will cause the poultry product to be dry
3. The possibility of food-borne illness will increase
4. Enough stuffing cannot be prepared for everyone using this method

4-38. Overstirring and overcooking cereal during preparation may produce which
of the following results?

1. The cereal becomes sticky and gummy

2. The cereal loses moisture content
3. The cereal becomes thick
4. The cereal becomes lumpy

4-39. In which of the following ways does vermicelli differ from spaghetti?

1. Vermicelli is thicker
2. Vermicelli contains eggs
3. Vermicelli is made from hard wheat flour
4. Vermicelli cooks quicker

4-40. What reference lists the characteristics and recommended use of each type of
milk procured by the Navy?

1. NAVSUP P-421
2. NAVSUP P-476
3. NAVSUPNOTE 7330
4. NAVMED P-5010-1

4-41. You can prevent bitterness in brewed coffee by taking which of the following
measures?

1. Storing the coffee grounds in an airtight container

2. Using the proper proportion of water in relation to coffee grounds
3. Cleaning the coffeepot daily with hot soapy water
4. Making sure the coffee is not brewed too long

4-42. What should you use to clean the urn of coffee-making equipment at the end of
the day?

1. Hot water and urn cleaner

2. Hot soapy water
3. Vinegar and water
4. Baking soda and water

167
 CHAPTER 6

MEAT, POULTRY, AND SEAFOOD

Meat, poultry, and seafood offer excellent nutritional benefits. Importantly, a large
share of basic daily food allowance (BDFA), or the monetary value required to provide a
nutritionally adequate diet for one person for 1 day, is spent on meat, poultry, and
seafood. This chapter explains the following topics:

• Types of meat procured by the military

• Grades of beef, pork, veal, lamb, poultry, and seafood used by the military
• Styles of poultry used by the military
• Meat thawing methods
• Meat cooking methods
• Poultry cooking methods
• Seafood cooking methods

MEAT

Meat is the flesh of any animal used for food. The word meat as used in the Navy
foodservice means beef, veal, pork, lamb, or rabbit. Meat appears on the Navy menu in
some form each day. It is the focal point of every meal, dictating what other dishes will
be served. Correctly cooked and served meat is the sign of a well-informed and skillful
CS.

FORMS OF MEAT

The forms of meat procured by the military are frozen, fabricated, and canned.

Fabricated meats have been either partially or completely boned, trimmed, and
portion-cut into slices, steaks, chops, or roasts. Most types of meat procured by Navy
messes are fabricated to some extent. A completely fabricated meat has all bones
removed and is cut into portion-sized steaks or roasts. For example, boneless beef is cut
from selected wholesale beef cuts or carcass meat according to specifications of the
armed forces. The meat is wrapped, packed in shipping containers, and then frozen.
Bones, excess fat, gristle, and tendons are removed by the processor.
BEEF

Beef comes from cattle and is the most frequently used of all meats. There are five
categories of beef.

• Steer: male that is castrated when young

• Cow: female that has calved
• Bull: fully developed male
• Heifer: young female that has not born a calf

168
 • Stag: male castrated after maturity

Steers and heifers are most suitable for use in Navy messes; whereas cows, bulls, and
stags are older and stringier and may be found in canned products.
Beef Inspection

All beef and beef products prepared in establishments operating under Federal Meat
Inspection Regulations are branded or labeled as follows: “U.S. inspected and passed by
Department of Agriculture”; “U.S. inspected and passed”; U.S. INSP’D & P’SD”;
together with the number that identifies the establishment. These stamps indicate that the
beef and beef products bearing these stamps comply with the inspection regulations of
the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), and that they are wholesome and
have been processed under sanitary conditions.

Beef delivered under contract to the military within the continental United States is
not accepted unless each item (or the shipping case) bears the inspection stamp or USDA
label. Each item must also bear a Department of Defense stamp that indicates that the
item meets all terms of the contract.

After it is determined that the animals are free of disease and meet sanitary
requirements, the USDA stamps are placed on the meat carcass.

Grades of Beef

Beef is graded as prime, choice, good, standard, commercial, utility, and cutter. The
military services generally purchase only choice and good grades.

However, utility grade or better ground beef and beef tenderloins are procured
ungraded. Beef roasts and steaks procured for the Navy are choice grade. Choice grade
meats are tender, juicy, and flavorful. Some beef items such as diced beef may be from
choice or good grade meat. Good grade beef is not quite as tender, juicy, or flavorful as
choice grade, but if the proper preparation methods are used, an acceptable product is
produced. Good grade beef has less fat marbling than choice or prime grade beef.

Frozen boneless beef products that are procured include the following:

• Grill steak. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Average weight: 7 ounces. Rib-eye, loin strip, sirloin

butt.
• Sandwich steak. . . . . . .Wafer-thin slices of lean beef, 2 ounces.
• Swiss steak, braising . . . . . .Average weight: 6 ounces.
• Oven roast . . . . . . .. . . . . . Approximately 10 pounds. Knuckle, top round.
• Oven roast, precooked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Top round. Product is ready to be
sliced and served. May be heated on grill or served with hot au jus.
• Pot roast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Maximum weight: 10 pounds. Shoulder
clod or chuck roll.

169
 • Beef patties mix, bulk.. . . . . . Packaged in rectangular or chub with 20 percent
soy pack units. Approximately 7-pound package.
• Beef patties with 20 percent soy . . . . . . . . . . .Weight. approximately 3 ounces.
• Beef for stewing, diced. . . . . . . . Prepared from selected bone-in or boneless
whole beef cuts.
• Rib-eye roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Weight. 8 to 10 pounds.
• Rounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Prepared from bone-in rounds. Weight 35
to 57 pounds.
• Tenderloin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Minimum weight: 4 pounds. Ready to roast
or slice into steaks.

Each box of boneless beef is clearly marked to show the type of meat inside. Bone-in
beef (beef rounds and ribs) should be used only as storage space permits. It requires
more storage space than boneless beef. T he beef rounds have the rump and shank
removed. The weight range for rounds is 40 to 64 pounds. The oven-ready weight range
of beef ribs is 14 to 22 pounds.
PORK

Pork comes from hogs. Pork is USDA inspected and graded, but grade marks are not
indicated on the meat for consumer use. The difference in the tenderness, juiciness, and
flavor of the different grades of pork is not as great as it is in the different grades of beef.
The flesh of hogs is the lightest in color of all meats. Young pork is white to grayish
pink; pork from older animals is darker pink. The flesh should be firm and fine grained
and should have a good intermingling of fat and lean.

The Navy procures both fresh and cured pork. The fresh cuts, which may be delivered
frozen, are pork butts (Boston), boneless pork hams, bladeless pork loins, boneless pork
loins, pork hocks, pork sausage, diced pork, pork spareribs, country-style ribs, and pork
tenderloins. Cured products include Canadian-style bacon, raw and precooked bacon,
boneless cooked smoked ham, smoked pork hocks, and canned ham (pear-shaped,
pullman-shaped, and chunks).

As with beef, pork should be handled, cut, prepared, and packaged according to
contract specifications. The curing processes are applied to the basic pork products such
as ham, shoulder (picnics), and bacon. The bladeless loin is that portion of the loin that
remains after the blade bone and related cartilages and the overlying flesh have been
removed. The boned pork loin is the regular cut loin that has been trimmed and boned,
cut in half, and the two halves placed together and tied to form a symmetrical roast. If
desired, pork chops may be cut from the boneless pork loin.

Boneless slices consist of 5 ounces of boneless loin. Pork tenderloin is a muscle that
has been removed from the loin section of pork sides. Spareribs are the bony but
flavorful rib section. Country-style ribs are prepared from the backbone. Frozen pork
sausage is available in links, bulk and patties styles. All pork sausage products are very
perishable and have a short shelf life of 2 to 3 months. Fresh pork hocks and pigs’ feet

170
are available for use. Pigs’ feet may be served with cooked greens or as an entrée. Fresh
pork hocks are uncured and generally served with sauerkraut.

Bacon is served more frequently than any other pork product. Frozen raw or canned
and frozen precooked items are available. Precooked frozen and canned bacon require
only heating to a serving temperature. They save space and reduce waste. Although
initially more expensive, each pound of precooked bacon is equivalent to 2 1/2 pounds of
raw bacon. Smoked pork hocks may be cooked and served as a main course or used to
season cooked greens. Hams procured by the Navy may be fresh, frozen, canned,
smoked boneless, or whole hams. All hams are skinned. Fresh pork hams are frozen and
also boneless. They range in weight from 8 to 14 pounds. Canned hams are pasteurized
and may be used without further heating, but heating and glazing improve the flavor.
They should be stored and kept under refrigeration at all times.

Canned hams have a high yield, are easy to prepare, and are economical if they are
sliced properly. Improperly sliced ham will not only produce uneven portions that are
unattractive but will produce more waste and will increase the overall cost. The
following slicing technique is recommended to obtain the maximum number of usable
slices from either whole or tamed ham after it is baked or as it comes from the can.

1. Divide the whole ham into three sections. Cut the upper third section straight
across the butt end and cut the remaining portion into two even pieces lengthwise.

2. Cut the slices lengthwise with the grain, across the butt section. Cut the other
sections across the grain.
VEAL

Veal/calf is immature beef or calves less than 1 year old. Good veal/calf has a light
grayish pink color and has a firm, smooth appearance. The types of veal/calf procured
are boneless roasts (5 1/2 to 7 pounds), ground veal, and breaded veal steaks. Breaded
veal steaks, 5 to 6 ounces, are produced from veal using a flake-cut method. The product
is ready to cook. Deep fat fry, add cheese and tomato sauce, and heat until hot in ovens.
Veal steaks should be cooked frozen to ensure a moist, tender product.
LAMB

Official USDA grades for lamb are prime, choice, good, utility, and cull. These
grades are based on conformation (shape of the cut) and quality. The military services
procure only prime and choice. High-quality lamb has a smooth covering of clear, white,
brittle fat over most of the exterior. The lean portion is pinkish red in color, fine in
texture, and velvety in appearance. GMs use only boneless leg roast.

OTHER MEAT ITEMS

Other meat items that are used in the GM are as follows:

• Beef liver is available in portion-cut 4-ounce slices.

171
 • Corned beef is a frozen product commercially prepared by pickling boneless
brisket, rump, or other selected beef cuts in a salt solution (brine). Also, it may be
used for such entrées as corned beef and cabbage or for sandwiches.
• Dried beef is a frozen product commercially prepared from beef rounds cured
with sugar and salt, dried, and sliced paper thin. It is normally used for creamed
chipped beef on toast.

Sausage is finely or coarsely chopped meat (pork, beef, or combination of beef

and pork), seasoned with spices and herbs, that is stuffed into edible casings.
Depending on the type of sausage, it may be cooked or uncooked. Check the
label for cooking instructions.

• Other types of specialty meats include the following:

Pastrami is precooked. It is commercially produced by curing and smoking beef

with spices. Pastrami is usually served as hot slices in sandwiches.

Cold cuts, including pressed ham, pickle and pimento loaf, turkey roll, bologna,
salami, luncheon meat, and liver sausage, once thawed, are sliced and served for
sandwiches or cold-cut platters. Bologna, salami, and luncheon meat may be
grilled and served as breakfast meats.

Frankfurters, popularly called hot dogs or wieners, are similar to sausage

products, but are always precooked. Only heating is required before serving.
After heating, they may be served in a sandwich roll (hot dog) or as an entrée; for
example, frankfurters and baked beans. There are two sizes: regular (10 links per
pound) and one-fourth pound.

GENERAL PREPARATION AND COOKING METHODS

Most of the meat procured for use in Navy messes is frozen. Handling procedures,
before and after cooking, are extremely important in regard to sanitation as well as to
economy and palatability. Meat is a potentially hazardous food. Frozen meat,
improperly thawed, can become contaminated with bacteria. Uncovered meat surfaces
are a perfect area for bacterial growth; therefore, long exposure of the moist surface to air
should be avoided. Improper thawing also causes an unnecessary loss of nutrients and
meat juices, resulting in a decreased quality of meat.
THAWING METHODS

Frozen meat may be thawed in several ways. The preferred method is slow thawing
because there is less drip loss in the meat. Meat thawed slowly yields a juicier and more
palatable cooked product. On small ships with limited chill space, or whenever time is
limited between meat issue and mealtime, slow thawing is not practical. The Bureau of
Medicine and Surgery (BUMED) has approved the use of alternate methods that are
recommended for such circumstances.

172
 Once meat has been defrosted or thawed, it should be used as soon as possible and not
refrozen. Breakouts should not exceed the amount to be served.

Preferred Thawing Method

Break out the quantity of meat required. Remove it from the shipping container, but
leave the meat inside the wrappings. Thaw slowly at temperatures between 36°F and
38°F until almost completely thawed. The thawing period will vary according to the
following conditions:

• Size of the meat cut (the larger the size, the longer the time required).
• Bone-in or boneless state. Bone-in meat takes less time to thaw.
• Air temperature and circulation in chill space. Moving air accelerates thawing.
• Quantity of meat being thawed in a given area. A large amount will lower the
temperature of the room and decrease the thawing action. Spread the cuts out. Do
not stack them. It is almost impossible to predict the exact time required to thaw
meat unless there is a perfectly controlled set of circumstances. Frozen wholesale
beef cuts and frozen boneless beef may require up to 48 hours to thaw at temperatures
of 36°F to 38°F. Cuts from pork, veal, and lamb will probably thaw in about 24
hours under refrigerator temperatures.

Alternate Thawing Methods

If it should become necessary to thaw the frozen meat quickly, one of two methods is
used. When it is necessary to use either alternate thawing method discussed next, the
medical department representative (MDR) must be notified.

1. Thaw in the original sealed wrapper or container at room temperature (not to exceed
80°F) for several hours. This procedure is to be used only by small ships when the use of
chill box reach-in refrigerators is not available.

2. Thaw in the original unopened container at 50°F or lower in the meat preparation
room. This procedure is approved for larger ships that do not have thaw boxes or when
the use of chill box reach-in refrigerators is not available.

In each alternate method, the container acts as a refrigerator and allows the meat to
thaw from the outside toward the center of the package. The outside pieces remain
sufficiently cold to prevent spoilage while the center is thawing.

Proper precautions should be taken to make sure potentially hazardous foods are not
allowed to remain at room temperature once thawed.

COOKING FROZEN AND THAWED MEATS

Most cuts of meats should be thawed or tempered before they are cooked. Bulk
ground beef, diced meat, and Swiss steak should be completely thawed before they are
cooked. Thawed meats and meats cooked while frozen are prepared exactly as chilled

173
meats. The principle of using lower temperatures cooking is equally applicable to all
meats.

Frozen Roasts

If cooked in the frozen state, roasts will require approximately one-third to one-half
additional cooking time. Seasoning should be delayed until the outside is somewhat
thawed and the surface is sufficiently moist to retain salt, pepper, and flour. The insertion
of the meat thermometer can be delayed until the roasts are partially thawed.
Ground Meats, Diced Meats, and Swiss Steak

Ground meats, diced meats, and Swiss steak must be completely thawed before
cooking. Beef patties mix used for meatballs, meat patties, and meat loaf requires mixing
with other ingredients and shaping before cooking. Since diced meats used in stews or
other recipes often are dredged in flour and seasonings before browning, they must be
thawed. Swiss steak also requires thawing before cooking.

To temper meat, remove from freezer and place under refrigeration for a period of
time sufficient to help ease separation and handling of the frozen product. Internal
temperature of the food should be approximately 26°F to 28°F. The additional time
required to cook meats completely done while frozen ties up the cook’s time, as well as
grill space. Grill steak should never be completely thawed before grilling. Once thawed,
the steaks will be dry and tough. Some styles may also fall apart.

Liver should be partially thawed to ensure a moist and palatable product and to
provide slices that are uniform and attractive in appearance. If liver appears greenish
after grilling, it is not spoiled. The method used to cook meat is determined by the kind
of meat and the tenderness of the cut. Tender cuts require a dry heat method. However,
tough cuts require moist heat and long, slow cooking.

MOIST HEAT COOKING METHODS

Moist heat refers to cooking with added liquid or steam. Moist heat methods include
braising, simmering, and stewing. These methods are used to cook less tender cuts of
meat.

Stewing and Simmering

One method of moist heat cooking is stewing. It is the method used in preparing the
least tender cuts of meat. Small pieces of meat cooked in water are said to be stewed;
large pieces are said to be simmered. In each case, the meat is covered with water and
simmered—kept just below the boiling temperature. It is never boiled. Boiling the meat
for the length of time required to tenderize it will dissolve the connective tissue
completely and the meat will fall apart and become stringy and dry.

Vegetables may or may not be added to the stew. If they are added, they should be
cooked to the “just tender” point and should still retain their color, shape, and flavor after

174
they are cooked. The gravy should be light and smooth and have the same flavor as the
meat. The meat is dredged in seasoned flour and browned in a small amount of fat.
Stews are made in a steam-jacketed kettle that has a hinged lid. The stew should be held
at the simmering temperature until the meat is done, usually about 2 hours. Meat cooked
in liquid is tender and juicy and holds its shape when sliced. Usually the steam-jacketed
kettle is used so that the meat can be completely submerged in the liquid at all times.

Braising

Braising is used to prepare tough cuts of meat. Check the Armed Forces Recipe
Service (AFRS) for those cuts of meat that should be braised.

To braise, meat is browned in a small amount of added fat, then covered and cooked
slowly in the juices from the meat or in a small amount of liquid that is added. The liquid
may be water, stock, vegetable juices, thin sauces, or a combination of these liquids. Just
enough liquid to start the natural juices in the meat should be used. Only a small amount
of liquid should be added at a time as the color and appearance of both the meat and
gravy are better if the liquid is kept to a minimum. Pot roast and Swiss steak are cooked
using this method of moist heat cooking. Flavor is improved by dredging the pieces of
meat in seasoned flour, then browning them in a small amount of fat, or by marinating the
meat in a well-seasoned mixture of vinegar, vegetables, and spices (such as sauerbraten).
Browning the meat develops flavor and aroma, and a rich brown color is typical of well-
prepared braised dishes.

After the meat has been browned, the temperature is reduced, and cooking is
continued at a low temperature so that the liquid will not boil. Braising may be done in
the oven, on top of the range in a deep pot or in the steam-jacketed kettle. Whichever
method is used, the container should be tightly covered. The aim of braising is to
produce a piece of meat that is evenly browned on the exterior, tender, juicy, and evenly
cooked throughout, with no stringiness. Meat cuts that are braised are always cooked to
the well-done stage.

Frying

Meat may be fried in deep fat, in an oven by pan-frying, or in a pan with a small
amount of fat by sautéing.

PANFRYING.— Sautéing or shallow pan-frying is done on the range or griddle in a

pan with just enough fat to keep the meat from sticking. This method of cooking is
sometimes more economical and less work when a small amount of food is to be fried.

The fat should be heated to the proper temperature before the meat is placed into it;
otherwise, the meat will absorb too much of the fat and will be unappetizing. The correct
temperatures are indicated on the recipe cards.

Liver, any tender meats (such as grill steaks), and meat mixtures that are breaded or
floured may be fried with good results.

175
 DEEP-FAT FRYING.— Deep-fat frying is done by completely immersing the meat in
heated deep fat and allowing it to remain in the fat until it is done. Meat that is to be deep
fried should be breaded to prevent an excessive loss of moisture. It is also important to
have the fat at the proper temperature. If it is too hot, the exterior of the meat will brown
excessively before the interior has had time to cook. If it is too cool, the meat will absorb
too much fat and be greasy. A deep-fat thermometer is the only accurate way to
determine the temperature of the fat.

For best results, the pieces to be fried should be of uniform size, and the basket should
not be overloaded. Just enough pieces should be placed in the basket to completely cover
the bottom of the fry basket. This method permits the hot fat to completely surround the
meat and ensures thorough cooking. When the basket is overloaded, the fat is cooled
excessively, and the hot fat cannot circulate freely.

Fry only one kind of meat or food item at a time. Fry the meat as quickly as possible
and only as needed (practice batch cookery). Drain to remove excess fat after cooking,
then salt or season. Never salt or season food directly over the fryer.

OVEN FRYING.— Oven frying is similar to baking or roasting except fat is added.
Food may be oven fried with or without breading.

DRY HEAT COOKING METHODS

Dry heat refers to cooking meat uncovered without adding moisture. Dry heat
methods include roasting, baking, broiling, and grilling. These methods are used for
tender cuts of meat that have little connective tissue.

Grilling

Grill steaks, beef patties with soy, ham slices, bacon, liver, and pork sausage are
uitable for grilling. In grilling, the meat is placed directly on the ungreased griddle. The
heat is transmitted to the meat from the hot metal of the griddle. A moderate temperature
is maintained that prevents the meat from overbrowning. Enough fat cooks out to keep
the meat from sticking. Excess fat should be removed as it collects to prevent the meat
from frying. Tongs or a food turner should be used to turn the meat. Do not use a fork to
turn the meat because puncturing the meat with the tines of a fork allows the juices to
escape. If the juices escape the meat becomes dry and coarse. Check the AFRS for cuts
of beef, lamb, and pork that may be grilled.

Pork requires thorough cooking to bring out its full flavor. Braised pork chops are
more desirable from the standpoint of aroma, texture, tenderness, and flavor of the lean
meat. If pork chops and pork steaks are grilled, they require additional cooking in the
oven to ensure complete doneness. Veal is usually not grilled because it is a lean meat
and has an abundance of connective tissue that requires long, slow cooking. Grilled meat
is usually turned only once. The seasoning is applied to the cooked side just after it is
turned.

176
Broiling

Broiling is cooking by dry heat. Conventional and continuous broilers are available in
some Navy GMs. For cooking times and temperatures, check the manufacturer’s
directions for cooking meats. Steaks and hamburgers are generally cooked using broilers.
Where broilers are not available, grills are used.
Roasting and Baking

The word roasting describes the cooking of meat by dry heat in an oven. Any tender
cut of beef, pork, or lamb may be roasted. Baking is the reparation method used in
roasting ham, meat loaf, fish, and some chicken recipes.

Roasting pans should be of a heavy material with low sides that allow meat to be
cooked by hot air freely circulating over and around the meat. Open pan roasting will
brown roasts evenly. Do not crowd roasts. Season meat as directed on the AFRS
recipes. If racks are available, place roasts on racks to allow juices and fat to drain from
roasts as they are cooked.

The following rules pertaining to roasting apply to beef, veal, pork, and lamb.
Included with each rule is the “why.”

• Use a moderately low oven temperature (325°F) so the roast will be uniformly
done throughout, the cooking losses will be moderate, the meat will be more
palatable, and the roast will be plump and full. High temperatures cause excessive
shrinkage, uneven cooking, and decreased juiciness and tenderness.
• Do not sear meat before roasting. Searing toughens the outer layer of meat,
increases cooking losses, causes a loss of fat, and contributes to excessive shrinkage.
• Place roast fat side up on the pan. This eliminates basting; as the meat
cooks, it will baste itself with the melting fat.
• Add salt to the roast before or after it is cooked. Salt penetrates less than half an
inch below the surface and any salt added before the roast is cooked adds flavor to the
drippings.
• Unless specified in the AFRS recipe, never cover a roast. If the roasting pan is
covered, the moisture escaping from the meat will surround it and the meat will be
cooked by moist heat.
• Do not add water. Roasts cooked without water are juicier and more flavorful.
The only reason for adding water would be to keep the drippings from becoming too
brown. This will not happen, however, when low oven temperatures are used.
• Do not flour the roast. Drippings from a floured roast may be a more
attractive brown, but the same results can be obtained by browning flour in the drippings
when you make the gravy.
• Use a meat thermometer to tell when the roast is done. The meat
thermometer is the only accurate measure of doneness. The length of cooking time
depends on the temperature of the oven, the weight and shape of the roast, and the kind of
meat.

177
 The thermometer should be inserted into the center of the main muscle (the thickest
part of the meat) so that the tip of the thermometer does not touch the bone, gristle, or the
fat. As the heat from the oven penetrates the meat, the internal temperature at the center
of the roast gradually rises and this rise is registered on the thermometer. When the
thermometer registers the desired temperature for that particular kind of meat, the
roast is ready to be removed from the oven.

• Boneless meat will require a somewhat longer cooking period than meat with
bones. A smaller roast requires more minutes per pound than a larger one. Follow
the AFRS recipe that specifies the type of meat required and the proper cooking
temperature.

Cooking time is only a guide to meat doneness. Roasts will continue to cook slightly
after being removed from the oven. Cooking time depends principally upon the size and
cut of the meat, the degree of doneness desired or required, and the cooking temperature.
The temperatures at which meats are cooked also determine cooking times. Maintaining
even temperatures aids in predicting cooking periods. For information on convection
oven cooking, check the AFRS guidelines, specific recipes, and manufacturer’s directions
for meat cookery.

POULTRY

Poultry is a menu favorite. Chicken, duck, Rock Cornish hen, and turkey are the main
poultry items used in Navy messes.

TYPES

Various styles of chicken and turkey are available for use in Navy messes.

All poultry is inspected to make sure it is free from disease and is slaughtered,
dressed, and processed in a clean manner. Canned, boned chicken and turkey are also
inspected for wholesomeness.

Poultry may also be graded as to quality. Grading is done according to overall

appearance, meatiness, amount of fat, and the presence or absence of defects (torn skin,
discoloration, bruises, and so forth). USDA grades A, B, and C are used to indicate
poultry that has been officially graded. Grades B and C are not as attractive as grade A
but are still wholesome. They may have defects and faulty conformation and be lacking
in meat content and fat cover.

Chicken

Frozen broiler-fryer chickens weighing 3 to 3 1/2 pounds are procured in several

styles:

• Whole
• Cutup

178
 • Quartered
• Breasts
• Legs
• Thighs
• Frozen Rock Cornish hens are young chickens weighing 20 to 25 ounces that
have been produced by crossbreeding the Cornish chicken with other chicken species.
They require only thawing and splitting in half and washing under cold water before
cooking.
• Canned, boned chicken offers space and weight savings. It needs no refrigeration
and is usually stocked when freezer space is limited. Canned chicken may be used in
recipes requiring diced chicken, such as chow mein, tetrazinni, baked chicken with
noodles, and chicken salad.
• Frozen chicken, breaded, precooked, drumsticks and thighs and/or breast halves,
is available for reheating either in the oven or in the deep-fat fryer. The product can
be reheated quickly and used as an entrée item or on the speedline.
• Frozen, chicken fillet, breaded, precooked, also can be reheated quickly and used
for sandwiches or as an entrée item.
• Frozen, chicken fillet, unbreaded, precooked, also can be reheated quickly and
used for sandwiches or as an entrée item.
• Frozen chicken fillet nuggets, breaded, precooked, can be reheated quickly and
used as an entrée item or on the speedline.
Turkey

Turkey for Navy messes is procured in the following styles:

• Frozen, whole turkeys vary widely in weight. Hen turkeys have a minimum
weight of 12 pounds; tom turkeys weigh 16 to 24 pounds. Self-basting and regular
whole turkeys are procured. An 8- to 12-pound whole turkey is available for use
aboard submarines.
• Frozen, boneless, raw turkey rolls weigh 9 to 12 pounds and contain the same
proportion of light and dark meat as whole turkey. Raw turkey rolls require cooking.
• Frozen chicken and turkey giblets are available for preparation of giblet gravy.
Thaw and use according to AFRS directions.

PREPARATION AND COOKING OF POULTRY

Poultry should be handled with strict sanitary measures during both cooking and
preparation.

Preparation

Thaw frozen chicken, Rock Cornish hen, turkey, and duck before cooking. All
poultry must be thawed at chill temperatures (36°F to 38°F). Never thaw in water.
Thawed poultry should never be refrozen. Refreezing lowers quality and promotes
bacterial growth.

179
 Use thawed poultry as soon as possible. Do not hold in refrigeration more than 24
hours. Longer holding lowers quality and risks spoilage.

Whole turkeys, Rock Cornish hens, ducks, and chickens are wrapped in plastic bags.
Remove whole poultry from the shipping containers, but leave in the plastic bag. To
speed thawing, spread them out so that air can circulate. Cutup or quartered chickens
should be thawed in the intermediate carton. If this carton has an over wrapping, remove
it.

Turkeys weighing more than 16 pounds require 3 to 4 days to thaw, at 36°F to 38°F.
Turkeys weighing under 16 pounds require 2 to 3 days. Whole chickens and ducks
require 18 to 24 hours and Rock Cornish hens need 12 to 18 hours.

Clean all poultry after thawing by removing any spongy, red lung tissue inside the
back, loose membranes, pinfeathers, and skin defects. Wash poultry inside and out under
cold, running water and drain. Refrigerate until needed.

NOTE: All cutting boards used for preparing poultry must be thoroughly sanitized
after each use.

Cooking

Procedures for cooking whole turkeys, Rock Cornish hens, chickens, and ducks are
described in the AFRS. Poultry maybe cooked using either moist or dry heat. These
methods and their variations are explained as follows.

DRY HEAT METHODS.— Care should be taken to prevent the poultry skin from
becoming too hard and dry while it is roasting. To prevent dryness, rub the skin of the
chicken or turkey with salad oil or shortening. This is not necessary for duck because of
its high fat content. If self-basting turkey is supplied, follow the package instructions for
cooking. Place the poultry in an open pan, breast side up, on a V-shaped rack if vailable.
A low oven temperature (350°F) should be used for chicken and Rock Cornish hen.
Duck and turkey are cooked at 325°F.

If the bird starts browning too soon, aluminum foil may be placed over it to prevent
overbrowning. The formation of a hard, dry crust can be prevented by occasionally
basting the bird with pan drippings during roasting.

The Navy procures boneless, frozen, cooked, and uncooked turkey rolls. These rolls
consist of light and dark meat. The instructions for preparing each type are included with
the specific turkey roll and recipes in the AFRS. The boneless turkey roll is equal in
quality and flavor to whole turkey, and it is easier and faster to prepare. It also permits
accurate portion control, saves storage space, and eliminates waste. However, roast
whole turkeys are often prepared for special meals.

As turkey is larger than most other poultry, it is more difficult to cook to the well-done
stage without overdoing it. Care should be taken to cook it no longer than necessary;

180
overcooking will result in the loss of juices and stringy, dry meat. The use of a meat
thermometer inserted in the thickest part of the thigh muscle will give the internal
temperature of the turkey.

MOIST HEAT METHODS.— In moist heat methods, the water should simmer rather
than boil to avoid the toughening effect of high temperature on the fibers. Depending
upon the cooking method used, temperatures will vary, but slow to moderate
temperatures should be used at all times to develop maximum flavor, tenderness, color,
and juiciness. Intense heat will harden and toughen the protein, shrink the muscles, and
dry out the juices, thus producing a less palatable product. All poultry should be cooked
to the well-done stage. Follow the AFRS directions for preparation.

Pan-frying.— To panfry poultry, wipe the pieces dry, season them with salt and
pepper, and roll them in flour. If a heavier coating (crust) is desired, dip the pieces in
batter or a milk and egg mixture and roll them in soft bread crumbs before they are fried.
Put approximately one-half inch of frying fat in a heavy frying pan and preheat to a
temperature of 360°F to 365°F. Add the pieces of poultry to the hot pan. Turn the pieces
frequently. Use tongs or two spoons to turn the pieces. Do not use a fork because
puncturing the meat with the tines of the fork allows the juices to escape. Cook until
well-done.

Oven Frying.— Dip the pieces of poultry in flour, milk and egg mixture, then into
crumbs. Place poultry in a shallow pan. Pour the fat over the pieces to ensure an even
coating. Cook in the oven.

Deep-Fat Frying.— To deep-fat fry poultry, wipe the pieces dry, season them with salt
and pepper, and roll them in flour. If a heavier coating (crust) is desired, dip the pieces in
batter or a milk and egg mixture and roll them in soft bread crumbs before they are fried.
Place enough fat in the pan to completely cover the pieces of poultry. Preheat the fat to
325°F, then carefully lower the pieces into the fat. Do not crowd. The chicken may be
cooked until done, or it may be browned in deep fat and placed in the oven to complete
the cooking. Always allow the fat to regain the proper temperature before
reloading the fryer.

The giblets (gizzard, heart, and liver) need no preparation other than ordinary washing
in cold water before cooking. One precaution-the liver should be inspected closely to
detect any sign of bile contamination. The bile sack is often broken during its removal
from the liver. Bile damage is easily recognizable by a greenish brown or yellow color
on the liver. Any liver indicating bile damage is unfit to eat and must be discarded.

After washing the giblets in cold water, you should place them in just enough cold
salted water to cover, bring to a boil, then reduce the heat and simmer approximately 1
hour or until they are tender (Livers cook much faster than gizzards and should be cooked
separately). Save the stock and chop the giblets (do not grind) for use in the gravy or
dressing. Refrigerate them until they are ready to use.

181
MEAT CARVING

For special occasions such as holidays, hand carving hams or roast meats on the
serving line is preferred to slicing by machine in the galley.
Rules for Carving Meat

Meats carve more easily if allowed to set (cool off after cooking). The following rules
for carving meat should be used:

• Always use clean, sanitized equipment.

• Use the proper knives for the job.
• Keep the knives sharp.
• Use a meat fork.
• Always cut across the grain of the meat and away from the body.
• Arrange meat portions in a serving pan so that you can easily remove slices
without breaking them.

You should be able to carve meat portions of equal size. Meat, fish, and poultry
recipes indicate the size of the serving portions.

Carving Roast Turkey

Roast whole turkey is usually carved in the galley. Let the turkey stand for about 30
minutes after it is removed from the oven before carving. This will allow the juices to be
absorbed, the flesh to become firm, and the turkey can then be sliced with greater ease
and efficiency. The carving techniques described as follows are the procedures that
should be followed for carving turkey in the galley and will provide generous, accurate
portions.

1. Use a sharp, long-bladed knife. Place the legs to your right if you are right-handed,
to the left if you are left-handed.

2. Remove the leg by holding the drumstick firmly with the thumb and forefinger. Cut
through the skin by drawing the knife back and forth and sever the joint. Press the leg
away from the body with the flat side of the knife. Cut the remaining skin on the back.
Remove the oyster (choice dark meat in spoon-shaped bone on back) with the leg.

3. Disjoint the drumstick and the thigh by holding the leg at a right angle to the board.
Cut through the meat to the bone; then, hold the thigh with the knife and press down with
the other hand until the joint snaps.

4. Slice the leg meat by holding the drumstick at a right angle to the board, cutting
down; turn the leg to get uniform slices. To slice the thigh, straddle the bone with a fork
and cut into lengthwise strips.

182
 5. Remove the wing by placing the knife at a right angle to the breast, about 1 1/2
inches above the wing, and cut straight through the skin and the wing joint.

6. To remove the breast from the back, insert the knife along the top and cut slowly,
guide the knife along the curve of the rib section. Remove the breast in one piece. Place
the breast on the slicing board and slice pieces one-fourth inch thick. You may slice the
breast meat directly from the bird. Hold the bird with a fork straddling the breastbone or
insert the fork in the ribs opposite the side being carved. Start the first slice just above
the place where the wing was removed and with the knife parallel to the breast; use a
sawing motion and cut the slices about one-fourth inch thick.

7. Arrange the sliced turkey in shallow pans; fill one-half of the pan with white meat
and the other half with dark meat. Cover the pan to keep the meat moist and appetizing.
A small amount of broth may be added, if desired.

8. Place the sliced turkey in the steam table inserts. Do not permit the steam table
temperature to go above 200°F as the meat will become dry and continue cooking.

9. To complete the trimming of the bird, cut all remnants off the carcass. This meat
can be used for sandwiches, soups, or creamed dishes.

There are two advantages to this method of carving. It ensures portion control and
makes it possible to use all meat on the carcass and avoid waste.

On special occasions roasted whole turkey may be carved on the serving line. This
allows everyone to see and share in the festivity that a holiday bird symbolizes.

Be sure to store all unused portions of the bird properly. Place the sliced meat on a
tray and cover it loosely with waxed paper before it is placed in the refrigerator. Place
trimmings and other edible parts in the refrigerator if they are not to be used immediately.
Carving Boneless Turkey Roll

Boneless turkey roll may be roasted in the frozen state. If cooked while frozen, allow
1 to 2 hours additional cooking time. If the turkey starts to become too brown, place a
piece of foil loosely over the bird for the last hour of cooking. After the turkey is roasted,
let it stand for at least 30 minutes, preferably 1 hour, before it is served, so that the juices
can be absorbed and the turkey can be sliced more easily and effectively.

If feasible, machine slicing of boneless turkey is preferable to hand slicing. However,

regardless of what method is used, the following slicing procedures are recommended:

• Remove the netting and skin.

• Cut in slices about one-fourth inch thick.
• Place the slices in a shallow insert pan and cover with aluminum foil.

183
Deboning Meat and Poultry

The current availability of frozen boneless meat has practically eliminated the need for
foodservice operations to do in-house butchering or deboning of meat. This has
increased the capacity of total available storage area.
SEAFOOD

Like meat and poultry, seafood products are excellent protein foods and an excellent
source of minerals and vitamins.

There are more than 200 species of fish and shellfish sold in the United States. If you
are looking for variety, they give you more choice than any other food group. You can
buy fish and shellfish fresh, frozen, and canned.

Seasonally and locally available fresh and frozen fish items are authorized for all GMs
through the Department of Defense subsistence offices.

Seafood is highly susceptible to spoilage, and receipts from either Navy or

commercial sources should be carefully checked for quality. Refrozen seafood should
not be accepted; it will usually have soft, flabby discoloration. Occasionally, you may
have to use fresh fish on your menu and you should be able to distinguish the good from
bad.
Fin Fish

Fish is an excellent source of protein, minerals, and vitamins. Fin fish (vertebrates)
have backbones and fins. Examples include salmon, catfish, cod, flounder, haddock,
perch, pollack, rockfish, trout, and whiting.

All fresh fish will spoil rapidly if mishandled. Keep under refrigeration and use
within 3 days of receipt. Keep frozen fish at 0°F or below. Thaw fish at 36°F—never in
water. Handle thawed fish carefully to prevent breakage. Never refreeze fish once
thawed.

Most GMs purchase fish in the form that it will be prepared. Fresh fish may be
purchased in a variety of cuts or forms.

When you are buying fresh fish locally, you should check for quality and freshness.
Fresh fish should have the following characteristics:

• Eyes—bright, clear, and full

• Gills-reddish pink and free from slime
• Scales-adhering tightly to the skin, bright colored with characteristic sheen
• Flesh-firm and elastic, springing back when pressed, not separating from the
bones
• Odor-fresh, free from objectionable odors

184
 Fresh fillets, steaks, and chunks should also have a mild, fresh odor, and the flesh
should have a fresh-cut appearance without any traces of browning or drying.

Frozen fish compares favorably in appearance, flavor, and food value with fresh fish
and may be used interchangeably. Frozen fish should be delivered still frozen and should
remain frozen until just before it is cooked.

Frozen fish fillets and steaks should be thawed gradually under refrigeration and used
as soon as possible thereafter. The ideal temperature range for the thawing period is 36°F
to 38°F. During the thawing period, the fish should be kept in the box just as it was
received from the supplier. The box furnishes insulation that permits all the fish to thaw
uniformly. If not properly protected fish is thawed at temperatures that are too high, the
surface may begin to spoil before the inside is completely thawed. Frozen, breaded
seafood products should not be thawed before they are cooked. In general, a few helpful
rules include the following:

• The amount of fish thawed should not exceed the amount to be served.
• Fish should be thawed just before it is used; it should not be refrozen.
• Seafood products should not be thawed under cold running water.
Shellfish

Shellfish have a partial or complete shell covering. There are two classes of shellfish.
Crustaceans have semihard to hard shells over the back and claws and soft shells under
the body. Shrimp and lobster are examples. Mollusks have two very hard shells of the
same size, which are tightly closed when the mollusk is fresh. Sort and discard any open
shells before cooking. Clams, oysters, and scallops are examples.

The chief varieties of shellfish available from Navy or commercial sources for use in
the GM include clams, crabs, lobsters, crawfish, oysters, scallops, and shrimp.

CLAMS.— Clams are procured as either frozen or canned minced. They are shucked
and packed in natural juices. Clams are available as either frozen regular or individually
quick frozen (IQF). They should not be thawed until they are to be used. IQF clams are
easier to handle since only the amount needed is removed from the container. Once
removed, they should not be refrozen, but they should be drained and used in chowder.
Canned clams should be drained and used like the frozen ones.

CRAB LEGS.— Crab legs are a similar food item in flavor to lobster. The legs
should be split before cooking. Steam or boil and serve with lemon wedges and drawn
butter.

CRAB MEAT.— Crab meat is available in tamed and frozen forms. It maybe used in
crab cakes, salads, and sandwiches. Both forms are fully cooked and ready to use.
Frozen crab meat, once thawed, should be used immediately. Do not refreeze.

185
 LOBSTER.— Lobster is one of the largest species of shellfish. There are two types:
northern lobster and spiny lobster. Northern lobster, the true lobster, is distinguished by
its large heavy claws.

Whole lobsters are available fresh and frozen. When cooked, the shell turns a bright
orange-red color. Fresh and frozen lobsters are very perishable. Keep fresh lobsters alive
until ready to use. Do not freeze. Frozen whole lobsters are commercially available
wrapped in polyethylene film. Do not thaw before cooking. Keep frozen at 0°F or
below. Follow the AFRS for cooking directions. Be sure not to overcook or lobsters will
be tough and dry.

Spiny or rock lobster is distinguished by the absence of large claws and by the
presence of its long slender antenna and many prominent spines on its body and legs.

SCALLOPS.— Scallops are shellfish, similar to oysters and clams. The excellent
flavored adductor muscle, sometimes called the eye, is the only edible part of the scallop.

The Navy procures frozen sea scallops. When thawed, they have a sweetish odor.
Frozen breaded scallops are available. They may be deep-fat or oven fried.

SHRIMP.— Shrimp are caught in all the coastal waters from Maine to Alaska.
Although shrimp vary in color when raw, they differ little in appearance or flavor when
cooked. Green shrimp is a commercial term used to denote raw shrimp.

Shrimp may be procured raw, whole; raw, peeled and deveined; raw, breaded, IQF;
and in breaded molded shrimp portions.
PREPARATION AND COOKING OF SEAFOOD

The type of seafood to be cooked determines the preparation and cooking method.
Fish must be cooked thoroughly but not overcooked. Seafood prepared too far in
advance, even though properly cooked, becomes dry, hard, and loses its flavor and
succulence. Fish should be baked at a moderate temperature (375°F). It is done when it
flakes easily with a fork. Cooking it too long makes it dry and tough.
Preparation

Some fat or oil should be added to practically all varieties of fish, whether light flesh
or dark flesh, when they are cooked. The fat helps keep the fish moist while it is cooking
and makes it more palatable. If the fish is baked, a solid fat such as butter or shortening
may be “dotted” over the fish; melted fat or oil maybe brushed on the fish; or sliced
bacon or thinly sliced salt pork may be laid over the fish. If the fish is to be deep-fat
fried, some fat is added to the fish through the frying process. Fat may also be added to
the fish by a sauce made with fat or oil.

Simple seasoning is best for most fish. Salt and pepper should be added in
moderation; monosodium glutamate also enhances the flavor. Lemon juice and the
milder herbs such as parsley are good seasonings. Seasonings may be added to the fish

186
or placed around it in a baking pan, or they maybe incorporated into a sauce or a basting
liquid that creates steam and helps to keep fish moist and flavorsome. When fish is
cooked in a liquid or a sauce, both the fish and the sauce should be lightly seasoned to
avoid a salty product.
Cooking

Generally it is best to fry lean fish, such as haddock or flounder, and broil or bake fat
fish, such as salmon or mackerel. However, you may broil or bake lean fish if you baste it
frequently with melted fat or if you cook it with a sauce to avoid dryness.

BAKING.— You can bake fish of almost any size provided there is enough oven
space. Place the fish on a greased pan and brush it thoroughly on both sides with melted
butter or margarine. Sprinkle it with the appropriate seasoning and bake at 375°F for 35
minutes or until lightly browned.

PANFRYING.— You can panfry small whole fish or serving-size fillets or steaks. To
panfry breaded fish fillets or steaks, follow these procedures:

1. Place the fish fillets or steaks that have been dredged in a mixture of crumbs, flour
and pepper, on a sheet pan containing one-eighth inch of shortening. The shortening
should be hot, but not smoking.

2. Brown the fish on one side. Turn it carefully, and brown it on the other side. Use
moderate heat.

3. Drain the fish and serve hot. Garnish with chopped parsley or lemon wedges.

DEEP-FAT FRYING.— Do not thaw breaded frozen fish portions before cooking
them. If you thaw them, the breading may fall off or become tough and dark during the
frying process. If this happens, the natural juices of the fish will be lost. Cook frozen
portions in fat heated to 350°F for 3 minutes or until lightly browned. Drain well in a
basket or on absorbent paper.

You can deep-fat fry small, whole fish or serving-size fillets and steaks. Thaw the
fish. Then dip it in an egg-milk mixture, drain it, and roll it in a mixture of bread crumbs
and flour. Shake off excess coating. Cook fish in fat heated to 365°F for 4 minutes or
until browned. Drain well in a basket or on absorbent paper.

COOKING SHELLFISH.— Shrimp, oysters, and scallops are usually breaded and
deep-fat fried. Serve them either separately or in a seafood platter. Drain oysters in a
colander after they thaw and remove any pieces of shell. Cook breaded shrimp and
scallops in deep fat at 350°F. Fry breaded oysters in deep fat at 375°F.

187
 CHAPTER 7

NUTRITION AND MENU PLANNING

One of your most important duties as a senior Culinary Specialist (CS) is to see that
the general mess (GM) customers are always well fed. To be well fed means that they
should have not only enough food but also the right kind of food in the proper
combinations; that is, foods containing the correct amounts of the various nutrients
necessary to good health and well-being. To accomplish this, the menus must be
carefully and skillfully planned to produce the right combinations of food in dishes that
will appeal to the personnel to whom they are served. This should be accomplished
within your budget and with the food items you have had the foresight to stock on board.
This service must be carried out afloat and ashore, consistently, under varying operating
conditions, in widely differing geographic locations, and in all kinds of weather.

The purpose of this chapter is to provide you with the information and guidance
needed in the areas of menu planning, and nutrition, and ultimately, in the supervision of
other personnel in this area.

The foodservice division is a customer service oriented division, and customer

satisfaction is one of our primary goals. We should take every opportunity to motivate
the personnel who man the contact points (galley, serving line, and mess area), whether
civilian or military, to do their best and to take pride in the caliber of service they provide
their shipmates. Motivating our personnel in these positions provides a special challenge
to the senior CS. We should make sure the personnel manning these contact points
realize that they are part of a people-oriented team, that they are an important part of our
Navy, and that the positions they hold at these contact points are positions of special trust
that support our most important resource-our Navy men and women.

NUTRITION

Nutrition is the science of the nourishment of the human body, the science of food. To
master this science we should familiarize ourselves with the nature of food. Food is
composed of various nutrients: proteins, carbohydrates, fats, minerals, vitamins, and
water.

Nutrition concerns itself with determining what components are needed and how
much of each is required to maintain healthy bodies. Nutrition concerns itself with the
ways in which foods are altered in processing, storage, and preparation, and in the ways
in which foods are transformed chemically in the body. Nutrition deals with the
preparation and serving of foods in such a way as to make sure the nutrients necessary to
good health are not unnecessarily lost in the process. In addition, nutrition should be
concerned with the social, economic, cultural, and psychological implications of foods.

When you prepare your next meal, the patrons will have definite ideas-positive or
negative-about the meal and the specific foods that are served. They may delight in the
variations in the texture, in the color combinations of the food, in the artistic touch of a

188
garnish, or they may find the food unacceptable because the fuel lacks color or is
carelessly served. They may enjoy the tantalizing smell of meat, of freshly baked rolls,
or the fragrance of fully ripened fruit. The odor of grease that has been too hot or of
vegetables that have been cooked too long may cause lack of appetite and even nausea
The patrons will experience countless flavors-the salty, sweet, bitter, and sour tastes and
their variations; they will feel the textures of smooth or fibrous, crisp or soft, creamy or
oily, moist or dry foods. The provision of a nutritious diet, well cooked and attractively
served, plays an important part in the acceptability of a meal.

FOOD CONTENT

Food is any substance consisting essentially of protein, carbohydrates, fats, minerals,

vitamins, and water that is used in the body to sustain growth, to build and repair tissues,
to furnish energy, and to sustain the vital processes of the body. The body’s needs for the
various nutrients vary with age, sex, occupation, and environment. A child needs certain
foods to grow and the body continues to require certain foods for its upkeep. Vitamins,
minerals, and proteins provide regulators that enable the body to use other materials.
Fuel for the body’s energy and warmth is provided by food.

Calories

A knowledge of the calorie content of food is important to you as an CS. Your skill in
developing healthy menus plays a critical role in the support of the physical fitness and
personal appearance of Navy personnel. The role of the foodservice division in meeting
this need is providing lower calorie food choices. Some low-calorie food choices include
low-calorie salad dressing; salads and relishes (raw vegetables); skim and/or low-fat
milk; fresh and/or tamed fruit drained of syrup; lean meat, poultry, fish, or seafood
without added high-calorie sauces or gravies; a vegetable choice without added fat; and
light desserts in smaller portions. Think-thin menus are planned using the same
principles and standards used for the general menu and should be based on the general
menu. Think-thin menus should include all the basic menu components while
eliminating high-calorie extras such as gravies, sauces, and toppings. Calorie content is
influenced by preparation methods and portion size. Guidance on planning low-calorie
meals, low-fat food preparation, and think-thin portion sizes of Armed Forces Recipe
Service (AFRS) recipes is contained in NAVSUP P486.

Food Nutrients

There are six types of food nutrients. Most of us can get enough of these nutrients by
eating foods from the major food groups each day. These nutrients are discussed next.

PROTEINS.— The chief function of protein in the body is to supply the tissue-
building material. Protein itself is a chemically complex organic substance that contains
nitrogen in combination with carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen. In the process of digestion,
these substances break down into smaller units called amino acids. These units, in turn,
are rebuilt into body protein. Certain amino acids are necessary for maintaining growth,
weight, and good health. Foods are classified as protein foods only when they contain

189
protein in sufficient amounts to be of value when the food is consumed in normal
amounts.

Animal protein foods-meat, poultry, fish, eggs, milk, and milk products, such as
cheese-contain the necessary amino acids essential to body structure. The protein in
cereals, vegetables, and legumes lacks some of the important amino acids and alone
cannot support growth. However, vegetable proteins such as dried beans, dried peas, and
peanuts can supplement the animal proteins, and when they are served in the proper
combination can provide all the essential amino acids without the addition of any animal
protein.

FATS.— Fats provide twice as much energy and calories as do carbohydrates or

protein. Fats are important in the diet to furnish energy, provide essential fatty acids,
transport fat-soluble vitamins and aid in their absorption, increase palatability, and give a
feeling of fullness. However, it is becoming increasingly clear that excessive amounts of
total fat may lead to an increased risk of coronary heart and vascular diseases. Emphasis
should be placed on planning menus toward attainment of lower fat concentrations while
maintaining acceptability. A significant reduction of fat can be achieved by lowering
added fats during food preparation and increasing the proportion of lean meats, fish,
poultry, skim milk, and other low-fat dairy products in the menu.

CARBOHYDRATES.— Carbohydrates are generally low in calories and fat and high
in fiber. Complex carbohydrates are found in grains, vegetables, and legumes such as
dried beans and split peas. Nutritionists recommend that we get at least 55- to 60-percent
of our calories from complex carbohydrates. Complex carbohydrate foods play an
important role in weight control. They supply the body with energy in a constant, time-
released manner. Since carbohydrates supply sustained energy, athletes should get 60- to
70-percent of their calories from carbohydrates. Carbohydrates are stored in the muscles
as glycogen, which is essential for endurance. Additionally, a diet high in the soluble
fiber found in legumes, fruits, vegetables, and some grains may play a role in lowering
blood cholesterol.

MINERALS.— Twenty known minerals are essential to health. Some of the more
important minerals will be explained next.

Calcium.— The most abundant mineral in the body is calcium and, except for iron, it
is the most likely to be inadequate in the diets of many age groups. (From the age of 9,
the diets of many girls and women may lack as much as 25 percent to 30 percent of the
calcium they need.) Almost all calcium, and most phosphorus, which works closely with
calcium in the body, is in the bones and teeth.

The rest plays a vital role in tissue and body fluids. Soft tissue, or muscle, also has a
high phosphorus content. Calcium is required for blood to clot and for the heart to
function normally. The nervous system does not work properly when calcium levels in
the blood are below normal.

190
 In the United States we rely on milk as a basic source of calcium, and 2 cups of milk,
or an equivalent amount of cheese or other dairy products except butter, go a long way
toward supplying all the calcium needed for the day.

But milk is not the only source. Dark green leafy vegetables, such as collards,
mustard greens, or turnip greens, provide some calcium, and salmon and sardines supply
useful amounts of it if the very tiny bones are eaten.

Phosphorus.— Phosphorus is necessary for building bones and teeth. Milk, cheese,
eggs, meat, legumes, nuts, whole grain cereals, and vegetables are good sources of this
mineral. Iron.— Iron carries oxygen in the blood. The best sources of iron are meats
(especially liver). But foods from some plants, such as dried beans, dark green leafy
vegetables, and grains, are good sources of iron, especially when eaten along with foods
rich in vitamin C. Vitamin C helps the body absorb iron better.

Iodine.— The most important fact about iodine is that a deficiency of it can cause a
goiter—a swelling of the thyroid gland. Important sources are seafoods, plants grown in
the soil near the sea, and iodized salt, which is used in all Navy messes.

Salt.— Salt is needed by everyone. A person needs about 1 level teaspoon of salt per
day and more when a person perspires a great deal. The average intake of salt is from 2
to 3 teaspoons daily, which is enough for a person drinking up to about 4 quarts of water.
A person who is not getting enough salt will become weak.

Many Americans eat more salt and sodium than we need. Salt contains sodium and is
already present in many canned or processed foods. Excess salt contributes to high blood
pressure in some people.

Sodium (salt) has been reduced in AFRS recipes to minimum acceptable levels.
Sodium can be further reduced in recipes by using the following guidelines:

• Season food with herbs and spices instead of high-sodium items like salt, soy
sauce, or steak sauce.
• Choose fresh rather than canned food items.
• Look for prepared foods that say low or reduced sodium on the label.

VITAMINS.— There are about 13 vitamins that are absolutely necessary for good
health. Four are called fat-soluble vitamins because they dissolve in fat. These are
vitamins A, D, E, and K. They are digested and absorbed with the help of fats from the
diet. These vitamins can be stored in the body for long periods of time, mostly in fatty
tissue and in the liver. Nine other vitamins are called water soluble. They include eight B
vitamins and vitamin C. These vitamins are not stored in the body very long, so you need
to eat foods that are good sources of these vitamins every day.

A few of these vitamins are of great importance and you should know what foods
provide them.

191
 Vitamin A.— This vitamin plays a very important role in eye function and in keeping
the skin and mucous membranes resistant to infection. Although vitamin A occurs only
in foods of animal origin, the deep yellow and dark green vegetables and fruits supply a
material—carotene—that your body can turn into vitamin A.

Vitamin A is found in yellow, orange, and green vegetables; yellow fruits; and in the
fat of animal products like fish, milk, eggs, and liver. Both cheese made from whole
milk, and margarine enriched with vitamin A supply this vitamin.

Vitamin C.— Vitamin C, ascorbic acid, is not completely understood, but it is

considered important in helping to maintain the cementing material that holds body cells
together. Vitamin C is needed for wound healing; for development of blood vessels,
bones, teeth, and other tissues; and for minerals to be used by the body.

Vitamin C is found in citrus fruits, melons, berries, leafy green vegetables, broccoli,
raw cabbage, spinach, and turnip and collard greens. Potatoes and sweet potatoes provide
helpful amounts of vitamin C and so do tomatoes and peppers.

Vitamin D.— Vitamin D is readily available in fortified milk. Sunlight enables the
body to produce this vitamin if it has a chance to shine directly on the skin. Vitamin D is
needed for using calcium and phosphorus to build strong bones and teeth. Vitamin D is
added to most milk. It is also found in fatty fish, liver, eggs, and butter.

Vitamin E.— Vitamin E helps preserve the cell tissues. Although vitamin E’s exact
role in the body is not fully understood, it is being explored as an antioxidant that may
retard some aspects of the aging process. Vitamin E is found in a wide variety of foods,
and most people get enough. Vegetable oils and whole grain cereals are particularly rich
sources.

Vitamin K.— Vitamin K is essential because it indirectly helps blood to clot. Vitamin
K is widely distributed in a variety of foods such as the green and leafy vegetables,
tomatoes, cauliflower, egg yolks, soybean oil, and any kind of liver. It is also
manufactured in the body.

Three of the best known B vitamins-riboflavin, thiamine, and niacin-release the

energy in food. They also have a role in the nervous system, keep the digestive system
working calmly, and help maintain a healthy skin.

Thiamine (B1).— Thiamine is abundant in only a few foods. Lean pork is one. Dry
beans and peas, some of the organ meats, and some nuts supply some thiamine.

A lack of thiamine (vitamin B1 ) causes beriberi. Fortunately, this disease is now

almost nonexistent in the United States, although it is still seen in some alcoholics.

192
 Riboflavin (B2).— Riboflavin is easy to find and extremely important in the diet. It is
plentifully supplied by meats, milk and whole grain or enriched breads and cereals.
Organ meats (liver, kidney, and so on) also supply this vitamin.

Niacin.—Niacin (nicotinic acid) prevents a disease called pellagra. It aids in digestion

and the health of the skin. Whole grain and enriched cereals and bread are dependable
sources of niacin. Niacin also can be found in meat and meat products and peas and
beans.

Other B Vitamins.— Other B vitamins, such as B6, BIz, and folacin, are needed to
maintain normal hemoglobin-the substance in blood that carries oxygen to the tissues.
Vitamin B12 occurs in foods of animal origin. Folacin helps in the production of red
blood cells and is available in many foods but in small quantities. Sources of folacin are
liver, green vegetables, whole grains, and dry beans.

Strict vegetarians run a risk of developing the symptoms of Blz deficiency; these
include soreness of the mouth and tongue, numbness and tingling in the hands and legs,
anemia and loss of coordination.

WATER.— Water is often called the forgotten nutrient. It is needed to replace lost
body water. Water helps transport nutrients, remove waste, and regulate body
temperature.

CONSERVING NUTRIENTS.— It is not enough just to select the proper foods for
the menu. They must be prepared in such a way that valuable nutrients are not lost.

The following cooking rules, if followed, will make your meals more nutritious and
add to the general health of the crew.

• Serve fresh fruits and vegetables as soon after you receive them as possible.
• Handle fresh fruits and vegetables carefully because bruising causes a rapid loss
of vitamins.
• Store fresh fruits and vegetables properly until they are to be used.
• Do not soak vegetables in water longer than necessary to freshen or clean them.
Water will dissolve vitamins Bl, Bz, C, and minerals.
• To cook vegetables, place them in rapidly boiling water. Bring the water back to
a boil and reduce to a simmer.
• Cook vegetables quickly and just until tender in order to leave them with some of
their original crispness.
• Cook vegetables in as little water as possible.
• Do not throw away cooking water. Save it for use in soups, sauces, and gravies.
• Heat canned vegetables quickly just before serving.
• Shred outer leaves of lettuce, cabbage, and green leaves of celery for use in
flavoring soups.
• Serve fruits and vegetables raw in salads.

193
 • Prepare fruits and vegetables for salads just before serving.
• When salmon salad is prepared, save the juice and use it in salad dressing or as a
part of the liquid for salmon loaf or sauce.
• Prepare hot foods just in time to be served. Never prepare them early and reheat
them.

Menu planners should judge the nutritional adequacy of their menus and special
rations. Detailed analysis of nutrients is not required if the menu includes a wide variety
of foods and the food guide pyramid for daily food choices is used. This pyramid
provides a simple, quick, and reliable method of judging the menu’s nutritional adequacy.
The guide divides commonly eaten foods into five major food groups according to the
nutritional contributions they make.
FOOD GUIDE PYRAMID

The Food Guide Pyramid is an outline of what to eat each day, and it calls for a
variety of food and nutrients. Fruits and vegetables provide essential vitamins and
minerals, fiber, and other substances that are associated with good health. Low fat diets
rich in fiber-containing grain products, fruits, and vegetables may reduce the risk of heart
disease and some types of cancer. Milk products provide protein, vitamins and minerals
and are the best source of calcium. However, fats, oils, and sweets provide calories and
little else, and should be used sparingly. Drinking enough water is also essential to
keeping hydrated, converting food into energy, carrying nutrients through the body, and
removing waste.

These are guides set down on diet and health for individuals 2 yrs or older and are
published every 5 years based on new scientific information. The Department of Health
and Human Services (DHHS) and United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) form
the basis for the Federal Nutrition Policy. The Food Guide Pyramid was introduced in
1992 to illustrate a guide developed by the U.S. department of Agriculture (USDA) to
help healthy Americans use the Dietary Guidelines to choose foods for a healthy diet.
Since its release, the Pyramid has captured the imagination of nutrition educators,
teachers, the media, and the food industry. It now appears widely in nutrition curricula,
articles, food packaging, and advertising designed to show the composition of a healthy
diet and the contribution of specific food products to such diets.

The Food Guide Pyramid is a graphic tool that conveys “at a glance” important dietary
guidance concepts of variety, proportion, and moderation with the major causes of
morbidity and mortality in the U.S. being related to poor diet and a sedentary lifestyle.
Eating right is vital to promoting health and reducing the risk for death or disability and
chronic diseases. Some examples are:

• Cardiovascular disease
• Type 2 diabetes
• Hypertension
• Osteoporosis
• Certain types of cancer

194
 In fact, it has been estimated that dietary changes could reduce cancer deaths in the
United States by as much as 35 percent.

In is important to note that these concepts are not new—with varying emphasis, they
have been part of USDA food guides for almost 100 years. Studies conducted before the
release of the Food Guide Pyramid confirmed that the pyramid was the most effective of
numerous graphics tested in communicating key concepts of a healthy diet. Having said
that below is what we are taking about.

You should consume a variety of foods within and among the basic food groups
while staying within energy needs.

You should control calorie intake and manage body weight.

You should be physically active every day.

You should increase daily intake of fruits and vegetables, whole grains, and
nonfat or low-fat milk and milk products.

You should choose fats wisely for good health.

You should choose carbohydrates wisely for good health. Focus on complex
carbohydrates and whole grains.

You should choose and prepare foods with little salt.

You should keep foods safe to eat by keeping foods out of the danger zone
between 41F - 140F.
2005 Nine Dietary Guidelines For Americans

• Adequate Nutrients Within Calorie Needs

• Weight Management
• Physical Activity
• Improving Eating Patterns
• Fats
• Carbohydrates
• Sodium
• Alcohol
• Food Safety

195
NUTRITIONAL

A diet that is adequate in protein, vitamins, minerals, and dietary fiber, without
excessive amounts of calories, fat, saturated fat, cholesterol, sodium, added sugars, and
alcohol.

USABILITY

A guide that is practical and useful to consumers. Unlike earlier guides such as the
“Basic Four,” which recommended a foundation diet designed to prevent nutrient
deficiencies, the new food guide specifies food choices for the total diet because both
nutrient adequacy and excesses are of concern. The specific nutrient levels targeted are
the Recommended Dietary Allowances (RDAs) for protein, vitamins and minerals, and
levels of food components such as fat, saturated fat, cholesterol, sodium, and fiber
recommended by the Dietary Guidelines and by consensus reports of authoritative health
organizations. Consistent with the RDA, these goals apply to diets consumed over a
reasonable period of time—a week, for example. Both RDA and food guide serving
recommendations are by convention expressed on a daily basis; daily menus vary around
these standards. This allows flexibility in food choices.

Only 3 percent of all individuals meet four of the five recommendations for the intake
of grains, fruits, vegetables, milk products, and meat and bean food groups. Only one-
fourth of U.S. adults eat the recommended servings of fruits and vegetables each day.
Unfortunately, poor eating habits are usually established during childhood. And more
than 60 percent of young people eat too much fat, and less than 20 percent eat the
recommended servings of fruits and vegetables.

Adequate Nutrients Within Calorie Needs

Given the importance of a balanced diet to health, the intent of the Dietary Guidelines is
to summarize and synthesize knowledge regarding individual nutrients and the general
public can adopt food components into recommendations for an overall pattern of eating
that. The USDA Food Guide and the DASH Eating Plan exemplify these patterns.

DASH = Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension

Whole grains and low fat dairy foods are encouraged to be consumed daily.

196
 DASH Eating Plan
Calorie Level
2000

Whole grains
7-8
Vegetables
4-5
Fruits
4-5
Low fat/non-fat dairy
3
Meat, fish, poultry
~2
Nuts, seeds, legumes
4-5
Fats and oils
2-3
Sweets (discretionary calories)
2
Nutrient Dense Foods

This guideline recommends consuming a variety of nutrient dense foods and

beverages. Nutrient dense foods are those that contain many nutrients for the calories
they provide. Examples of these foods are fruits and vegetables. It is recommended to
adopt the USDA Food Guide, which emphasizes portion control to help Americans
consume adequate amounts of food without exceeding daily caloric needs. It is also
recommended to adopt the DASH eating plan, which stands for Dietary Approaches to
Stopping Hypertension. This plan recommends reducing sodium intake that will help in
the prevention of high blood pressure. Americans generally do not consume enough
nutrient dense foods (foods providing few calories for the many nutrients they yield)

A variety of fruits and vegetables are encouraged to be consumed daily within

calorie/energy needs. The recommended amounts of fruits and vegetables to be
consumed daily are 2 cups of fruit and 2-1/2 cups of vegetables.

The Food Pyramid referred to as the Food Guidance System has colored stripes and an
individual walking up a staircase that represents food groups to be consumed and daily
activity. This new logo promotes the importance of consuming fruit and vegetables,
whole grains and healthful fat, including nuts and olive oil, and limiting food with added
sugar, saturated fat and trans fatty acids. Exercise is also encouraged as signified by the
staircase on the left side of the pyramid.

197
Weight Management

When referring to weight management, it is critical to maintain body weight in a

healthy range. The calories consumed should be balanced with those expended. You
must maintain body weight in a healthy range. According to the 2002 DoD survey of
health related behaviors among military personnel, a trend shows that there has been a
significant increase of overweight personnel since 1998.

WEIGHT LOSS

Specific guidelines are recommended for weight loss with certain populations. The
goal for people who are overweight and trying to loose weight is to aim for slow, steady
weight loss. In the case with overweight children, it is recommended to reduce the rate
of weight gain. This may be achieved by changing food choices, beverages and after
school snacks to more nutrient dense options.

If a person is overweight and has chronic diseases, a health care provider should be
consulted and weight gain should be discussed. And let us not forget to increase your
physical activity, which is classified as engaging in regular exercise and reducing
sedentary activities in order to promote health, psychological well being and a healthy
body weight. Physical Activity can be achieved by participating in cardiovascular
conditioning, stretching for flexibility and resistance for muscle strength. Ideally, all 3
components should be incorporated into a physical fitness routine. Engaging in 30

198
minutes of moderate intensity exercise on most days can decrease the risk for chronic
disease. A person can obtain greater benefits if more vigorous, longer exercise sessions
are practiced. If weight management is a goal, 60 minutes of exercise is recommended
daily. For people desiring sustained weight loss, 60-90 minutes of exercise is
recommended daily. It is recommended that children and adolescents engage in 60
minutes of physical activity daily. Pregnant women are encouraged to engage in 30
minutes of physical activity daily in the absence of complications.
CHANGE YOUR EATING PATTERNS

It is recommended to consume 3 or more servings of whole grain products and 3

servings of dairy products. The recommended daily fat intake is between 20-35% of
calories with 10% coming from saturated fat and 0% from trans fats. The recommended
daily Cholesterol intake for all people is 300 mg. Cholesterol is a fat that accumulates in
the blood and comes only from animal sources.

When choosing carbohydrates, fiber rich fruits, vegetables and whole grains are
preferred. Fiber rich fruits include those with skins. When shopping for whole grains,
ensure that the first ingredient on the nutrition fact label is whole wheat or whole-wheat
flour. Foods prepared with little sugar and caloric sweetener are recommended. Caloric
sweeteners include corn syrup, sucrose syrup and high fructose corn syrup.
Carbohydrates do contribute to dental caries. Limiting sugary and starchy food intake
will reduce dental caries as well as practicing good oral hygiene.
The recommendation for daily sodium intake is 2300 mg, which equals 1 teaspoon of
salt, potassium rich fruits and vegetables including potatoes, oranges, grapefruits,
bananas, milk, yogurt, legumes, and meat. Certain populations have to restrict sodium
intake due to there being hypertensive. The daily recommended ratio of sodium to
potassium should be 1 sodium: potassium.

THE BOTTOM LINE

Foods provide an array of nutrients (as well as phytochemicals, antioxidants, etc.) and
other compounds that may have beneficial effects on health. In some cases, fortified
foods may be useful sources of one or more nutrients that otherwise might be consumed
in less than recommended amounts. Supplements may be useful when they fill a specific
identified nutrient gap that cannot or is not otherwise being met by the individual's intake
of food. Nutrient supplements cannot replace a healthful diet. Individuals who are
already consuming the recommended amount of a nutrient in food will not achieve any
additional health benefit if they also take the nutrient as a supplement. In fact, in some
cases, supplements and fortified foods may cause intakes to exceed the safe levels of
nutrients. Another important premise of the Dietary Guidelines is that foods should be
prepared and handled in such a way that reduces risk of food borne illness.
Pyramid Math

Plan on eating the number of servings recommended from each group each day.
Compare the portions you eat with standard Pyramid servings to judge whether you eat

199
the recommended amounts. Your portion sizes do not have to match the serving sizes,
but the total amount you eat over the day should match the total recommended amount.

MENU PLANNING

Menu planning in the Navy means devising meals that are nutritionally adequate and
acceptable to the patrons. The term providing for food needs means that enough
nourishing food must be served to satisfy the needs of the patrons and that this food
should be attractive and acceptable to these personnel. This service must be
accomplished consistently under varying afloat and ashore operating conditions in widely
different geographic locations, using the foodservice capabilities of your ship or station.
FACTORS AFFECTING MENUS

Many factors affect the menu planner’s choice of foods for the menu. Nutritional
requirements, portion preferences, food costs, and availability of supplies are discussed
next.
Monetary Allowances

Economic factors invariably concern all menu planners. GMs are operated on a
monetary ration allowance. NAVSUP 51 publishes a list of fixed unit prices quarterly.
This is used in pricing food items issued to the messes and in the monetary values of the
basic daily allowance, supplementary allowances, and special allowances.

The basic daily food allowance is sufficient to feed a full daily ration under normal
operating conditions. It is expected that, with proper management, an under expenditure
will exist at the end of the accounting period. This requires effective menu planning,
control of issues, correct inventory procedures, food conservation programs, and a daily
review of ration costs.
Seasonal Availability of Food Items

Seasonal availability of food is important in that menus should be adjusted to take

advantage of seasonal changes in the supply of fresh produce. Canned, frozen, or
dehydrated fruits, juices, and vegetables supplement the fresh menu items and are
comparable in nutritive value.
Equipment Personnel, and Storage Facilities

Limited storage space, especially on small craft deployed on long cruises, prevents the
use of many perishable food items. Menus for these activities should plan to use custom
foods extensively to take best advantage of available storage space. Menus for such
cruises should be planned well in advance to assure balanced stocks that will enable you
to prepare nutritious meals.

The choice of preparation of foods to be served will also depend upon the galley
equipment, the number of personnel to be fed, and the number of CSs on duty.

200
 Menus may be more elaborate if laborsaving equipment is available and a sufficient
number of CSs are on duty to allow for the preparation of last-minute items. In summary,
determining the choice of menu items should include the following considerations:

• The type and capacity of the galley equipment

• The number of personnel to be fed
• The number of workers in the galley

Avoid menus that require too much last-minute preparation. Plan a balance between
the foods that can be prepared in advance without deteriorating in quality and those that
must be prepared just before serving time.
Presentation Factors

Foods that look good and complement each other always have an advantage over
those that are less attractive, even though they may be equally well prepared and
nutritious. Learn to choose and combine foods in such a way as to achieve variety and
harmony, both in appearance and flavor. The following suggestions will help you:

• Vary the methods of preparation of the food served. Carrots, for example, can be
served raw, buttered, french fried, seasoned with lemon juice, or combined with peas.
• Consider the color of the food selected. Choose colors that look well
together. Avoid too many foods of the same color at any one meal.
• Avoid the use of unsuitable colors for food. Serve interesting combinations of
flavors. Combine mild and strong flavors but do not kill a delicate flavor with an
unsuitable flavor combination. Avoid using the same flavor twice in the same meal.
• Combine different shapes such as diced potatoes, sliced meats, and leafy
vegetables.
• Do not plan all soft, dry, or moist foods for any one meal. Vary the texture.
• Review the cycle menu each time it is used. Generally, avoid having the
same meal on the same day of every week.
MENU-PLANNING TOOLS

The skill of the menu planner is reflected in the meals served in the Navy. Developing
skill in appraising operating conditions, food acceptance, and food supplies in terms of
potential meals is a demanding and responsible task. To accomplish these tasks, you
should develop the following skills:

• Gain basic knowledge of menu-planning principles

• Balance meals in nourishing and attractive combinations of foods
• Keep food costs with unjustifiable limitations and prescribed monetary
allowances
• Plan for efficient food supply management and logistics

Flexibility and adaptability are essential to the proper planning of meals. Rarely will
you be able to use standard menus. The foods that are written into your ship’s menu

201
should vary as operating conditions vary. Even ships of the same type as yours,
operating under the same conditions and in the same area, probably could not use exactly
the same menus. The ability to adapt menus is a skill you must acquire.

The most important sources of guidance for menu planning are described in this
section.

Food-Preparation Worksheet

The Food-Preparation Worksheet, NAVSUP Form 1090, is a very important document

and should be properly maintained. This form serves as a written directive between the
leading CS and the personnel on watch. A food-preparation worksheet should be
prepared for each space in which food is prepared. The food-preparation worksheet will
prove its worth to you when you use it regularly because it provides much information
and guidance.

The worksheet helps reveal the strengths and weaknesses of the menu. When the
preparation of the daily menu is plotted on a worksheet, weaknesses and bottlenecks
stand out vividly. For example, you may find that all menu items are to be prepared in
the same three steam-jacketed kettles or that the three main menu items are to be oven-
prepared, each item requiring a different oven temperature.

The worksheet helps you plan and organize the work to be performed by your
subordinates. The information written in the Start Preparation, Start Cooking, and
Instructions columns will help subordinates plan their work. Careful planning avoids the
problem of having too much food prepared ahead of serving time.

The worksheet helps you to supervise the work performed by your subordinates. As a
written directive, the worksheet is your way of communicating instructions concerning
the preparation of the day’s menu to subordinates. You cannot depend on your memory
nor can you expect subordinates to depend on their memory.

The worksheet helps you to train subordinates who will be responsible for a galley
operation in the future. Discuss the worksheet with your watch captains so that they
know exactly how the menu is to be prepared. Point out the supervisory techniques you
want them to use in their working relations with the crew. After each meal, meet with
your watch captain and key personnel to critique the meal. This is the ideal time to
discuss the acceptability of menu items and to record the acceptability on the worksheet.
The critique session provides the information essential to promote efficient operations.

If your personnel are accustomed to following a worksheet, give the watch captains
the experience of developing one. Let each watch captain prepare the worksheet on a
monthly basis, plan the day’s work discuss premeal preparation, and hold postmeal
critiques. Delegating the development of the worksheet to the watch captain is excellent
training if the leading CS is readily available to advise, guide, and monitor discussions
and critiques.

202
 Finally, the worksheet serves as a means for establishing control of (1) issues to the
GMs (the quantities posted on NAVSUP Forms 1059 or 1282 should agree with the
quantities needed to prepare the number of portions specified), (2) the quantity of each
menu item prepared, (3) the portion size served, and (4) leftover menu items. Completed
worksheets on file provide the invaluable past history needed for establishing controls.
The acceptability of menu items will determine the quantity to break out, quantity to
prepare, and any change in portion size.
Acceptability Factors

Customer acceptability of the menu is a major goal of the menu planner. There is no
set pattern to indicate what foods the patrons will eat and enjoy. An individual’s food
tastes may be influenced by many factors, such as likes and dislikes before entering the
service, the foods one has learned to eat and enjoy during a service career, and the group
of friends one eats with at mealtime. The menu planner should know the customers so
that the meals planned will be well accepted. The following are ways that the menu
planner can determine the acceptability of specific foods in the mess.

A food acceptance factor is one that expresses the percentage of people who eat a
particular dish. To obtain an acceptability factor for individual menu items, divide the
number of portions of the item served by the number of patrons in attendance at the meal.

Keep a record of menu item acceptance on the Food-Preparation Worksheet,

NAVSUP Form 1090, the individual recipe card, or the Index of Recipes. An acceptance
factor is a valuable index of the popularity of menu items and should be used for this
purpose after an item has been tested at several meals.

Acceptance factors for the same menu item may vary from meal to meal. Different
combinations of foods on a menu, different weather, or varying appetites may alter the
acceptance of an item. A more accurate acceptance factor may result by averaging
figures obtained for a particular menu over a period of time.

Another way to determine acceptability is to keep a systematic check on plate or tray

waste. This should be recorded on the food-preparation worksheet.

Good food acceptance means less plate waste and fewer leftovers to account for in
planning future meals. Even popular foods may become monotonous if served too often.
Food Preference Ratings

The fact that the patrons will take or accept items on the serving line does not prove
that these are their preferred foods; they may take it merely because they have no better
choice.

Food preferences or attitudes toward foods may be determined by several approaches.

One approach is to solicit written opinions from the crew regarding items or classes of
foods when you have doubts about their relative popularity. A questionnaire may be

203
developed on which the patrons indicate their preference for various items. The manner
in which the foods are described, the instructions given with the questionnaire, and where
and when it is filled out are important factors to consider if you are to obtain good
reliable data.

The most commonly used food preference questionnaire is a rating scale given to each
person attending the meal or at some other appropriate time. This type of questionnaire is
easily tabulated and is reliable because checking or circling a block is all that a person is
required to do.

Food preference questionnaires can determine which single food items are most or
least popular, their desired frequency of use on a menu, and what menu combinations are
most or least liked. These food preference questionnaires should be updated periodically
because tastes change, new personnel come aboard, and new items are procured.
Food Usage Records

A 21 and 35-day menu with valid acceptability factors can be used to estimate the
requirements for a 21and 35day load out. Add one-third of initial requirements for a 60-
day (56 actual) period. By doubling the initial requirement, the time can be extended to a
90-day (84 actual) period, and soon. Type commanders establish operational endurance
requirements.

A first consideration in advance menu planning should be balanced requisitioning.

Past usage records help attain this balance by showing what is on hand and what items
are needed. Planning calendars of stock rotation will prevent a rewrite of menus to
incorporate surplus stocks of on-hand items. Items should be rotated on a regular basis,
oldest stocks should be used first.
Menu-Planning Guides

A menu plan needs to be well informed. Sources of information kept within easy
reach will be valuable in planning menus. Previous menu plans on file will give a good
indication of what is practical for the preparation facilities and number of personnel
served at a particular location.

STANDARDS OF FOOD SERVICE, NAVSUPINST 4061.11.— Section I of this

instruction, Menu Planning and Food Preparation, establishes updated menu-planning
standards that can be attained by all Navy GMs to assure wholesome, nutritious meals.

ARMED FORCES RECIPE SERVICE, NAVSUP P-7.— The AFRS, NAVSUP P-7,
consists of a file of approximately 1,300 recipes and recipe variations printed on 5- by 8-
inch cards. The cards are color-coded to make identification easier. The AFRS includes
color photographs of certain recipe finished products, guideline cards, and line drawings
of bread and sweet roll makeup procedures. The recipes are standardized to generally
yield 100 portions and include efficient preparation techniques. The Index of Recipes, an
adjunct to the AFRS, is a compact list of all recipes contained in the recipe service.
Continuous use of the Index of Recipes in planning menus will help avoid menu

204
monotony and will provide ideas for new menu combinations. Commands are
encouraged to send their favorite recipes to NAVSUP for consideration for inclusion in
the AFRS. All recipes are tested and evaluated for military wide acceptability and
adaptability.

The AFRS is a basic tool for requisitioning and planning workloads. Cost records for
individual recipes and recipe acceptability factors may be added to the recipe cards.
Recipe cards are also used to obtain a plan for the most efficient use of galley equipment.
The use of local recipes is encouraged. Local recipes should be in AFRS format and
approved by the food service officer.

NAVY FOOD SERVICE, NAVSUP P-476.— This publication is a quarterly

publication of NAVSUP 51 and is distributed to all activities having GMs. The
publication contains useful information on commodities, equipment for galley use, GM
modernization, revisions to publications, suggested special event or holiday menus,
nutrition, sanitation, training, hints on food preparation, foodservice operations, menu
planning, and recordkeeping.
Meal Attendance Predictions

Ashore units use signature head counts to document actual personnel fed. Afloat units
underway receive full ration credit for all enlisted personnel entitled to be fed in the GM.
A mechanical counting device should be used to determine ration credit for in-port
periods based on the number of meals actually fed. There are variations in meal
attendance from day to day and meal to meal. Head count records should be kept to show
how many people were served at each meal. Estimates of future attendance are based on
past records and experience. Factors such as weather, proximity to payday, and liberty
trends must be taken into account when predicting attendance.
CYCLE MENU SYSTEM

The cycle menu system is the menu rotation plan recommended for use in Navy GMs.
The cycle menu is a series of menus planned to be used consecutively with some
variations over a period of time. A cycle menu, rotated with appropriate changes on a
quarterly or seasonal basis, is recommended for Navy GMs. They should be reviewed
continuously to increase variety and eliminate unpopular dishes. Cycle meals save time
and are easier to analyze thoroughly and to perfect than those written on a weekly basis.
Cycle menus also lend themselves to more forecasting of ration costs and requirements
for requisitioning and daily food preparation.

In some messes, a family night is offered once or twice a month. This affords the
family and friends the opportunity to visit the command and enjoy a meal and pleasant
conversation. It also stimulates morale, promotes good will, and makes family members
feel more a part of the Navy.

205
Advantages of the Cycle Menus

The principal advantages of a cycle menu are better meals, time savings, improved
cost control, and more effective supervision and training.

While the cycle menu is in use, the menu planner can refine the menu and make
changes-tailoring it to patrons’ preferences, available supplies, and incorporating
seasonal fruits and vegetables and special events. Breakout quantities can be brought
closely in line with actual requirements when menus are repeated. The cycle period can
consist of as many weeks or months as practical.

In deciding the most desirable cycle length, the variety and frequency of resupply and
the number of duty sections should be taken into consideration as well as the CS watch
schedule. Because the accepted cook watch is port and starboard, an odd-numbered day
cycle allows each watch the opportunity to prepare the entire cycle menu by the time the
cycle has repeated two times.
Varying the Cycle Menu

Perfecting the basic menu and introducing variety can be made easier with sample
cycle menus available from other sources. Past menus may be used as a guide if they
have gained acceptance.

Experience gained through actual preparation and service of the menu points out
shortcuts, better preparation techniques, proper timing of food preparation, the
arrangement of food on the serving line, preferred serving sizes, and the most attractive
arrangement of food on the trays. Supervisors can provide the level of training and
supervision required to perfect each meal.

If the daily ration control record shows that the cost of the meals in the cycle menu is
excessive or is grossly below the allowed ration rate, the menu can be changed to bring
costs within acceptable limits. If inventories point out stocks that are either in long or
short supply, temporary adjustments to the cycle menu can be made to balance stocks.
Adjusting Meals for Climate

The menu is seasonal in the sense that plans are altered to include the special foods
featured for each season. Foods in season have a higher quality, are usually cheaper, and
are better flavored.

Adjusting Navy meals for the climate should also take into account the great variation
in climatic conditions under which Navy ships and shore stations operate. Menu plans
should be made to suit the weather in which you are operating. Food needs differ, and
appetites usually change with variations in temperature. Crisp, cool, fresh finds are
appealing to the patron in hot weather. Heavier, heartier foods such as hot soups, stews,
and hot cereals are welcomed in cold weather. Fresh fruits and vegetables are at their
highest quality and lowest price at seasonal peak. In hot weather, a variety of beverages,
including fruit juices, should be available.

206
 LOADING GUIDES.— The best guides for planning menus and determining loading
requirements are accurate records of a ship’s own past usage and menu plans or menu
summaries of previous extended cruises. Usage data and menus used during extended
cruises should be collected to provide a basis for balanced loading for future deployment.

Menus not only affect the health and morale of the crew, but also directly affect the
endurance of a ship. Endurance requirements vary among ship types and classes, and the
amount of food storage space varies even between ships with identical complements.
Proportionately smaller quantities of perishable foods are available on extended cruises,
and this calls for increased use of semi perishables, particularly ration-dense foods.

FREQUENCY CHARTS.— Developing a meat plan, frequency charts, and spacing

patterns are necessary preplanning functions that assure an acceptable, appealing menu
that is also within the daily monetary allowance.

A meat plan, also called a meat block shows the number of times the various types of
meat(including breakfast meats), fish, poultry, and cheese are to be used each week on
the cycle menu. This planned usage is directly related to the relative costs of these items,
their relative popularity, and their availability. A planned pattern of usage during the
cycle menu period will enable you to balance the use of expensive, moderately
expensive, and inexpensive meat items.

When the meats have been chosen, they are plotted on a frequency chart, spaced on a
spacing pattern, and finally entered on the menu draft. Frequency charts and spacing
patterns form the framework of the menu and like the meat plan, are developed before the
menu is drafted.

Frequency charts are developed for each major menu item or section; that is, the meat,
poultry, fish entrées, potatoes or potato substitutes, vegetables, salads, desserts, soups,
and breads that form the basic menu structure. These charts serve as the advanced
plotting of what to feed at which meal (breakfast, lunch, or dinner) and how often.

Spacing patterns show when the item will be served with a spacing pattern, the menu
planner can plot a balanced distribution of food items so that there is an appropriate
interval between the less popular items that are served, and so that the menus are not beef
heavy or corn heavy.

Revision.—An important step in the final review of cycle menus is the use of the
frequency chart to check the menu for repetition. This is done by listing the number of
meals containing each type of food. Then checking that the spacing of similar items,
such as ground beef, is adequate, that different methods of preparation are used, and that
the basic menu features a variety of dishes. It is particularly important to check the meal
plans for the first 3 days at the beginning of the first week’s menu and the end or last 3
days of the preceding week’s menu in the cycle. Revise the frequency chart by
eliminating identical or similar items served too close in succession.

207
 MENU BOARDS.— Menu boards assist in planning menus that are based on crew
preferences. There are two kinds of menu boards: (1) a menu-planning board that
actually plans the menu within the foodservice division and (2) a menu-review board that
functions in an advisory capacity.

Menu-Planning Board.— A menu-planning board acts on major decisions affecting

food supplies, on the selection of food choices commensurate with galley equipment,
workload, and other administrative decisions. The menu-planning board should be
composed of personnel with foodservice experience. The menu-planning board consists
of CSs from the foodservice division.

Menu-Review Board.— The menu-review board consists of personnel from all

divisions on board. This board can bring in new ideas on menu planning. All
commanding officers formulate their own policy as to the number of board members.
Menu boards, their requirements and functions, are discussed in Foodservice Operations,
NAVSUP P-486.

Menu Changes.— The commanding officer may grant written permission to the food
service officer to make necessary changes in the approved menu. Such authorization may
be furnished in the ship or supply department organizational manual. Under this
authority the food service officer may make changes in the menu necessary to meet any
emergency that might arise.

Each menu should include a notation at the bottom of the menu stating that “The food
service officer is authorized to make changes to this menu when, due to unusual or
unforeseen circumstances, it may be necessary to provide substitutions for food items not
in stock or to permit timely use of perishable foods.”

Menu changes should be kept to an absolute minimum and should not be made
without advance approval by the food service officer.

SELECTIVE MENUS.— A selective (multiple-choice) menu includes one or more

choices for the crew in each category. One or more choices are recommended under the
following circumstances:

• If a popular entrée or vegetable is to be served, offer an alternative.

• When a high-calorie, high-fat entrée is to be served, offer an alternative.
• If savings can be realized by offering a high-cost entrée with a low-cost one, offer
a choice.
• If practical from a production standpoint, a selection of various meal components
can be offered, including entrées, vegetables, breads, and beverages.

DRAFTING THE MENU.— To do the best possible job in menu drafting the Navy
menu planner needs a good working atmosphere in which to think. Most meals are

208
planned around main dishes of meat, and other food items are planned to complement
main dishes.

Use the standard Menu Draft, NAVSUP Form 1080, to build the week’s menu. The
menu planner has room for listing each menu item in a meal and has a column for the
AFRS numbers to eliminate guesswork on the kind of food, the method of preparation,
and the essential breakout data. Use standard abbreviations to achieve coordination
between the jack-of-the-dust (or subsistence storeroom storekeeper) and galley personnel;
for example, (f) for frozen, (cn) for canned, (dehy) for dehydrated, and (inst) for instant
foods. Certain standard menu items, such as coffee, are printed on the draft to facilitate
drafting.

The following steps illustrate the proper sequence in drafting major meal components:

Step 1—Main dishes, gravies, sauces, and accompaniments

Step 2—Potatoes, potato substitutes, and vegetables
Step 3—Salads
Step 4—Breakfast fruits and cereals
Step 5—Desserts
Step 6—Breads and breakfast pastries
Step 7—Soups and beverages

Accompaniments to menu items should be written alongside them, shown as follows,

or may be written directly underneath them, space permitting.

Breakfast Lunch or Dinner

Fruit or juice Soup - crackers

Cereal - milk Main dish - gravy or sauce

Main dishes Potatoes

Breakfast pastry Vegetables

Bread - butter Salads and salad dressing

Jam - jelly Bread

Beverages Dessert

Beverages

Meat, Poultry, and Fish.— Using information from the frequency chart and the
spacing pattern, enter the meat, fish, or poultry entrées planned for each day on the menu

209
draft form. Introduce variety to the menu by the recipes selected for the preparation of
each meat cut or poultry entrée. For example, beef, pot roast on the frequency chart and
spacing pattern, may be entered as L10-1 Ginger Pot Roast on the menu draft, and the
next time this style of beef is repeated on the spacing pattern, it maybe entered as L10-2
Yankee Pot Roast on the menu draft. Preplanning the entrées includes the selection of an
alternative choice of meat when rabbit, fish, or liver is shown.

When all entrées for the cycle have been entered on each week’s draft, it is good
management to review the drafts to determine the following: (1) whether the proper
variety and balance are maintained, (2) if higher portion cost entrées are balanced with
lower portion cost entrées, and (3) if preparation of the entrées is within the capabilities
of galley personnel and equipment.

Vegetables.— Frequency charts are developed for both potatoes or potato substitutes
and vegetables in conjunction with the meat frequency charts so that the items selected
will complement the meat, fish, or poultry item planned for each day. Entering the potato
or potato substitute and vegetables on the menu draft is the second step in menu planning.
Variety of preparation of the entrée items should be introduced on the menu by the
selected recipe card.

Salads and Salad Dressing.— The AFRS offers many varieties of salads and kinds of
salad dressings, as well as recipes for relishes. These numerous recipes are a fine
foundation for a varied bar of consistently high quality. An array of salads and relishes
can be prepared from the excellent variety of fresh, frozen, and canned fruits and
vegetables available.

When you are selecting salads for the menu, planning is needed to achieve variety and
to avoid costly leftovers. Because the salad bar generally offers some variety, there is a
temptation to offer the same assortment daily. With good planning, changes from day to
day can be achieved. When you are planning for salads and relishes, there are several
factors to consider: (1) seasonal availability for procurement, (2) temperature and
climate, (3) equipment and labor, and (4) combinations of salad ingredients.

Breakfast Fruits and Cereals.— Steaming hot cooked cereals are a welcome and
warming component of a hearty breakfast in cold weather. Warmer climates and higher
temperatures tend to swing the popularity pendulum toward dry, ready-to-eat cereals.

Offer a choice of fruit and juice each day to make sure a good source of vitamin C is
available to the patrons. Either the fruit or the juice should be citrus or tomato. In
addition, fruits can be used to introduce variety on the menus; for example, raisins in
oatmeal or rice, blueberries in pancakes, and apples in fritters.

Desserts.— Desserts should be individualized to each meal just as other menu

components, taking into account the patrons’ preferences and other factors influencing
the menu, such as climate, cooking facilities, and the skills of the personnel. Desserts are
classified as light, medium heavy, or heavy. Plan to use the one that goes best with the

210
rest of the meal. If the meal includes hearty salads and creamed vegetables, a light
dessert, such as fruit cup or flavored gelatin, is more appropriate than a medium heavy
one (puddings or ice cream and cookies) or heavy desserts (cakes and pies). Balance out
the day’s dessert by planning alight dessert (chilled pear halves and oatmeal drop
cookies) with a heavy dinner at noon and a heavy dessert (spice cake with lemon cream
icing) with a light supper. One heavy dessert daily, especially one that must be baked the
same day it is to be served, is sufficient for most messes.

To ensure a variety of dessert choices in your menus, make maximum use of mixes,
ice cream, prepared pie fillings, gelatin desserts, and other convenience foods.

A caution that should be observed, however, in planning desserts is avoiding a

repetition of the same flavors. It is easy to miss hidden flavor repetitions when breakfast
juices and dinner and supper salads contain fruit. Watch for these duplications in dessert
planning.

Breads and Breakfast Pastries.— Piping hot yeast rolls and quick breads dress up a
meal any day of the year. Hot breads can play an important role in balancing cold meals.

When you write a menu, be realistic. If baking facilities are limited or if

inexperienced CSs have not yet fully developed their baking skills, you should limit
baking items.

Soups.— The soup is one of the last items planned for a lunch or dinner menu. This
sequence in menu planning is not based on the relative importance of soup to a menu, but
rather on its relation to other menu items. Soups are classified as light, heavy, creamed,
and chowder and, as with dessert items, are selected to balance and complement the
menu. The number of times a soup is offered each day or each week should be based on
the crew’s acceptance of soup. If the acceptance of soup is high and you feel justified in
including it on the menu at both lunch and dinner meals, plan to serve a different soup at
each of these meals. Make maximum use of dehydrated soups and canned condensed
soups in order to offer a variety on the menu. Leftover soups are highly subject to
contamination; consequently, they create a health hazard. Fresh soup should be prepared
for each meal.

Beverages.— The beverage component of menus includes coffee or tea. Milk is very
nutritious and deserves a permanent place on the menu. It can be served chilled plain, or
flavored, or in hot cocoa as a cold weather beverage. Coffee and tea are not necessary for
good health and offering another choice for either beverage is acceptable, such as good
quality drinking water.

Iced beverages added to the menu during warm weather are refreshing and provide an
enjoyable change from the steady consumption of hot coffee or tea during the winter
months. All iced fruit beverages in the AFRS contribute additional vitamins and
minerals, as well as energy from the sugar they contain. Avoid overuse of the same

211
juices or fruit beverages on the weekly menus. Milk shake machines and carbonated
soda dispensers may be used in the mess also.

RECORDING THE MENU.— The Menu Draft, NAVSUP Form 1080, should be
carefully checked and edited for accurate recipe numbers as well as for correct recipe
titles and should then be presented to the food service officer for analysis. The food
service officer analyzes the menu to make sure it is nutritionally balanced and reflects
sound management with respect to personnel, food supplies, and food preparation
equipment. The NAVSUP Form 1080 should be returned to the leading CS (approved or
with noted changes) for typing on the GM Menu, NAVSUP Form 1080. NAVSUP Form
1080 should be retained for use in preparing recipe number lists and instructions on the
daily Food-Preparation Worksheet, NAVSUP Form 1090.

When you use the NAVSUP Form 1090, recipe numbers should be eliminated from
the NAVSUP Form 1080.

The NAVSUP Form 1080 is signed by the leading CS in the Prepared By block, by
the food service officer in the first Approved block and then submitted to the
commanding officer or the designated representative for approval and signature in the
second approved block. Menus may be submitted for command approval each week or
the cycle menu maybe submitted in its entirety quarterly, seasonally, or when a new cycle
menu is prepared.
PLAN SPECIAL MENUS

Meals have three roles in Navy life: (1) to support physical health and fitness, (2) to
build morale, and (3) to provide an occasion for socializing.

Holiday or Special Event Menus

Special meals for holidays or special meal celebrations (in GMs either afloat or
ashore) provide opportunities for festivity among the crew. A well-planned special meal
adds interest and creates real enthusiasm among the CSs and crew.

PREPARATION.— Creative menus may be planned using foods traditionally

associated with the holiday. Research through the AFRS and the Navy Food Service,
NAVSUP P-476, files should supply new ideas.

The meal patterns suggested for breakfast, lunch, and dinner may be changed for
holiday or specialty meals to include some extras for the celebration. Well-planned
special meals will add interest and enthusiasm among cooks and patrons. They can be as
simple or elaborate as time, personnel, and cost permit.

PRINTING.— Some GMs may have fancy menus printed for their entire cycle menu
or for special events or holidays. The printed menu gives a kind of flavor of its own to
special meals. These menus need not be elaborate to be attractive. They can be simply

212
produced using a graphics program on a computer or you can have them produced
professionally through the supply system.

Usually if menus are to be printed professionally, they are either going to be used
permanently for a cycle menu or for holiday menus repeating from year to year.
Brunch Menus

A brunch is neither breakfast nor lunch. Brunch is something of each of these meals,
yet it has its own special identity. The distinguishing features of brunch are time of
service and the special-occasion, leisurely atmosphere that can accompany a brunch
meal. The brunch meal is usually served between breakfast and lunch time, generally on
weekends and holidays.

Brunch menus need not be elaborate to be attractive and satisfying. A number of

menu items maybe added to a heavy breakfast meal to make a brunch meal. These may
be extra ranging from first course to heavy entrées and submit a nutritionally balanced
cycle menu to the to special types of cakes to complete the meal.

Imagination is the major key to successful brunch menus. Select luncheon entrées
with staying power that combine easily and appetizingly with breakfast foods. Above all,
avoid overtaxing the cooking and serving facilities and personnel by planning menus that,
for example, require too much oven space. Cooked-to order foods are especially
appropriate for brunch meals.

WARDROOM MENUS

As a senior CS assigned to a private mess you may hold the position of wardroom
supervisor. Because of your knowledge and experience with foodservice and nutrition,
the responsibility may rest with you to prepare mess caterer for review. The mess caterer
will then review the menu and submit it to the mess president for approval.

The same factors that affect the choice of foods used for the GM menu are used by the
menu plainer to plan a private mess menu. The wardroom menu must also meet Navy
nutritional requirements. As with the patrons of a GM, the preferences of wardroom
mess members should be surveyed and considered in the menu-planning stage. The
wardroom menu also should be limited to the supplies that are available. The menu
should not be costly. Also there should be a moderation of high- and low-cost meals to
keep the menu within the operating limits of the mess.

213
 QUESTIONS:
“Meat, Poultry, Seafood, Nutrition and Menu Planning” Assignment 5

5-1. The form of meat classified as fabricated is correctly described by which of the
following statements?

1. Artificial meat products fabricated from other foods

2. Meats that have been either partially or completely boned, trimmed, and portion-cut
3. Meat that does not conform to the specifications of the armed forces
4. Meat not requiring inspection by the Department of Agriculture

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 5-2 THROUGH 5-5, SELECT THE CATEGORY

OF BEEF THAT IS DESCRIBED BY THE QUESTION.

5-2. Beef originating from a young male that is castrated.

1. Stag
2. Bull
3. Steer
4. Calf

5-3. Beef originating from a fully developed male.

1. Stag
2. Bull
3. Steer
4. Bronco

5-4. Beef originating from a young female that has not borne a calf.

1. Calf
2. Cow
3. Mare
4. Heifer

5-5. Beef originating from a mature male that is castrated.

1. Steer
2. Bull
3. Stag
4. Stallion

214
5-6. The USDA stamp is placed on the carcasses of meat to indicate which of the
following conditions?

1. Meat originated in the United States

2. Meat delivered under contract met all the terms of the contract
3. Meat is graded as being prime or choice
4. Meat is free of disease and meets sanitary requirements

5-7. You may serve canned ham without first cooking it because it has undergone
what process?

1. Curing
2. Smoking
3. Pasteurization
4. Pickling

5-8. Veal is a product of which of the following animals?

1. Corn-fed lamb
2. Immature beef less than 1 year old
3. Immature sheep less than 1 year old
4. Immature swine less than 1 year old

5-9. For which of the following reasons should you use the preferred method of
slowly thawing frozen meats, whenever possible?

1. Meat thawed this way yields a more palatable cooked product

2. Meat thawed this way has less nutrient loss
3. The preferred method decreases the chance of bacterial contamination
4. Each of the above

5-10. When you are using an alternate thawing method, all EXCEPT which of the
following procedures are required?

1. Obtaining approval from the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery

2. Notifying the medical department representative
3. Thawing in the original sealed wrapper or container below 80°F
4. Thawing in the original unopened container at 50°F or lower

5-11. Approximately twice the cooking time is required when you cook roasts in
their frozen state?

1. True
2. False

215
5-12. For meat to be properly tempered, it should have what specific internal
temperature range?

1. 12°F to 15°F
2. 16°F to 18°F
3. 23°F to 26°F
4. 26°F to 28°F

5-13. What criteria determine the method you should use to cook meat?

1. The types of cooking equipment in your GM

2. The preferences of the food service officer
3. The kind of meat and the tenderness of the cut
4. The cost of the meat and the occasion

5-14. What method is most often used to cook the least tender cuts of meat?

1. Stewing
2. Frying
3. Braising
4. Boiling

5–15. What cooking method is used when you brown meat in a small amount of fat,
cover, then cook slowly in the juices from the meat or in a small amount of liquid
that is added?

1. Simmering
2. Stewing
3. Braising
4. Steaming

5-16. You should use which of the following methods to cook tender cuts of meat
that have little connective tissue?

1. Braising
2. Stewing
3. Simmering
4. Roasting

5-17. At which of the following times should you apply the seasoning when you are
grilling meat?

1. Before placing the meat on the grill

2. Before you turn the meat over
3. After you turn the meat over
4. After the meat has been completely cooked

216
5-18. When roasting meat, you should place the roasts fat-side-up for what reason?

1. To avoid oven frying the food

2. To eliminate having to trim the fat after the meat is done
3. To prevent searing the meat which causes excessive shrinkage
4. To eliminate the need to baste the meat during cooking

5-19. What factor affects the cooking time of a roast?

1. The amount of liquid used

2. The oven capacity
3. The type of seasoning used
4. The degree of doneness desired or required

5-20. Navy nutrition is concerned with achieving all EXCEPT which of the
following objectives?

1. Preservation of nutrients
2. What components are needed and how much is required by the body
3. How foods are altered in processing, storage, and preparation
4. Producing the least expensive menus

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 5-21 THROUGH 5-24, SELECT THE FOOD

NUTRIENT(S) THAT MATCH(ES) THE DESCRIPTION GIVEN AS THE
QUESTION.

5-21. The chief suppliers of tissue-building material.

1. Proteins
2. Minerals
3. Vitamins
4. Carbohydrates

5-22. Provides the highest amount of calories.

1. Carbohydrates
2. Proteins
3. Fats
4. Minerals

5-23. Stored in the muscles as glycogen.

1. Water
2. Carbohydrates
3. Minerals

217
4. Vitamins

5-24. Which of the following minerals is the most abundant in the human body?

1. Phosphorus
2. Iron
3. Iodine
4. Calcium

5-25. Which of the following minerals is responsible for carrying oxygen to the
blood?

1. Phosphorus
2. Calcium
3. Iron
4. Iodine

5-26 A deficiency of what mineral can cause swelling (goiter) of the thyroid gland?

1. Salt
2. Iodine
3. Iron
4. Calcium

5–27. What vitamin plays a very important role in eye function and in keeping the
skin and mucous membranes resistant to infection?

1. A
2. C
3. E
4. K

5-28. Sunlight enables your body to produce what vitamin if it has a chance to shine
directly on the skin?

1. B6
2. B1 2
3. D
4. K

218
IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 5–29 THROUGH 5-32, SELECT THE VITAMIN
THAT MATCHES THE DESCRIPTION GIVEN AS THE QUESTION.

5-29. Needed in order to use calcium and phosphorus to build strong bones and
teeth.

1. B1 2
2. C
3. D
4. K

5-30. Presently being explored as an antioxidant that may retard some aspects of the
aging process.

1. B1
2. B2
3. E
4. K

5-31. Essential for the manufacture of a substance that helps blood to clot.

1. A
2. B1
3. B12
4. K

5-32. Deficiency causes beriberi, a disease that is now almost

nonexistent in the United States.

1. B1
2. B2
3. B6
4. B12

5-33. Strict vegetarians are likely to be deficient in what vitamin?

1. B6
2. B12
3. Niacin
4. Folacin

5-34. You should use the food guide pyramid for daily food choices on menus to
accomplish what objective?

1. To eliminate the need for menu review boards

2. To determine the foods that have the highest acceptability

219
3. To quickly and reliably judge the nutritional adequacy of the menu
4. To give a detailed analysis of the cost of the menu

5-35. Fortified low-fat or skim milk products have essentially the same calories as
whole milk products but less fat content.

1. True
2. False

5-36. Foods from the meat group are valued primarily for providing which of the
following substances?

1. Calcium
2. Carbohydrates
3. Protein
4. Fiber

220
 CHAPTER 8

BREADS AND DESSERTS

This chapter deals with basic baking terminology, ingredients, and the procedures
used to produce breads and desserts. To bake a satisfactory product, you must have a
thorough knowledge of these terms, ingredients, and baking procedures.

BREADS

The term bread has been used for centuries to describe a mixture of flour, sugar,
shortening, salt, and liquid. This mixture is made into dough, and then yeast is added to
the mixture to make the dough rise. Two kinds of bread are used in the general mess
(GM). One kind includes yeast breads such as yeast-raised breads and rolls, sweet-dough
rolls of various kinds, coffee cakes, doughnuts, pizza, and quick breads. The other kind
includes products leavened by chemical leavening agents such as baking powder. Some
of these products are biscuits, muffins, pancakes, cake doughnuts, quick coffee cake, and
corn bread. Bread is the most important food produced by the Baker. It is prepared in
greater quantities than any other baked product. High quality and excellent taste should
be maintained regardless of the amount of bread baked.

YEAST-RAISED BREADS

The production of yeast-raised products, especially bread and sweet doughs, is

considerably more involved than the production of other bakery products. If the
ingredients are of good quality, used in specific amounts, and are properly mixed, using
proper temperatures, the doughs will yield good quality products.

Ingredients

The baker must understand the functions of each basic baking and bread making
ingredient used in bakery products. He or she should then use the ingredients properly
(manner of mixing and amount used). The functions of these ingredients are explained
next.

FLOUR.— Flour is a mixture of starch, protein, and other materials. The kinds of
flour used are described as follows:

• General-purpose flour is a mixture of hard and soft wheat flours. It is

used to make cakes, cookies, quick breads, pastries, and pies. It does not have enough
gluten strength to make satisfactory yeast bread and rolls.
• Bread flour is a blend of hard wheat flours. It contains more protein than
general-purpose flour and has a slight granular texture. Good quality bread and
other yeast-raised products can be made only with bread flour.
• Wheat base is prepared from the wheat germ, bran, and other fragments
of wheat kernels. It has a whole wheat flavor and may be combined with flour to produce
whole wheat bread.

221
 In addition to the protein, flour contains various food elements such as carbohydrates,
water, minerals, vitamins, enzymes, and fat. The amount of these elements contained in
the flour varies with the type, grade, and storage period of the flour.

Protein.— The two principal proteins present in wheat flour (gliadin and glutenin),
when combined with moisture, form gluten that gives structure to batters and doughs.
Gluten also gives the dough expansion qualities.

Carbohydrates. — Carbohydrates in flour are usually in the form of starch that absorbs
water and helps give bulk to dough. Flour that is especially made for cakes and pastries
is rich in carbohydrates.

Water.— Wheat flour usually contains from 9- to 15-percent moisture. Flour absorbs
or loses moisture in storage, depending on the atmospheric conditions.

Minerals.— Minerals are contained in the bran coat and the germ of wheat, and most
of the minerals are lost when wheat is made into white flour. These minerals are returned
to flours that are enriched.

Vitamins.— To replace the food value lost in milling, vitamins and minerals such as
thiamin, niacin, iron, and riboflavin are frequently added to flour. Flour treated in this
manner is known as enriched flour.

Enzymes.— An enzyme is a very minute substance produced by a living plant. The

mere presence of an enzyme brings about certain changes in the composition of a
material. Diastase and protease are the most important enzymes found in flour. Diastase
converts starch to sugar, and the yeast acts upon the sugar to produce carbon dioxide and
other fermentation products. Protease softens the gluten and, when this enzyme is
lacking, the dough will not have the desired elasticity.

Fat.— Wheat flour contains approximately 1.5-percent fat. The major portion of the
fat of wheat grain is removed during the milling process. Although the fat content of
flour is very low, this is what causes flour to become rancid if flour is stored for long
periods under warm and humid conditions.

WATER.— In many bakery products, including bread, the amount of water used is
second only to the amount of flour. Water contains minerals. The amount and kind of
minerals contained in the water vary from one part of the country to another. These
variations affect the properties of the dough and the finished bread.

Water is necessary to form gluten from the protein of flour, thereby giving the dough
its elasticity and its gas retaining property. Gluten absorbs twice its own weight of water.
The amount of water used determines the consistency and the temperature of the dough
after it is mixed. Water dissolves the salt and the sugar, makes it possible for the
enzymes to act, and holds the yeast in

222
suspension until it is added to the other ingredients and the fermentation begins.

SALT.— Very little salt is used in making bread, but the amount used is essential, for
it performs a very important function. Without salt, fermentation in dough is too rapid,
and the baked product becomes too coarse. With too much salt, the fermentation process
is slowed, and the bread becomes soggy. Salt strengthens gluten and helps it to expand,
improves the color of baked products, and enhances the flavor.

SUGAR.— During fermentation, part of the sugar is converted into a form that can be
used as food for the yeast. Starches are converted into sugar that produces carbon
dioxide gas and alcohol and that causes the dough to expand, making it softer and more
flexible.

This sugar in the bread contributes to the color of the crust, the taste of the baked loaf,
the toasting qualities of the bread, the texture, the moisture retaining qualities, and the
nutritional value. Sugar is also a tenderizer.

All sugars do not have the same degree of sweetness, since sweetness process through
which the sugar, for example, is less depends upon the refining sugar has passed. Brown
highly refined than white sugar and, therefore, is not so sweet. Brown sugar lends a
pleasant taste to cooked or baked products, and syrups can be used as a substitute for
regular sugar. Corn syrup, honey, or molasses improves the flavor of cookies and helps
retain their moisture.

SHORTENING.— Shortening is the animal or vegetable fat that is used in baking.

There are two general types of shortening-solid and liquid. The solid-type shortening is
recommended for use in bread dough because it can be more thoroughly distributed
through the dough. The reason for this is that it will not saturate the flour it touches.
Although the liquid-type shortening can be used effectively, the dough must be well
formed before the oil is added. The liquid-type shortening is mainly used in recipes that
call for melted shortening, such as some cake and bread recipes.

Shortening compounds are composed of deodorized animal and vegetable fats

mechanically blended to give a final product of acceptable elasticity and satisfactory
baking quality. There are two types of solid shortening compounds used in the Navy
GM—general-purpose shortening and bakery shortening (emulsifier-type).

General-Purpose Shortening.— General-purpose shortening is a high-grade shortening

that has excellent baking qualities. General-purpose shortening should not be substituted
in recipes that specify bakery-type shortening.

Bakery Shortening.— Bakery shortening or emulsifier-type shortening is

hydrogenated shortening to which an emulsifying agent has been added. This gives the
shortening exceptional ability to blend with other ingredients.

223
 SALAD OILS.— Salad oils are generally used in the preparation of salad dressing and
in recipes that specify oil. Oil should not be substituted for general-purpose or
emulsifier-type shortening in recipes specifying those types.

BUTTER.— Butter is the fatty constituent of milk that is separated from the other
milk constituents by churning. Butter is used most often as a spread, but it has many
other uses in food preparation. When butter is substituted for other shortening, you
should adjust your recipe. Butter contains salt, milk, and moisture so the salt, milk, and
liquid in the recipe should be decreased accordingly. The fat content of butter is less than
that of other shortening; therefore, more butter should be used in the recipe.

MILK.— Milk is almost a complete food. Nonfat dry milk contains all the food
qualities of whole milk except fat. In bread production, nonfat dry milk style A
should be used, as this milk is designed specifically for achieving volume, flavor, and
crust characteristics desirable in yeast breads. Dry milk can be added by mixing or
sifting the milk and flour together, or it can be reconstituted with part of the water in the
bread recipe and added to the dough. In either event, it is important that there are no
lumps of milk powder in the dough.

The amount of milk used in the dough can be as high as 6-percent nonfat dry milk
based on the weight of the flour. The use of more than 6-percent dry milk in the bread
dough is detrimental to fermentation. Milk improves the texture, flavor, and keeping
quality of bread.

EGGS.— Eggs are not used in making white bread but are used in making sweet
doughs, cakes, and cookies. In baked products, eggs supply a high protein, mineral, and
vitamin content. The yokes add color, the whites help bind other ingredients, and both
combine to add flavor and moisture to the bread.

Fresh eggs should be removed from the refrigerator and warmed to room temperature
before they are used in dough. Frozen eggs should be completely defrosted before they
are added to the dough and should be well mixed. Dehydrated egg mix may be sifted
with the dry ingredients in some baked products containing a high percentage of dry
ingredients; the water needed to reconstitute eggs should be added to the required liquid.
Reconstituted eggs should be used within 1 hour after they are reconstituted or returned
to the refrigerator until they are to be used. Do not hold them overnight.
Leavening Agents

Leavening agents are gases that cause the dough to rise. The gases are produced by
chemical action or introduced by the mixing process, which forces air into the dough.
The common types of leavening agents are steam, air, and carbon dioxide gas. These
agents are produced by yeast or bating soda or baking powder.

AIR.— Air is introduced into the dough by blending (creaming) fat and sugar
together, by sifting flour, or by folding in beaten egg whites that already contain air.
Steam is used to leaven éclairs and cream puffs.

224
 YEAST.— Yeast is a microscopic, one-celled plant that, when conditions are
favorable, will multiply by budding or by the division of a cell into two cells. In
this process of reproduction, the yeast plant uses available food (sugars) to produce
carbon dioxide gas and alcohol. This is known as fermentation.

ACTIVE DRY YEAST.— Active dry yeast should be suspended in about seven times
its weight of water at 105°F to 110°F for 5 minutes before it is used. The proper
temperature of the water is important, as water that is too cold or too hot will harm the
yeast. Make sure the temperature of the water does not exceed 110°F. Active dry yeast
does not require refrigeration, but should be stored in a dry and reasonably cool place.
When properly stored, dry yeast will keep for many months.

Yeast foods, known as dough conditioners, have other more important functions than
to supply food for yeast. Their major purposes are to condition the water and to assist in
the proper fermentation of the dough.

Yeast foods contain three types of functional ingredients:

1. Ammonium salts to supply yeast with a supply of nitrogen for growth

2. Calcium salts to produce the correct amount of hardness in the dough water and
to firm the gluten

3. An oxidizing agent to give a firmer, less sticky dough

In addition, yeast foods contain starch and salt to add bulk and make weighing easier.
The use of yeast foods is often determined by the strength of the flour and the
fermentation period desired. Not all flours require yeast food. When the flour requires
such material, its addition produces bread of larger volume, better grain and texture, and
improved loaf appearance. Too much will produce inferior bread with low volume and
coarse grain.

BAKING SODA.— Baking soda acts as a leavening agent only when there is an acid
present. Some of these acids are sour milk or buttermilk, molasses, brown sugar, honey,
corn syrup, maple syrup, lemon juice, and vinegar. These are used for different types of
quick bread. Only a limited quantity of the acid ingredients can be used for leavening
purposes due to the pronounced flavor and heavy texture that baking soda and molasses
or syrup give to the products. It is also difficult to determine beforehand the amount of
gas that these mixtures will produce. Thus, it is difficult to obtain standard results.

BAKING POWDER.— Baking powder is a leavening agent that contains baking

soda, a large amount of starch, and a material that forms an acid when it is mixed with
water, thus producing a gas. There are several types of baking powder. The Navy uses a
combination-type baking powder that contains the acids sodium aluminum sulphate
(S.A.S.) and orthophosphate plus sodium bicarbonate and a cornstarch filler. This type of

225
baking powder is moderately double acting; one constituent acts in the batter, while the
other does not act until it is heated in the oven. Baking powder is generally preferred
over baking soda because it is more reliable.

General Breadmaking Procedures

The processes described next include not only the steps that you, the baker, perform,
but also the processes that take place within the dough as a result of your action. When
actually preparing bread, you should always follow the steps and procedures in the
Armed Forces Recipe Service (AFRS).

MIXING.— After you select and weigh or measure the necessary ingredients, the next
important step is mixing. Dough may be mixed by hand, but an electric mixer or a bread-
dough machine will make the job easier.

Dough Temperatures During Mixing.— Temperature has a definite influence on the

function of yeast and its ability to condition a dough properly to produce a quality bread.
The desired dough temperature (DDT) is obtained from the recipe card.

The temperature of the dough can be regulated by considering all the factors that will
influence the temperature of the dough and then using water at a temperature that will
offset the adverse temperatures. Any desired temperature of the dough when it leaves the
mixer may be obtained by a rather simple calculation that first determines the friction
factor (temperature rise induced by mixing) and may then be used at all times when the
same mixer and the same weight of dough are used.

Determine the friction factor by competing the following steps:

1. Add the temperature of the room, the temperature of the flour, and the temperature
of the water.

2. Multiply the temperature of the mixed sample dough by 3.

3. Subtract the first answer from the second answer.

For example:

Step 1. Temperature of room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75°F

Temperature of flour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73°F
Temperature of water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +54°F
202°F

Step 2. Temperature of mixed dough. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74°F

x3
222°F

Step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -202°F

226
Friction factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20°F

Adjusting the temperature of the water used in the dough will control the temperature
of the dough. To determine the desired water temperature you add the temperature of the
room, the temperature of the flour, and the friction factor and subtract this total from the
DDT multiplied by 3. You will then have the desired water temperature. For example:

Step 1. Temperature of room. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75°F

Temperature of flour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73°F
Friction factor. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +20°F
168°F

Step 2. 80°F (DDT) x 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240°F.

-168°F
Desired water temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72°F

The individual recipe will indicate the temperature of the water to be used in the
mixing process. By following the procedures just discussed, and using a thermometer to
assure the proper temperature of water being used, the final mixed dough temperature
will be that which was desired.

Mixing Operation.— The mixing operation accomplishes two functions. First,

thorough mixing distributes the ingredients evenly. Secondly, it stretches the dough until
the gluten is fully developed and distributed.

In the early stages of the mixing process, water wets the flour and the dry ingredients.
At this stage, the dough will be rather wet and lumpy. As the mixing progresses, the
flour continues to take up liquid and the dough becomes moderately firm.

When you are using high-speed mixers, the dough will become firm after several
minutes of mixing, hut the dough has no stretching characteristic. As mixing continues,
the dough begins to bond and becomes more elastic. The lumpiness disappears and the
dough becomes more firm as the flour picks up more moisture. At this stage, the dough
is rather sticky and sticks to the mixer bowl quite easily. Next, the dough becomes less
sticky and more elastic. When this happens, the back of the bowl begins to be cleared of
dough and eventually becomes completely clear. At this time you should use careful
judgment not to allow the mixing to progress too far or the dough will breakdown to a
point where it loses elasticity and becomes sticky and runny. There is no rule governing
the mixing time for dough other than the feel and appearance of the dough. When the
mixing process is completed, the temperature of the dough should range between 78°F
and 82°F.

FERMENTATION.— After the mixing operation, the dough is either left in the
mixing bowl or placed in a dough trough to ferment.

227
 Fermentation is the chemical change that takes place when yeast (or other leavening
agent) in the bread releases carbon dioxide gas, causing the dough to rise. The
fermentation period is the time that elapses between the mixing of the dough and the time
the yeast is killed by the oven heat. The correct temperature for the dough during
fermentation is indicated on the recipe card. A higher temperature will cause the growth
of undesirable bacteria (wild yeast) and excessive acidity, which will result in a coarse-
grained bread of poor flavor.

The length of the fermentation period depends on the amount of yeast used, the
strength of the flour, and the temperature during fermentation. Too much yeast and
higher temperatures than those designated cause the dough to rise too fast. Insufficiently
fermented or conditioned dough is called “young dough” while that which has fermented
too long is known as “old dough.”

PUNCHING.— Punching the dough after it rises develops the gluten and also
redistributes the yeast cells. The temperature of the dough is equalized, and some of the
carbon dioxide gas is forced out. Yeast dough is ready for punching when it is light and
approximately double in size. To test the dough to determine if it is ready for punching,
press the dough lightly with a fingertip. If the impression closes up immediately, the
dough is not ready. If the impression recedes slightly, it is ready to be punched or folded.
The dough should then be punched.

To punch the dough you should use both hands and punch the dough through the
center, going from end to end of the dough trough. Then, use both hands to grasp one
side of the dough and pull it on top, once again working from end to end of the dough
trough. To punch dough in a mixing bowl, punch the center, fold sides into the center,
then turn completely over. After the dough has rested for approximately 30 minutes, it
should be taken from the bowl or trough to the bench for makeup.

DOUGH MAKEUP.— The dough is divided into uniform pieces of the desired
weight. When you are dividing the dough by hand, cut off the dough with the dough
scraper and weigh the dough on a scale. Use the scraper to add or remove dough until the
desired weight is obtained. This process is referred to as scaling. In a machine-operated
bakeshop, the baker scales the pieces by machine, making adjustments so that the pieces
will be the desired weight.

ROUNDING THE DOUGH.— After scaling, the dough is rounded by tucking the raw
edges and forming a smooth round ball. This process seals the raw edges that are left
after the dough is divided.

INTERMEDIATE PROOFING.— The intermediate proofing period is a stage when

the rounded piece of dough is allowed to rest between the time it is divided and rounded
and the time it is formed for panning. The intermediate proofing period should be just
long enough for a piece of dough to recover from being divided and rounded. The dough
should be loose enough so that it can be easily molded. This requires from 12 to 15
minutes, depending on the dough and the conditions of the room.

228
 Some of the advantages of rounding and giving the dough intermediate proof are it
achieves uniform shape, facilitates panning, makes texture uniform, stretches gluten
slowly, expels excess gas, and forms skin on surface of dough.

MOLDING AND PANNING.— The pieces of dough are shaped so that they can rise
in the pan and form a shaped loaf of bread. Use the following steps in hand molding:

1. Place each piece of dough on the board, top side down. Use as little dusting flour as
possible.

2. Press the gas out of the dough and pull lengthwise carefully, shaping the dough into
an oblong loaf about the length of a finished loaf of bread.

3. Flatten the dough with your hands or with a rolling pin.

4. Shape the dough by folding in the ends to form a rectangle.

5. Fold the dough lengthwise to the center and seal by firm finger pressure.

6. Fold over the other half of the dough and press for additional seal.

7. Roll the dough to complete the sealing and molding of the loaf.

After the dough is molded into a loaf, place it in a lightly greased pan. Each loaf
should be placed so that the molding seam is on the bottom, and the loaf should be long
enough to reach the ends of the pan.

PAN GREASING.— The primary purpose of lightly greasing the bread pan is to
prevent the bread from sticking when it is removed. Too much grease on the pan surface
can seriously affect the proofing, baking, and slicing of the bread.

PAN PROOFING.— After shaping and panning, loaves should be placed in a

properly controlled room or cabinet called the proof box or proof cabinet for the final
proof or pan proof. Temperature of the cabinet should be maintained at 90°F to 100°F.
During pan proofing, the action of the yeast is speeded up by the higher temperature and
the gluten becomes more mellow and elastic.

To determine whether the loaf is properly proofed, touch it lightly with one fingertip
and press in slightly. If the impression made by the tip of the finger remains, the loaf is
proofed. If the imprint does not remain and fills out when the fingertip is removed, the
loaf is still too compact and should be proofed more. Usually, 50 to 75 minutes is
sufficient.

BAKING.— The final stage in bread production is to place the pans of dough in an
oven that is heated to a temperature sufficient to heat the dough quickly (temperature

229
specified on AFRS recipes) and to cause the carbon dioxide of the dough to expand,
thereby greatly increasing the size of the dough. The oven temperature also vaporizes
moisture on the surface of the bread and ultimately causes caramelization of the sugars,
starches, and other ingredients that make up the exposed dough surface. The oven
temperature and the time required to bake a loaf of bread will vary, depending on several
factors. When using convection ovens, follow the operating manual instructions or use
the AFRS guideline card for convection ovens. Baking time is shorter and temperature is
lower in a convection oven than in a conventional oven. Remember that some bread
recipes will contain convection oven information as a note.

Bread is the end product of a long line of chemical and physical reactions. If the loaf
is removed from the oven before these changes occur, no matter what crust color is
obtained, the loaf will lack desirable qualities. Color and thickness of crust depend on
the length of time the loaf is subjected to oven temperature and on the concentration of
sugars. Aroma of underbaked bread is “green,” lacking the full-scale, delicious fragrance
characteristic of freshly baked bread. If sufficiently underbaked, the loaf sides will
collapse and proper slicing is not possible.

The oven temperature may be controlled for the purpose of influencing bread
character in other ways than just the color. A low oven temperature tends to open the
grain of the loaf. If too high a temperature is used, the loaf may burst in a rather violent
manner, usually along the sides, that results in a misshapen loaf.

A properly baked loaf of bread sounds hollow when tapped. Remove the baked loaves
of bread from pans and cool on racks in areas free from drafts. Bread will dry out more
quickly if the air is either too warm or too dry.

COOLING.— After the bread is done, remove the loaves from the pans and place
them on racks to cool, making sure there is at least a 1-inch space between loaves.
Cooling usually takes from 1 1/2 to 2 hours. Bread should not be covered while it is
warm

STORING AND SERVING.— Bread should be stored at cool room temperature under
conditions where it will not dry out. If wrapped in plastic bags that are closed with
twisters, bread can be stored for up to 96 hours in a cool room. If the room is hot and
humid, it may be necessary to store the bread under refrigeration to prevent mold from
forming. Refrigeration is not ideal, however, for extended storage because bread stales
more rapidly under refrigeration than it does at room temperature. This staling makes the
bread firm and the crumb becomes coarse and hard. Bread may be held for extended
periods if frozen in plastic wrap or bags. If freezer storage is impractical, bread quality is
best maintained by baking in quantities that will be consumed within 48 hours.

The bread storage should be arranged so that the older bread always can be used first.
Sliced bread left over from a previous meal can be thoroughly dried and used for bread
crumbs, bread pudding, or crouton preparation.

230
 SHORT-TIME FORMULA.— This formula was developed to meet a critical need
aboard Navy ships with limited bakery space. The short-time formula eliminates both the
intermediate proof and the final loaf-molding operation. This modified sponge-type
dough produces a good loaf of bread.

More importantly, ships without production equipment can produce bread within 2 to
2 1/2 hours. In addition to eliminating the 8- to 10-minute intermediate proof, the baker
can roll the rounded pieces into a sausage shape and pan—one person being able to roll
and pan an average of 20 per minute. Hot rolls and variations may be prepared using the
short-time formula. Follow the AFRS for best results.

A room temperature of 80°F should be maintained to assure the desired finished

product. Any increase in the bakeshop temperature will, of course, reduce the
fermentation time. Because of the absence of fermentation rooms aboard ship, this
control is strictly dependent on the baker’s skill and knowledge in determining the
readiness of the dough. Mixing time will not change, however, as the 10-minute periods
appear to be optimum for proper dough development under practically all conditions.

UNDESIRABLE CONDITIONS.— Certain undesirable conditions may develop in

the baking and storing of bread that will not only spoil individual loaves and batches but
will infest the bakery and continue to destroy subsequent baking. Sanitary precautions
against these conditions are particularly necessary in hot, humid climates.

Rope.— Rope is an undesirable condition of bread caused by bacteria. The crumb of

the loaf deteriorates, darkens, and becomes sticky and wet. If the loaf is pulled apart,
long wet strands will appear as it separates. Rope has an odor similar to overripe
cantaloupe. The rope spores that are formed from the active rope bacteria cells are highly
resistant to heat, and any that may be near the center of the loaf will not necessarily be
killed by baking.

Temperatures of 86°F and above, particularly temperatures of 95°F to 105°F, promote

the development of rope. When the climatic condition is such that the shop temperature
is high, rope could develop even in doughs that are lower in temperature than 85°F. In
the tropics, high humidity often accompanies high temperature. This increases the danger
of rope developing in the bread. Also, doughs that are not sufficiently acid are highly
subject to rope infection. Since acidity is normally increased through fermentation, an
overly warm dough may not have time to become sufficiently acid to retard the
development of rope.

When the weather or climate is hot and humid, you should keep a sharp lookout for
the appearance of rope and do everything in your power to prevent its development. By
controlling the temperature of the doughs, you can keep them cold enough to retard the
development of rope. A mold-preventive inhibitor can be added to the bread dough. To
prevent the development of rope, you should take the following precautions:

231
 • Baking ingredients should not be kept in the shop longer than necessary, and
those that are kept should be arranged in such a way as to allow free circulation of air
around them.
• The bread-baking schedule should be planned so that the bakery is not
overstocked; this would result in some of the bread becoming old in the shop or in the
storage room.
• Bread that has accumulated and has become stale may be used for croutons and
crumbs.
• All bread should be thoroughly cooled before it is stored.
• Keep equipment scrupulously clean and see that no pieces of previous doughs are
allowed to remain in the shop. The shop and all equipment should be thoroughly
cleaned as soon after it is used as possible.

In the event that rope does develop in your shop, it will be necessary to kill all the
rope bacteria before you do any more baking. Generally, you should take the following
precautions:

• Dispose of all baked products and baking ingredients in the shop.

• Thoroughly clean the shop and all the equipment. Wash the bulkheads, decks,
and overhead with hot soapy water and rinse them thoroughly.
• Remove all foreign matter from all equipment and tools and from the cracks and
seams in the oven.
• Sterilize the workbench and all small equipment.
• Rinse down everything a second time with a strong vinegar and water solution.

Mold.— Mold is composed of tiny plants that are visible to the naked eye. There are
many types of mold that vary in form and color. They form velvety, colored spots on the
bread and create a musty odor. Mold spores are present in the air and will become visible
on most any food substance if they are given sufficient time under proper conditions to
develop. Mold will multiply in a warm, humid atmosphere or on moist food. The
absence of light and sufficient time also contributes to their growth. Mold first appears
on the side of the loaf.

Mold is not resistant to heat; therefore, mold that may be present in baking ingredients
will probably be killed during baking. This means that any mold on the baked bread is a
result of improper handling of the bread after it is baked. To prevent the formation of
mold in the bakeshop, take the following precautions:

• Keep the shop clean and dry.

• Assure proper circulation of air in the shop.
• Make sure all areas are lighted.
• Bake bread thoroughly and cool properly before storing it.
• Always avoid handling the bread with wet or damp hands.
• Make sure bread is not kept for any length of time, since bread molds very
quickly in storage.

232
ROLLS

Several types of hot rolls can be made from the basic recipe in the AFRS. The method
of making rolls is the same as that used for making bread. However, less mixing is
required and the dough is much softer. Careful handling of the dough will assure light,
tender rolls. To make up the rolls, take the following steps:

1. Divide the dough into 3- or 4-pound pieces.

2. Roll each piece of dough into a strip 1 1/2 inches in diameter.

3. Cut each strip into pieces weighing approximately 2 ounces each.

4. Round each piece into a ball by rolling it with a circular motion on the workbench.

5. When you have performed these basic steps you are ready to shape the dough into
sandwich rolls, Parker House rolls, wiener rolls, or dinner rolls.
Hot Roll Mix

Time-saving roll mixes have premeasured and combined ingredients except water and
yeast. Follow package and can instructions in mixing, fermentation, panning the dough,
and bating.

Roll Production Precautions

The following precautions are associated with roll production:

• Like bread production, temperature control is important. The AFRS temperatures

should be used. Too high a temperature will cause dough to ferment too rapidly and
rolls will be sour or yeasty tasting. Too low a temperature causes heavy, tough rolls.
• The amount of fermentation time needed depends on the amount of yeast and
sugar used.
• The first major step in preparing hot rolls is the dough makeup. The variety of
shapes possible with soft and hard rolls is almost endless. Accurate scaling and
skilled handling in forming shapes are required. Follow AFRS guidelines for hot roll
makeup.
• Since rolls are smaller than bread, proofing time is very critical. Therefore, over
proofed rolls will be blistered on the surface and will fall when placed in the oven.
The texture will be coarse.

Types of Rolls

Two variations of hot rolls—hard rolls and brown-and-serve rolls—can be made using
the short-time formula. About 1 1/2 hours’ preparation time per batch of hot rolls is saved
if the short-time formula is used instead of the straight dough method. Also, a variety of
sweet rolls can be made from the basic sweet dough recipe.

233
 BROWN-AND-SERVE ROLLS.— For makeup, follow the procedure described for
plain rolls for cutting and shaping. About 30 minutes (three-fourths proof) is needed for
proofing. Bake at 300°F for 12 to 15 minutes or until lightly browned. Partially baked
rolls may be refrigerated at 40°F up to 2 days. If freezer space is available, these rolls
freeze satisfactorily up to 5 days. Finish baking at 425°F for about 12 minutes.

HARD ROLLS.— Hard rolls should have a crisp crust. Hard rolls must be thoroughly
fermented or well aged because young dough produces tough, rubbery crusts. Bread
flour is necessary for properly fermented or aged dough. Allow 1 1/2 hours before
punching. Varieties of hard rolls include round, French, and caraway seed.

SWEET ROLLS.— A wide variety of sweet rolls can also be made from the simple
basic sweet dough recipe. Sweet dough is prepared from a bread formula high in sugar,
shortening, eggs, and other enriching ingredients. There are two types of sweet dough—
regular sweet dough and Danish pastry. Products prepared from either of these doughs
may be similar in size, shape, and weight but will differ considerably in texture. The
fine, even grain and texture of regular sweet dough items are quite different from the
flaky texture of the Danish pastry products. The dough should be smoother than bread
dough, but it should not stick to your hands.

Among the types of sweet rolls that can be made from this basic recipe are cinnamon
buns, butterfly rolls, doubleleaf rolls, pecan rolls, twists, chaintwists, braids, bear claws,
cross buns, crullers, snails, crescents, raisin buns, hot plain coffee cake, small coffee
cakes, and Swedish tea rings. Specific instructions for making each of these types of
sweet rolls from the basic dough recipe are given in the AFRS.

Much of the attractiveness of sweet rolls is due to the glazes and fillings used. You
will find the recipes for these glazes and fillings in the AFRS—Frostings and Fillings,
section D.
Sweet Dough Mix

Some GMs purchase commercial sweet dough mix that is available through the supply
system. Sweet dough mix has premeasured and combined ingredients, except for water
and yeast. Follow package or can instructions in mixing, fermentation, panning, and
baking the dough.

QUICK BREADS

Quick breads are bakery products in which quick-acting leavening agents such as
baking powder and baking soda are used. Examples of quick breads are pancakes,
muffins, and biscuits. These products require less time to mix and bake than yeast-raised
products.

234
Soft Batters

Soft batters contain varying amounts of liquid and may be prepared in either pour
batters or drop batters. Pour batters are thin enough to pour directly from a container into
cooking pans. An example of a pour batter is pancake batter. Drop batters are thick
enough to require spooning into baking pans. An example of a drop batter is muffins.

Roll-Out Doughs

Roll-out doughs are soft dough products such as baking powder biscuits, or stiff
dough products such as cake doughnuts.

Dough or Batter Ingredients

Batters or doughs are made with dry mixtures of flour, baking powder, salt, liquids,
and other ingredients such as fats, eggs, sugar, and flavoring.

FLOUR.— General-purpose flour is used for quick breads and batters. General-
purpose flour produces finer grained baked products than bread flours.

LIQUIDS.— Nonfat dry milk is used in recipes for quick breads. The dry milk is
sifted together with the other ingredients and the liquid is added later in mixing.

LEAVENING.— Baking powder is the chemical leavening agent used in AFRS quick
breads. It is a double-acting baking powder in which one stage of leavening occurs in the
batter and another occurs while the product is baking.

The amount of baking powder used depends on the type of bakery product, the
ingredients, and their proportions. Baking powder must be measured accurately. Too
much baking powder produces a coarse grain and may cause the product to fall after
being taken out of the oven. If excessive baking powder is used, the color will be dark
and yellowish and the taste will be salty or bitter. Too little baking powder will result in
the structure being heavy and dense with low volume.

FAT.— General-purpose shortening compound is used in quick bread and batter

production. Shortenings produce products with a soft crumb and aid in browning.

EGGS.— An important ingredient in quick breads and batter is eggs, which add
flavor, color, and palatability. They also provide some leavening action. Fresh whole
eggs or frozen whole baking-type eggs are used. Dehydrated egg mix may be used as a
successful substitute in any recipe if the eggs are sifted with the dry ingredients. This
will assure even distribution and uniform reconstitution when the liquid is added.

OTHER INGREDIENTS.— Other ingredients include spices; grated, whole, or

chopped fruits, nuts, poppy or caraway seeds; cereals such as bran or cornmeal; and salt.
Salt adds flavor.

235
Mixing Methods

How ingredients are mixed determines to a large extent the structure and texture of the
finished product. All ingredients should be evenly mixed. If needed, the flour gluten
should be developed to the desired degree to keep the loss of the leavening gas to a
minimum during baking.

These general rules apply to mixing quick breads and hatters, regardless of which
mixing method is chosen:

• The degree of mixing is always limited when the leavening is produced by baking
powder.
• The amount of mixing varies with the kind of ingredients and their proportion,
except for leavening. For example, a product containing a high percentage of fat and
sugar maybe mixed longer with less harm to the quality of the finished product.
• Recipes in the AFRS outline should be followed, step by step, as the method for
mixing quick bread halters.

MUFFIN-MIXING METHOD.— This method is used for pancakes, muffins, corn

bread, dumplings, and fritters. The sequence of steps for the muffin method includes
sifting dry ingredients together, blending in the liquid and eggs, adding melted
shortening, and mixing only until dry ingredients are moistened. Corn bread, muffin, and
dumpling batters should appear lumpy.

BISCUIT OR PASTRY METHOD.— This means of combining ingredients is used

principally for biscuits. This dough contains more flour than liquid and is of a kneaded
consistency.

The dough is prepared by sifting dry ingredients together, blending in the shortening,
adding the liquid, and mixing only enough to yield a uniform structure. The dough is
then cut into the desired shapes and baked.

CAKE METHOD.— Several quick breads and batters are mixed by the cake method.
Cake doughnuts, coffee cakes, and muffins are mixed similarly to batter cakes, Steps
used in this method are as follows:

1. Cream shortening and sugar,

2. Add eggs.

3. Gradually add the dry ingredients to the moist ingredients, alternating so that you
begin and end with the dry ingredients.

236
Quick Bread Preparation

Both drop and pour soft batters and roll-out dough preparation methods are important
to know. These batters and roll-out doughs are explained individually in the following
sections.

Coffee Cakes

Coffee cakes are popular breakfast or brunch items. The recipe formulas are the same
as for regular cakes eaten as desserts, except for minor ingredient changes. The major
difference is in the frosting used on cakes.

Coffee cakes are either topped with sweetened crumbs or combined with fruit. Crumb
cake and quick coffee cake recipes in the AFRS are of this type. Serve these cakes while
still warm. Quick coffee cakes may be prepared with biscuit mix. Check the AFRS for
variations.
Corn Bread

Corn bread is a quick bread popular in both northern and southern parts of the United
States. Yankee-style corn bread is prepared with sugar; southern style is prepared
without sugar. Jalapeno corn bread may be prepared by adding chopped jalapeno
peppers.

Corn bread can be baked in either sheet pans or the batter may be poured into muffin
pans to make muffins. Corn bread mix is available.

Hush Puppies

Hush puppies are small balls of corn bread batter (about 2 tablespoons) that are deep-
fat fried. Finely chopped onions and black or white pepper are added to the corn bread
batter. The sugar is eliminated. Corn bread mix, a complete mix except for water, is
available for preparing corn bread, muffins, and hush puppies.
Dumplings

There are two basic types of dumplings included in the AFRS. The first type is the
meat dumpling that accompanies meat stew or poultry and is made from a dough that
contains eggs and has no fat. This dumpling is light in texture and bland in flavor to
accompany any meat or poultry entrée without overpowering it. This type is cooked by
steam or in boiling stock. These dumplings are dropped by scoop or 1/4-cup measure on
top of simmering stew. The kettle should be covered during the entire cooking period to
assure fast and even doneness.

A finished dumpling should not be gummy. Dumpling quality should be the same
when cooked in stock in kettles, stockpots, insert pans, or steamers. The outside of the

237
dumpling is characteristically moist, and the inside is light and fluffy. Dumplings absorb
the flavor of the accompanying meat dish.

Fritters

A fritter is a food, such as fruit, meat, poultry, or vegetables, that has been dipped in a
milk-egg-flour batter and fried in deep fat. The food maybe uncooked, cooked, or a
leftover. Fritters are made by combining a vegetable, such as corn, into the basic batter.
The AFRS contains recipes for apple fritters and corn fritters.

The muffin method is used for mixing fritters; that is, dry ingredients are sifted
together, liquid ingredients are combined and added with melted shortening. The amount
of mixing is not as critical in the production of fritter or batter mixtures as it is with other
quick breads because of the high ratio of liquid to flour and the volubility of the other
ingredients. There is less tendency to overdevelop the flour gluten because the
ingredients mix easily. Fritters are usually very tender products because they are cooked
in deep fat.

Fritters should be thoroughly drained after drying. Place the fritters on absorbent
paper for a short period. Fry in small batches because fritters lose crispness if allowed to
stand on a steam table.

Commercial breading and batter fry mix is a product made of ingredients similar to
those used in fritter batter. Fry mix may be used for deep-fat frying, pan-frying, or for
grilling. Pancake mix batter may also be used for making fritters.

Tempura Batter

Tempura batter is prepared from flour, baking powder, salt, ice-cold water, and beaten
eggs. The batter is unsweetened and lighter than fritter batter. It is used for dipping raw
shrimp, onion rings, or a variety of other vegetables before frying.
Pancakes

The muffin method is used in mixing pancakes. Mixing should be kept to a minimum
to prevent the overdevelopment of the flour gluten, which causes a tough texture.

Cooking should begin as soon as the ingredients have been mixed. A hot, lightly
greased griddle is essential in producing high-quality pancakes. The griddle should be
maintained at 375°F. Too high or low a temperature causes uneven browning and heavy
textured pancakes.
Muffins

Ingredients for muffins cover a wide range of products including fruits, nuts, bacon,
and cereals in addition to the plain muffin ingredients.

238
 Muffins are mixed using the muffin method. The mixing time is more limited for
muffins than for other products mixed by this method because of the high ratio of flour to
liquid. After the addition of eggs, shortening, and water, the muffin mixture should be
stirred until dry ingredients are slightly moistened. It is essential that dry flour lumps be
dampened. After mixing, the batter should appear quite lumpy. If over mixed, tunnels
and peaks form, the product texture is tough, and the volume is low. Drained blueberries,
chopped nuts, dates, or raisins are folded into the batter just before panning.

The panning procedure is an extremely important aspect in muffin be well greased.

preparation. The muffin pans should be well greased. Gas that causes the muffin to rise
can escape rapidly if the mixed batter is allowed to stand. Scale each muffin carefully,
filling each muffin cup two-thirds full. Too much batter in muffin pans causes muffins to
be coarse. A well-prepared muffin has a uniform texture, even grain, and a well-rounded
but uniform top crust. A muffin mix is available. Prepare it according to instructions on
the container.
Baking Powder Biscuits

Baking powder biscuits are prepared from flour, liquid, shortening, salt, and a
leavening agent. When mixing, the shortening should be cut in thoroughly until the
mixture resembles cornmeal.

The proportion of liquid to dry ingredients is extremely important in the production of

biscuit dough. The dough should be soft, not dry or stiff, and slightly sticky. Gradually
add water until dough is formed. The condition of the flour, moisture in the bake shop,
and the speed of mixing can alter the amount of liquid used. When to stop adding liquid
will be recognized as experience is gained in the production of biscuits.

BISCUIT MIX.— Biscuit mix is also used and contains all the ingredients except
water. The leavening agent is packaged separately from the other ingredients. It should
be thoroughly blended with the mix before blending in the required water. Follow
directions for baking listed on the container.

BISCUIT VARIATIONS.— Biscuit variations may be prepared by rolling the dough

in a rectangular shape, spreading the dough with butter, and adding brown sugar and nuts
or a granulated sugar cinnamon-raisin filling. The biscuit dough is rolled up like a jelly
roll and the biscuits are then sliced. Cheddar or American cheese that has been grated
maybe added to the dry ingredients to make cheese biscuits.
Cutting and Panning

Biscuit cutters used are 2 1/2 inches in diameter. Dip cutters in flour and tap lightly to
remove the excess flour before cutting out the biscuits. Cut the biscuits so that rounds do
not overlap.

Biscuit dough also may be patted on baking sheets and cut with a sharp knife in
squares to speed up production and to save rerolling of dough. If little space is left
between each biscuit on the pan, less crust is formed. If more crust is wanted, place

239
biscuits farther apart. Baking powder biscuits should be baked at the temperature listed
in the AFRS. They are best when served piping hot.

YEAST-RAISED DOUGHNUTS

The doughnut formula is basically a sweet dough; however, leavening and eggs are
decreased and a combination of bread and general-purpose flours is used. A blend of
general-purpose and bread flours produces a more tender texture and a shorter
fermentation time than if all bread flour is used.

Doughnut formulas contain different percentages of sugar, shortening, and eggs; the
greater amount used, the richer the dough. However, variations in richness for yeast-
raised doughnuts do not extend over as wide a possible range as with cake doughnut
formulas that tolerate larger quantities of sugar and eggs.

The sugar content in yeast-raised doughnuts controls, to some extent, the amount of
browning and fat absorption during frying.

The quality of ingredients is just as important in doughnut production as it is in other

yeast-raised items. Extreme care in mixing, fermentation, and makeup is essential to
high-quality doughnut production.

Mixing

Mixing temperature should be controlled so that the dough leaves the mixer at 78°F to
82°F. The temperature of ingredients when mixed has a definite effect on the amount of
fat absorbed during frying. Mixing time should be limited to 10 minutes or until the
dough is smooth and elastic.

Fermentation and Makeup

Mixed doughs should be immediately divided into uniform pieces, the size of which
depends on the weight of the entire batch being made up. Follow recipe instructions for
rolling and cutting, as thickness of dough and uniformity of doughnut size are extremely
important to proper frying. If there are cracks in the dough, or if it is stretched
unnecessarily, the dough will tend to absorb a greater amount of fat during frying.

CUTTING.— Doughnut cutters should be used carefully to prevent overlapping the

cuts and wasting the dough. Reworked and rerolled dough can be used, but will not give
cut doughnuts a smooth surface or an even brown color.

Doughnuts may be cut into various shapes. Other than the characteristic round shape
without centers, there are long johns, crullers, and beignets.

Yeast-raised doughnuts are neither dispensed from a machine into frying fat nor
mechanically cut because they require a short proofing period.

240
 FRYING.— Recommended temperature of the fat is 375°F for raised doughnuts.
Make certain the correct temperature is used because doughnuts will soak up fat that is
too cool and will brown before they are done if fat is too hot. To allow for expansion of
dough and turning room, place cut doughnuts carefully in fry baskets one-half inch apart
and lower into hot fat.

Normal fat absorption should be 2 to 3 ounces per dozen. This absorption is both
desirable and necessary to create high-quality products. Grease soaking is undesirable,
however, and is caused principally by undermining of dough, misshapen cuts and rough
surfaces, and poor-quality fat used in the frying process. A fat-soaked doughnut is heavy,
greasy tasting, and stales very rapidly.

Doughnuts removed from the fat should be thoroughly drained on racks or absorbent
paper and cooled to 160°F if glazed. If topped with coatings, doughnuts should be cooled
to 72°F (room temperature).
FILLINGS AND FINISHES

Fillings made from fruits such as cherries, pineapple, and prunes, almond paste, cream
fillings, or sugar and spice mixtures may be used to fill coffee cakes, sweet dough, and
Danish pastry. Most everyone prefers a coating or finish of one type or another on sweet
rolls, coffee cakes, doughnuts, and other pastries. An endless combination of ingredients
can be used for this purpose. The following are the most commonly used combinations:

• Dry coatings such as cinnamon-sugar filling, powdered sugar, or granulated sugar

• Glazes such as vanilla or butterscotch for doughnuts and syrup or syrup-fruit
glazes for sweet rolls and coffee cakes
• Washes for breads, rolls, and coffee cakes
• Toppings
Dry Coatings

The dry coatings are used most often on cake doughnuts. Using dry sugar coatings is
somewhat more complicated than merely shaking together a properly cooled fried cake
doughnut and sugar in a paper bag.

Sugar coating will shed off rapidly from an overcooked, dry doughnut. On the other
hand, a sugared doughnut appearing moist on the surface may be an undercooked
doughnut. If the sugar melts or disappears, the doughnut is too moist. This condition is
known in the baking industry as sweating. Follow the AFRS for preparing cake
doughnuts. Cake doughnuts should be cooled before being sugared.
Glazes

A vanilla glaze is usually applied to yeast-raised doughnuts, but cake doughnuts also
may be glazed. Other glazes incorporating imitation maple, rum, brandy, cherry, almond,
and black walnut flavoring may be used.

241
 Doughnut glazing is somewhat more complicated than the sugaring process because
the glaze is much less stable, particularly at warm temperatures. Glazes should be
sufficiently thin to flow and to allow the excess to roll off.

Yeast doughnuts should not be less than 160°F when glaze is applied. Taken from
375°F deep fat, a doughnut will cool to the proper temperature in about 1 to 2 minutes.
Doughnuts should be submerged into the glaze and drained on a wire screen until the
glaze is set. Air circulation around the entire doughnut is important in setting the glaze.

Syrup glazes are usually applied to rolls or coffee cakes. A syrup glaze is prepared
from a mixture of blended syrup and water that is boiled for 5 minutes. For variation, a
fruit juice or pureed fruit, sugar, and syrup mixture can be prepared. Brush syrup glazes
over hot baked coffee cakes and sweet rolls.

Washes

Washes are applied to sweet doughs before baking and are used in addition to glazes
or toppings in many products. They are used also on pastry, some quick breads, yeast
bread (rolls and buns), and bar cookies.

Washes serve two functions: (1) to wash off excess flour and facilitate browning and
(2) to provide a surface to help added toppings such as nuts, fruits, poppy or sesame
seeds, or onions stick to the products. Any one of the following ingredients maybe used
individual or in combination: butter, cornstarch, whole eggs, and egg whites.
Toppings

Toppings such as glazed nut, orange coconut, raisin, streusel, pecan, or praline
toppings are added to sweet rolls or coffee cakes before baking.
PIZZA

Almost any lean dough formula, such as that for French bread, can be used for making
pizza. The major difference between a particular formula for pizza and lean bread
doughs is that the yeast is not fed. That is, sugar is not an ingredient in a pizza formula
because it is not needed to supply the yeast energy. Volume is not a factor in pizza
doughs. Fermentation for pizza is relatively short in comparison with other bread doughs
and makeup consists only of flattening the dough to the required dimensions.

Partially baked pizza crusts are prepared commercially and frozen. Add galley-
prepared pizza sauce and bake according to package directions.

DESSERTS

Desserts are popular in the GM. A dessert maybe as simple as a fruit gelatin or as
elaborate as a decorated cake. The AFRS has a wide variety of recipes for all types of
desserts. The AFRS also has step-by-step procedures for the preparation and service of

242
desserts, but the end result is often determined by the dedication and experience of the
Culinary Specialist (CS) that prepares the dessert.

CAKES

Cakes are popular desserts in the GM. A wide variety of colors from a few basic
recipes are possible through the use of varied shapes, frostings, or fillings. Cakes are
easily made in large quantities and they are less perishable than many other types of
desserts. Service in the GM is greatly facilitated by the use of cakes for dessert because
they can be made up ahead of time.
Types

Cakes can be divided according to the ingredients into three separate types and the
proportions of the ingredients used in each. The three types are batter cakes, foam cakes,
and chiffon cakes.

BATTER CAKES.— Batter cakes contain shortening. They include the pound cakes
(loaf type) containing a high percentage of fat, the plain cakes (basic type of layer)
containing smaller percentages of fat, and the chocolate cakes (incorporating cocoa and
soda) such as devil’s food and mild chocolate cakes.

FOAM CAKES.— Two kinds of foam cakes served in the GM are angel food and
sponge cakes. Angel food cakes are foam cakes that are leavened by air beaten into the
egg white. Cream of tartar is added to the egg whites to make them firmer when they are
beaten. Sponge cakes are foam cakes containing baking powder and whole eggs. The
eggs are combined with the sugar and heated until the mixture is lukewarm (110°F), and
then the mixture is beaten.

CHIFFON CAKES.— Chiffon cakes contain both foam and batter, mixed separately
and folded to a mixture.

The subdivisions of the three types are many and dependent upon the method of
incorporating the ingredients and upon the variation of ingredients added to the basic
recipe. Batter and sponge-type cakes are the ones normally prepared in Navy dining
facilities; consequently, further discussion will relate only to these.
Functions of Cake Ingredients

Each ingredient in a basic recipe has a specific function.

Flour furnishes structure and is used to hold the other materials together in making a
cake. It should be a general-purpose flour.

Sugars, used chiefly as sweeteners, have a tenderizing effect resulting from their
ability to soften flour protein and starches. By lowering the caramelization point of the
batter, sugars allow the cake crust to color at a lower temperature. Sugars also help to

243
retain moisture in the baked cake, thereby keeping the cake moist and edible for several
days.

Shortening carries the air that is incorporated in the finished cake batter. This air has a
tenderizing action on the cake by virtue of its leavening action. Thus, shortening is
considered to be a tenderizing agent.

Eggs furnish structure, moisture, flavor, and color. Egg whites for whipping must be
free from grease or traces of egg yoke—as little as one-tenth of 1 percent will adversely
affect the whipping quality.

Milk, water, fruit juice, or coffee can be used as the liquid in cake. Liquid is needed
to combine and actuate all other ingredients. It controls the consistency of the finished
cake batter.

Salt brings out the flavor of the other ingredients.

Leavening is accomplished in three ways: (1) incorporation of air during mixing, (2)
chemical leavening, and (3) vaporization of the liquids in the dough by the heat of the
oven.
Cake Mixes

Cake mixes are convenient to use as they require shorter preparation time, less storage
space, no refrigeration, and less training and experience to prepare successfully than
cakes made from recipes using the basic ingredients. Cake mixes are available in a
variety of flavors and preparation instructions are printed on the containers. Cake mixes
are complete mixes that require only the addition of water. They contain a leavening
agent, bicarbonate of soda (baking soda), packed separately inside the container. The
soda packet should be mixed thoroughly with the dry ingredients before adding water.
Cheesecake mix is combined with milk before mixing. No baking is required . Recipes
for variation to cake mixes are given in the AFRS.
Cake Making

In addition to the proper selection of ingredients, accurate measuring, and proper

mixing, other factors influence the finished product.

CAKE PANS.— Cake pans should be handled carefully so they do not warp or bend.
You should not use pans that are bent out of shape because cakes will be uneven in shape
and cola. Cake pans maybe greased or greased and dusted with flour, or they may be
lined with wax or kraft paper. Some recipes call for a pan coating made from shortening
and flour mixed together. Pans for angel food cake should not be greased because the fat
will keep the cake from rising. Each AFRS cake recipe specifies which method is used.

244
 PAN CLEANING.— If grease is allowed to build up in pans, especially in comers, it
can become rancid and give a very objectionable taste. Care should be taken to clean
baking pans thoroughly each time they are used.

SCALING.— Scaling too much batter or using the wrong size pan can cause the cake
to fail. Follow the instructions given on the specific recipe card. The AFRS cake recipes
are designed to yield the correct amount of batter for standard 18- by 26-inch sheet cake
pans. Use only lightweight sheet pans. If heavier sheet pans are used, they will cause
overdone products. Other pan sizes may be used such as 9-inch layer pans or 16-inch
square sheet pans. A listing of pans and sizes is found on the AFRS guideline cards.

OVEN TEMPERATURES.— Set the oven at the temperature specified in the recipe
or in the cake mix directions and allow enough time for it to reach the correct temperature
so that the cake can be placed in the oven at the specified baking temperature as soon as it
is mixed. The oven thermostat should be checked from time to time to make sure it is
working properly.

Allow space in the oven between the pans so that heat can circulate. Cake pans should
be placed so that they do not touch each other or the sides of the oven. If the oven is’ too
hot, the cake will have a peaked, cracked surface and will be too brown. It will also be
dry and shrink excessively. If the cake is baked too rapidly, the outer edges will be done
while the center will be uncooked and the cake will fall when it is removed from the
oven. If the temperature is too low, the cake will not rise well. The AFRS guideline cards
give the cause of cake defects and failures.

BAKING.— During baking, the proteins in the flour and eggs coagulate and the starch
in the flour swells and absorbs moisture, causing the cake to become firm. Baking takes
place in four stages. In the first stage, the batter is fluid and rises rapidly as the leavening
develops. In the second stage, the batter continues to rise and the cake becomes higher in
the center than at the edges. Bubbles rise to the top, the surface begins to brown, and the
batter begins to become firm on the edges. In the third stage, the cake has completed
rising and it becomes freer and browner. In the fourth stage, browning is completed and
the structure is set. When you are baking in a conventional oven, do not open the oven
door until baking time is almost ended or the cake may fall.

TESTING FOR DONENESS.— To determine if the cake is done, touch the center of
the cake lightly. If an impression remains, return the cake to the oven for 3 to 5 minutes
more and then retest. A toothpick or wire cake tester may be inserted into the cake. If no
batter clings when it is removed, the cake is done. Batter cakes will shrink slightly from
the sides of the pans when done.

COOLING.— If space is limited, cakes may be cooled, frosted, and served in the
baking pan. If the cake is to be removed from the pan for icing, decorating, and service,
allow it to cool for about 15 minutes or as directed in the specific recipe. Remove jelly
rolls from pans while they are hot. Paper liners should be removed while the cake is still
hot. If allowed to cool, the paper will cause the cake to pull apart and tear. Generally,

245
however, for most cake items use a spatula to gently loosen the cake around the sides of
the pan. Cover the cake with the bottom side of a clean pan of the same size and invert
both pans. The cake should drop easily onto the clean pan. Cakes baked in loaf pans
should be cooled completely in an upright position before they are removed. Cut around
the sides, tilt the pan, and slide the cake out gently.

CAKE CUTTING.— To prevent breaking, cakes should be completely cooled before

icing and cutting. Cakes baked in standard-size sheet pans are usually cut into 54 square
pieces, 6 across and 9 down. For other cake shapes consult the AFRS guideline cards.
To cut a cake use a knife with a sharp, straight edge and a thin blade. Dip the knife in hot
water before cutting and repeat as necessary to keep crumbs and frosting from clinging to
the knife. Cut with a light, even motion. A loaf cake or fruitcake should be cut with a
slow sawing motion. Fruitcakes cut easier if they are chilled first.

STORING CAKES.— Cover cakes with moisture proof paper and place them in a
clean area with a temperature range of 75°F to 95°F where they will not absorb odors.
Cakes should be served within 1 to 2 days for best quality.
CAKE DECORATING

Cake decorating does not have to be limited to holidays and special events, such as a
change of command or a retirement. Some commands honor the birthdays of crew
members weekly with a decorated cake. This gives the CSs frequent opportunities to
practice and develop their skills at cake decorating.

The first important step in cake decorating is to have a frosting of the type and
consistency required to make the desired shapes. Decorators’ frosting and cream
frostings are suitable. Frostings used for decorating should be stiffer than those used for
spreading.
Decorating Equipment

The second important step in cake decorating is to have the equipment needed: cones,
tips, tubes, and coloring.

CONES.— The cones used for cake decorating may be either pastry bags purchased to
fit commercial tubes, or they maybe made from paper. Paper cones are easily made, are
disposable, and are sanitary. The best paper used to make a cone is parchment paper.
Heavy waxed paper also can be used, although it is less rigid and, therefore, more
difficult to handle. Several cones can be filled with different frosting colors to be used
alternatively in decoration.

TUBES.— There are many kinds and sizes of metal tubes (tips) available. They can
be selected from those in standard stock or purchased to fit individual requirements. By
varying the colors of the frosting and the sizes of the metal tips, a wide variety of
decorations can be made. Borders can be plain or elaborate, depending on the tube used.

246
Writing should be carefully planned before starting so it will be well centered. An open
star metal tip is used to make shell, rope, and heavier ridged borders or small flowers.

FOOD COLORINGS.— Food colorings are available in paste and liquid forms. A
little coloring goes a long way. Food coloring paste will give dark shades when desired,
but will not thin the frosting. Liquid colorings will thin icings and will provide only
pastel shades.

To color frosting, first blend the coloring into a small amount of frosting. Then add
this blend gradually to the rest of the frosting until the desired shade is obtained. Use
paste shades. Dark colors, such as bright red, blue, and green, should be used only for
accents and for holiday cakes.

Secondary colors may be obtained by blending primary colors:

• Blue and yellow make green.

• Yellow and red make orange.
• Red and blue make violet.

By shading violet with blue, purple is obtained; violet with red yields a reddish violet.
By using red or orange, you can make red or yellow-orange by shading orange with either
red or yellow. Blue-green will result when green is shaded with yellow or blue.

Try to keep icing colors as close to nature as possible by leaning toward pastels. If
you must use bright colors, use them sparingly, as accents mostly, and for children’s and
holiday cakes. Concentrated paste colors are best to use. They give you dark shades
when you want them and will not thin icings as liquids sometimes do.
Frostings

Frostings add to the appearance and flavor of cakes and help to keep them moist.
Some cakes, such as pound cake and fruitcake, are generally served without frosting, but
most cakes require some kind of frosting or glaze. Jelly rolls are filled with jelly or
cream filling, and powdered sugar is sprinkled on top.

FROSTING INGREDIENTS.— Ingredients used to prepare frostings include liquids,

sugar, fat, flavoring, and salt.

Liquids.— Liquids make the frostings soft enough to spread. Milk water, coffee, and
various fruit juices are the liquids specified in frosting recipes.

Sugar.— The kinds of sugar used to make frostings are granulated, brown, powdered
(confectioner’s), and blended syrup (corn and refiner’s). Powdered sugar is preferable in
uncooked frosting because it is fine grained and dissolves rapidly. Blended syrup
prevents the formation of large crystals that cause graininess in cooked frostings. If too
much syrup is used, it will keep cooked frostings from hardening.

247
 Fat.— Butter is the fat ingredient usually specified in the AFRS frostings.

Flavoring.— The AFRS frosting recipes specify vanilla flavoring, but other kinds of
flavoring may be substituted where they would be appropriate for the flavor of the cake.
Some of the flavorings available are imitation almond, banana, brandy, black walnut,
cherry, lemon, maple, orange, peppermint, pineapple, and rum.

Salt.— Salt is an important ingredient in frostings because it brings out the other
flavors.

CAKE FROSTING PROCEDURES.— Cakes should be completely cooled, but not

chilled before frosting. This prevents the cake from breaking when frosting is spread
over it. Remove loose crumbs. The consistence y of the frosting should be such that it
spreads easily, but is not so thin that it runs off. The cake should be frosted far enough
ahead of time (an hour or more) to allow the frosting to set before it is served. To frost a
cake, space six equal portions of frosting evenly over the center of the cake. Using a
spatula, spread the frosting to the same thickness across the top and to the edges of the
cake. The AFRS has guidelines for preparing frosting and for frosting all types of cakes.

TOPPINGS, GLAZES, AND FILLINGS.— Toppings, glazes, and fillings, or a

combination of these, can enhance the flavor, texture, and appearance of cakes. Some
cakes are identified by the toppings or glazes. Pineapple, or other fruit, combined with
brown sugar and melted butter and covered with yellow cake batter makes upside-down
cakes. Shortcake are made by serving fruit and whipped topping with plain cake.
Gingerbread is usually served with whipped topping or lemon sauce. Boston cream pie is
a cake with a cream filling and covered with chocolate glaze. To make jelly rolls, sponge
cake is spread with jelly, rolled, and cut in slices. Vanilla glaze topping may be spread
over angel food cakes or drizzled over bundt-type cakes such as chocolate macaroon
cake. Ice-cream toppings and powdered sugar may be served with pound cakes for
variation.
COOKIES

Cookies are a popular dessert. Unlike most other desserts they can be stored for a day
or more and used as they are needed. The various types of cookies are defined by the
special processes used in making them. These types and processes are described in the
following paragraphs. General directions for successful cookie making are summarized.
Types of Cookies

Cookies are often referred to as small sweet cakes and classified by the method of
mixing: stiff dough, soft dough, and refrigerated dough. Recipes for the three classes of
cookies are contained in the AFRS. The following types of dough are used in the
production of cookies: soft dough is used for drop cookies; stiff dough is formed into a
roll and baked on sheet pans; and refrigerated dough is formed into a roll, wrapped, and
refrigerated until sliced and baked.

248
 Cookies are formulated much like cake, except that there is less liquid (eggs and milk)
and the baked cookies are characterized by soft, hard, brittle, or chewy textures.

SOFT DOUGH.— Soft-batter cookies have a high moisture content and, therefore,
require a greater percentage of eggs to give them structure. The desired finished product
is soft and moist and should be stored or packaged in a container with a tight-fitting
cover. Cookies included in this category are dropped cookies of all sorts and brownies
(butterscotch and chocolate).

STIFF DOUGH.— Formulas of stiff dough contain less liquid and eggs and more
flour than soft cookies. These cookies are often referred to as sliced or rolled cookies.
The desirable finished product is crisp. When humidity becomes excessive, the cookies
become moist and tend to soften up and lose their desirable crispness. Examples are
peanut butter cookies and sugar cookies. Crisp cookies should be stored in a container
with a loose-fitting cover.

REFRIGERATOR DOUGH.— Refrigerator cookies are mixed in the same manner as

other cookies, except the dough is very stiff. The resulting cookie is very brittle. After
the mixing is completed, the dough is weighed into pieces of convenient size. The dough
is then formed into rolls, then they are sliced into the desired slices, wrapped in wax
paper, and put into the refrigerator until time to bake them. The advantage of this type of
cookie is that it can be made and stored in the refrigerator until it is needed, thus
eliminating waste and providing a ready source of dessert at short notice. Butternut and
chocolate refrigerator cookies are good examples.

Mixing Methods

Cookies are mixed in much the same manner as batter cakes. The temperature of the
ingredients should be approximately 70°F. The dough is sometimes chilled later to
facilitate shaping.

Cookie doughs should be mixed just enough to blend the ingredients thoroughly.
Over mixing develops the gluten in the dough, thereby retarding the spread. When the
mix is over creamed, the cookies will not spread as much because of the dissolving of the
sugar crystals. Improper mixing of ingredients will produce cookies that are spotted.

The conventional or creaming method is the most commonly used method. The
longer the shortening and sugar are creamed, the less spread the final product will have
because the sugar will be more finely distributed throughout the mix. The longer the
dough is mixed after blending the flour and water, the more developed the structure of the
mix will become and less spread will result. Undercreaming will give the cookies a
coarse structure and will result in a baked product that has too much spread. If lumps of
sugar are left in the dough during mixing, sticking is likely to occur due to the syrup that
is formed during baking. Then, the sugar becomes hard and solidifies on the pans.

249
PIES

A successful pie should have a tender crust. To make sure the piecrust is tender the
proper ingredients must be used and the dough should be carefully mixed.

If properly made, the standard piecrust has outstanding characteristics. In appearance,

it will be golden brown with a rough surface that appears blistered. The texture will be
flaky or mealy depending upon the method used to combine the ingredients. It should be
tender enough to cut easily, but not so tender that it breaks or crumbles. The flavor
should be delicate and pleasing.

Piecrust Ingredients

Piecrusts are made from flour, shortening, water, and salt.

FLOUR.— General-purpose flour should be used to make piecrust as it produces pie

dough that is easy to handle and pan. Do not use bread flour. It will cause tough pastry.

SHORTENING.— General-purpose shortening compound should be used as it makes

the crust flaky and tender. Rancid shortening or shortening that has absorbed other odors
causes off-flavors in piecrust and should never be used. The shortening should be
approximately 60°F when ready for mixing and just soft enough to blend with the other
ingredients. At 60°F, the shortening blends well into the flour while giving firmness so
that a flaky piecrust is produced. Bakery emulsifier shortening, melted shortening, or
salad oil should not be used as they will cause the dough to be oily and hard to handle
and will not produce flaky piecrusts.

WATER— The quantity of water and the method of mixing it with the other
ingredients are the most important factors in making a tender piecrust. The water should
be cold (40°F to 50°F). The amount of water should be sufficient to make a dough that
forms a ball that does not crumble, but also is not sticky when rolled out. Too much
water will cause toughness.

SALT.— Salt aids in binding the ingredients together and enhances the flavors of the
other ingredients.

Mixing

The flour and shortening should be mixed together until they form very small particles
and are granular in appearance. When mixing by hand, the water should be added
gradually until the dough reaches the right consistency—neither sticky nor crumbly.
When you are machine mixing, the water is added all at once and mixed just until the
dough is made.
Rolling the Dough

Divide the mixed dough into three sections (about 5 pounds 3 ounces each) and chill
for at least 1 hour. The chilled dough will be easier to handle. When you are rolling the

250
dough, handle it as little as possible, The pastry board or workbench and rolling pin
should be dusted lightly with flour to prevent the dough from sticking. Using a dough
divider, cut the dough sections into 7-ounce pieces for top crusts and 7 1/2-ounce pieces
for bottom crusts when making two-crust pies. For one-crust pies, 7 1/2-ounce pieces
should be used.

Lightly dust each piece of dough with flour and flatten the pieces gently with the palm
of the hand before rolling. Use quick strokes and roll from the center toward the edge to
forma circle about 1 inch larger than the pan and about one-eighth inch thick. If the
dough is stretched or forced, it will shrink back during baking. Pie dough pieces may be
placed into a pie rolling machine, if available. The pie dough will be rolled out
automatically into a circular shape and ready for panning. Do not grease pie pans. The
dough has enough shortening to keep the crust from sticking.

Fold the circle of dough in half and place it in the pan, then unfold it to fit smoothly in
the pan. Make sure to fit the dough carefully into the pan so that it is flat and air pockets
cannot form between the pan and dough.
Types of Pies

The types of pies prepared in the GM are one-crust (custard type), one-crust (prebaked
shell), and double-crust pies.

ONE-CRUST PIE (CUSTARD TYPE).— After you roll out the dough and place it in
the pan, make an edging by forming a high-standing rim on the pie shell and fluting. Fill
the pie with filling and bake according to the recipes.

ONE-CRUST PIES (PREBAKED SHELL).— After placing the dough in the pan and
fluting the edges, the dough should be pricked with a fork or docked. This enables air or
steam that is formed underneath the crust during baking to escape without causing the
crust to puff up or crack. After baking the shell, you should fill with the appropriate
filling. Examples are coconut cream and chocolate cream pies. small slits should be

DOUBLE-CRUST PIES.— The bottom crust is filled with pie filling. The piecrust
rim is brushed with water. Before placing the top crust on the filling, several small slit
should be made in the top crust to allow steam to escape. The top crust should be folded
in half for ease in handling, then placed on the pie filling. Unfold it carefully to prevent
the crust from tearing. The edges of the piecrust are pressed lightly together. The excess
dough is then trimmed. The pie may be fluted in the same manner as one-crust pies. If a
finish or glue is desired, the pie top may be sprinkled lightly with sugar or brushed with
pie wash. Select the pie wash that is applicable to the type of pie being prepared.

PIECRUST VARIATIONS.— The AFRS has recipes for other piecrusts using graham
crackers. Graham cracker crusts may be prepared from either crushed graham crackers,
granulated sugar, and melted butter or prepared ready-to-use graham cracker crust.

251
Pie Fillings

Pie fillings may contain either fruit or cream. Some pie fillings are already prepared.

PREPARED PIE FILLINGS.— Prepared pie fillings are convenient to use as they
require no preparation. The required amount of filling is poured into an unbaked pie
shell. Apple, blueberry, cherry, and peach are the varieties available. For further
information, see the AFRS cards for prepared pie fillings.

PUMPKIN.— Pumpkin pie filling is a custard-type filling to which pumpkin and

spices are added. The filling is added to the unbaked crusts and baked. Note that the
pumpkin mixture for the filling should set 1 hour before adding the eggs. If not, the full
amount of absorption will not take place and the filling will shrink and crack during
baking.

Cream or custard fillings are highly susceptible to the formation of bacteria that cause
food-borne illness. Never hold custard or cream fillings between 41°F and 140°F longer
than 4 cumulative hours. Always keep cream pies refrigerated until they are served.

OTHER FILLINGS.— Pecan, mincemeat, and sweet potato pie fillings may be
prepared for pie filling variations. These fillings are poured into unbaked pie shells and
baked according to AFRS recipe directions.

Pie Toppings

Meringues, whipped cream, and whipped toppings are most often used as toppings to
attractively garnish cream pies.

MERINGUES.— Meringues are generally used for topping cream or lemon pies.
Meringues are made with egg whites, sugar, vanilla, flavoring, and salt. They must
always be baked.

OTHER TOPPINGS.— Toppings for pies maybe a slice of processed American

cheese or a scoop of ice cream to top apple pies. The AFRS has a large selection of
frostings, fillings, and toppings.
Cutting and Serving

Pies should be cut into eight serving-size portions. Pies may be placed on individual
plates for self-service from the dessert bar. Pies should be placed for service so that the
point of the pie slice faces the front of the serving line. Turnovers, dumplings, fried pies,
and cobblers should be served in a similar manner as pies.

Pastry

There are several types of pastries that are included in the AFRS. These are cobblers,
turnovers, dumplings, and fried pies. Ready-to-use puff pastry dough, in sheets, is

252
available. It is used with fruit fillings as a dessert. It can also be used with meat fillings
and served as an entreé.

COBBLERS.— Cobblers are pies that are baked in sheet pans instead of pie pans.
Cobblers maybe varied by topping the filling with pie dough cut into small dollar-sized
circles or other shapes, or by using a streusel topping. Cobbler-style pies take less
preparation time than the regular type of pies. Directions for preparing cobblers are
provided in the AFRS.

OTHER DESSERTS

Besides cakes and pies, there are various other types of desserts used in the GM.

Fruit Desserts

Fruit-flavored gelatins, fruit crisps and crunches, baked apples, fruit cups, and fresh,
canned, frozen, or dried fruit provide additional dessert variety.

FRUIT GELATIN.— Gelatin desserts are light, simple to prepare, colorful, and
economical to serve. They may be plain, fruit-flavored gelatin served with a
whipped topping or a gelatin and fruit mixture. Available flavors are cherry, lemon, lime,
orange, raspberry, and strawberry. Follow the commercial directions on the container for
the gelatin being used.

When adding fruit to gelatin, the juice drained from the fruit can be used for part of
the water specified in the recipe. Using only the fruit juice will make the gelatin too
sweet and may cause it to be too soft. The fruit should be well drained. Slice, dice,
halve, or quarter the fruit before adding it to the slightly thickened gelatin. Fresh
pineapple should be cooked before it is added to gelatin desserts as it contains an enzyme
that will prevent gelatin from setting. Canned pineapple is a cooked product and,
therefore, may be used without cooking.

Keep gelatin desserts refrigerated until served. Holding them on the serving line for
long periods of time may cause them to melt. Gelatin desserts that are prepared in
decorative molds can be unmolded easily by dipping the container in lukewarm water for
a few seconds to loosen the gelatin from the bottom and sides. Individual portions can be
cut with a sharp knife and a spatula used to lift out the portions for service. Gelatin
desserts may be garnished with whipped toppings.

FRUIT CRISPS AND CRUNCHES.— Fruit crisps and crunches are baked fruit
desserts prepared from canned or dehydrated fruits (for example, apples, peaches,
pineapple, and red tart cherries). Crunches may be also made by using canned, prepared
fruit pie fillings. Crisps and crunches are topped with mixtures such as buttered crumbs,
oatmeal, oatmeal cookie mix, or cake mix. Cinnamon and nutmeg are added to cooked
apple dessert crisps for flavor.

BAKED APPLES.— Baked apples are prepared from fresh whole, unpeeled, cooking-
type apples that have been cored. A cinnamon-flavored sugar and butter syrup is poured

253
over the top before baking. The apples may be filled with a raisin nut or raisin coconut
filling if desired. Serve the baked apples warm. Whipped cream, whipped topping, or a
scoop of ice cream may be added just before serving.

FRUIT CUPS.— Fresh, frozen, and canned fruits can be combined to make eye-
appealing desserts. Ambrosia is a fruit cup to which coconut has been added. Seasonally
available melons, such as cantaloupe, watermelon, honeydew, and honeyball melons,
give extra variety to fruit cups.

FRESH, CANNED, AND FROZEN FRUIT.— Seasonally available fresh fruits and
the readily available fruits such as apples, oranges, grapefruit, and bananas can complete
a meal when offered as dessert. They offer an alternative to weight-conscious dining
patrons who want to avoid the high-calorie desserts. Canned and frozen fruits may be
served as simple desserts. Fresh pineapple may be cut into pieces and served as a dessert
fruit.
Custards and Puddings

Custards and puddings containing milk and eggs must not be held at temperatures
between 41°F to 140°F for more than 4 cumulative hours. These desserts are extremely
susceptible to rapid bacteria growth that causes food poisoning. Keep them chilled until
they are served.

CREAM PUDDINGS.— Cream puddings may be prepared from the basic recipes or
from instant dessert powder pudding mixes. Ready-to-serve pudding in chocolate and
vanilla flavors is also available. Those products may be spooned into serving dishes or
used as pie fillings in baked piecrust shells or graham cracker or cookie crusts. For
information on puddings, see the section on cream pie fillings. Sliced bananas, orange
sections, crushed pineapple, or coconut may be added for variations.

BAKED CUSTARD.— Baked custard contains milk, sugar, eggs, flavoring, and salt.
It is baked until the custard is firm. The custard is done if a knife slipped into the center
is clean when removed. The custard should be refrigerated until it is served.

BREAD PUDDING.— Bread puddings are economical to serve since they allow
leftover bread to be used. Because of the custard base, these puddings must be kept
thoroughly chilled. Chocolate chips or coconut may be added instead of raisins.

RICE PUDDING.— The AFRS includes recipes for both baked and creamy rice
puddings. Creamy rice pudding is prepared in a similar manner as cream pudding. The
rice should be cooked before it is combined with the other custard ingredients. Coconut
or crushed drained pineapple and chopped maraschino cherries may be substituted for
raisins. Since it is a custard, rice pudding must be continuously refrigerated.

CAKE PUDDINGS.— Some cake puddings separate while baking into a layer of cake
over a layer of pudding (such as chocolate cake pudding). Other types of cake puddings

254
differ in that fruit is mixed with or placed over a cake batter before baking. Fruit cocktail
pudding is an example

Cream Puffs and Éclairs

Cream puffs are round pastries that expand while baking, becoming hollow in the
center. Éclairs have the same ingredients but are oblong rather than round. Cream puffs
and éclairs are made by first stirring general-purpose flour into a melted butter and
boiling water mixture, then cooling the mixture slightly. Unbeaten eggs are added to the
mixture a few at a time and the mixture is beaten until it is stiff and shiny. Cream puffs
and éclairs should be baked immediately. During the last few minutes of baking, the
oven door should be opened. This will prevent them from becoming soggy and falling
when removed from the oven. Cream puffs and éclairs are filled with chilled
pudding, whipped cream, or ice cream. Powdered sugar may be sprinkled on top or they
may be served with chocolate sauce. Cream puffs and éclairs may also be filled with
tuna, shrimp, or salmon salad mixtures, or chicken a la king.

Ice Creams

Ice cream and sherbet are popular desserts. The kinds that are used in the GM are
commercially prepared ice cream and sherbet and galley-prepared soft-serve ice cream
and milk shakes.

COMMERCIALLY PREPARED ICE CREAM AND SHERBET.— Ice cream and

sherbet are available commercially in various container sizes—bulk, slices, and
individual cups. Ice-cream novelties that may be procured include ice-cream bars, cones,
sandwiches, and fruit-flavored ices on a stick.

SOFT-SERVE ICE CREAM AND MILK SHAKES.— Galley-prepared ice-cream

mixes greatly simplify making soft-serve ice cream and milk shakes. The kinds available
are dehydrated ice milk-milk shake mix, fresh liquid ice milk mix, and fresh liquid milk
shake mix.

Dehydrated Ice Milk-Milk Shake Mix.— Soft-serve ice cream and milk shakes,
chocolate and vanilla flavors, may be made from dehydrated ice milk-milk shake mix.
The mixes are combined with 41°F to 60°F water using a wire whip. Once reconstituted,
they are very perishable. Keep refrigerated until ready to use. The mixture should not
contain any lumps because they will clog the freezer. After mixing, chill the mixture to
35°F to 40°F and pour it into the freezer. Do not add a warm mixture to the freezer.
Start the dasher motor and then the refrigeration. Freeze the ice cream to 18°F to 22°F or
until it is stiff when it is drawn off.

When preparing milk shakes, the method of preparation is the same; however, the
milk shake is frozen to 27°F to 30°F.

Fresh Liquid Ice Milk Mix.— Soft-serve ice cream may be prepared from fresh liquid
ice milk mix that is available from local dairy contracts. The mix is available in

255
chocolate, vanilla, and fruit flavors. Fresh liquid ice milk mix is ready to use. No water is
required.

Fresh Liquid Milk Shake Mix.— Milk shakes in chocolate and vanilla flavors may be
prepared from fresh liquid milk shake mix. This mix is intended for use in milk shake
mix machines, but may be prepared in a soft-serve ice-cream machine if the other is not
available. A slightly slushier product will be made.

Both of the fresh, liquid mixes are perishable and should be kept chilled at all times.

For cleaning soft-serve and milk shake machines, check the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Yogurt

Plain and fruit-flavored yogurts are available. A vanilla or fruit-flavored yogurt mix
for use with the soft-serve ice-cream machine is also available.

SAUCES

Some fruit sauces served with desserts such as cake, puddings, and ice cream are
thickened with cornstarch or pregelatinized starch. Prepared pie fillings that are thinned
with water can be used to make quick and easy fruit sauce toppings for ice cream.

Galley-prepared caramel sauce does not contain cornstarch or other thickeners. It is

thickened by cooking the sauce until it reaches the soft ball stage (235°F). Chocolate
sauce is prepared by combining milk with a cooked paste made of sugar, cocoa, salt, and
water and then cooked. Butter and flavoring are then added. These sauces may be served
over ice cream or plain cake cut into serving portions.

Vanilla sauce is served with cakes, puddings, and pastry dumplings. Cornstarch or
pregelatinized starch is used for thickening. When cornstarch is used, the sauces should
be cooked to thicken and to eliminate the raw starch taste.

Cherry jubilee sauce, a sauce prepared from dark sweet, pitted cherries, cornstarch,
sugar imitation brandy flavoring, and water, may be prepared to serve warm over vanilla
ice cream or for serving cold over vanilla pudding or plain, unfrosted yellow or white
cakes.

A variety of flavorings such as imitation wild cherry, black walnut, brandy, rum,
almond, orange, lemon, and banana are available for use in dessert toppings and sauces.
They may be substituted for vanilla flavoring in vanilla sauce and used as specified in
other recipes.

256
 QUESTIONS:
“Bread and Desserts” Assignment 6

6-1. When preparing cakes, cookies, quick breads, pastries, and pies, you should use
what type of flour?

1. Hard wheat
2. Soft wheat
3. General-purpose
4. Whole wheat

6-2. General-purpose flour contains more protein than bread flour.

1. True
2. False

6-3. When combined with water, what food component(s) of wheat flour form(s)
gluten?

1. Bran
2. Proteins
3. Carbohydrates
4. Minerals

6-4. Gluten is capable of absorbing what percentage of its own weight in water?

1. 50
2. 75
3. 100
4. 200

6–5. When you are making bread, the use of too much salt will produce which of the
following results?

1. Accelerated fermentation
2. Retarded fermentation
3. A heavy baked product
4. A coarse baked product

6-6. When you substitute butter for shortening in a dough or batter recipe, what
adjustment should be made?

1. Increase the liquid to be used 2. Use milk instead of water as the liquid
3. Use nonfat dry milk in place of liquid milk
4. Use more butter than the required amount of shortening in the recipe

257
6-7. Before reconstituted egg mix is used in dough preparation, you should remove it
from the refrigerator and warm to room temperature for over 1 hour.

1. True
2. False

6-8. Active dry yeast should be suspended for 5 minutes in about seven times its
weight of water at what specific temperature range before it is used?

1. 95°F to 100°F
2. 100°F to 104°F
3. 105°F to 110°F
4. 111°F to 115°F

6-9. As a baker, you would use a friction factor to determine which of the following
factors?

1. Temperature rise induced by mixing

2. Required room temperature
3. Required flour temperature
4. Desired dough temperature

6-10. Before you take dough to the bench for makeup, you should allow it to rest for
approximately what number of minutes?

1. 10
2. 15
3. 20
4. 30

6-11. Which of the following indicators should you use to determine that a loaf of
bread has been properly baked?

1. The loaf has split down the center of the top

2. The loaf has a hollow sound when tapped
3. The loaf’s top has a flat surface
4. The loaf slopes outward on the top

6-12. If freezer storage for bread is impractical, you can best maintain its quality by
baking in quantities that will be consumed within what specific number of days?

1. 6
2. 2
3. 7
4. 4

258
6-13. The doughnut formula is prepared the same as the basic sweet dough formula
in all EXCEPT which of the following ways?

1. Leavening and eggs are decreased

2. Leavening and eggs are increased
3. Only cake flour is used
4. Only general-purpose flour is used

6-14. The temperature of doughnut ingredients at the time they are mixed will affect
which of the following processes during frying?

1. Proper sizing of the doughnuts

2. Amount of fat absorbed by the doughnuts
3. Color of the doughnuts
4. Ability of the doughnuts to brown

6-15. You should cool doughnuts to what specific temperature if they are to be
glazed?

1. 72°F
2. 96°F
3. 140°F
4. 160°F

6-16. By omitting sugar as an ingredient, you may use which of the following dough
formulas to prepare pizza dough?

1. Sweet dough
2. French bread
3. Hot rolls, short-time
4. Biscuit

6-17. Which of the following functions does salt perform as a cake ingredient?

1. Furnishes structure to the other ingredients

2. Helps the cake retain its moisture
3. Brings out the flavor of the other ingredients
4. Acts as a tenderizing agent

6-18. When baking cakes and discovering that the cakes are cooking too quickly,
you should take what action?

1. Open the oven door for several minutes

2. Close the vent for several minutes
3. Turn off the blower for 15 minutes
4. Reduce the heat 15°F to 25°F

259
6-19. Cakes baked in a standard 18- by 26-inch sheet-cake pan should be sliced in
what number of portions?

1. 48
2. 52
3. 54
4. 56

6-20. You should store cakes that are not to be used immediately at what specific
temperature range?

1. 32°F to 34°F
2. 35°F to 40°F
3. 50°F to 70°F
4. 75°F to 95°F

6-21. Cookies are classified in what manner?

1. By the texture of the finished product

2. By the properties of the dough ingredients
3. By the method used to mix the dough
4. By the dough moisture content

6–22. When you over mix cookie dough, you will encounter what problem during
the cooking process?

1. The spreading of the cookies will be retarded

2. The cookies will spread too much
3. The cookies will become spotted
4. The cookies will become brittle and break easily

6-23. Which of the following characteristics is NOT an indication that a piecrust has
been properly made?

1. A golden brown appearance

2. A rough surface that appears blistered
3. An elastic or coarse texture
4. A crust tender enough to cut easily

6-24. Which of the following factors is important in making a tender piecrust?

1. The quantity of water

2. The method of mixing the water with the other ingredients
3. The temperature of the water (40°F to 50°F)
4. Each of the above

260
6-25. The dough sections for the bottom crust of a two-crust pie should be cut into
pieces weighing what specific number of ounces?

1. 7
2. 7 1/2
3. 8
4. 8 1/2

261
 CHAPTER 9

FOODSERVICE
Excellence in foodservice is essential to the health, morale, and efficiency of all Navy
personnel. Good foodservice begins with you as the CS in the galley. The food must be
properly prepared to look, taste, and smell good. It should be brought to the serving line
in appropriate containers and be served in attractive portions by properly trained, neat,
and clean foodservice personnel. The serving lines and all the serving operations should
be arranged so foods are served at the proper temperature.

One of the most important traits that you, the CS, should have is a genuine feeling for
people and a sincere service-oriented attitude. Good customer relations start with you.
You should have a positive attitude toward your job and the customers you service.
Attitudes have a major influence on people. A poor attitude will destroy all the hard
work that has been put into the preparation and service of the meal. The key to good
customer relations is to treat a customer the way you would like to be treated if you were
a customer. The way you conduct yourself can make or break the meal regarding
customer satisfaction. Always remember that the CS rating is a people-oriented rating
and customer service is of the utmost importance.

GENERAL MESS

General mess (GM) foodservice begins in the galley with the preparation of the food.
It is equally important that food be properly served. The guidelines for attractive food
presentation and serving techniques in the GM are geared to cafeteria and fast-food
operations. Wardroom styles of food presentation and serving techniques are discussed
later in this chapter.

APPLICABLE EQUIPMENT

Steam Table Pans

To make sure an appetizing appearance is maintained, use shallow steam table inserts
for serving both vegetables such as mashed potatoes, broccoli, and cauliflower and meat
items such as breaded veal cutlets or baked pork chops. If french-fried eggplant is
stacked in a deep insert, the first few customers served will receive acceptable portions;
everyone else will be served a soggy portion. If the eggplant is spread loosely in a
shallow insert, you will know that all the customers served will receive an appetizing,
palatable portion.

Standard-sized inserts can be used to serve items such as fried chicken, baked
potatoes, and macaroni. If foods require cooking in larger pans such as roasting pans or
sheet pans, food items should be transferred to an awaiting insert on the serving line.
Lasagna should be prepared in full-sized shallow steam table pans to prevent destroying
the appearance and to increase the overall acceptability of the product. All food items
should be covered to prevent shriveling or drying out. Many recipes are prepared in

262
steam table pans thus eliminating the need for transferring the cooked food into steam
table pans on the line.
Serving Utensils

Serving utensils and serving techniques go hand in hand. You cannot serve properly
without the right utensils. Using the right serving tool for each dish has several
advantages. It simplifies foodservice, exercises portion control, reduces food waste, and
maintains a more appetizing appearance of foods in pans on the serving line.

Portion sizes appropriate for each meal is the responsibility of the galley watch
captain. If the menu features two vegetables, preparation of full portions of both may
result in plate waste. The portion size shown on the recipe card is a guide, not a rule.
Appropriate portion sizes are shown on the food-preparation worksheet. You should
periodically check excess tray waste. Portion sizes should be reduced if there is food
waste. The patron who desires more will request larger portions. If the portions are hard
to control, use ice-cream scoops.

Mashed potatoes, rice, bread dressings, and baked beans are easy to serve with a scoop
and portions are easier to control. When you are serving bulk ice cream, scoops and
dippers should be rinsed between servings or placed in potable running water. Bulk ice-
cream products are not authorized for self-service.

Use a food turner for lifting steak scrambled eggs, or other similar items. For mashed
potatoes or items of similar consistency, use a serving spoon or a scoop. Use a basting
spoon or other shallow spoon to dip sauce or gravy from a shallow pan. Use a ladle to
serve food from a deep well. Some foods, such as peas and cabbage, should be served
with a perforated spoon, so the liquid drains back into the serving pan. Fried chicken,
asparagus, broccoli, and corn on the cob should be handled with tongs. If more than one
serving line is being used, be sure the same item is being served in the same portion on
each line.

Serving Utensils for Salads

An adequate number of the proper serving utensils for the salad bar will promote good
sanitary practices and keep the salad bar in order during self-service. The most useful
utensils and the food with which they can be used are as follows:

1. Tongs—for relishes and green salads—such as carrot sticks, celery, pickles,

olives, lettuce and other salad greens

2. Perforated spoons-for salads mixed with thin dressings—such as coleslaw, fruit

salad, and cucumber and onion salad

3. Basting spoons or scoops—for compact foods and salad mixtures-such as potato,

ham, fish, cottage cheese, and macaroni salads

263
 4. Small ladles—for thick and thin salad dressings

Lighting

Foods appear more attractive under warm, natural light. Use incandescent or warm
white fluorescent bulbs to give natural warm colors to the serving lines. If colored lights
are used, be careful to use the correct color to achieve the desired effect. Red lights will
give roast beef a warm, rare, and hearty appearance. Test the color lights needed for your
particular layout. Position light correctly on the food so the customer and the server are
not blinded. Lights over food also should be adequately shielded.

SERVING LINE AREAS

The serving area, which includes the salad bar, steam table, bread and pastry counter,
drink or beverage dispensers, should be cleaned after each meal. This area should be
checked again before each meal to make sure it is clean and sanitary.

Salad Bar

Most salad bars are self-service and refrigerated. Salad bars range from the
proportioned to the make your own type. A fully stocked, large variety salad bar is very
popular with patrons of the GM. Often, it offers an alternative food source for weight-
conscious patrons.

ARRANGEMENT OF SALAD ITEMS.— Overcrowding items on the salad bar

detracts from the overall appearance, hinders easy self-service, slows down the service,
and generates confusion. Careful attention should be given to the arrangement of the
salad items to prevent the customer from having to reach over one container of food to
get to another. Particles of food are often dropped from one container to another,
resulting in an unappetizing, unsatisfactory display of food.

REFRIGERATION OF SALAD INGREDIENTS— For proper refrigeration of

ingredients, place all salad bar items in pans of in trays on a bed of ice, or on a
mechanically refrigerated salad bar unit. Proper drainage is essential if salad items are
set in ice.

When the use of ice is not possible, and the salad bar is not refrigerated, the bar should
be large enough to accommodate shallow pans or trays of salad items. These trays of
salad items should be kept under refrigeration until just before serving time. Because of
the high room temperature of most messing areas, easily contaminated food should be
placed on the salad bar in small quantities and replenished as needed. Examples of such
foods are salad mixtures containing meat, fish, poultry, eggs, cooked salad dressing, and
mayonnaise. Commercially prepared salad dressings in individual portions and opened
bottled salad dressing should be refrigerated.

264
Hot Food

Hot food should be placed on the steam table just before serving time. The quantities
of food placed on the serving table should be small and should be replenished frequently
during the serving period. It will be necessary to use progressive cooking techniques to
meet these requirements.

If possible, arrange hot foods in the following order: soup, main entrée, sauce or
gravy, potatoes or potato substitute, and vegetables. All short-order types of items for
breakfast such as pancakes, ham slices, and eggs should be served from the grill on a
prepared-to-order basis.

Heat and juices are lost so quickly from sliced meats. Roasts are more palatable when
carved on the serving line as the customers come through because most of the natural
juices and the heat will be retained.
Cold Food

Keeping cold foods, such as salads, properly chilled also requires planning and
preparation. Salads contribute a great deal to the meal; they add variety, make meals
more attractive, and help balance the meal.

Desserts and Pastries

When possible, separate the dessert bar from the serving line and place it in the center
of the messing area. Using this setup, the patrons can pick up desserts after eating the
main course.

Desserts should be set in a tempting arrangement. Serve cleanly cut slices of pie and
evenly sliced squares of cakes and cookie bars. Puddings and other similar desserts
should be spooned neatly in bowls or dishes. Most desserts should be proportioned and
replenished frequently to the serving line. If a special occasion cake is prepared, set the
unsliced cake on the serving line. This will allow the decorated cake to be seen before it
is sliced. Slice and proportion the cake on plates as the customers approach the dessert
bar. One or two whole baked pies can be set on the serving line with sliced portions of
the pie.

Highly perishable desserts such as cream puddings and pies, custards, fruit gelatin
desserts, cream puffs, and éclairs should be served chilled. Place them on refrigerated
units or on trays over ice. Keep ice cream frozen. Whipped toppings should be served
cold. Serve toppings from a small container and replenish frequently.

Locate dessert dishes for ice cream next to the ice-cream freezer. If soft ice cream is
served, place paper cones or sugar cones near the machine. Sundae toppings should be
located near the ice cream. If pie a la mode is the featured dessert, add scoops of ice
cream as the dining patrons select the pie. Ice-cream pies should remain frozen. Place
only a few slices of ice-cream pie on the serving line and replenish as required.

265
 When preportioning desserts, you should provide a smaller portion with the standard
size for the weight-conscious patrons.

Beverages

Cold drinks and juices should not be dispensed by ladle from an insert; milk
dispensers or other appropriate dispensers should be used. Do not serve juices from their
original container unless the cans are the individual size. Juices may be dispensed from
beverage coolers or pitchers. Proportioned juices speed service and aid in portion control
and can be replenished as required.

Serving Line Arrangement

A well-arranged serving line operates quickly and smoothly. Each customer can
select the food that is desired and can get the food to the table while it is still at the proper
eating temperature. Some of the planning techniques used to accomplish these goals are
explained next.

Careful arrangement of hot and cold foods is extremely important. Personnel should
be routed to avoid delay and unnecessary congestion in serving and dining areas.

If the physical setup allows, salad bars should be stationed where the patron can stop
first before approaching the hot food serving line. Eliminating the stop at the salad bar en
route to the tables will enable the hot food to be eaten while still hot.

If possible, separate the dessert bar from the serving line and place it in the center of
the dining area. Using this setup, the patrons can pick up desserts after eating the main
course. A reduction in the number of desserts convinced and a decrease in tray waste will
usually be noticed.

Place trays and bowls at the head of the serving line. Silverware should be at the end
of the serving line. Cups and glasses should be placed near the beverage dispensers.
GMs with false overheads, wooden paneling, brand new equipment, and a showplace
galley will enhance the atmosphere. However, the key to customer satisfaction is good
food, well served.
Speed Line

Equipment specifically recommended for fast-food application is laborsaving and

offers an activity a modern upgrade. Yet, fast food products are easily prepared in older,
unmodified galleys.

For many years ships and shore activities have had a speed line in addition to a normal
cafeteria-style full serving line.

The benefits GMs gain using both a normal and a speed line are as follows:

266
 • Reduce their waiting lines
• Provide the sailors with a more pleasant atmosphere
• Prepare highly acceptable, easily prepared food items using modem, high-
production equipment

Most often, speed line items and recommended menus can be prepared and served in
any GM without equipment changes or additions. An exception is when extruded french
fries are to be prepared. The Armed Forces Recipe Service AAFRS) has recipes that can
be used as speed line items.
SERVING TECHNIQUES

As a petty officer, you may be placed in charge of the serving line. When this is the
case, you should instruct personnel on the proper techniques for placing items on the
serving line. This should include how to serve each item and how to place the items on
the plate or tray. Correct serving techniques are very important.
Merchandizing

Presenting menu items on the serving line is doing what commercial food operators
call merchandising. Successful merchandising involves making these items so attractive
and appetizing that customers want to eat them. When we present menu items on the
serving line we want to stimulate the appetite and promote the welfare of the patron.

People will always eat with their eyes. So it is a good rule of thumb that foods that do
not have an attractive and appealing appearance are often rejected without being tasted.
Harmonious colors present an inviting appearance when placed together on the plate.

All food items in a well-planned meal should vary in color, size, shape, and texture.

Service is speeded up when a person knows what foods are being served before
reaching the serving line. It is a good practice to post the current menu, in full view, near
the beginning of the serving line. It may either be in the form of a typed menu or a menu
board. The menu board is used to display those food items that are being served for the
current meal. Actually, any display method is acceptable that gives the customers time to
decide which foods they desire before they reach the serving line. A suitable means of
expressing calorie content for each item in the meal should be publicized for the benefit
of dieters and weight watchers.

Centerpieces can be the focal point of the serving line on holidays and special
occasions. The realm of possibilities is limited only by imagination and time.

Ice, crushed, cubed, or carved, can be an interesting addition to highlight any meal.
On special occasions, and when practical, ice carvings can be used as distinctive
centerpieces. They can take on many forms, such as swans, baskets, rabbits, deer, and
even turkeys. They may be elaborate or simple in design.

267
Garnishing

Though garnishing is just one step in presenting food attractively, it is a very

important one. A garnish is described as an ornament or a decoration. Garnishes are
planned to complement the flavor and the texture of the dish as well as add eye appeal.
Any garnish used should be edible and should be such an integral part of the food that it
will not be left on the plate.

If you were to plan a garnish for every food, it would be quite a job, but fortunately
not all foods need this help. An example is a meal consisting of pot roast of beef, mashed
potatoes, brown gravy, buttered peas, celery sticks and sweet pickles, hot rolls and butter,
and blueberry pie. Such a meal needs to having nothing added in the way of a garnish to
make it attractive. The natural colors, textures, and flavors combined in this meal
provide enough variety to make the meal inviting to the eye and tempting to the taste.

Many of the AFRS recipes have a built-in garnish. Good examples of this are beef
stew, tossed vegetable salads, browned casseroles, and desserts such as cakes iced with
frostings that complement the color and flavor of the cake.

Always refer to the food-preparation worksheet for information on garnishing various

foods on the menu.

The following list contains some practical guides to effective food garnishing:

• Use restraint in garnishing. Keep a picture of the whole meal in mind. Too many
garnished dishes in one meal will spoil the effect. Select a suitable garnish, if one is
needed, and use it sparingly.
• Vary food garnishes. Do not let garnishes become monotonous. Use a section of
orange or a slice of peach on top of a pudding occasionally; not always a maraschino
cherry.
• Plan garnishes ahead of time and show the serving personnel how garnished foods
should be served.
• Plan simple garnishes. Do not sacrifice timely preparation for the sake of
garnishing.
• Take advantage of the natural food color contrasts in combining foods. Do not
rely on the addition of food coloring to the food to supply color contrast.
Carving

For special occasions such as holidays, hand carving hams and roasts on the serving
line is preferred over machine slicing.

Carving plays an important role in serving meat in an appetizing manner. Carving

affects the appearance and texture of the meat, and the portion size can be controlled by
carving. Therefore, as an CS, you must develop skill in carving.

268
 The direction of meat grain determines how the meat is to be sliced. Most meats
should be cut across the grain. Cross-grain slicing shortens the muscle fibers and
produces a more tender slice of meat. Roast meats should be allowed to rest about 20
minutes after they have been removed from the oven before they are carved. This period
allows the meat to “firm up.” It also allows the meat to reabsorb some of the juices lost
during the roasting process. The meat becomes firm and can be sliced with greater ease
in equal slices.

Slicing should be done on a hard rubber cutting board so the cutting edge of the knife
is protected. The carving board should be placed in a sheet pan to catch the drippings
while the meat is being sliced. Remove any string or netting that may have been used to
hold the meat together while it was cooking. With a sharp carving knife (long, thin-
bladed knife) and a two-tined fork in hand. carve the roast as follows:

1. Cut one slice across the top of the roast so the Carver can determine the direction of
the grain of the roast.

2. Hold the roast in place by pressing the fork firmly into the top of the roast.

3. Carve across the grain of the meat from right to left for a right-handed person and
from left to right for a left-handed person. The carved portions can then be easily lifted
to the plate or tray.

Sliced meat portions should be controlled by weight rather than by the number of
slices. For this reason, the customer’s preference for thick or thin meat slices can be
satisfied by the carver.
Timing

The commanding officer sets the hours for serving the meal. The time published
should be strictly adhered to; the day’s work schedule in the galley should be organized
to conform to the established hours for serving meals. The messdecks and serving
personnel should be ready to begin serving on time. Planning will ensure prompt and
efficient service.

The serving line should not be setup too early. You should set up about 45 minutes
before the regular meal as a general rule. This also allows for the cooks and mess
attendants to enjoy their meal.

When serving you should be alert to what needs to be replenished. Do not wait until
the food item is completely depleted before replacing. Food items should not be left on
the steam table line too long. Remember to batch-cook all items that can be cooked
progressively. A good rule of thumb to remember is what is available for your first
customer should be available for your last customer.

269
Foodservice Attendants

Foodservice personnel should be trained to provide good customer service. Common

courtesy is the backbone of good customer service. This cannot be overemphasized
because the way the serving line personnel conduct themselves often determines the
patrons’ satisfaction or dissatisfaction with the meal.

Every person assigned to the serving line should be clean and look neat. This requires
the washing of hands many times during the day. Uniforms, hats, and aprons must be
clean. Long sleeves should be rolled up to avoid touching the food and equipment.
Foodservice attendants not only should be clean and neat, they should be trained to serve
food properly because serving techniques also affect sanitation and attractiveness. They
should be given detailed instructions on the proper serving of each menu item. To avoid
possible contamination, utensils and dishes should be properly handled during serving.
Servers’ hands should not come in contact with eating surfaces of bowls, trays, or
silverware.
Serving Line and GM Appearance

All items of mess gear should be inspected for cleanliness and should be supplied in
sufficient number to last the entire serving period. The serving counters and steam tables
should be checked for cleanliness before foods are set in place. Condiment bottles,
including tops, should be thoroughly cleaned. During meal service, keep serving lines
and salad bars wiped down. Wipe up spills immediately. Sponges and other cleaning
aids should be kept out of sight. If used, sponges should be spotlessly clean. Dirty
sponges detract from meal service. Return soiled empty serving inserts and containers to
the galley.

SERVING THE FOOD

Soups and chowders are placed on the steam table in deep well inserts. Use the 8-
ounce ladle to serve as follows (key serving points follow each step):

1. Pick up the soup ladle. Hold the ladle about halfway down the handle, grasping it
between the thumb and forefinger. This firm hold makes it easier to balance a full ladle.

2. Stir the soup or chowder. Stirring distributes the solid particles and the temperature
evenly.

3. Dip from the bottom. Solids settle to the bottom, and the soup or chowder at the
bottom of the insert is the hottest. Dip while solid particles are in motion.

4. Raise the ladle above the level of the soup bowl. The customer in line has extended
the tray and soup bowl toward you. As you raise the ladle, the liquid it contains will
settle so it is easier to pour, and it will not
spill over the sides.

270
 5. Tip the ladle slightly and pour slowly. Direct the pouring into the center of the soup
bowl.

Whenever you serve stew, chili con came, or any similar item, you should use the
same technique. Stir to distribute the solid particles and the liquid evenly and then dip
from the bottom. This is the only time you should stir these items. When there is a lull
and you are waiting for the next person to come through the line, do not stand and idly
stir the vegetables. The less they are stirred, the better they will maintain their appetizing
appearance.

As you serve items that are in shallow inserts, serve the food from the back of the pan
toward the front of the pan in an orderly system across the pan. Types of food that
should be served this way are macaroni and cheese, baked lasagna, or lyonnaise potatoes.
A uniform way of serving helps maintain the fresh appearance of the food and promotes
eye appeal.

Butter patties should be served from a dispenser. If a dispenser is not available, the
ready-to-serve patties may be placed on a tray and set over a container of ice on the
serving line. Unwrapped patties should be placed on paper chips and arranged on a tray
set over ice.

Dry cereal also should be served from a dispenser. It should never be served directly
from the packing carton. If a dispenser is not available, the individual packages should
be arranged on a tray on the serving line.

Bread will remain fresher if served from dispensers. Otherwise, bread should be
opened as needed, removed from the wrapper, and placed in a shallow container on the
serving line. Galley-baked bread should be sliced and replenished when needed during
the meal. Chilled bread should be heated before meal service. To give a fresh-baked
quality to breakfast pastries, coffee cakes, and sweet rolls, heat them in an oven (250°F)
for 8 to 10 minutes before serving.
Portions

The CS assigned to supervise the serving line has two responsibilities regarding
portion control. One is to see that servings are fair. The other is to make sure the amount
served is not more than the individual requests.

The portion size of some items can be regulated on the serving line by using standard
ladles and spoons. When you serve meat, guesswork on correct portion sizes can be
eliminated by using scales to check one or two slices before you cut the entire batch.
Some meat items are precut in individual serving portions; for example, grill and Swiss
steaks, pork slices (chops), and veal slices.

271
Temperature of Food

The steam table should be prepared in advance. Water has to be placed in the steam
table and the steam table turned on. This will allow the water to be at a temperature of
180°F to 200°F when food is placed on the table. This temperature should be maintained
always while food is on the serving line. Temperatures below this range will not keep
food hot enough. Higher temperatures will cause overcooking and ultimately ruin both
the taste and the appearance of the food.

Replenishment

As the petty officer in charge of the serving line, you have the responsibility for
keeping food on the serving line for the entire meal. You should make sure food is
replenished in a timely manner and not allow the line to be held up.

Replenish by removing the inserts or containers and replacing them with fresh filled
ones. Never dump food into inserts already on the serving line.

Empty inserts should be kept off the decks and serving lines. They should be sent to
the deep sink for cleaning and sanitizing after each use. They should not be allowed to
build up until the completion of the meal.

Customer Service During the Meal

Customer service does not end with the serving line. Other important customer
service considerations are clean tables and chairs with adequate supplies of napkins, salt
and pepper shakers, and condiments. Patrons also like peace and quiet with courteous
foodservice attendants and messdeck masters-at-arms (MDMAAs).

Maintaining the Messing Area

Sanitary practices that should be followed in the preparation and in the serving of the
food have been discussed. It is equally important to maintain the mess area in an orderly
and sanitary manner during the meal and to clean it thoroughly after the meal.

The tabletops should always be kept scrupulously clean. They should be scrubbed and
sanitized after each meal. This should be done with hot soapy water and rinsed with clear
water to which a germicide solution has been added. Germicide and fungicide solutions
are standard stock items and may be ordered through supply charnels. The sanitizing
Solution should be changed as frequently as necessary to ensure a clean solution.
Securing

After each meal the salt, pepper, and condiment containers should be thoroughly
wiped with a mild detergent solution and then refilled. Once each week the salt and
pepper shakers should be emptied, prewashed, and put through the dishwashing machine.
These containers should be arranged in the same order on all tables. The method

272
recommended is to place the taller containers in the center and arrange the others around
them in graduated order of height.

Foodservice personnel assigned to the messing area should be instructed to check the
messing area continuously during the serving period. Spilled food on the deck is a safety
hazard and should be cleaned up immediately.

Dinnerware should be washed after each meal and made ready for the next meal.
Before storing the clean utensils, the cabinet should be inspected for cleanliness. Trays
and bowls should be at the head of the serving line; silverware may be placed at the head
of the line but it is recommended that it be placed at the end of the line. Cups and glasses
should be located near the beverage dispensers. All items of dinnerware should be
inspected to make sure they are spotlessly clean and not chipped, cracked, or bent. An
inventory should be taken once a week to be sure there is enough dinnerware to last the
entire serving period.

WARDROOM MESS

Thus far, our discussions have centered primarily on the various aspects of preparing
and serving the food in the GM. While this is an important part of your job, it is only one
part. You have other duties. They include maintaining a clean, sanitary messing area,
setting the tables for regular and formal meals for officers, and estimating the proper
seating arrangements for the officers and their guests.

The wardroom is usually a multipurpose area. It is the officers’ dining area and
lounge. It is an area where officers gather for social functions, entertainment, to conduct
business, and to hold conferences.

Usually family-style foodservice will be provided in a wardroom. However, other

factors determine the type of service used in a wardroom. These factors are specific
wardroom design, the number of foodservice personnel assigned, and the desires of the
mess president and commanding officer. Regardless of the type used, the service should
be carried out properly.

The success of a meal often depends on how it is served. Good foodservice is not
easy to give and requires knowledge, training, and planning. All of this should be
accomplished before seating the wardroom members.

MEAL STYLES

There are two basic meal styles used in the wardroom-formal and informal.
Variations of each style are used on particular occasions. These styles and their
differences are discussed next.

273
Formal Service

Formal meal service includes the semiformal and the formal styles called French
service.

The formal type of meal requires more planning, detailed preparation, and elaborate
tableware than any of the other styles. The formal meal style is used most often when
special guests or dignitaries are present either in the flag or wardroom messes.

The formal meal style of serving is when you serve the food from a food wagon, a
side table, or offer it to guests from a serving dish. As many as seven courses may be
served in this manner. All courses are served with the plates being removed after each
course. Additionally, the place setting has no bread and butter plate.

Semiformal service is the type of service used more often than formal. For example, it
may be used daily in commanding and flag officers’ messes if there are no guests. The
preparation and service of this meal are not as elaborate as the formal style and require
less time, facilities, and personnel. The individual place settings are similar to those used
for the informal meal styles. Few center items are used other than salt and pepper
shakers, sugar bowls, and creamers.

The method of serving meal items distinguishes semiformal from informal meal
styles. In the semiformal style, each food item is arranged on a separate serving dish in
the pantry. It is then offered to each diner. Beginning with the meat or main course, each
course is carried into the wardroom separately. The courses are presented to each diner
in turn, starting with the head of the table. The senior guest or the individual designated
by a buck is served first. Each diner selects desired items from the serving dishes and
places them on his or her plate while the serving dish is held. Serving dishes are returned
to the pantry after their contents have been offered to all the diners.
Informal Service

Several types of informal service are used in the wardroom mess. Those now in use
include family, American, ala carte, cafeteria, and buffet styles.

FAMILY STYLE.— For this type of service the food is attractively arranged in the
pantry or galley in the proper serving dishes. The food is then placed on the table with
the proper serving utensils.

Each officer serves himself or herself and passes the serving dishes around the table.
Dessert items that are to be served later can be brought in from the wardroom and placed
on the sideboard. The serving dishes are replenished as necessary.

AMERICAN STYLE.— This type of service is used in most restaurants. The main
course plate is not part of the initial place setting. Instead, individual plates are prepared
in the pantry or galley and placed before the seated diners. This form of meal service is
often provided in officers’ messes on medium-sized ships. It is often combined with

274
other traditional forms of service. In American service, food is placed on plates in the
galley and taken to the wardroom and served to each diner.

A LA CARTE STYLE.— This type of service is usually provided at breakfast. As

with the American style, the main plate is not part of the initial plate setting. Instead. the
diner is given a menu or breakfast order form. The diner decides what food he or she
wants and how it is to be prepared. The order is then delivered to the pantry or galley and
the food is prepared as requested. It is placed on a plate and served to the diner as in the
American style of service.

CAFETERIA STYLE.— This is the type of service that is used aboard some larger
ships such as carriers and supply ships. The diner does not normally serve himself or
herself. Rather, the diner selects the desired items and the foodservice attendant places
them on his or her plate. However, salads, desserts, and some side dishes may be
apportioned in dishes and the diner simply takes them from the serving line. The main
course consists of vegetables, starches, and meat. These items are portioned onto a plate
by the serving line attendants as the diner selects them.

BUFFET STYLE.— Buffet service may be used for both formal and informal
occasions. This type of service is commonly used when either space or serving
personnel are limited. The food is attractively arranged on a sideboard or serving table,
and the officers and guests serve themselves. It is customary to place silverware and
other necessary dishes on the dining table so diners do not have to carry them. When
seating at the dining table is not adequate, or for a stand-up buffet, silverware and
napkins are placed on the buffet table. All foods may be arranged on the buffet, or some
items may be taken from the buffet and served after the guests are seated.

Serving responsibilities for buffet service are fewer, but they are no less important.
The buffet and dining table should be watched constantly so items are replenished before
they run out; also, to remove soiled dishes immediately after use. After the diners are
seated, the buffet will require constant attention so it remains attractive for latecomers or
anyone desiring seconds.

When everyone has finished the main course, the main course foods should be
removed from the buffet table. The dishes and used silverware should be removed from
the table. If the dessert is to be served from the buffet table, the dessert and appropriate
serving dishes should be arranged as soon as the main course foods are removed.
Otherwise, the dessert should be served at the table.

DINING TABLE CENTER ITEMS

After setting the individual places, you should then set the dining table center items.
These items include standard items that are typically used at every meal and meal-related
items that may be included on the basis of menu requirements. The standard center items
will always be placed on the dining table when setting up the table.

275
Standard Center Items

• The sugar bowl is a small, silver, oval-shaped container with a short pedestal
stand and lid. It is always set with a sugar spoon.
• Salt and pepper shakers may be all silver or they may be glass with silver tops.
The salt should always be kept loose and dry. When placed on the dining table, both
shakers should always be at least three-fourths full.
• The coffee cream pitcher is similar in size and shape to the sugar bowl but has a
spout and no top.

One set of these standard items is provided for every six diners. However, a set of salt
and pepper shakers is provided for every four diners. The standard center items are
arranged with the sugar bowl centered between the salt and pepper shakers on one side of
the table and the creamer on the other side. The salt shaker should be placed on the right
side toward the head of the table.

Most ships consider some type of centerpiece as standard. This centerpiece usually
consists of a silver fruit bowl containing either fresh or artificial fruit for breakfast or
fresh or artificial flowers for lunch or dinner. If used, centerpieces should be lined up and
arranged across the tables to present a neat, attractive uniform appearance.

Meal-Related Center Items

Cereal cream pitcher—The cereal cream pitcher is shaped like a small beverage
pitcher with a modified hourglass design. It has a handle on one side and a capacity of 16
ounces. It is set only for breakfast or brunch when cereal is to be served.

Syrup pitcher—The syrup pitcher is similar in size and shape to the coffee cream
pitcher. However, the pouring spout is partially enclosed by a metal lip. It is set only for
breakfast or brunch when pancakes or waffles are to be served. It is placed on a coffee
cup saucer.

Silver fruit bowl—The silver fruit bowl is a large hollow bowl. It is used for serving
fresh fruit for breakfast or brunch. It is often set as a centerpiece containing artificial or
real fruit for breakfast or artificial or real flowers for lunch or dinner.

Bread tray—The bread tray is a rectangular silver dish with rounded ends and
perforated sides. It is used primarily for breads, but it also maybe used for relishes such
as cannot or celery sticks. When used for breads, an opened napkin is placed in the tray.
The bread is then neatly arranged on the napkin, and the edges of the napkin are folded
over the bread to retain freshness and warmth.

Cruet and caster—The cruet and caster consist of two stoppered glass bottles placed
on a small tray. The bottles hold oil and vinegar salad dressings when salads are served
at lunch or dinner.

276
 Butter dish—The butter dish is a small, rectangular china dish with rounded corners.
It is normally used at all meals for serving butter patties. At breakfast or brunch, it can be
used for serving jam or jelly packets.

Pickle fork—The pickle fork is used only at lunch or dinner when pickles or other
relishes are served. It is placed on the relish (bread) tray. The pickle fork has three tines
and is similar in shape to the diner’s oyster fork but is slightly larger.

Meal-related items are selected on the basis of menu requirements. Examine the menu
and identify those menu items for which related center items are normally used, such as
jellies and syrup at breakfast. Pencils are supplied for falling out order forms.

For semiformal lunch or dinner, the bread, if served, is placed on the dining table after
the main course item. For all informal-style lunch or dinner meals, bread is set 5 minutes
before the meal.
DINING TABLE

When assigned to wardroom duty, you are responsible for setting the table for meals.
Setting a table correctly helps avoid confusion at meals and allows the table to look neat
and attractive. An attractively set table contributes to the enjoyment of the meal.

Linens

Linen is handled when preparing for a meal and when securing from a meal. All linen
should be examined for cleanliness and serviceability before use. When linen is stained,
torn, or frayed, it is not suitable for the table. Linen in this condition should be brought
to the attention of the wardroom supervisor.

Linen Placements

All linen should be in place before the wardroom tables can be set. Linen also should
be placed on the sideboard and, sometimes when appropriate, the buffet table. Linen that
is worn, but clean and without stains, may be used on the sideboard if it can be neatly
folded so the damaged parts are hidden.
Sideboard

Most wardrooms have a waist-high cabinet known as the sideboard. Its storage spaces
are used for storing wardroom linen and tableware. The top forms a counter for the
placement of hot and cold beverage services and extra tableware in preparation for a
meal.

Napkins

When cloth napkins are to be used alongside plate settings, they should be folded flat
and set aside. If napkin rings are to be used, napkins should be folded, rolled, and placed
in the rings.

277
SETTING THE TABLE

Setting the dining table involves two basic tasks: setting individual place settings and
setting the dining table center items. Steps for selecting and placing individual place
settings and dining table center items are dependent on specific menus and styles of meal
service. Variations in the procedures may recur. These variations are based on the way a
specific mess maybe equipped and on the desires of the mess president and/or the
wardroom supervisor. For instance, if there is a lack of a certain type of needed
tableware, the wardroom supervisor should be asked to decide what item should be used
as a substitute.

Setting Individual Place Settings

The dishes, silver, glasses, and napkin placed in front of one person are called a cover.
The number of dishes and pieces of silver necessary for a cover depends on the occasion
and the menu. Everyday meals require fewer dishes and silver than formal meals. Always
check the menu before setting the table.

Individual place settings are traditionally arranged as follows:

Dinner or service plate—The dinner or service plate is placed directly in front of each
chair. The ideal spacing of plates for family style or formal occasions is 24 inches from
plate center to plate center. This is close enough to permit easy conversation and
provides enough room for each diner. The dinner plate is not placed on the table when
American, cafeteria, buffet, or a la carte style is used.

Silverware—Silverware is placed about 1 inch from the edge of the table and close to
the plate. It is placed according to the order in which it will be used—the outermost
pieces being used first. Knives are placed next to the plate on the right side with the
cutting edge toward the plate. Spoons are placed to the right of the knives with the bowl
up. Forks, except oyster forks, are placed on the left side of the plate. When the oyster
fork is used, it goes to the right of the spoon. Usually, not more than six pieces of
silverware are placed at a cover. During a formal dinner, when additional silver is
required, it is brought in with the course requiring its use.

Bread and butter plate—The bread and butter plate, when used, is placed to the left of
the dinner plate, above the points of the forks.

Beverage glasses—The water glass is placed to the right of the dinner plate above the
points of the knives. The water glass is set for lunch unless another chilled beverage is to
be used. It is a wide, short 10-ounce glass and is used only for water. The beverage glass
is a taller, narrower 10-ounce glass. It is used for lunch or dinner when milk, iced tea, or
other chilled beverages are served. The juice glass is a small 6-ounce glass. It is not set
but is used to serve juice when ordered by the diner. It is used only at breakfast.

278
 Coffee cup—The coffee cup is set upside down on the saucer and is placed to the
upper right of the outer spoon.

Napkin-The napkin can be either cloth or paper. It is placed either to the left of the
forks or on the dinner plate.

After all covers are set, check the table once again to see that all covers are alike and
that nothing was omitted. Be certain that spoons are laid with bowls up and that the
cutting edges of knives are turned toward the plate. Place the chairs so the front edge of
the seats are just against or under the drop of the tablecloth.
Setting Place Cards

Place cards are usually used for such functions as formal or informal dinner parties
when the persons attending may not know one another. Place cards are prepared to
eliminate confusion. When used, the place card is laid flat on the napkin.

Setting Center Items

After setting individual places, you should then set the dining table center items. The
standard center items discussed earlier in this chapter will always be placed on the dining
table when setting up the table.

SETTING THE SIDEBOARD

The sideboard is normally where the hot and cold beverage services are set up for the
meals. Additionally, extra tableware is placed on the sideboard.

Setting Up the Hot Beverage Service

The principal hot beverage used aboard ship is coffee. Hot tea or hot chocolate also
may be used if desired by wardroom members. The hot beverage service should beset up
following placement of the linen on the sideboard. The following steps explain beverage
service setup.

1. To set up this service, you should take coffeepots from the sideboard to the pantry
and obtain enough coffee for the meal. You should have one coffeepot for each 10 to 12
diners. Place the pots on the sideboard coffee warmers. Select at least one coffee pitcher
for each dining table and place on the linen next to the coffee warmers. Coffee servers
should be filled just before serving and should not be placed on the warmers.

2. To setup hot tea or chocolate, you should put hot water in a coffeepot and set it on the
coffee warmer. Arrange tea serving pots next to the warmer. The number of teapots is
determined by the wardroom supervisor or through experience. Tea bags or hot
chocolate packets should be placed next to the serving pots.

279
Setting Up the Cold Beverage Service

To setup the cold beverage service, you should take serving pitchers from the
sideboard to the pantry to obtain the cold beverages. Water is always made available
even if another beverage is served. Cold beverages are prechilled and placed on the table
just before announcing the meal. The pitchers should be ready on the sideboard for
refills.

When fruit juices are included on the breakfast menu, a galley serving pan insert
should be filled with enough ice to cover half the height of the glasses. It should then be
placed on the sideboard, and the juice glasses then filled to the bulge with juice, and
placed in the ice to cool.
Setting Up Extra Tableware

The required amount of extra tableware will normally be determined by the wardroom
supervisor. Extra tableware should be included for occasional breakage of china during
meals and the likelihood of unexpected diners. If a second seating of diners is required,
tableware should be placed on the sideboard to permit quick resetting of the dining table
after the first seating has finished.

Obtain and neatly place the necessary items on the covered portion of the sideboard.
Dishes and bowls may be stacked several high. Cups and glasses should not be stacked,
especially during rough seas. Silverware should be arranged by type and napkins should
be prefolded and stacked near the silverware.
SETTING FOR BUFFET SERVICE

Buffet service was briefly described earlier in this chapter. However, there are unique
sanitary considerations involved in the setup and operation of buffet- or cafeteria-style
serving lines. Open serving pans and trays provide ideal sites for growth and spread of
disease-carrying organisms. Following a few simple rules can reduce the chance of
infection.

1. Always keep hot foods at temperatures above 140°F, Discard the food within 4
hours of the beginning of preparation if these temperatures cannot be maintained.

2. Display only limited amounts of food on the serving line at any one time. This
permits the balance of food to be kept in the pantry for temperature control. Refill
serving pans and trays only as necessary.

3. Finally, use a sneeze shield whenever possible.

The principal tasks involved in setting up the buffet serving line are presented next.

The serving line setup tasks should be done in the order listed and completed 5
minutes before serving time.

280
 1. Make space for the buffet serving line. A buffet table should be located to allow
CSs convenient access to the pantry for filling the serving pans. This also allows the
diners to use the serving line easily without crowding from furniture or other diners.
2. Place the linen on a special buffet table or a selected area on the sideboard. Remove
all nonessential items on the sideboard area when used to setup a buffet serving area.

3. Set up the chafing dish stands. Setup enough stands so there is at least one for each
food item. Place them in the serving area so a diner can have ready access to them
without leaning over the table. After the chafing dish pans have been set in place, put 1
inch of water into those pans that are for hot food. Sterno heating units are then placed
below the center of the pans containing water. Make sure there are no flammable items
placed near these units as the setup continues. Do not light the heating units at this point.

4. Place the sneeze shield now, if one is available. Do this in a way to make sure all
food items are properly protected. Diners should still have ready access to the foods.

5. Determine what utensils will be needed. Then place all necessary eating utensils
neatly at the beginning of the serving line. Napkins and silverware are usually placed on
the dining tables. However, when there are more diners than seats, additional place
settings should be kept on the sideboard. They should be placed on the dining tables after
diners finish and leave, making room for additional diners. There are not always enough
CSs to do the resetting. On these occasions, napkins and silverware should be placed on
the serving line. They should be placed next to the china and away from the chafing
dishes.

6. Set the decorations selected by the wardroom supervisor on the serving table.
Decorations are usually artificial or real flowers arranged around the three sides of the
serving area facing the diner.
SEATING ARRANGEMENTS

In the wardroom where regulations and precedence closely control seating

arrangements, officers are assigned to permanent seats for daily meals. They are seated
from left to right, according to rank and precedence.

The senior line officer in command, or in succession to command, is the president. He

or she sits at the head of the table, or at the head of the senior table when more than one
table is used. The commanding officer who regularly eats in the wardroom is the
president. When the commanding officer has his or her own mess, the executive officer
is the president. T he exception would be on large ships that have more than one
wardroom. In this case, the senior line officer of each mess is the president. However,
when the commanding officer or other senior officer is invited for an occasional meal,
this officer is considered the guest of honor. In this case, he or she is seated to the right of
the mess president.

281
 The caterer sits opposite the president. The officer next in rank sits in the first seat to
the right of the president. The officer third in rank sits in the first seat to the left of the
president, and so on down the table. All line officers of the same grade take precedence
with each other according to his or her respective dates of rank. When they have the
same date of rank, their precedence is according to their lineal numbers as given in the
official Navy Register.

Staff officers with the same date of rank as running mates of the line take precedence
after their running mates of the line. However, they take precedence before all line and
staff officers who are junior to the running mate. When officers of more than one staff
corps have the same running mate, they take precedence in the following order: Medical
Corps, Supply Corps, Chaplain Corps, Civil Engineering Corps, Judge Advocate
General’s Corps, Dental Corps, Medical Service Corps, and Nurse Corps.

When more than one table is in use, the treasurer usually sits at the head of the junior
table.

When officers of other service branches have the same relative grade and the same
date of rank, they have precedence according to the time each has served on active duty
as a commissioned officer of the United States Armed Forces. The seating arrangement
changes when a guest is present. When several guests are to be present, the seating
arrangements are normally worked out by the wardroom supervisor and approved by the
caterer.

MEAL STYLE PROCEDURES

Meals should begin immediately after the president and the officers are seated.
Prompt and courteous service add much to the enjoyment of a meal. Serving personnel
should be alert. They should not lean on the sideboard or lounge against the bulkhead
when they are not busy. With proper training, serving personnel will know what their
responsibilities are and how they should be met.

INFORMAL MEAL SERVICE

All meals are served by family, cafeteria, American, buffet, ala carte service, or by a
combination of these, as discussed earlier.

Foods, including soups, are served from the left of the person being served. Beverages
are served from the right.

Soup is normally ladled into the soup plates in the pantry and served rather than
offered to the officer at the table.

The rule of thumb to follow during formal and informal service is to serve the foods
from the left and remove from the right, except beverages.

282
 To avoid overcrowding the table during family-style service, refill the water glasses as
necessary instead of placing a water pitcher on the table. In other types of service such as
cafeteria, a water pitcher maybe placed on the table for those who desire refills.

Coffee should always be available and served piping hot. Be careful when serving
coffee and other hot beverages especially aboard ship when the ship is underway. An
accidental spill can cause a painful burn. When an officer has finished a course, remove
the used dishes. Do not stack the dishes in front of the officer. With the right hand,
remove the plate and silverware used during the course. When more than one plate is
being removed, hold the first in the left hand and place the others on top of it.

When desserts are not picked up from the line, they should be served. Place a pitcher
of hot coffee on the table for those desiring seconds and place ashtrays within the
officers’ reach.

When guests are present, some changes to the seating and serving order are necessary.
Although some of these changes were mentioned earlier, bringing them together at this
point will help you to recognize what routines should be changed.

The buck is not used when guests are aboard. A guest of the ship or the guest of
honor sits to the right of the president and is always served first. Other guests usually sit
to the right of their host officer. When no guest of honor is present and more than one
officer has guests, the guest of the senior host officer is served first. In all cases, after
serving the guest of honor, the serving continues from that point counterclockwise around
the table. Do not skip around in order to serve all guests first.
FORMAL

The service required for formal meals is more elaborate than for informal meals.
However, the table setting is basically the same as for informal meals. Usually four or
five courses are served, but as few as three or as many as seven maybe served. All food
from each course is served to all diners in prompt succession. For a formal dinner
everything is served; nothing is set on the table except the salt and pepper shakers.
Condiments and other seasonings are served at the proper time.

Service plates are normally used at formal dinners. These are large plates that are
placed on the table at the time it is set for the meal. They are not removed until replaced
by the heated dinner plate for the first hot course after the soup. They are used only
because it is considered bad form for the diners not to have plates before them throughout
the meal. No food is placed directly on the service plate. Instead, dishes containing the
first courses of the meal are set upon the service plate. Although bread and butter plates
were never used for formal dinners in the past, they are frequently used today.

All foods are served from the left, and beverages are served from the right. Dishes are
removed from the right. An exception to this rule is the replacing of silverware. These
pieces of silverware that are placed to the right of the place plate are replaced from the
right. In this way it is not necessary to reach in front of the diner.

283
 As soon as the members and their guests are seated, the first course, shrimp cocktail,
is served.

When all have finished the course, the shrimp cocktail glass is removed with the used
silverware. The soup course is served next.

When all have finished the soup course, the soup plate, service plate, and soup spoon
are removed. The heated dinner plate replaces the service plate for the main course. The
food is brought in on a platter or in serving dishes. The food is presented to the guest
who is seated to the right of the host. The service then proceeds counterclockwise around
the table.

Upon completion of the main course, the dinner plate and used silverware are
removed. The salad plate is then put in its place. To provide faster service, the salad is
usually arranged on the salad plate before it is brought in. When all have finished their
salads, the salad plate and silverware are removed. At this point, the only items
remaining from the original setting are the water and wine glasses. Before the dessert is
served, the crumbs, if any, should be brushed off the table with a folded napkin and tray.
The dessert course with appropriate silverware is then placed before the diners.

Coffee is served with the dessert course or following it. If cups are placed on the table
and coffee offered to those who want it, service is from the right.

It is customary not to smoke at formal dinners until after the coffee or demitasse has
been served. When allowed, at the proper time cigarettes and/or cigars are passed and
ashtrays are placed before those persons desiring them.

SERVING BEVERAGES

The serving of beverages was discussed earlier; however, four general guidelines and
several specific procedures for serving beverages will now be explained.
Formal Beverage Service

Since the formal style of service is quite elaborate, different beverages may
accompany each course, and considerable guidance is needed for this to be done
correctly. Guidance should be obtained from the wardroom supervisor and from other
references.

Informal Beverage Service

The first guideline is that beverages are to be served from the diner’s right if possible.
Otherwise, check with the wardroom supervisor about how to serve the beverages in a
way that disturbs the least number of diners.

284
 The second guideline is that the server should never lift the diners’ glasses or cups
from the dining table to refill them. Rather, he or she should pour the beverage into them
while they are on the table. If the cup or glass is not conveniently placed for service,
carefully move it to a better location. If it cannot be reached, politely ask the diner to
move it.

The third guideline is that the order of service for beverages is the same as that for the
serving of foods.

The fourth guideline is not to fill serving pitchers to the top when used for filling
glasses or cups at the dining table. A third pitcher is difficult to handle and feels quite
heavy after a while. Therefore, pitchers should be filled between one-half and two-thirds
full.

Finally, you must remember that each wardroom mess may have certain rules for
serving beverages. The wardroom supervisor should be asked about these rules.
AFTER THE MEAL

You should immediately restore the wardroom to its pre-meal condition as soon as
possible after the meal. Some helpful suggestions are as follows:

• Clear the table as soon as all officers have finished eating and have left the table.
• Remove all meal items from the sideboard and return all dishes, silverware, and
ashtrays to the pantry for washing.
• Refill the salt and pepper shakers as needed and store them in the pantry.
• Remove buffet serving line items.
• Inspect the napkins and place the soiled ones in the laundry. Refold those suitable
for reuse and replace them in their respective napkin rings (when they are used) and
store in the napkin storage area. Single service paper napkins are being used in many
private messes for regular meals and cloth napkins are used only for more formal
occasions.
• Brush the crumbs from the tablecloth. Be careful not to rub food particles into the
fabric.
• Shake the cloth out lightly and refold it along its original creases. Reroll or refold
the silence pad as appropriate, and store it with the tablecloth.
• Clean tables, sideboard, and chairs.
• Replace the table cover.
• Vacuum and sweep the deck of the wardroom.
SETTING UP FOR SPECIAL EVENTS

Navy commands traditionally sponsor events and ceremonies to acknowledge

noteworthy accomplishments and achievements of Navy personnel. Command functions
recognizing personnel promotions,

285
reenlistments, retirements, command milestones, changes of command, and other similar
events are vital to morale and tradition. These events usually include a reception which
provides light refreshments of some variety.

As an CS, you will probably get tasked to provide your in-rate skill to help plan and
prepare for the event, regardless of the occasion. This is especially so if food is involved.
For example, you may be asked to decorate a special cake for the event. You may be
tasked to prepare a special menu, which includes hors d’oeuvres and refreshments.

Some planning factors you should consider are theme determined by the occasion or
event being planned and the number of guests that will be present. You also should
consider the season and time of day. Arrange for indoor facilities if it is expected to rain
or to be cold.

You should make sure the facility chosen is available when needed and that it includes
the necessary space or capacity. You should inquire into the availability of all needed
supplies and needed capable personnel.

Coordinate with other activities on the base to make sure other events are not
scheduled that will conflict with yours.

You can avoid last-minute confusion and delays by preparing a master plan after the
event has been planned in detail. Review this plan with all personnel who will be
involved with the preparation and service. During the review, give personnel specific
instructions on all assigned tasks. After the review, post the master plan where involved
personnel can refer to it.

Check all necessity items of equipment to make sure they are functioning properly.
The person in charge should check on chairs tables, podiums, and so on to make sure an
adequate number is available on the scheduled date.

286
 QUESTIONS:
“Foodservice” Assignment 7

7-1. To provide good foodservice in any foodservice operation, it is necessary to

employ all EXCEPT which of the following tools?

1. The ability to properly prepare and serve food

2. The ability to properly train foodservice personnel
3. Good customer relations
4. An unlimited budget

7-2. What person is responsible for determining the portion size appropriate for
each meal?

1. Galley supervisor
2. Galley watch captain
3. Leading CS
4. Food service officer

7-3. You should use the portion size shown on a recipe card in what manner?

1. As a fixed standard
2. As a weight control device
3. As a foodservice rule
4. As a general guide

7-4. What type of light will make foods appear more attractive on the serving line?

1. Red
2. Bright
3. Natural
4. Yellow

7-5. When possible, you should place the dessert bar in what section of the messing
area?

1. At the end of the main serving line

2. After the salad bar
3. Between the main serving line and the salad bar
4. In the center of the messing area

7-6. If the physical setup of the mess allows, in what location should you place the
salad bar?

1. Where the patron can choose a salad first

2. Next to the chill box

287
3. After the main serving line
4. In the center of the messing area

7-7. When you are garnishing food items, which of the following practices is
encouraged?

1. The use of food coloring to supply color contrast

2. The use of restraint
3. The use of inedible garnishes
4. The use of elaborate garnishes

7-8. When preparing to slice a roast, you should first cut one slice across the top of
the roast for what purpose?

1. To provide a surface to place the meat fork

2. To allow the meat to become firm
3. To permit the meat to be sliced with greater ease
4. To determine the direction of the grain of the roast

7-9. When you control sliced meat portions by weight rather than by the number of
slices, you can satisfy the patron’s preference for thick or thin meat slices.

1. True
2. False

7-10. What person sets the hours for the serving of meals?

1. Executive officer
2. Food service officer
3. Officer of the day or duty officer
4. Commanding officer

7-11. As a general rule, you should set up the serving line what specific number of
minutes before the regular meal?

1. 10
2. 15
3. 30
4. 45

7-12. Salt and pepper shakers should be emptied, prewashed, and put through the
dishwashing machine at what frequency?

1. Daily
2. Weekly
3. Twice weekly

288
4. Twice monthly

7-13. In a messing facility, what is the recommended location to place silverware?

1. At the beginning of the main serving line

2. At the end of the main serving line
3. After the dessert bar
4. Before the salad bar

7-14. You should conduct an inventory of all dinnerware at what frequency to make
sure there is enough to last an entire meal?

1. Daily
2. Weekly
3. Twice weekly
4. Twice monthly

7-15. What term is used to describe the dishes, silver, glasses, and napkin that are
placed in front of each person?

1. Space
2. Placing
3. Spread
4. Cover

7-16. You should place the silverware what number of inches from the edge of the
table?

1. 1
2. 2
3. 3
4. 4

7-17. When used, the bread and butter plate should be placed in what location on
the table?

1. To the left of the dinner plate, above the points of the forks
2. To the right of the dinner the plate, above tips of the knives
3. To the upper right of the outer spoon
4. To the left of the forks or on the dinner plate

7-18. At what time should you have water available during a wardroom meal?

1. During formal meals when wines are being served

2. During informal meals when another beverage is being served
3. Only when coffee is not being served

289
4. Water should always be available

7-19. When officers of more than one staff corps have the same running mate, which
of the following corps takes precedence over the others?

1. Supply corps
2. Chaplain Corps
3. Medical Corps
4. Civil Engineering Corps

7-20. During an informal meal, what procedure should you use to refill a diner’s
glass?

1. Let the diner hold the glass up for you

2. Have the diner tilt the glass toward you
3. Pick up the diner’s glass and pour
4. Pour the beverage while the glass remains in place on the table

290
 CHAPTER 10

FOODSERVICE ADMINISTRATION
As a Culinary Specialist (CS) first class or chief, you are at the mid management level in
your career. In this position of authority, you will have direct working relationships with
the supply officer, food service officer (FSO), other supervisors, and subordinates. Your
success will be largely determined by your ability to develop strong working
relationships with these people. As you should support the workers in your group, so
should you turn to your supply officer, FSO, and other supervisors in your division for
their support in making your job more effective. You will earn the support of these
personnel through cooperation and willingness to assist others, through earnest efforts to
do your job well, and through constant efforts to improve yourself, your organization, and
the ship or station to which you are attached.

PROCUREMENT OF FOOD ITEMS

Although the supply officer or FSO is responsible for procuring of food items, in some
instances you must perform these duties. In either case, your experience, your
knowledge, and your planned menus will be extremely valuable when preparing
requisitions.

A thorough knowledge of the mechanics of procurement is essential. Each phase will

be discussed and explained in this chapter. However, before any thought is given to the
actual preparation of requisitions and purchase orders, you should determine your needs.
This cannot be done on the spur of the moment. You should know what stocks are on
hand, how much can be loaded in each storage space, and when to order.

Whatever you procure must be receipted for, inspected, and stored. Prior
planning and preparation will eliminate confusion, disorganized storage spaces, and the
resultant survey of spoiled food items. This portion of the chapter is intended to help you
find the answers to such questions as the following:

• What items should I consider to develop a balanced load?

• How do I establish the stockage objective and determine the provision
requirements for my ship or station?
• What catalog should I use when purchasing or requisitioning food items?
• When requisitioning from other Navy activities, what paper work do I submit?
• What should I do with unsatisfactory food items?
• What are my duties in connection with underway replenishment?
• Where in the freeze box should pork, veal, lamb, poultry, and fish be stored?

The fleet cannot stay at sea without food. You are responsible for ensuring maximum
endurance capability of your ship.

291
 During the past few years, several crises have arisen that required ships to report to
their stations on extremely short notice. There may be other crucial periods in the future
that will require similar action.

BALANCED LOAD

You should aid the FSO in developing a balanced load. Use the menu as a daily tool
for maintaining a balanced load. A well-developed cycle menu, in conjunction with a
frequency chart of major menu items, will aid in determining balanced load requirements.
When deployed, you will want to keep a close check on inventories to make the best use
of your remaining stocks.

You should have the following information when you are developing a balanced load:

• The fleet commander’s operation plan that established endurance by ship type for
each category of stores.
• The amount of cubical storage space available for normal operating conditions
and the amount of deck storage space available in the event of emergency operations.
• Your ship’s operating schedule

Remember, you cannot establish your food item endurance loads on the basis of
formulas and graphs alone. You should apply common sense and good judgment to the
problem.

If you have usage data that were generated during extended unreplenished operations,
you have ideal information to use in planning your endurance load. However, if the only
available data represent usage during replenishment operations or when normal liberty
was granted, the data would not reflect requirements for true endurance conditions. Such
data can, however, be a help in deciding what foods to include in your endurance load
list. When local usage data are applicable, and usage data from a ship of the same class
are not available for use in planning load lists, refer to the subsistence endurance base
(SEB). This guide is also a helpful tool for CSs who have had limited experience in
planning load lists. The Navy Food Service, NAVSUP P-476 (a quarterly foodservice
publication), also includes articles on endurance loading.
STOCKAGE OBJECTIVES

A monthly supply demand review will be made of all Subsistence Ledgers (NAVSUP
Form 335) in order to maintain the current in-stock position for all items with a recurring
demand, and keep inventories within prescribed limitations. For semi-perishable foods,
the maximum in-stock position is the high limit that is established by the fleet or type
commander. The maximum in-stock position of perishable foods is the quantity
consumed times the storage life of that item. Non-CARGO (Consolidated Afloat
Requisitioning Guide Overseas) foods should be stocked to last for the duration of the
deployment period (i.e., spices). When the monthly review indicates that food items
exceed their high limit, menu changes will be initiated in time to provide for their
consumption prior to deterioration.

292
 A low limit and a high limit will be established for each item of stock at quarterly.
Low limits and high limits should be adjusted as necessary for the following reasons:

• Increase or decrease in crew size

• Anticipated operations
• Change in crew preference
• Changes in the menu
• Any other factors affecting the consumption of the items being ordered
Low Limit

The low limit is the stock position that signals the need to begin replenishment action.
The number of days endurance required for the low limit will be established by the fleet
or type commander. There will be no low limit for perishable chill foods except when
that item has a storage life greater than the high limit number of days endurance
established by the fleet or type commander.

To compute the low limit for food items, use the following formula:

Total quantity consumed during the previous three one-month accounting periods (less
surveys and transfers) divided by (÷) days in the previous three one-month accounting
periods (usually 90 days) times (x) number of days endurance for the low limit (as
established by the fleet or type commander) equals (=) low limit.

NOTE: FSM will automatically compute and adjust low limits based on past usage.
In accordance with Appendix A the FSM Users Manual must be printed for details.

The high limit is the maximum quantity of food to be maintained on hand to sustain
current operations. The number of days endurance required for the high limit will be
established by the fleet or type commander. The high limit for perishable chill foods will
not exceed the storage life of that item times.

To compute the high limit for subsistence items, use the following formula:

Total quantity consumed during the previous three one-month accounting periods (less
surveys and transfers) divided by (÷) days in the previous three one-month accounting
periods (usually 90 days) times (x) number of days endurance for the high limit (as
established by the fleet or type commander)equals (=)high limit.

To compute the ordering and shipping time quantity, use the following formula:

293
 Total quantity consumed during the previous three one-month accounting periods (less
surveys and transfers) divided by (÷) days in the previous three (1) month accounting
periods (usually 90 days) times (x) the applicable ordering and shipping time equals (=)
ordering and shipping time quantity
The quantity to order of any item will be determined during the monthly supply
demand review. The following formula will be used:

The high limit for the item minus (-) the on hand balance recorded on the NAVSUP
Form 335 minus (-) quantity on order plus (+) quantity required to cover the order and
shipping time equals (=) the quantity to be ordered

NOTE: Round the quantity to be ordered to whole case lots.

Ships’ underway subsistence replenishments are normally based on the individual

ship’s usage data. This data cannot be readily used for subsistence endurance levels
where resupply occurs less frequently.
DETERMINING PROVISIONS REQUIREMENTS

You are always required to have enough food items on board to provide for a specific
period. This means enough food to provide a balanced diet. Your fleet commander
specifies this period, in days, and this period varies among fleets and among type
commanders. You are responsible for carrying out the directives you receive on
maintaining specific quantities of food items.
Requirements

Fast frigates are expected to carry a 45-day stock. You should be ready to get
underway whenever required and not worry about replenishing for at least 45 days. You
should have enough of the right kinds of foods aboard to provide a balanced diet during
deployment. Normally, fleet commanders specify that ships should replenish every 2
weeks while they are in the United States. The fleet commander also may specify that
all ships top off storerooms (fill the storerooms to capacity). This will enable ships to
stay at sea for a maximum period without replenishment.

These requirements may not be valid on your ship. When you report on board a ship
for duty, check the fleet commander’s instructions for the actual requirements in your
area.

Five steps should be considered when you are determining your requirements. These
steps are proper for either general or private messes.

• Step one of your loading out is determining your present stock level; this can
be done by checking your Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP Form 335, for
quantities on hand.
• In step two you determine the capacity of the total storage area and then divide
that figure into dry, chill, and freeze storage areas.

294
 • Step three should be the planning of your menus.

When you are planning menus for extended, unreplenished periods, the use of
specialty items such as pizza crusts, potato chips, or ice-cream cups should be ordered in
quantities that will not tax your storage spaces. The use of cycle menus is extremely
important in preparing for deployment. Cycle menus are always an excellent
management tool, but especially valuable when you are preparing for an extended
deployment.

For more information on cycle menus, refer to the menu planning section of the
Foodservice Operations Manual, NAVSUP P-486. If you have cycle menus already
prepared, review them closely. Custom foods should be used to their fullest extent when
you are planning for deployment. Fresh produce has a higher acceptability; therefore,
you should stock what you can, considering the spoilage factor and the storage capacity.

When you are considering requirements for a deployment, think storage capacity and
custom finds. The term custom food is used to describe the various types of laborsaving
and space saving processed foods that are authorized for Navy messes. Custom foods are
economical space savers and, if properly used, will reduce the operating cost of the mess.

• In step four you should determine the quantities of food items that are
necessary for a specific period, such as the time between replenishment and
your next scheduled replenishment.

The word scheduled is emphasized because you should allow for unforeseen
circumstances when your scheduled replenishment date cannot be met. For example,
inclement weather could cause the postponement of replenishment, supply ships may not
be available, or the supply center maybe out of an item or items.

• In step five you should be able to identify the available supply source(s).

You may be required to help the supply officer, FSO, or mess caterer requisition and
procure food items; in some instances, you must perform these duties on independent
duty. In either case, your experience, your knowledge, and your planned menus will be
extremely valuable to you when you are preparing requisitions.
REQUISITIONING PROCEDURES

The Subsistence Prime Vendor (SPV) program is a result of the Department of Defense
(DOD) Food Inventory demonstration project. The demonstration proved the viability of
using commercial vendors to provide subsistence requirements within Continental United
States (CONUS). Under congressional mandate, the DOD Joint Task Group assigned to
implement this project approved a deployment plan for all DOD activities. Defense
Supply Center Philadelphia (DSCP) Prime Vendor administers the indefinite quantity
contracts that provide support to the SPV program. Contracts are awarded for a base year
with multiple year options. Guaranteed minimum and maximum ceilings provide the
basis for the contract. Deviations are allowable in the event of emergencies and

295
mobilization. SPV uses a single, full-line commercial food distributor that delivers
subsistence products directly to the dining facility. Orders are submitted via electronic
commerce methods. SPV contracts are tailored to meet the needs of the fleet by
providing high quality products while reducing the distribution and warehousing costs of
the Department of Defense at all levels.

The Prime Vendor will stock items in sufficient quantities to fill all ordering
requirements. Items ordered will be delivered within the required timeframe after
transmitting the order. Longer order lead time will be accommodated by the SPV for
ships requesting delivery in three or more days from date of order. This will require
coordination between the ship and the Fleet Industrial Supply Center (FISC).

The Defense Subsistence Office (DSO) (and occasionally the SPV) will still supply
fresh fruits and vegetables. Bread and dairy items will still be ordered from a local
contracted vendor (not the SPV) via (FISC).

The following are required in order to place a Prime Vendor delivery for FSM:

• Subsistence Total Order Receipt and Electronic System (STORES).

• Fleet Industrial Supply Center (FISC).
• Streamline Automated Logistics Transmission System (SALTS).
• Printer (laser printer is highly recommended).
• 3-1/2 inch Diskettes.

Storage Data

If your GM requirements for each food item, including perishables, were based on
subsisting 1,000 personnel for 30 days, you should adjust the cube and gross weight data
to reflect local delivery schedules for various foods before listing the data to estimate
storage requirements. For example, the chill storage requirement for milk for 1,000
personnel for 30 days is 1,063 cubic feet; however, this is based on milk being delivered
daily except on Sunday. For example, the storage requirement for a 20-day supply of
milk is 20/30ths of 1,063, or 709 cubic feet. Adjust storage data when requisitioning
frozen meats instead of chilled sausage meats and other cured meats. Chilled storage is
recommended for fresh potatoes and onions. If you have separate specific storage areas
for these items, adjust the chill storage requirements accordingly. Storage requirements
reflect only the space required for the foods in their packaging. You should estimate the
additional space required for air circulation, aisles, shelves, and battens. The many
variations in storage space configuration make a standard modification impractical.
FLEET AND INDUSTRIAL SUPPLY CENTER (FISC). The FISC will serve as the
afloat unit point of contact for all subsistence requirements under the SPV program.
Afloat units will not contact their local prime vendor directly. All subsistence issues
should be resolved by the FISC point of contact (refer to the TYCOM/FISC operating
guide for details). The FISC tracks all subsistence requirements from receipt of order to
time of delivery. The FISC also coordinates with DSCP to revise the SPV catalog in

296
response to fleet input. A monthly listing of non-catalog procurements is provided to
DSCP with copy to TYCOM for possible inclusion to catalog.
Procurement Restrictions

PROCUREMENT RESTRICTIONS. Salespersons or other representatives of food

suppliers or companies will not be encouraged to visit the general messes to sell or
promote their products. These procurement restrictions will be strictly adhered to. For
details on submission of food items for evaluation, salespersons should be instructed to
write directly to NAVSUP or contact the closest NFMT for asssistance:

Commander
Naval Supply Systems Command
Attn: Food Service Division (NAVSUP 51)
5450 Carlisle Pike
P.O. Box 2050
Mechanicsburg, PA 17055-0791

Any of the food items listed in the Prime Vendor Catalog as authorized for Navy use
may be requisitioned for ultimate sale to private messes.

Determining Space Availability

Now that you know how to estimate quantities, you should learn to estimate storage
space. You do not want to order more than can be stored. The capacity of a
compartment is found by multiplying the length by the width by the height; for example,
20 x 15 x 10= 3,000 cubic feet.

Unfortunately, all storage spaces are not this easy to figure. Many times there are
coils, pipes, lights, and required passageways or aisles that prevent you from using all the
space. You cannot pack or store food items up to the overhead or from bulkhead to
bulkhead because room for ventilation and access to the food items must be provided.

For example, a storage space 22 feet 6 inches long, 14 feet 3 inches wide, and 9 feet 9
inches high. There are coils extending out 6 inches from the bulkhead along both the
long sides of the space. Also, a 30-inch passageway should be provided down the center
of the space. Notice the allowances that will have to be made for the coils and
passageway. In addition, the lights extend down 7 inches from the overhead, and
gratings 8 inches high were placed on deck.

297
 To find the cubical capacity of this storage space, write down the actual dimensions of
the space. Then subtract the dimensions of the allowances you will need to make, like
this.

22’6” Total length 14’3” Total width 9’9” Total height

less -2’6” passage -7” light
-1’ coils -8” grating
22’6” usable length 10’9” usable width 8’6” usable height

Using the new dimensions, proceed as before.

22 1/2 x 10 3/4 x 8 1/2 = 2,055 15/16 cubic feet.

Special Space Problems

Some food items, such as frozen meats, should be kept in a special type of storage.
The capacity of these spaces limits the amounts you may order. When planning for an
extended cruise, you may find that freeze space on your ship is not adequate to store the
total meat requirements. You will want to load canned meats to supplement your frozen
meat supply. The Table of Substitution Factors for Custom Foods lists the factors to use
when converting pounds of frozen meat items to canned meat counterparts. This table can
be found in the NAVSUP P-486, appendix E.
REQUISITIONING FOOD ITEMS

REQUISITION AND PURCHASE ORDER DOCUMENTS USED FOR

ACTIVITIES WHEN NOT ORDERING FROM SUBSISTENCE PRIME VENDOR

GENERAL. The form used for ordering food items depends on the nature of the
items and the requirements of the issuing activity.

FORMS. The following forms may be used to order one or more line items per
purchase order/requisition document:

a. Order for Supplies or Services/Request for Quotation (DD Form 1155)

b. Requisition and Invoice/Shipping Document (DD Form 1149)

FILES. Files are required for maintaining a copy of each procurement document
originated. An “Outstanding Requisition File” will be maintained for DD Form 1149.
An “Outstanding Purchase Order File” will be maintained for DD Form 1155 purchase
orders. These forms will be maintained in document number sequence within their
individual file.

REQUISITION LOG.– Maintaining the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336, is

optional for all ashore and afloat activities. The requisition log provides requisition
documentation control and information on outstanding requisition documents and

298
receipts. It also provides a breakdown of receipts with and without charge. Outstanding
requisitions that are brought forward to the current month’s requisition log should carry
the same requisition document numbers assigned on the previous month’s log.

Instead of maintaining the Requisition Log, NAVSUP Form 1336, all receipts without
charge may be annotated with W/O in the left-hand margin on the NAVSUP Form 367.
At the end of each month, the receipts with charge file will be used as the source file for
determining the dollar value of the Receipts With Charge block for the monthly
NAVSUP Form 1359. This value also can be confirmed using the NAVSUP Form 367
by totaling all receipts not annotated W/O.
PURCHASING

When it is not possible to procure food items from normal sources of supply, they
maybe purchased under existing shore contracts or in the open market. In general,
contract bulletins and local regulations should furnish you with the necessary information
concerning commercial sources of supply.

Contract bulletins issued by Navy purchasing activities are the official source to
determine that the contract under which an order is to be placed (1) is in existence and
covers the specific product required and (2) provides for delivery at the particular port or
area when delivery is requested.

Do not rely upon pamphlets or lists furnished by suppliers since they may contain
errors. If you place orders based upon information contained in these pamphlets without
confirmation against contract bulletins, they may result in the unauthorized placement of
orders or disallowance of payment by the Navy Regional Finance Center (NRFC) or
Fleet Accounting and Disbursing Center (FAADC).
General Regulations

The following rules apply to all purchases of food items:

1. REGULAR SOURCES. Authorized food items will be obtained from the nearest
Prime Vendor contractor or other Naval Support Activity, combat logistic force ships or
other afloat activities. These sources of supply are expected to stock a complete range
and level of food items to support operations. Problems experienced in obtaining
adequate support for food items, that is, frequent substitutions or not in stock (NIS)
position, will be reported to NAVSUP 51 via Type Commanders for appropriate
resolution. When a subsistence item has been identified as required in support of a menu
and not available on the PV Catalog, the FSO should provide the item nomenclature, unit
of issue, and anticipated monthly demand to their Type Command (TYCOM) or Navy
Food Management Team (NFMT). The TYCOM or NFMT will identify the regional
demand for the subsistence item, which generally should exceed 10 cases/month, and
request Defense Supply Center, Philadelphia (DSCP) incorporate the item into the PV
Catalog. DSCP will provide a local stock number upon inclusion of the subsistence item
into the PV Catalog. It is anticipated this process should not exceed 14 days for CONUS

299
requests, although OCONUS requests may take longer. The SPV should be utilized
when procuring subsistence items. When an item is not available on the PV Catalog,
every effort should be made to incorporate it into the PV Catalog. For those rare
items/occasions when the PV Catalog cannot be utilized, ensure proper procedures are
followed to procure subsistence items from sources outside the SPV.

2. OTHER SOURCES. When authorized food items cannot be obtained through

regularly established supply channels listed, subsistence support may be required from
the sources specified below. Usually food items will be requisitioned from these sources
for an interim period only and in the absence of regular supply sources.

a. Transfers From Other Military Services and United States Government

Departments. Food items may be procured by transfers from other military services or
other United States government departments. Material will be taken up as a receipt with
charge.

b. Sales From Ship’s Stores. Only individual size serving items, that is, food items
packaged in small containers providing one individual serving and authorized for special
meals, may be procured from the ship’s stores to the general messes for use in preparing
special meals. (These transactions must be recorded as receipts with charge.)

c. Local Purchase. Local purchases should be made only through the local support
activity. NAVSUP 51 and Type Commanders will be notified of problems in obtaining
support from regular supply sources. Subject to such limitations as may be prescribed by
the senior officer present, individual supply officers are authorized to obtain required
supplies or services by purchase in the open market when all the following conditions
exist:
(1) There is an immediate and urgent requirement for authorized supplies or
services;
(2) The supplies or services are not available at the local supply activity; and,
(3) Time is a factor and scheduled operations will not permit procurement
through shore based purchasing activities.

All food products will be purchased only from approved sources of supply. The list
of approved sources can be obtained from Veterinary Services, NAVSUP 51.

d. Foreign Purchases (other than Prime Vendor). Meat, fish, poultry, dairy (to
include eggs), and products of foreign origin will be purchased only in emergencies or
when foreign sources are the regular supply sources. Quantities procured are to be
strictly limited to immediate requirements necessary to relieve the emergency. Purchases
of other food items of foreign origin should also be strictly limited. Importing foreign
grown fruits, vegetables, meat, and dairy (to include eggs), is prohibited. Therefore,
when general messes afloat are purchasing these items, only such quantities are to be
taken on board which will be completely consumed before arrival to ports in the United
States, including Alaska and Hawaii. If any excessive quantities remain onboard they
must be disposed of; further guidance is found in Chapter 6 of NAVSUP P 486. The

300
senior medical department representative will be informed when foreign purchase is
considered. When an emergency purchase of foreign meats must be made from a country
infected with rinder-pest, foot and mouth disease, or Newcastle disease, the commanding
officer will notify the U.S. Department of Agriculture (Plant Protection and Quarantine
Programs) Inspector in charge at the port upon arrival in the United States so that safe
guards may be taken. The commanding officer will strictly enforce the instructions of the
agriculture inspector. All countries of the world except Australia, New Zealand,
Republic of Ireland, Northern Ireland, Canada, and the United States are infected with
one or more of the ruminant and swine diseases listed. Poultry carcass meat, which is
free of Newcastle disease, is allowed entry only from Canada.
Underway Replenishment

Underway replenishment is a major task. However, this task may be simplified

somewhat by careful planning and supervision on your part. The Underway
Replenishment Bill is a part of your ship’s Standard Organization and Regulations
Manual. Compare this bill with others that you have used. If the bill can be improved,
discuss your recommended changes with your immediate supervisor.

If your ship is attached to an operating force, it will receive most of its support from
mobile logistics support groups (AFs).

Listed next are some major points that you should consider when planning underway
replenishment:

1. Submit your requisition to the AF within the item limits listed in replenishment
guides. This gives the AF ample time to process the requisition.

2. Be sure you are ready for replenishment when the time comes by accomplishing
the following:

a. Know the replenishment stations.

b. Determine the number of cases that will come aboard, how many
people will be required as checkers, and how many people will be
needed in the working party.

c. Be sure all storerooms are ready to receive the stores. This may
require stock rotation and storeroom cleanup by the bulk storeroom
personnel.

d. Plan the traffic routes for the working party to take. (Be sure to
indicate a separate return from the storerooms to avoid congestion
and confusion.)

3. Make sure the working party and the checkers are on station before replenishment
begins.

301
 4. Be sure the checkers have a system for checking all actual quantities of food items
that come aboard.

5. Be sure the working party stays on the job until all food items are received aboard
and stored below in the proper storerooms.

6. Be sure the checkers know where all the items are to be sent for storage. The
checkers usually should be CSs.

7. Take necessary precautions to see that items, such as fresh fruits, are not pilfered
during the storing operation.

Procurement for Private Messes

Any food items listed in the PVC, as authorized for GM use, maybe requisitioned and
held for ultimate sale to private messes. Food items not listed in the PVC may be
procured for immediate sale by the supply officer, through normal supply channels, to
flag and cabin messes only upon receipt of a written request. Such items may be held in
stock and issued to flag and cabin messes as required during extended deployments.
Food items not authorized for GM use and specifically requisitioned for sale only to
private messes may not be returned by the private mess for credit. Requisitions for food
items not authorized for GM use are annotated “For sale to private messes.”

FOODSERVICE COST CONTROL

GMs provide high-quality meals to authorized personnel. The FSO maintains

financial accountability and control of the GM within the allowed monetary budget.
Providing high-quality meals within a prescribed monetary allowance requires
managerial skills and constant attention from the FSO and the foodservice division.

As a junior CS, you learned the basics of a very challenging rating. As you advanced,
your responsibility significantly increased and you now direct more and more of your
attention to management. This incidentally is your rating’s middle name.

The key to effective management is control. As an CS third or second class petty

officer, you learned the importance of portion control; also how it related to effective
management on a smaller scale. We will now discuss the control procedures used to
manage an effective operation and how to use the available resources and money to the
Navy’s best advantage.

Navy GMs afloat and ashore operate on a monetary ration allowance. The allowances
represent these dollars and cents called monetary rates. In 1933, the present Navy Ration
Law, 10 U.S. Code 6082, came into effect. This law (specified in actual quantity of food)
is a converted cash equivalency. You can compute this allowance by using the
quantitative food allowance prescribed by the DOD Food Cost Index. This is based on
food items authorized by the 1933 Navy Ration Law. The 1933 Navy Ration Law is

302
listed by weight (such as 44 ounces of fresh vegetables) and converted to a monetary
allowance.

As a senior CS, you should understand not only what a ration is but also the various
types of rations used in the Navy. Additionally, you should know which personnel are
entitled to rations-in-kind, what forms to use in determining ration credit, and how to
determine ration credit afloat and ashore. The NAVSUP P-486, defines this in detail.

One purpose of a cost control system in a mess is to provide you information on the
financial operation of the mess. Cost controls provide the proper detailed information to
give you the tools to overcome waste, lack of portion control, unwise menu planning,
and/or pilferage; thus, ensuring guidance or restraint over money, material, and
personnel.

COMPONENTS OF FOOD COST CONTROL

The following are five elements of cost control:

1. A prescribed operating limit or budget

2. A knowledge by management of the actions and procedures necessary to maintain

within the prescribed operating limits of the mess

3. Prompt and accurate information on the daily progress toward maintaining within
operating limits

4. The ability of management to rate the information received

5. The ability of management to follow up and take remedial action as necessary

The financial requirements of each activity are subject to circumstances unique to the
individual installation concerned.
COMPUTING DAILY FOOD COST

All GMs post total ration credits daily to the NAVSUP Form 338 whether ashore,
afloat in port, or afloat at sea.

Ashore activities obtain ration credit information on meals sold and meals fed–rations-
in-kind from the Subtotal line of the Recapitulation of Meal Record, NAVSUP Form
1292.

Afloat activities enter the actual number of meals sold whether in port or at sea. These
figures are obtained either from the Cash Meal Payment Book DD Form 1544, or the Sale
of General Mess Meals, NAVSUP Form 1046. Meals fed rations-in-kind while at sea
will be the same as the number of rations allowed daily. The actual head count numbers
for each applicable meal will be used to reflect the number of meals fed rations-in-kind.

303
.
DETERMINING OPERATING LIMITS

We now know that the Enlisted Dining Facility Control Record, NAVSUP Form 338,
provides a daily cumulative record of the financial condition of the GM. The leading CS
uses the data available on the NAVSUP Form 338 for menu planning and for menu
revision and adjustment to accomplish the following goals:

• Determining the financial status of the GM before preparing a menu, especially

when planning to use high-cost menu items.
• Comparing the daily monetary allowance with the daily food cost as a check of
the actual cost each day with the authorized cost for the same day.
• Relating the actual cost of one ration to the daily menus to determine the
relatively high- and low-cost menus and to use that information in planning future
menus and to adjust menus that have resulted in excessively high costs.

The FSO will check the NAVSUP Form 338 daily to make sure the GM is operating
within the authorized allowance. This daily check also makes sure the NAVSUP Form
338 is being posted daily.

Whenever an overissue occurs, immediate action should be taken to determine the

cause and eliminate the overissue by a corresponding underissue.

SPECIAL MEAL FEEDING

When specific conditions are met, there is a need for issuing special meals. These
meals are issued for consumption aboard aircraft, small craft, or at a duty station away
from the GM. The following are the different types of special meals along with a brief
description of the conditions that should be met when they are issued:

• Flight meals. Enlisted members of the armed services who are entitled to a meal
without charge in a GM when permitted or required to fly in Navy or Marine Corps
aircraft are issued flight meals without charge. Enlisted personnel who are not
entitled to meals without charge, yet have TAD or travel orders permitting or
requiring them to fly in Navy or Marine Corps aircraft, are charged for flight meals at
the current prescribed rate.
• Boat meals. Boat meals are issued at no charge to enlisted members of the armed
services who are entitled to rations-in-kind and are unable to return to the GM for a
meal for reasons such as assignment as beach guards or boat crew members. Navy
enlisted personnel receiving COMRATS/BAS and officer personnel must pay cash
for each boat meal received.
• Box lunches are issued to personnel entitled to rations-in-kind when assigned to
duty that prevents them from returning to the GM for a regular meal. When box
lunches are used, they are accounted for as regular GM meals, or as special meals,
whichever method is most administratively helpful to the GM.
• In-transit meals are for enlisted personnel of the military services that are in a
group travel status, including air travel, and are not receiving per diem or

304
 COMRATS/BAS. They are entitled to transit meals at no charge when they cannot
be fed in the GM.

RESPONSIBILITIES

Discussed next are the responsibilities of both the FSO and the requesting officer in
processing requests for and issuing special meals.
Food Service Officer

The FSO is responsible for the following:

• Requisitioning authorized food items required for special meals

• Procuring nonfood items authorized for the preparation of special meals
• Providing the facilities and supervising the preparation of special meals
• Maintaining files of the receipt for flight meals to substantiate billings to foreign
governments

ENTITLEMENT CERTIFICATION.– A responsible officer or chief petty officer

certifies on the NAVSUP Form 340 the eligibility of the United States enlisted crew
members and passengers not receiving per diem or COMRATS/BAS to receive special
meals without charge. The officer or chief petty officer lists the name of each individual,
meal pass number, and the abbreviated name of the activity to which the person is
assigned.

ISSUE PROCEDURES.– The FSO is authorized to issue special meals only when
paid for in cash, or when proper certification is acquired. Proper certification shows that
the person who will consume the meal is entitled to a special meal at no charge. The
FSO makes sure only the number of special meals is prepared as requested on the signed
copy of the NAVSUP Form 340 that is completed by the requesting officer.

At the time of pickup, the FSO or his or her designated representative verifies the
completed original NAVSUP Form 340 with the cash collected. All meals issued without
charge arc justified with a signed certification of entitlement to special meals or a receipt
of special meals.

The FSO or his or her designated representative obtains a receipt signature from the
requesting officer or the requesting officer’s designated representative. This receipt
signature goes on the NAVSUP Form 340 when the special meals arc picked up.

The FSO or his or her designated representative acknowledges receipt of cash on the
working copy of the NAVSUP Form 340 and returns the receipted copy with the special
meals to the requesting officer. The FSO then retains the original NAVSUP Forms 340
with the signed certification to prepare the monthly Special Meals Report, NAVSUP
Form 1340, with the signed certificate for posting to General Mess Summary Document
(NAVSUP Form 1359) monthly.

305
Requesting Officer

The requesting officer is responsible for the following:

• Determining eligibility for special meals

• Preparing the NAVSUP Form 340 for request and receipt of special meals
• Collecting charges for special meals sold for cash
• Endorsing orders for special meals made available to enlisted personnel receiving
per diem
• Obtaining signatures on the reverse side of the NAVSUP Form 340 for special
meals furnished to enlisted members of foreign governments

The requesting officer (usually the air terminal officer, squadron duty officer, or
officer exercising operational control of the flight, small craft, or group travel operation)
prepares, in triplicate, the Special Meal Request/Receipt, NAVSUP Form 340. One
signed copy of the NAVSUP Form 340 is then forwarded to the FSO at least 3 hours
before the time special meals are picked up from the foodservice office.

The requesting officer receives payment from personnel receiving special meals in one
of the following manners:

• Cash in the amounts prescribed by Naval Supply Systems Command instructions.

• Certification by an officer or chief petty officer that personnel are entitled to
meals without charge. A list of names, meal passes, or travel order numbers, and the
activities to which assigned are provided to support the certification.
• Signed receipt for flight meals (on reverse of NAVSUP Form 340) from foreign
personnel.
• Endorsement of travel orders to show receipt.

The requesting officer then makes sure the original NAVSUP Form 340 is completed,
showing the breakdown of special meals requested and the signatures of any foreign
personnel on the reverse, to provide to the FSO or his or her designated representative at
the time of pickup of the special meals.
ACCOUNTING PROCEDURES

When 10 or less special meals are issued during the monthly accounting period, they
are accounted for the same as regular GM meals. The accounting procedures discussed
next are used only when more than 10 special meals are issued during the monthly
accounting period.

The FSO uses either a NAVSUP Form 1282 to record the quantity and value of food
items required in preparing the special meals.
The issue document is priced and extended using fixed prices. This is done at the time
of issue. The quantity issued is posted as an expenditure in the Other column of the
Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP Form 335. The issue document should be retained by the
FSO pending preparation of the Monthly Special Meals Report, NAVSUP Form 1340.

306
General

When a flight or operation is canceled or other valid circumstances prevent the use of
special meals requested and prepared, they can be returned to the FSO. However, special
meals are not returned for credit if more than 3 hours have elapsed since they were
issued.

Return of cash for unused special meals, already paid for in cash, is authorized.

Refunds are made by the FSO or his or her representative only upon receipt of a
NAVSUP Form 340 prepared by the officer signing the original request for meals. The
request should have a notation “Returned for credit” clearly marked on the original. This
is used by the FSO to post credit entries to cash accounts.

Monthly Special Meals Report, NAVSUP Form 1340

A NAVSUP Form 1340, prepared in duplicate, is used to report the number of special
meals issued during the month and the cost of food items used in preparing the special
meals. This should be the value of all documents prepared for issue of food items used in
the preparation of special meals during the month. This value is entered in the Cost of
Food Used column. The cost of supplemental food items may be prorated among the
meals in which they are served.

The NAVSUP Form 1340 should be completed showing the total meals issued upon
certification of entitlement to each government agency and to any foreign enlisted
personnel at government expense. This information is taken from the NAVSUP Forms
340, processed during the period covered by the NAVSUP Form 1340. The foreign
government and invitational travel order numbers of foreign enlisted personnel under the
Military Assistance Program should be shown for foreign issues and should be taken
from the Receipt for Flight Meals on the reverse side of NAVSUP Forms 340 for the
period being reported.

The type of aircraft or small craft and its serial or hull number should be shown in the
Comment block when applicable. The FSO should sign the NAVSUP Form 1340,
certifying that the special meals indicated were issued.

The total value of food items used in preparation of special meals during each
accounting period should be entered on the Balance Sheet section of the General Mess
Summary Document (NAVSUP Form 1359).

If a completed NAVSUP Form 1340 reveals that the cost of food used for any type of
special meal exceeds the monetary allowances for that meal, a letter of explanation
should accompany the report explaining why the allowances were exceeded and actions
taken to prevent reoccurrence.

307
 Cash received for the sale of special meals should be safeguarded and deposited with
the disbursing officer. A receipt should be obtained in a Cash Receipt Book NAVSUP
Form 470.

In addition to the recapitulation on NAVSUP Form 1340, cash collected, deposited

and due from credit sales is reported on the monthly Ration and Sale Report, NAVSUP
Form 1359.

308
 QUESTIONS:
“Foodservice Administration” Assignment 8

8-1. What person is ultimately responsible for procuring food items?

1. Jack-of-the-dust
2. Records keeper
3. Leading CS
4. Supply officer

8–2. Before any thought is actual given to requisitions and purchase orders, you
must first have which of the following information available to you?

1. What stocks are on hand

2. How much can be loaded in each space
3. When to order
4. Each of the above

8–3. You should aid what individual in developing a balanced endurance load?

1. Commanding officer
2. Food service officer
3. Leading CS
4. Storeroom custodian

8-4. What source will give you the most ideal information to use in planning your
endurance load?

1. Usage data generated during extended unreplenished operations

2. Data that represents usage during replenishment operations
3. Usage data from a ship of the same class
4. The subsistence endurance base (SEB)

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 8-5 THROUGH 8-8, SELECT THE

REQUISITIONING TERM DEFINED BY THE STATEMENT USED AS THE
QUESTION.

8-5. The quantity of material needed to sustain operations between replenishment.

1. Low limit
2. Operating level
3. Safety level
4. Stockage objective

309
8–6. The quantity of material normally required to be on hand to sustain operations
for a stated period without augmentation.

1. Stockage objective
2. Average endurance level
3. High limit
4. Requisitioning objective

8-7. The quantity of material needed for continuous operations in the event
normal replenishment is interrupted or to meet unpredictable fluctuations in
demand.

1. Safety level
2. Operating level
3. Stockage objective
4. Reorder point

8-8. Represents the quantity of material that will be consumed during the interval
between submission of requisition and receipt of material.

1. Reorder point
2. Average endurance level
3. Stockage objective
4. Order and shipping time

8-9. You should establish a low limit and a high limit only for major items of stock
at the beginning of each accounting period.

1. True
2. False

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 8-10 THROUGH 8-13, USE A 90-DAY

ACCOUNTING PERIOD IN THE CALCULATIONS.

8-10. If the total quantity of coffee consumed during the previous accounting period
was 3,750 pounds, you surveyed 80 pounds, transferred 100 pounds, and the fleet or
type commander established a 45-day subsistence endurance base (SEB), what is
your low limit?

1. 1,783
2. 1,785
3. 1,874
4. 1,875

310
8-11. If the total quantity of oven roast consumed during the previous accounting
period was 23,950 pounds, you surveyed 200 pounds, transferred 450 pounds, and
the fleet or type commander established a 50-day SEB, what is your low limit in
pounds?

1. 12,944
2. 12,954
3. 13,305
4. 13,306

8-12. If the total quantity of peanut butter consumed during the previous accounting
period was 4,632 jars, you surveyed 20 jars, transferred 45 jars, and the fleet or type
commander established a 75-day SEB, what is your high limit in jars?

1. 3,780
2. 3,781
3. 3,804
4. 3,806

8-13. If the total quantity of pork loin consumed during the previous accounting
period was 13,847 pounds, you surveyed 80 pounds, transferred 950 pounds, and the
fleet or type commander established a 75-day SEB, what is your high limit in
pounds?

1. 6,408
2. 6,409
3. 10,681
4. 10,685

8-14. Normally, fleet commanders specify that ships located within the United States
should replenish at what specific frequency?

1. Weekly
2. Every 2 weeks
3. Monthly
4. Every 2 months

8-15. The Consolidated Afloat Requisitioning Guide Overseas (CARGO), NAVSUP

P-4998, is issued annually through what office or organization?

1. Defense Logistics Agency

2. Defense Personnel Support Center
3. Fleet Material Support Office
4. Navy Food Service Systems Office

311
8-16. The subsistence requisitioning tables contained in the CARGO provide
alternative balanced loads that range to support a 30-day level of supply for what
maximum number of persons?

1. 1,000
2. 2,000
3. 3,000
4. 4,000

8-17. If the frozen storage requirement for ground beef for 157 personnel for 100
days is 1,850 cubic feet and you are directed to carry an additional 20-day supply,
what additional number of cubic feet of storage space will this require?

1. 307
2. 370
3. 377
4. 380

8-18. Requests for exceptions or deviations from food item usage restrictions must
be submitted to what ultimate authority?

1. DOD food planning board

2. NAVFSSO
3. NAVSUP
4. Type commander

IN ANSWERING QUESTIONS 8-19 THROUGH 8-23, COMPUTE THE USABLE

CAPACITY OF THE STORAGE SPACE USING THE DIMENSIONS GIVEN AS
THE QUESTION.

8-19. Total length of 28 feet 5 inches with no obstructions; total width of 16 feet 3
inches requiring allowances for a 3-foot 2-inch passage and 2-foot coils; and total
height of 11 feet 6 inches requiring allowances for 7–inch lights and 9-inch gratings.

1. 2,888 cubic feet

2. 3,023 cubic feet
3. 3,149 cubic feet
4. 3,202 cubic feet

8-20. Total length of 36 feet 8 inches with no obstructions; total width of 23 feet 6
inches requiring allowances for a 2-foot 3-inch passage and 2-foot coils; and total
height of 11 feet 3 inches requiring allowances for 8-inch lights and 5-inch gratings.

1. 6,473 cubic feet

2. 7,059 cubic feet

312
3. 7,179 cubic feet
4. 7,189 cubic feet

8-21. Total length of 19 feet 8 inches with no obstructions; total width of 13 feet 5
inches requiring allowances for a 5-foot 3-inch passage and 4–foot coils; and total
height of 9 feet 3 inches requiring allowances for 6–inch lights and 9-inch gratings.

1. 568 cubic feet

2. 586 cubic feet
3. 650 cubic feet
4. 656 cubic feet

8-22. An irregular space with a height of 15 feet, two widths as the irregularity (25
feet and 17 feet respectively), and a length of 21 feet has what number of usable
cubic feet?

1. 5,355
2. 6,615
3. 7,875
4. 9,875

8-23. An irregular space with a height of 17 feet, two widths as the irregularity (18
feet and 13 feet respectively), and a length of 18 feet has what number of usable
cubic feet?

1. 3,978
2. 4,743
3. 5,508
4. 7,160

8–24. All completed requisition or purchase order files should be maintained by

what person?

1. Food service officer

2. Leading CS
3. Records keeper
4. Supply officer

8–25. The quantitative food allowance prescribed by the DOD Food Cost Index is
based on food items authorized by what authority?

1. Navy Regulations
2. Navy Ration Law
3. U.S. Treasury
4. U.S. Department of Agriculture

313
8–26. You should find detailed information on determining ration credit using what
publication?

1. Cost Control Manual for Messes and Consolidated Package Stores Ashore
2. DOD Food Cost Index
3. Foodservice Operations
4. Food Service Management 486

8-27. The FSO or his or her designated representative obtains a receipt signature for
special meals using what form?

1. DD Form 1131
2. DD Form 1544
3. NAVSUP Form 340
4. NAVSUP Form 1340

8-28. The document used to issue the food items required in preparing special meals
is priced and extended based upon what pricing method?

1. Use of fixed prices

2. Use of last receipt prices
3. Use of item pricing
4. Use of sale of meal and surcharge rates outlined in NAVSUPINST 4061.9

314
 CHAPTER 11

FOODSERVICE MANAGEMENT

As a senior CS, you may be charged with the responsibility of managing a general
mess (GM). This could be one of your most challenging and rewarding assignments.
During the course of your career, you probably have gained a wealth of knowledge as
your responsibilities have increased. At this point, you should understand all phases of
foodservice operations for which you have been responsible.

This chapter discusses procedures that are used in combination with your acquired
experience and rate-related reference guides to enable you to efficiently manage a GM.

GMs are established to provide Navy personnel with wholesome, nutritious, well-
balanced meals through the proper preparation and service of food items. At this point,
you should know that you (the senior CS) are responsible for making sure the highest
standards of foodservice are upheld.

As the senior CS, you are responsible to the food service officer (FSO) for the
efficient management of the GM. You must plan menus, order all food items, schedule
deliveries of food items, and check and inspect receipts. You must supervise storage and
issue of food items and determine load capacity. You also must administer work
schedules for foodservice personnel, assign jobs to the rotational pool personnel, and
initiate corrective action to maintain the facilities and equipment. With aid from the
medical department, you must administer a training program for the foodservice division
in food sanitation. Instruction should be based on the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery’s
Manual of Naval Preventive Medicine, NAVMED P-5010, chapter 1, “Food Sanitation.”

FOODSERVICE ORGANIZATIONAL AND PLANNING POLICIES

Messes are operated according to the various laws, directives, regulations, and
instructions. Some laws apply to all services while others apply only to the Navy. Some
regulations and instructions are Navy wide and some are local. As an CS first class or
chief, you should be familiar with those that pertain to the operation of your particular
GM. It is your job to see that they are enforced.

The procedures contained in the Food Service Management, NAVSUP P-486,

establishes policies to administrate, operate, and manage Navy GMs afloat and ashore.
These procedures are the minimum that is essential to good foodservice management and
are mandatory unless specifically stated as optional. However, these procedures are not
limiting when conditions require additional controls. When necessary, heads of supply
departments, commanding officers (COs), or higher authority may supplement
procedures that do not conflict with the NAVSUP P-486.

315
MESSING FACILITY ORGANIZATION

To carry out the purpose of the foodservice division, GM organization requires the
efficient arrangement of personnel by functions. This requires dividing the activities and
assigning responsibilities and authority to specific individuals within the foodservice
division.

GM organization varies according to the mission, physical characteristics, and

complement of each ship or station. When prescribed by the type commander
(TYCOM), the supply department head prepares a supply department organization
manual. This manual contains a description of each component’s function within the
division. It also assigns areas of responsibility and authority, including tasks of key
personnel.

The supply officer prepares an organizational chart for the department. This chart
identifies the essential functions and a clearly defined channel of responsibility and
authority.

Records

The Food Service Management (FSM) system automates many of the routine
manual foodservice records-keeping functions. The system uses the same terminology,
forms, and procedures as found in the manual system. Since the system has been
designed with current regulations in mind, the software can be easily used by an
individual familiar with manual foodservice records. The NAVSUP P-486, provides a
mandatory checklist and a NAVSUP recommended system access list, which automated
activities are encouraged to use. Further information is available from the Terminal
Users’ Guide, which is distributed with the software.

This chapter discusses the use of foodservice records as management tools that enable
you to more efficiently operate the mess. As the assistant to the FSO in the GM, you
should not have custody or control over original financial records applicable to operating
the GM. However, you should have access to these records and may have duplicates, as
needed, for the effective administration and operation of the GM.

Food Preparation

The FSO is directly responsible for making sure foodservice personnel follow all
section orders concerning the proper preparation of food. As the leading CS, you should
make sure the FSO’s orders and regulations are followed by all foodservice personnel.

In addition to the service of food, these orders and regulations encompass such
specifics as food conservation, sanitation, scullery operation, and the handling of food
wastes. Managing these processes requires setting up a strict routine for preparing and
serving food. This routine should include some of the following actions:

• Giving all foodservice personnel instructions that apply specifically to their duties

316
 • Making sure all foodservice personnel are in clean uniforms (usually white) and
maintain the highest personal grooming standards
• Instructing foodservice personnel concerning proper serving techniques before
serving meals
• Inspecting and sampling the foods served in the GM
• Training foodservice personnel in the proper preparation of food

In addition to normal feeding, various conditions require situational feeding. All

foodservice personnel should be capable of preparing and serving meals under these
diverse conditions.

NORMAL CONDITIONS.– As the leading CS, your presence during all meals is
essential to the foodservice operation. The fact that you are there and paying close
attention to all the work being done has a positive effect on both the foodservice
personnel and patrons.

The following are some of the reasons the leading CS’s presence in the foodservice
spaces is important during the meals:

• Making sure all personnel receive attractively presented, appetizing, and

nutritious food served in a pleasing manner
• Making sure the GM patrons are not distracted during the meal
• Handling customer complaints on the spot
• Making sure visitors do not receive tours of foodservice and dining spaces during
meal hours
• Preventing circumstances that may upset the normal dining routine or ambiance
from occurring during normal meal periods

To make sure the serving area runs smoothly, you should make sure a current menu
with nutritional information exists in full view at the beginning of each serving line. You
should make sure food is served promptly and in an appetizing manner. Additionally,
you should make sure the equipment on the serving line operates at the proper
temperature.

You should place an CS in charge of each serving line. This individual should be
capable of instructing foodservice personnel on all aspects of the serving line operation.

SITUATIONAL FEEDING.– You should make sure your facilities, personnel, and
schedule are flexible enough to support any required situational feeding. Situational
feeding refers to the various types of special meals, battle feeding (combat feeding), or
emergency and disaster feeding.

Special Meals.– Personnel required to work through normal meal hours, due to the
nature of their duties, must receive a chance to eat. They are usually provided special
meals.

317
 Battle Feeding.– Aboard ships, food is distributed to battle station lockers for use
during battle feeding situations. Food that does not require galley preparation or semi
perishable food distributed in this manner requires constant checking. You should check
to make sure all food items are rotated periodically to prevent spoilage, misuse, or theft.

During battle stations, personnel must man their stations until secured. Because battle
stations may last for some hours, food carriers, racks, trays, and large coffeepots should
be available to support battle feeding needs.

Battle food preparation will depend on whether the galley is in operation and enough
CSs are available. If neither the galley nor enough personnel are available, you should
use the meal ready to eat (MRE) ration and supplement it with hot or cold drinks. If
limited galley foodservice is available, you should plan simple menu items. Simple menu
items include sandwiches, fresh or canned fruit, hot canned beef stew, chili con came, or
easy to prepare recipes. You should supplement these meals with hot or cold drinks.

Emergency and Disaster Feeding.– Historically such disasters as hurricanes, flooding,

earthquakes, volcano eruptions, or accidents at sea have occurred. Military activities
have found it necessary to feed survivors of such disasters. As the leading CS, you
should be familiar with your command’s disaster preparedness contingency plan, which
should include specifics on how to set up and feed the victims of disasters. You also
should know how to properly account for the feeding of these personnel. Accounting
procedures for emergency and disaster feeding is covered in the Expenditures and
Accounting section of the NAVSUP P-486.

There are two classes of survivors of disasters used for accounting purposes. These
classes are destitute survivors of disasters and survivors of disasters having personal
funds.

1. Destitute survivors of disasters include refugees, civilian evacuees, and American

merchant seamen. They are conditionally entitled to rations-in-kind and may be fed in
Navy GMs at sea. The CO must first determine that the survivors are in fact destitute.
The issuing command should use a locally prepared form to furnish information
establishing entitlement of rations issued. This letter is called the certification of rations
issued form. The Ration System section of the NAVSUP P-486, furnishes instructions on
the completion of this form.

2. Survivors of disasters having personal funds are authorized to eat in the GM on a

cash basis and must pay cash for each meal they receive. The rates charged for these
meals are either those published in the NAVSUP 7330 NOTE. You should make every
effort to collect cash from these personnel at the time of sale.

This class of personnel requires written authorization to receive rations from the GM.
This authorization may be included in the supply department or command organization
manual. Charges and accounting procedures for this class of personnel are described in
the Expenditures and Accounting section of the NAVSUP P-486.

318
 Disasters and/or emergencies also may occur ashore and in port. To feed personnel
under such conditions, the CO must issue a directive declaring an emergency or disaster
exists, and subsistence must be provided to persons other than those normally authorized
to subsist.

The following actions should be taken to refund the Navy for meals furnished to
victims of such a disaster:

• Individuals should be requested to pay (the sale of meal rates) at the time of
receipt of the meal. If collections cannot be made, appropriate information such as
name, address, and signature should be obtained.
• Individuals also should be informed that collection may be effected later.
• If unable to collect from individuals, then reimbursement should be obtained from
one of the following organizations:

The American Red Cross

Navy Relief
TYCOM disaster relief funding
A business (contractor responsible for causing
an evacuation)
Other disaster relief organizations

• FSOs finding collection efforts from ashore sources unsuccessful should request
permission to waive collection. This request should be made to the Navy Comptroller
(NAVCOMPT) through the chain of command. Should NAVCOMPT grant
approval, the activity’s Operations and Maintenance, Navy (O&M,N) fund will be
charged the cost of feeding the individuals.

Catastrophic disasters or emergency feeding ashore or in port usually requires feeding

large numbers of personnel. This is especially so if multiple supporting ships or stations
are involved. A responsible officer in command, normally the local area commander,
must issue a directive declaring that an emergency exists. Then subsistence may be
provided to personnel other than those normally authorized to be subsisted. Under these
circumstances, ration credit should be taken as previously described unless otherwise
directed by NAVSUP. NAVSUP should be immediately contacted for guidance on the
proper accounting and feeding procedures for these personnel. This is because the size of
the operation may require unusual management actions or clarification to ease resolution
for involved activities.

Subsistence

All bulk subsistence storerooms including refrigerated storerooms used to keep chilled
and frozen food are accountable spaces. The subsistence issue room, if used, is also an
accountable space. These storage spaces must be maintained in an orderly fashion. Food
items must be stored according to the NAVSUP P-486 and NAVMED P-5010-1.

319
 A jack-of-the-dust must be appointed to be responsible to the accountable FSO for the
safekeeping of all food stored in these spaces. Even small ships with few CSs should
assign a jack-of-the-dust this primary responsibility. This is a full-time job that involves
receiving, storing, and issuing subsistence, and completing all the appropriate
documentation. All food in these spaces must be recorded on the inventory cards
maintained by the records keeper.

Special Use of the Messdecks

Under certain circumstances, functions other than messing may periodically be held in
the dining area of a GM. This is so regardless of how large or small a messing facility
may be. These circumstances may include training, meetings, or special events that
include games and contests. You should make sure all events of this nature are
coordinated and scheduled. Coordination involves informing key personnel such as your
chain of command and any other personnel that may be affected. You should schedule
all events so normal routine is not interrupted. This includes the proper and timely
preparation for meal service, actual meal service, and cleaning up after meal service.
NAVY FOOD SERVICE SYSTEMS OFFICE GUIDANCE

NAVSUP has two main responsibilities. Establishes and monitors all policies,
procedures, programs, and regulations concerning the management, administration, and
operation of all Navy GMs and afloat private messes. NAVSUP P-486 contain detailed
information on the administration of GMs and afloat private messes respectively.

When requested, NAVSUP also will provide aid to activities in solving all major
problems encountered in managing or operating enlisted or private messes.
NAVY FOOD MANAGEMENT TEAM ASSISTANCE

Excellence in foodservice is essential to the health and morale of Navy members and
to the overall readiness of the Operating Forces. Because food is a major item of
expense, use of the best food management practices (conservation, preparation, and
serving) is necessary.

Navy Food Management Teams (NFMTs) use on-the-job training to provide

foodservice personnel with skill in preparing and serving food. This significantly
improves the overall Navy foodservice program.

Organization

The NFMTs are directly responsible to NAVSUP for performance of their mission.
The team members may be assigned for additional duty to the host command for military
and administrative purposes.

320
Mission

The NFMTs’ mission is to aid ships and ashore activities in raising the quality and
standards of foodservice. This assistance is provided in the following manner:

• Participating in an advisory capacity in managing the local foodservice program

by working along with foodservice personnel. Demonstrating proper techniques in all
phases of foodservice. This includes management, production and serving of food,
sanitation, training, and accounting. Their training also motivates foodservice
personnel toward increased efficiency and effectiveness.
• Providing on-the-job training to foodservice personnel through the “do as I do”
method of instruction, employing advanced training aids and techniques.
• Instilling management awareness in responsible foodservice personnel. Placing
special emphasis on high-quality food preparation, progressive cookery, proper
serving techniques, foodservice safety precautions and operating procedures, fire
prevention, sanitation, and personal hygiene.
• Inducing and stimulating professional pride in foodservice personnel.
• Reviewing the use of facilities, equipment, personnel, and other foodservice
resources to evaluate each GM visited. Identifying limitations that hamper fulfillment
of the foodservice goal.
• Reviewing manual and automated foodservice records, organization and operating
manuals, and financial returns to determine compliance with the Naval Supply
Systems Command (NAVSUP) Manual and current foodservice directives.
• Evaluating and aiding in implementing foodservice policies and procedures
established by the Department of Defense, the Department of the Navy, and
commands.
• Aiding in developing patron foodservice education programs to make sure
personnel understand the foodservice operation, especially conservation.
• Providing information on and demonstrating new developments in foodservice
and food items.
• Evaluating the practical application of foodservice techniques. Imparting
programs of instruction, curricula, and formal training through technical and on-the-
job training.
• Exchanging ideas on foodsservice operations with activities visited. Sending new
ideas to NAVSUP for dissemination to other NFMTs and field activities.
• Recording observations to provide a basis for follow-up actions to aid in resolving
problems beyond the control of the local foodservice management personnel through
better use of material and financial resources.
• Prime Vendor and automated ordering procedures;
Requests for Navy Food Management Team Assistance Visits

Activities are highly encouraged to request foodservice training assistance visits.

Length of Visit. Standard team visits can be requested from three days up to 14. Longer
visits may be arranged if necessary due to operating schedules. Commands may request
a follow-up visit within 90 days of the initial visit. An example is a ship desiring a visit

321
to address specific problem areas. Team visits normally should not be requested during
yard overhaul, while underway, or before shakedown periods of newly commissioned
ships. This is because maximum benefits are not gained during such periods. Those
activities desiring aid should submit a letter request showing several periods that may be
convenient for the visit.

Activities requesting assistance are encouraged to communicate with the officer in

charge of the NFMT within the designated area of responsibility before a visit. This is
done so that the following information can be provided to the team before the visit:

• Any specific problem areas requiring special attention

• Quantity of CSs and foodservice attendants on board
• Available government berthing if the visit is outside the team’s home port NFMTs
also conduct training in the following areas:

• Maintaining of general mess records and

• Location of the ship during the requested dates preparing of GM returns
• Monitoring the contractual messmen program at ashore GMs
• Conducting the Ney Memorial Awards Program

Foodservice assistance is also provided to officers’ and chief petty officers’ messes
afloat.
Report of Visit

At the end of each visit, the Officer-in-Charge of the Navy Food Management Team
or the designated representative will informally discuss the overall operation of the
general mess with the Commanding Officer or designated representative, the Supply
Officer, the Food Service Officer, and key food service personnel. The Officer in Charge
of the team will submit a summary of each assist visit to the Readiness Branch, Navy
Food Service, ACOS Navy Family Support, Mechanicsburg.

THE PROCESSES OF FOODSERVICE MANAGEMENT EFFICIENCY

Whether afloat or ashore, you, as a senior CS, will be responsible for managing many
processes related to foodservice. Foodservice management efficiency entails giving each
process related to foodservice the proper attention. You must formulate plans, coordinate
the duties, and supervise your personnel’s work as well as assume responsibility for the
results. You must get the work done by directing and controlling the activities of others
so they work together efficiently.

The following are some of the processes related to foodservice that are discussed in
this chapter:

• Following the basic standards of foodservice

• Using proper inventory control and accounting procedures

322
 • Setting up a sanitation program that includes physical examinations, training, and
inspections
• Conducting routine preventive maintenance
STANDARDS OF FOODSERVICE

Quality of foodservice and customer service contributes substantially to maintaining

high morale and the general welfare of Navy personnel. GM patrons are entitled to
properly prepared, wholesome, well-balanced, and satisfying meals served under sanitary
conditions in a pleasant atmosphere. To this end, the Standards of Food Service,
NAVSUPINST 4061.11, outlines concrete actions that protect patron health and enhance
satisfaction. They should be regarded as basic to any GM operation and serve as a guide
for all GM operations.
Monitoring Food Preparation

The success or failure of a meal depends a great deal on properly timed cooking. For
example, if chops or similar meats are to be served, cook only enough to get the meal
started. Then continue preparing the chops during the serving, keeping just ahead of the
demand. As the end of the serving line approaches, make an accurate count of how many
servings will be needed to avoid preparing wasted rations.

Many items lose their taste or attractiveness if they are prepared too far in advance or
in large quantities. It is good management to implement and enforce progressive cooking
practices. Accurate computations on the NAVSUP Form 1090 will enable your CSs to
prepare the proper amounts of food. You should keep a record of the amounts of all
foods needed to serve each meal. Be sure you get a correct count on the number of
people who are ashore on liberty or absent for other reasons. These records serve as a
basis for more accurate future calculations.

Insist that your CSs carefully weigh the quantities of food to be used. Otherwise,
accurate calculations are a waste of time. You also should monitor the following tasks to
include conservation in preparation:

• The proper cleaning and paring of vegetables eliminate considerable waste

• When you are opening cans, make sure the contents of each can are examined
carefully before they are emptied into a large container. The spoiled contents of one
can will make a whole kettle full of canned food unfit to serve. Food of questionable
quality should be treated as bad food.
• Make sure vegetables are not overcooked. Cooking should end just as soon as the
vegetables are tender. Longer cooking destroys food value and appearance.
• Make sure all fresh vegetables to be used uncooked in salads are thoroughly
chilled. They should be kept in the refrigerator until it is time to prepare them. After
they are prepared, they should be placed back into the refrigerator to keep them crisp
and fresh. Do not put the dressing on a salad until just before it is served or the
dressing may make the fruits and vegetables wilt.

323
 The senior CSs of both watch sections should jointly conduct a weekly critique of the
past weeks menu with all the junior CSs tasked with preparing the meals. During the
critique, specific improvements needed in food preparation should be discussed, based
upon recent experience, regarding the coming week’s menu.
Control and Documentation of Leftovers

The world’s finest foods are provided for the Navy, but the food budget is not
unlimited. It’s up to you to help keep it within reasonable limits. Waste is one way to
send costs shooting skyward. Conservation is the simplest way to keep costs under
control. As the person in charge of a GM, you should make it a matter of pride to have a
low record of spoilage and leftovers.

You can eliminate waste by planning your menus carefully. Remember, your past
food-preparation worksheets contain information on the successes or failures of your past
menus.

Note the amount left on trays and listen to the patrons’ comments. If there are
complaints, find out why the meal did not appeal to them.

Compliance With Recipes

All Armed Forces Recipe Service (AFRS) recipes have been tested and evaluated for
military wide acceptability and to support current nutritional standards. The use of the
AFRS is required and is issued to all GMs to standardize and improve food prepared and
served. Standardized recipes are needed for a well-run foodservice operation. The
success of the AFRS depends upon its careful use and attention to detail. The AFRS also
is the most effective management tool you can use for guiding the requisitioning of
supplies and controlling breakouts and inventories.
Foodservice Suggestions

One of your responsibilities as leading CS may be to act as the customer service

representative to the FSO. In this capacity you must be present in the mess area to
answer patrons’ inquiries and to receive their suggestions or comments during each meal.

A suggestion box also should be prominently posted at each exit for the convenience
of the patrons. This suggestion box should have a pencil or pen attached and have
Suggestion to the Food Service Officer, NAVSUP Forms 1343, or local forms provided
for customer use. You should remove suggestions daily, after the evening meal, and turn
them in to the FSO. The FSO should review all suggestions for possible adoption.

EVALUATING FOODSERVICE SUGGESTIONS.– Customers submitting

suggestions or comments should be treated as individuals with individual needs. Most
customers experience an empty stomach three times a day. Conversely, this need is
routinely filled on a more impersonal basis–the same filling for all customers. You may
provide the correct service, but if you treat the customer as just one of a group, rather
than as an individual, it may cause resentment. Therefore, when evaluating suggestions

324
or comments, you should present the right attitude toward the needs of the customer.
These needs may run the extent from the ridiculous, through the routine, to the very
difficult. However, these categories reflect your opinion of the needs and requests–not
the customer’s. The problems are important to the customers, otherwise they would not
have submitted a suggestion or comment. Thus, you should make all customers feel that
their problem is important.

Regardless of the nature or seriousness of a customer’s problem, certain negative

factors may serve to complicate it. For example, the customer may be angry, worried, or
frustrated. Possibly, the customer may be unwilling to accept anything less than his or
her desired solution to the problem. Awareness of these factors allows you to approach
each suggestion practically and, in turn, deal with most rational suggestions effectively.

GIVING FEEDBACK ON SUGGESTIONS.– The FSO should evaluate all

suggestions or comments and furnish a reply when requested, within 48 hours. The
leading CS should make sure the proper action is taken to adopt or implement those
suggestions the FSO considers favorable to improving the quality of service. Adopted
suggestions should be posted twice weekly or placed in the ship or station plan of the day
for the crew’s convenience.
Recording Meals Consumed

There are different categories under which personnel fall when recording meal
consumption. For you to account properly for all meals consumed in a GM, you must
understand rations and ration entitlement. Also, the distinction between afloat and ashore
recording procedures must be understood.

RATIONS.— Many times you have heard senior CSs say, “prepare 100 rations of that
item.” What the CS really meant is “prepare 100 portions” because a ration is defined as
a basic daily food allowance (BDFA). This and related terms will be explained next.

Basic daily food allowance. The BDFA is a prescribed quantity of food, defined by
components or monetary value, required to provide a nutritionally adequate diet for
one person for 1 day.

Supplemental food allowance. A supplemental food allowance is a prescribed

quantity of food, defined by quantity or monetary value, which, due to unusual or
extraordinary circumstances, is required in addition to the BDFA.

Special food allowance. A special food allowance is a prescribed quantity of food,

defined by components, quantity, or monetary value, required when use of the BDFA is
insufficient.

Night meals. Night meals are quantities of food that may be furnished to enlisted
people standing night watches or performing other assigned duties between 2000 and
0800 hours. The value of food items used in preparing night meals is included in the total

325
cost of issues to the GM. No additional ration credit may be claimed during sea periods
regardless of the number of meals an individual consumes, including night meals.

Midrations (midrats). Midrats are food items such as soup, crackers, sandwiches, and
leftovers normally offered to personnel assuming the midwatch and those being relieved.
Midrats are different from night meals in that they are offered to personnel who have
already consumed their breakfast, lunch, and dinner during normal meal hours.
Therefore, they are not entitled to a full night’s meal. The value of food items used to
prepare midrats is included in the total cost of issues to the GM. However, taking ration
credit for midrats and/or the sale of midrats is not authorized.

Rations-in-kind. This is the term used to describe meals furnished to enlisted personal
from the GM at government expense.

RATION ENTITLEMENT.– Regular and Reserve enlisted personnel of the armed

services, officer candidates, cadets of the armed forces academies in a duty status, and
prisoners of war are entitled to rations-in-kind at government expense under various
appropriation acts.

Retired enlisted military personnel confined in a hospital or dispensary are entitled to

rations-in-kind.

Destitute survivors of disasters, refugees, civilian evacuees, and American seamen

may be fed without charge in Navy messes. Entitlement is determined and action taken
to effect reimbursement by NAVSUP as appropriate from the data furnished in the
certification required for this category of personnel.

Rations are furnished to foreign government personnel on a cash basis, except when
the invitational travel orders authorize other means of reimbursement. Enlisted personnel
in a travel status who are receiving per diem instead of subsistence are not entitled to
rations-in-kind unless their orders are endorsed showing the number and type of meals
authorized.

Cash sales may be authorized to various types of personnel. Usually, approval of the
CO is all that is required and, in some instances, this approval can be obtained in the form
of supply department instructions. Only those personnel entitled to rations-in-kind are
authorized to eat without charge; all others must pay for each meal consumed.

AFLOAT PROCEDURES.– On the first day of the month, the executive or personnel
officer should advise the FSO of the estimated daily number of personnel entitled to be
fed in the GM. The FSO should be told when any significant change to the number of
personnel entitled to subsist occurs during the month. When rations for foreign or other
personnel are included, the FSO should be informed also.

The FSO uses the daily expected number of rations allowed to accomplish the
following:

326
 • Post the General Mess Control Record, NAVSUP Form 338, each day at sea.
• Plan the quantities of food to be prepared on the following day based on the actual
number of persons expected to be fed using the current acceptability factors.

• Prepare certifications as required and arrange to have them completed and signed
before departure of personnel requiring certification. The FSO signs certifications
when signatures of persons in charge of groups cannot be obtained.

During days at sea, ration credit should be taken for each enlisted member on board.
Ration credit also should be recorded daily on the NAVSUP Form 338 for all meals sold
for cash. Days at sea includes the day of leaving and the day of arriving regardless of the
time of departure or return.

During in-port periods, ration credit should be taken only for the personnel actually
fed. Any convenient, accurate method for determining this number is permissible;
usually, a hand counter is used by the master-at-arms as personnel pass through the
serving line. Full ration credit may be taken in port while simulated at-sea exercises are
being held and all personnel are remaining aboard overnight.

Ration allowances are adjusted to compensate for the change in the calendar day
resulting from crossing the 180th meridian. When the time is set back 1 day in crossing
from the west (Japan) to the east (United States), rations are credited for the extra day.
When time is advanced 1 day in crossing from the east (United States) to the west
(Japan), rations are not credited for the lost day.

ASHORE PROCEDURES.– To provide uniform and equitable procedures in

accounting and estimating military feeding costs, the policy that such programs will be
based upon actual food costs per person was established by the Assistant Secretary of
Defense. Such costs are essential to the planning of budget requirements and for the
development of absentee rates for congressional presentations. The development of per
capita consumption costs is based upon the actual number of persons fed in Navy GMs
ashore. This is accomplished by the signature head count method whereby a daily count
is made of all personnel fed at each meal.

Activities with GMs physically located ashore include the following:

• All shore activities except naval hospitals operating hospital messes

• All mobile construction battalions and detachments eating in GMs ashore
• All fleet and force commands operating GMs
• All cargo-handling battalions eating in GMs
• All inactive service craft facilities
• All naval beach groups
• All GMs operated aboard permanently moored ships that grant liberty under shore
command conditions, including naval inactive ship maintenance facilities

327
 Daily Allowed Rations.– The executive or personnel officer verbally advises the FSO
of any significant changes in the expected number of rations allowed for all categories of
personnel to be fed in the GM for the following day. If warranted by local operating
conditions, the executive or personnel officer furnishes this information more frequently.
When the allowed rations include rations for foreign or other personnel for whom
certification is required, the FSO is so advised. The FSO uses the daily expected number
of rations allowed to accomplish the following:

• Plan the quantities of food to be prepared on the following day after adjusting the
net allowed rations by other factors affecting the number of personnel to be fed.
• Prepare a certification of rations issued for personnel who require it. Before their
departure, the number of rations received should be entered on the certificate and the
person in charge of the group should sign it. If the signature of the person in charge
of such personnel cannot be obtained, the FSO should sign the certificate.

Tenant activities should verbally advise the host command of any significant changes
in the expected number of personnel to be fed in the GM for the following day.

Meal Pass.– The Meal Pass, NAVSUP Form 1105, is issued by the personnel office to
identify each member authorized to eat in the GM ashore. The NAVSUP Form 1105 is
available in white, blue, pink, green, salmon, and yellow.

The host command is responsible for coordinating procedures governing meal passes
to ensure consistency by all tenant commands using the activity’s GM. In this
responsibility, the host command specifies the colors to be used for each category of
personnel and prescribes procedures for controlling the issue of meal passes. Commands
performing personnel and administrative functions must be responsible for the actual
issue and control of NAVSUP Form 1105, which will be accepted as valid by any GM.
Different color meal passes must be used to identify Naval Reserve and other military
personnel in the following manner:

• Naval Reserve enlisted personnel on active duty should be assigned the same
color meal passes as Regular Navy personnel and should, for the purpose of GM
accounting, be considered Regular Navy.
• Naval Reserve enlisted personnel on active duty for training (ACDUTRA) should
be assigned meal passes of a different color than Navy and Naval Reserve personnel
on active duty and should be recorded and accounted for separately by the GM.
• Different color meal passes are assigned to enlisted members of other service
categories as determined by local needs.

The possession of a meal pass entitles the holder to consume meals at government
expense in any Navy GM; therefore, it is incumbent upon each command to make sure
only those enlisted members entitled to receive such meals are issued and permitted to
retain a NAVSUP Form 1105.

328
 Commands issue a meal pass to each enlisted member assigned who is entitled to
rations-in-kind. Meal passes are not to be issued to the following:

• Personnel receiving commute rations

• Personnel receiving basic allowance for subsistence

• Personnel assigned to another command, except at activities where two or more

commands are serviced by a single personnel office

When a meal pass is issued to an individual, the individual’s name and social security
number are typed or printed opposite the pass number in the meal-pass log and the
recipient signs the log.

Head Count Procedures.– A signature head count procedure is used by all shore GMs,
except in cases of mass or captive feeding, to determine the actual number of personnel
fed at each meal. Every person receiving a meal must sign, in ink, a Meal Signature
Record, NAVSUP Form 1291, to indicate receipt. Ration credit is based on the number
of signatures recorded. One initial surname and meal-pass number (except contract
facilities’ personnel who should insert one initial and surname only) are required of each
individual. Command or unit entries are not required by parent (host) activity personnel
or by tenant activity personnel if a means is used to identify individual tenant activities.
Transient personnel are required to indicate their parent command or unit. Individuals
passing through the serving line more than once during the same meal should sign the
NAVSUP Form 1291 only once.

The FSO is responsible for conducting and monitoring the signature head count
procedure. The FSO also must train personnel involved in controlling the signature head
count procedure, placing special emphasis on the eligibility of patrons authorized to
receive rations-in-kind at government expense.

The messdeck master-at-arms (MDMAA) is responsible for the following:

• Determining the eligibility of personnel passing through the serving line to eat in
the GM
• Obtaining signatures and a legible meal-pass number on the NAVSUP Form 1291
• Preparing a daily Recapitulation of Meal Record, NAVSUP Form 1292

In discharging these responsibilities, the MDMAA places special emphasis on the

eligibility of patrons authorized to receive rations-in-kind at government expense. The
MDMAA performs the following:

• Requires each person to exhibit a valid meal pass and identification card
• Permits new arrivals on travel orders and receiving per diem to have the travel
orders endorsed
• Receives the NAVSUP Forms 1292 for mass feeding in the GM and makes a
manual count of the group as they enter the serving line to verify the total

329
 • Enters Total Verified and signs on the second signature line of each NAVSUP
Form 1292 for mass feeding within the mess area

The records keeper is responsible for verifying the entries made on the daily NAVSUP
Form 1292 by the MDMAA and the cashier and for entry of meals served to personnel
not passing through the serving line. The records keeper performs the following:

• Verifies totals of each type of personnel listed Checks cash sale to make sure
credit sales are included in the count
• Makes sure the NAVSUP Form 1292 prepared Makes for duty foodservice
personnel is accurate and does not include personnel receiving commuted rations
• Checks meals requested and furnished against NAVSUP Forms 1292 for
other types of personnel not passing through the serving line
• Make sure the entry for contract foodservice personnel does not exceed the
number on duty during the meal
• Reports noted inconsistencies to the FSO for corrective action
• Makes required corrections to personnel counts and coordinates the correction
with the responsible personnel for the error whereby both must initial the correction

NAVSUP Form 1291.– This form should be preserialized and the headings completed
before each meal to ensure control and to prevent loss or misuse of the signature sheets.
Either the MDMAA or the person authorized in writing by the FSO supervises the
signing of the NAVSUP Forms 1291. The supervising MDMAA should be seated on a
high stool behind the signature counter to verify meal passes and to direct personnel to
the correct meal signature sheet. This assignment is one of the most important duties
within the division. This person must be firm but fair in carrying out this assignment.
This person must make sure each person passing through the serving mess line is entitled
to either rations-in-kind or pays, without exceptions.

Categories of personnel. The number of personnel fed in each category is determined

by requiring the personnel in each category (Regular Navy, Naval Reserve, Marine
Corps, Army, Coast Guard) to sign separate forms. The forms should be placed on
separate clipboards, color coded to match the meal passes, or have stenciled signs to
indicate the personnel categories. Minor categories may be combined on a single form
and the appropriate category entered in the Command/Unit column.

Night and brunch meals. Night meals are served between 2000 and 0800 hours.
Brunch meals served before 0900 hours are recorded as breakfasts. Brunch meals served
after 0900 hours are recorded as lunches.

Special feeding occasions. The number of persons fed at special feeding occasions,
such as picnics, barbecues, and cookouts, are counted and reported for the regular GM
meal that the special event replaces.

Mass or Captive Feeding.– Mass feeding means accounting for a group of personnel
by using a NAVSUP Form 1292 as a summary document instead of obtaining individual

330
signatures on a NAVSUP Form 1291. At activities with mass or captive feeding, such as
recruit training centers, schools, brigs, and groups fed outside the GM, the person in
charge of a draft or group of personnel uses a NAVSUP Form 1292 to record the number
of personnel in each category to be fed at the meal. The person in charge computes the
total; writes an appropriate statement in the Remarks block, such as “Mass feeding-
school,” or” Mass feeding-picnic”; and signs on the first signature line including grade or
rate and service number.

When a group is fed in the GM, the person in charge of the group presents the
completed NAVSUP Form 1292 to the MDMAA upon entering the messdeck. The
MDMAA makes a count of the group as it passes to verify the total, writes Total
Verified, and signs on the second signature line. The MDMAA retains the NAVSUP
Form 1292 and assembles it with the appropriate NAVSUP Forms 1291 for that meal.

Meals furnished to personnel not passing through the mess line, such as working
parties, inpatients of the dispensary or hospital, duty foodservice personnel, prisoners,
and picnic or outing personnel, are handled as mass feeding. However, persons eating
individually, in these cases, sign the NAVSUP Form 1291 and are excluded from the
count on the mass feeding NAVSUP Form 1292. A person familiar with this
responsibility is designated to prepare the NAVSUP Form 1292 and deliver it to the
records keeper as soon as possible after the meal and no later than the following morning.
The records keeper checks the form to make sure it is complete and makes such checks as
possible to verify the total. The records keeper writes “Checked” and signs on the third
signature line.

Meal Recapitulation.– Upon securing the mess line, the MDMAA assembles the forms
in sequence by category and draws an ink line below the last name of each form. The
MDMAA determines the total number of signatures for each category of personnel and
enters the totals on a NAVSUP Form 1292, which is prepared in an original and one
copy. The total of all categories is entered as the first subtotal. The totals for breakfast,
lunch, and dinner are entered on the same form. Separate forms are not prepared for each
meal. The MDMAA signs on the first signature line and delivers the NAVSUP Form
1292 to the FSO after the dinner meal. When more than one MDMAA is on duty at
different meals, they both initial the subtotal(s) for which they are responsible and both
sign on the first signature line.

Duty Cashier.– When cash sales are made, the duty cashier enters the total number of
meals sold from the GM in the Cash Sales block, computes the second subtotal, and signs
the certification on the second signature line. The entry opposite the Cash Sales block
includes all meals sold, both those for which cash is collected before admission to the
serving line and those sold on a credit basis. This figure should agree with the total
recorded in the daily meal record.

On some stations the cashier billet may be combined with the MDMAA. This can be
accomplished effectively providing the person assigned has received proper training.
There is no individual duty or assignment that can be singled out as the most important

331
within the foodservice division because it takes team effort; however, the duties of
cashier and MDMAA have the distinction of being the first customer contacts.
Letters of Authority, Authorization, and Appointment

Letters of authority appoint personnel to act for another person or persons of higher
authority. Letters of authorization permit certain functions or actions. Letters of
appointment assign responsibility and authority to designated personnel to control a
specific function. The supply officer must maintain, in the supply office, a current file of
all such letters applicable to operating the supply department. Copies applicable to the
GM should be retained by the FSO.

LETTERS OF AUTHORITY.– The following are letters of authority that may be

required in the foodservice division:

• CO’s letter appointing an assistant to the supply officer as the FSO

• CO’s letter appointing the person authorized to receipt for food items in the
absence of the FSO and his or her designated assistant
• Mess treasurer’s letter designating a person to approve issue requests for a private
mess

LETTERS OF AUTHORIZATION.– The following are letters of authorization that

may be required in the foodservice division:

• CO’s letter authorizing the FSO to make necessary changes in the approved menu
• CO’s letter authorizing the sale of meals from the GM on a credit basis
• CO’s letter authorizing a change fund for the GM

LETTERS OF APPOINTMENT.– The following arc letters of appointment that may

be required in the foodservice division:

• CO’s letter appointing a control officer for the handling and security of the Cash
Meal Payment Book, DD Form 1544
• FSO’s letter appointing an individual to be a collection agent or authorized funds
custodian
• FSO’s letter designating a cashier to receive payment for meals sold from the GM

INVENTORY CONTROL AND PHYSICAL SECURITY

We have already concluded in previous chapters the importance of maintaining a

balanced load to support the ship’s mission. In this regard, procedures should be set in
motion to control your inventory levels. This includes employing safeguards for the
security of your inventory.

These procedures should contain provisions for reviewing the accuracy of inventories,
actual issues, and records. You should review these items as necessary to ensure the
continued availability of balanced stocks.

332
 The actual (physical) inventory of food items on board should be accurately reflected
in the inventory records. Improperly kept records support practices that, without
exception, will lead to inefficiency and cause losses in money and material.

Stock Maintenance

The topics discussed next are critical in the efficient maintenance of required stock
levels.

• You should constantly check your food inventory to ensure rotation and use of
stocks to prevent oversupply, which may result in surveys. Store stocks so the oldest
stocks can be used first.
• Review past usage records regularly. They will help achieve balanced
requisitioning by showing what is on hand and what items are needed.
• Make sure menu changes are kept to a minimum. An accumulation of menu
changes can unfavorably affect your balanced load, either increasing or decreasing
the planned usage of food items. This results either in stocks being depleted faster
than expected or unused stocks unnecessarily taking up storage space.
• Adjust your high and low limits as necessary to adapt to an increase or decrease in
crew size. This helps make sure you order an accurate quantity of food items for a
load out.
• Regularly review food stocks currently on hand during underway periods. If
inventories point out stocks that are in either long or short supply, temporary
adjustments to the cycle menu can be made to balance stocks.

ISSUE CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES.– Repeated use of your menus and

breakout guides allows you to adjust breakout requirements to match the quantities
actually needed for preparation of the meals by yielding breakout information that closely
reflects actual requirements.

When you review a document requesting an issue, you should make sure it reflects
only the items actually needed and in the correct quantities.

Authorization.– Documents requesting breakouts to the galley must be approved by

the FSO or a person designated in writing by the FSO. The FSO establishes controls to
account for each issue document. Issue documents are prepared in triplicate and
approved by the senior CS on duty. The original should be forwarded to the FSO on the
morning following the date of issue.

Documentation.– Issues to the GM must be made on a NAVSUP Form 1282.

RETURN OF UNUSED ISSUES TO STOCK ON HAND.– Return all unused and

unprepared food items remaining in the galley after completion of meal periods to the
issue storeroom at the end of each day. The NAVSUP Form 1282 containing the daily
issues should be changed to document items and quantities returned and reflect any

333
quantities issued to the galley. The NAVSUP Form 1282 should be signed by both the
senior CS on duty and the issue-storeroom custodian.

FREQUENT SPOT INVENTORIES.– Frequent (twice weekly recommended)

counting of fast-moving and high-cost items is advisable to maintain financial
control of GM accountability. When spot inventories are conducted, all affected records
should be adjusted.
Key Custody and Controls

Afloat Supply Procedures, NAVSUP P-485, and Food Service Management,

NAVSUP P-486, describe current security information.

The basic rules set down by the NAVSUP P-485 for key security are as follows:

• Supply spaces must be kept locked when not in use.

• Custody and responsibility for any space must rest with the person in charge of
that space.
• Permission for entry of persons not ordinarily authorized to have access must be
obtained from the supply officer, FSO, or a delegated representative.
• No space should be secured in such a manner that access by use of ordinary
damage control equipment is hindered in an emergency.
• Keys to supply space padlocks must not be taken from the ship and should be
turned in to the key locker when the custodian goes ashore.
• Whenever an original or duplicate key is lost, a new lock must be placed in use.
• Combinations to locks must not be recorded in writing except for a written
combination in a sealed opaque envelope. This envelope must be signed over the flap
by both the custodian and the accountable officer in the presence of one another and
retained in the accountable officer’s safe.
• All key padlocks must be of 1 1/2-inch size.
• All keyless padlocks used must be of the three-combination, manipulation-
resistant type.

Aboard submarines, because of unique space limitations, damage control purposes,

and the necessity for storing material in widely separated small spaces, it is not feasible to
keep all supply spaces locked. Fleet, type, and local instructions make necessary
provisions for appropriate deviations.

Train your personnel to lock the padlock on the staple and remove the key whenever
they enter a storeroom or other locked supply department space. This procedure prevents
keys from being locked in the storeroom and locks from being lost or switched by
unauthorized personnel. It also prevents members from being locked in the space by a
passerby who may think the space has been left unlocked by oversight.

334
 LOCK GROUPINGS AFLOAT.– Aboard ship, the locks of the foodservice division
are integrated with those of the rest of the supply department. Locks and keys for
individual spaces are grouped by the following functional areas:

• Group I spaces consist of all supply department and general stores spaces,
including storerooms, special lockers, and related spaces.
• Group II spaces consist of foodservice spaces including the galley, bakeshop,
bread room, vegetable preparation area, foodservice issue room, meat preparation
area, refrigerated spaces, and foodservice storerooms.
• Group III spaces consist of the ship’s retail and clothing stores, the fountain,
vending machines, and related bulk storerooms.
• Group IV spaces consist of the ship’s service activities such as the barbershop,
tailor shop, dry-cleaning shop, and laundry.

For all afloat groups, each lock must be opened by an original and duplicate key
different from the keys to any other space. Additionally, each group must have a master
and one duplicate master key capable of opening every lock in the group. here also must
be a grand master and one duplicate grand master capable of opening every lock in every
group. NOTE: Group III has special keyless padlocks that are excepted.

Afloat, accountable food items must always be kept under lock and key. The only
exception is when the bulk of such material needed for a required endurance load makes
storage under lock and key impractical. Storage of accountable food outside of locked
and controlled storerooms should not be done without the knowledge and consent of the
supply officer. Physical inability to store all items under lock and key may mitigate, but
does not relieve the FSO or his or her responsibility for accountability.

LOCKS ASHORE.– At ashore GMs, the locks of the foodservice division may or may
not be integrated with other locks of the supply department. In either case, the FSO must
be knowledgeable of the existence and have control over any master and duplicate master
keys that can open foodservice spaces. The following procedures further outline custody
and handling of keys:

• No two spaces should have locks that can be opened with the same original and
duplicate key except master and grand-master keys.
• The person in charge of the space must get the original key from the general key
locker at the beginning of the day. This person must keep possession of the original
key during working hours and return it to the general key locker after working hours.
• The general key locker should be located in the supply office to provide
centralized key control.
• Duplicate keys should be kept in a duplicate key locker in the supply office or in
the supply officer’s safe. The supply officer may authorize a special duplicate key
locker when procedures require recurring use of duplicate keys.
• When these procedures do not satisfy local circumstances, the supply officer may
prescribe in writing alternate procedures to ensure proper control of keys and access
to spaces.

335
 • Equipment and locker keys to cabinets and small nonaccountable gear storage
lockers located in the common messing area are controlled as directed by the FSO.

As department head, the supply officer has overall accountability and right of access
to all foodservice spaces. This right of access does not compromise accountability.
AUDITING ACCOUNTING RECORDS

To this end it is vital that an auditing process be in place that allows for frequent
checks of all records to ensure their accuracy. Balancing the Subsistence Ledger The
records keeper maintains the Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP Form 335, keeping one for
each food item on board. This form provides a record by quantity of receipts and
expenditures. It also provides a running balance on hand for each food item. Such
transactions occur regularly and should be recorded to reflect the actual date of each
transaction. The types of transactions are receipts, issues, sales, transfers, surveys, or
inventory adjustments resulting from inaccurate inventory. Each transaction must be
recorded accurately.

To make sure all transactions are recorded accurately and the math is correct, the FSO
or designated representative must periodically perform certain checks. He or she should
check to make sure the correct unit is used for all transactions recorded.

Unlike other stock items, food items have two unit prices-the fixed price and the last
receipt price. The purchase price for food items on the commercial market fluctuates and
the GM must operate on a fixed ration allowance. For this reason, NAVSUP establishes
a fixed price for all items used in the GM. Thus, the same charge is made for an item
throughout the accounting period regardless of the current market or receipt price. The
receipt price for each receipt should be entered in the space provided along with the date
of receipt. This price is used to survey, transfer, or sell items to private messes and to
extend inventory value.

You can verify the current on-hand balance by adding all receipts to the opening
inventory and subtracting all issues, transfers, surveys, and sales. The resulting figure
should equal the current on-hand balance.

You can confirm the Cumulative Total (issues) figure by running a printout or tape.
Add the beginning inventory and all receipts. Subtract all quantities in the Other
column and subtract the current on-hand balance. The result will equal the
Cumulative Total figure if there are no mathematical errors on the NAVSUP Form
335.

The Subsistence Ledger, NAVSUP Form 335, is considered a paper inventory and
should not be interpreted as a true representation of the physical inventory. An actual
physical inventory should be conducted to confirm the paper inventory. As was
discussed earlier, frequent spot inventories should be conducted on fast-moving and high-
cost items.

336
Cash Collection

The FSO is responsible for collecting required basic charges and surcharges received
from the sale of meals from the GM. Additionally, he or she is responsible for depositing
such funds with the disbursing officer. When wardroom members are furnished meals
from the GM, whether continually or during in-port periods, the mess treasurer is
responsible for the collection and reimbursement for such meals.

RECEIPT AND RECORDING OF FUNDS.– The FSO designates, in writing,

cashiers to receive payment for all meals sold for cash. Payment may either be received
in advance through sales of meal tickets or directly from personnel as they enter the GM.

DOCUMENTATION.– Various forms are used to document sales of meals. Those

used to classify ration entitlement and to document rations-in-kind were discussed earlier
in the chapter. Discussed now are the forms used to record receipt of funds.

Cash Meal Payment Book.– The Cash Meal Payment Book, DD Form 1544, is used to
record meals sold for cash from a GM in the manner prescribed next.

The CO will designate a control officer for the handling and security of the DD Form
1544. The transfer control and receipt coupons (four numbered coupons per book) will
be used to complete the book. Individuals authorized to receive cash meal payment
books sign the transfer control and receipt no. 1 at the time of receipt. The coupon is then
retained by the control officer transferring the book. Another transfer control and receipt
coupon is used to return the completed book.

Cash Meal Payment Sheet Register.– The headings Organizations and Installation are
filled in by the appointed control officer. The individual (normally a cashier) authorized
to receive cash meal payment sheets should sign and insert the organization and date on
the cash meal payment sheet register. He or she must make sure the sheet numbers
correspond on both the payment sheets (described in the next paragraph) and the register.
When the cash meal payment sheets are completed they are returned to the control
officer. Now, the columns Date Returned, Cash Collected (foods surcharges), and
Received By should be filled in. The Voucher No. column should not be completed since
this column may be used at some future date.

Cash Meal Payment Sheet.– Before using this form, the Organization block is
completed. It also should have all applicable charges such as food charges, surcharges,
or per diem.

The cashier makes sure all individuals paying cash for meals sign their names and
indicate their grade. He or she should then insert the applicable charge after each
signature.

A cash meal payment sheet also may be used for periods exceeding 1 day. In this
case, the cashier should fill in the first unused line with his or her signature, rate, and

337
date. Below this signature, rate, and date, a double line should be drawn to separate
dates.

After a payment sheet has been completed and all totals inserted, the cashier signs and
inserts his or her rate and the date. The cashier then turns the sheet in to the control
officer or appointed representative.

When cash is turned in to a collection agent or disbursing officer, the DD Form 1544
serial and sheet numbers are entered next to the signature of the individual turning in the
cash in the Cash Receipt Book, NAVSUP Form 470. The DD Form 1544 and the Sale of
General Mess Meals, NAVSUP Form 1046 (credit sales), are used to substantiate sales
from the GM and the ration credit claimed.

The DD Form 1544 is audited and reconciled at the time the cash is collected by the
collection agent or authorized custodian appointed to that established position by the
FSO. The FSO should review the DD Form 1544 at least weekly and make sure an audit
is made when the cash is collected.

Funds held by the cashier more than the allowed change fund should be collected
daily. The only exception to this is cash received from meals sold on weekends or
holidays. This cash may be retained in the personal custody of the cashier provided
adequate facilities exist for the security of such funds. Separate and adequate facilities
should be either a secured safe with a three-tumbler combination lock or a locked
container within a safe of this type. At the close of each meal period cashiers are
personally responsible for the security of all funds in their possession. Cashiers remain
responsible for such funds until depositing them with the authorized collection agent.

The FSO appoints collection agents and authorized custodians. GM cashiers and the
FSO cannot be designated as collection agents. Each individual responsible for funds
must be provided with his or her own safe or a separate locked compartment in a larger
safe.

Overages and Shortages.– The cashier records overages and shortages in cash
received from the sale of GM meals on the DD Form 1544. During the daily audit, the
collection agent verifies the difference during the weekly DD Form 1544 inspection. The
agent determines the cause of cumulative cash differences in excess of $1 or .05 percent
(whichever is larger) per cashier for the week. The collection agent then acts as
warranted by the circumstances to prevent a recurrence.

Any cash discrepancy involving possible fraud or criminal act, regardless of value,
should be recorded as outlined in the Navy Comptroller Manual. Total overages and
shortages exceeding 10 dollars should be reported on the NAVSUP Form 1359 on the
line for undeposited sales that exist at the end of the month or patrol cycle. A letter
should be prepared and submitted with the NAVSUP Form 1359 explaining the
circumstances involved with the gain or loss.

338
 Credit Sales.– If the sale of meals from the GM has been authorized and is considered
quite practical, the CO may authorize the sale of meals on a credit basis. This
authorization is for officers, enlisted, and other categories subsisting daily.

When meals are sold on a credit basis, the Sale of General Mess Meals, NAVSUP
Form 1046, is used to record these credit sales.

When the CO determines that it is impractical and uneconomical to subsist a small

number of officers in the established wardroom during in-port periods, weekends, and
holidays, he or she may authorize officers to purchase meals from the GM.

At the option of the CO, a GM CS may be assigned the duty of maintaining the
NAVSUP Form 1046. The CS should place a check mark or maintain a running total in
the appropriate block opposite each name to show consumption of a meal. The form
should be posted in a noticeable location where it can be seen by the wardroom mess
members. At the end of each month, each mess member signs in the Name block to
acknowledge approval of the meal tally.

The payment for all meals sold on a credit basis is required no later than 15 days
following the month in which the meals were sold. Individuals concerned should make
payment before detachment. The FSO furnishes a receipt for the cash paid.

Deposit of Funds.– When practical, finds in excess of the change fund should be
deposited daily with the disbursing officer. When impractical to make daily deposits, the
cash should be deposited at least twice weekly. Any exceptions to this must be
authorized by the Naval Supply Systems Command. When it is it should be retained in
the collection agent’s personal custody or turned in to the FSO.

Accountability File

The FSO must maintain files of accounting records and substantiating documents
required for audit of subsistence, supply, and GM operations. Records and documents
must be retained and disposed of according to Navy and Marine Corps Records
Disposition Manual, SECNAVINST 5212.5.

RESPONSIBILITY.– The accountability file must be established by the FSO on the

first day of the accounting period.

SECURITY.– The accountability file must be kept under lock and key by the
accountable officer to maintain security of all accountable transactions and substantiating
accountable documents. At the end of the mony, the documents in this file become the
ship’s retained returns for the period, except the rough inventory. The rough inventory
should be impractical for the collection agent to deposit cash daily, retained in the
accountability file until the next rough inventory is made.

339
SANITATION

This chapter addresses sanitation from the management position.

The FSO is held directly responsible for any foodborne illness that may result from
improper or careless preparation, serving, or storage of food. Consequently, he or she
must ensure the following accomplishments:

• Frequent inspections of equipment and personnel are conducted.

• Formal and informal training is carried out as dictated.
• All foodservice personnel receive physical examinations as prescribed in
SECNAVINST 4061.1 and NAVMEDP-5010-1.

As the most senior CS, you will be directly responsible to the FSO for the
maintenance and sanitary conditions of all foodservice spaces, equipment, and
utensils.

In this position, you must prescribe and enforce the rules and regulations regarding the
general cleanliness and sanitation of equipment, utensils, and working uniforms of
foodservice personnel. Additionally, you are responsible for the proper storage of food
equipment and for the use of sanitary procedures in the preparation and service of food.

Frequency of Inspections

To make sure all foodservice section rules and directed procedures are being followed,
the FSO and the senior CS should make both routine daily inspections and thorough
weekly inspections of all foodservice personnel, spaces, and operations.
Training

Foodservice personnel play an important role in the prevention of foodborne illness by

adhering to good personal hygiene procedures. For foodservice personnel to understand
these practices and procedures and appreciate their importance in preventing foodborne
illness, they must receive formal training as prescribed in SECNAVINST 4061.1 in
addition to their regular, supervised on-the-job instruction.
Physical Examinations

Physical examinations are a means of medically screening personnel for evidence of

communicable disease before initial assignment in foodservice. They are conducted to, at
a minimum, detect diseases that may be transmitted by food evidence of To this end, you
must make sure all personnel receive an initial physical examination before they are
assigned foodservice duties. Additional guidance can be found in chapter 1 of the
NAVMED P-5010.

340
Monitoring Temperatures

Foodservice personnel must exercise special and continuous close surveillance over
all food items, foodservice spaces, and foodservice equipment to make sure prescribed
temperatures are constantly maintained. You must make sure this action is taken to
prevent the following conditions:

• Damage to food items

• Heat stress conditions in food preparation spaces
• Improper preparation of food
• Inadequate holding temperatures for prepared food items
• Inadequate temperatures in the dishwashing and sanitizing process

Consequently, you must develop and carry out a system for monitoring the
temperatures of these items.

FOOD ITEMS.– You should supervise the length of time that foods are held at room
temperatures during handling and preparation. This will aid in making sure
contamination does not occur. Hand preparation not only increases the likelihood of
contamination but increases the time foods are at room temperature. The following are
some objectives you want to accomplish when regulating temperatures of food items
from the time the food is broken out until it is consumed or discarded:

• Make sure food is always refrigerated except during actual preparation or serving.

• Keep time between preparation and consumption to a minimum.

• Keep frozen foods frozen until removal for preparation.
• Thaw food at temperatures between 36°F and 38°F.
• Never thaw food by exposure to heat or in water.
• Once thawed, never refrigerate food.
• Food items that will not be served immediately should be handled in the
following manner:

Place in shallow pans (food depth not more than 3 inches) and cover

Label the product with the time and date of preparation, name of product and person
storing product, and expiration date of product

Then immediately refrigerate at temperatures below 41°F

Leftovers should be avoided if possible. However, if unavoidable, they should be

handled in the manner just described.

NOTE: Do not hold any hand-prepared item as a leftover.

341
 FOOD PREPARATION AREAS.– Food preparation areas must be monitored to
ensure proper ventilation. Proper ventilation allows for a net flow of air into the spaces
reducing excessive temperatures that may cause heat stress. Temperatures in foodservice
spaces should not exceed 78°F

STORAGE SPACES.– Storage spaces must be monitored to prevent the deterioration

of perishable food items resulting from improper temperatures. The following are causes
of deterioration of perishable food items:

• Bacteria, yeasts, and molds. They are the primary causes of spoilage. Usually an
objectional odor indicates spoilage by bacteria. Yeast induces spoilage for items of
high sugar content, particularly if stored between 77°F and 90°F. Mold can be
detected by visible threadlike filaments growing on the surface of food items.
• Age. All foodstuffs will spoil if kept in storage too long. This type of spoilage is
prevented by issuing the oldest items first.

Storerooms for semi perishable items should be clean, cool, dry, lighted, and well
ventilated.

You must maintain temperature logs for all refrigerated spaces. Temperatures of bulk
refrigerated spaces must be taken from thermometers inside each space at least twice
daily. These temperatures are recorded in a log and maintained by the jack-of-the-dust.
The engineering department must maintain a separate log with temperatures taken from
remote sensors. Temperature problems should be immediately reported to the FSO.

It is important that fresh and frozen food items should be stored in three separate food
categories. The following are the categories and associated requirements for proper
temperature maintenance:

• Fresh fruit and vegetables. Air circulation is important–containers should be

raised off the deck. This is accomplished by using pallets. The use of a fan helps
maintain air circulation in all parts of the room. Proper temperatures must be
maintained at 32°F to 41°F. Humidity should be from 85 to 95 percent.
• Dairy products and eggs. Air circulation maybe accomplished for these items by
storing on pallets that are raised off the deck. Additionally, there should be a fan
capable of keeping the air circulating. Proper temperatures must be maintained at
34°F to 41°F.
• Meat and other frozen products should not be stored on bare decks. The use of
pallets to raise items off the deck permits air to circulate under the items.
Temperatures for frozen products must be maintained at 0°F or below.

Acceptable temperature ranges for chilled and frozen storage or holding spaces are as
follows:

• Dairy: 41°F , or below

• Reach-in refrigerators: 32°F to 41°F

342
 • Chill and vegetables: 32°F to 41°F
• Thaw box: 36°F to 38°F
• Freezers: 0°F or below

There should be no frost buildup on the chill or freeze box coils. The chill and freeze
boxes should be defrosted and cleaned regularly. This is best accomplished when
provisions are low and just before loading out.

The engineering department should be informed when a major onload of stores is

going to take place. This allows them to plan ahead and secure the boxes affected. This
will prevent high or unnecessary loads on the chill or freeze unit and frost buildup during
the loading evolution. Hot gassing operations to defrost may even be planned during this
time. Remember to start the reefer units up immediately after the onload and have a
qualified person standing by to monitor the first couple hours of reefer operation.

EQUIPMENT.– Equipment such as ovens, griddles, fryers, and dishwashing and

sanitizing equipment should be calibrated periodically. This is done to make sure they
can maintain the required temperatures for their respective purposes.

Before calibrating ovens, griddles, fryers, and dishwashing and sanitizing equipment,
you should always consult the manufacturer’s technical manual before making any
adjustment. These procedures are written as general guidelines.

There are three types of thermostatic controls. The two that will not be discussed at
length here are those that have a backing plate with the temperatures marked or etched on
it and those with a movable toothed sleeve on the back of the knob.

The most common type of thermostat has a removable knob that exposes a hollow
shaft with a screw inside. When you turn the screw clockwise on this thermostat, the
temperature is lowered. When you turn the screw counterclockwise, it raises the
temperature.

A pyrometer with a surface probe is used to calibrate griddles. A wire probe is used
for ovens and a needle probe is used for deep-fat fryers, steam lines, sculleries, and so on.
Use of pyrometers is explained in the Standard Preventive Maintenance Subsystem
Identification Guide (SPMIG).

Dishwashing and sanitizing equipment must be constantly inspected and periodically

calibrated. This must be done to make sure the equipment is capable of maintaining the
required temperatures for all stages of the dishwashing and sanitizing operation.
Dishwashing and sanitizing are the most important steps in breaking the chain of
infection. If dishes are not clean and sanitary, germs can grow and reproduce. No matter
what method you use–by hand or the preferred machine method-the final results depend
upon the operator.

343
 Proper machine washing temperatures are as follows:

• Wash: 150°F to 160°F

• Rinse: 160°F to 180°F
• Sanitize/final rinse: 180°F to 195°F

Manual dishwashing temperatures are as follows:

• Wash: 95°F to 125°F

• Rinse: 120°F to 140°F (do not put hands in this water, use a dip basket)
• Sanitizing rinse: 171°F with a 30-second contact time (do not put hands in this
water, use a dip basket)

Allow all items to air dry and store clean dishware and equipment inverted.

Routine operational tests should be conducted to make sure the correct temperatures
are maintained for both manual and mechanical dishwashing.

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

It is a fact that a well-maintained galley plays an important role in effective

foodservice. This further contributes to labor saving and high morale. Yet, there are no
Navy schools that provide training on the proper upkeep of galley equipment. Contrary to
this is the fact that galley equipment is often the most used and abused equipment found
aboard ships. Engineers may often be preoccupied with other matters such as refresher
training (REFTRA) or operational reactor safeguards examinations (ORSEs). For this
reason, the role of the senior CS is vital. He or she must conduct frequent equipment
inspections as well as monitor required maintenance to make sure it is done properly. If
frequent inspections are not conducted to determine needed repairs, equipment
deficiencies may go unnoticed and lead to decreased operating efficiency and safety
hazards to personnel.

The Navy’s planned maintenance system (PMS) maintenance actions are the
minimum required to maintain Navy machinery and equipment in a fully operable
condition within given specifications. To this end, preventive maintenance is set up for
all equipment that may be seriously damaged or affect the safety of the operator if it
should break down. The Navy PMS program provides a list of all equipment that
requires periodic inspection, adjustment, cleaning, and lubrication.

The senior CS is directly responsible to the FSO for the proper maintenance of all
spaces and equipment of the foodservice section. In this position, you must advise the
appropriate department or division of all required repairs to foodservice equipment and
spaces.

A Machinist’s Mate should take care of the oiling of your equipment. However, it is
up to you to make sure it is done as scheduled.

344
Preventive Maintenance Schedules

Proper use of the PMS program ensures maintenance is conducted and completed
when required. It provides a simple and standard means for planning, scheduling,
controlling, and performing preventive maintenance. The PMS program uses schedules
and documents, some of which areas follows:

• A weekly PMS schedule shows the planned maintenance schedule for

accomplishment during a specific week.
• A quarterly PMS schedule shows the planned maintenance schedule for
accomplishment during a specific 3-month period.
• A cycle PMS schedule shows the planned maintenance requirements to be
performed during the period between major overhauls of a ship.

Routine Maintenance

Each piece of galley equipment has a maintenance requirement card (MRC). This card
provides detailed procedures for performing maintenance requirements and tells, who,
what, when, how, and with what resources a specific requirement is to be accomplished.
It also states safety precautions that reduce the chance of costly or dangerous preventive
maintenance errors.

PMS Audit/Spot Check

Individual maintenance requirements are audited to determine the effectiveness of

PMS accomplishments. The FSO or other designated person performs a PMS audit on at
least one maintenance requirement (MR) per week. The following steps should be taken
when conducting a PMS audit:

1. Randomly select from a weekly or quarterly schedule a maintenance requirement

that has been crossed off as being completed.

2. Identify and call upon the individual who performed the maintenance requirement.

2. Have this individual pull the MRC (auditor should read the MRC and become
familiar with the steps performed). Proceed with the individual to the equipment
selected to be checked.

3. Then question the maintenance person. The questioning should be of a general

nature and related to the maintenance requirement.

Memorizing the card is not required, but if the maintenance was done, the person
should be familiar with the MRC. Inquiries should be made to determine the following
information:

• If the person actually did the work. (If not, a scheduling or supervisory

345
problem exists.) If the person did not do the work then the individual who actually did the
maintenance should be questioned.
• If all basic parts of the maintenance requirement were done; for example, if parts
of the MR required operation of the equipment were they in fact operated.
• If basic safety precautions were observed.
• If the proper tools and materials were used.
• If disassembly was part of the procedure, inspect the equipment for evidence of
disassembly, such as mechanical guards or hold-down bolts.

Finally, the work center supervisor should be asked the technical accuracy of the
MRC.

346
 QUESTIONS:
“Foodservice Management” Assignment 9

9-1. When necessary, heads of supply departments or commanding officers may

supplement procedures that conflict with those that are contained in the NAVSUP
P-486.

1. True
2. False

9-2. As a leading CS, you may consult which of the following sources for detailed
information on getting the maximum use of your foodservice personnel and
resources?

1. NAVSUP P-421
2. NAVSUP P-486
3. NAVSUPMAN 39619
4. NMPCINST 1080.1

9-3. General mess (GM) organization and purpose require the efficient arrangement
of personnel using what criteria?

1. Experience
2. Function
3. Individual desire
4. Rank

9-4. As the leading CS, you should have access to GM records to accomplish all
EXCEPT which of the following tasks?

1. Record GM financial transactions

2. Conduct inventories of food items
3. Determine provisions requirements
4. Prepare correspondence and reports

9-5. In the chain of command of a typical GM, the records keeper comes directly
under what person?

1. Supply officer
2. Food service officer
3. Leading petty officer
4. Galley watch captain

347
9-6. An individual is entitled to a special meal under which of the following
circumstances?

1. When required to work through normal meal hours

2. When on the ship’s weight control program
3. Whenever the day is a holiday
4. Whenever the ship is at battle stations

9–7. When you are unable to collect from individuals fed under disaster or
emergency situations ashore, reimbursement may be obtained from all EXCEPT
which of the following organizations?

1. NAVSUP
2. Navy Relief
3. The American Red Cross
4. TYCOM

9–8. The Navy food management teams (NFMTs) are directly responsible to what
person or organization for performance of their mission?

1. BUPERS
2. CNO
3. NAVSUP
4. SECNAV

9-9. Which of the following functions is part of the NFMTs’ mission?

1. Establishing foodservice regulations

2. Establishing accounting procedures
3. Imparting programs of instruction to BQs ashore
4. Instilling management awareness in responsible foodservice personnel

9-10. For what reason should a NFMT visit NOT be requested for a newly
commissioned ship before its shakedown period?

1. The ship has new equipment and top quality personnel

2. The ship is not yet equipped to fund such a visit
3. The ship does not have an operating mess
4. The ship cannot gain the maximum benefits from such a visit

9–11. At the conclusion of a visit, the officer in charge of the team ultimately
submits a summary of the visit to what person or organization?

1. Leading CS
2. Supply officer
3. NAVFSSO

348
4. Area TYCOM

9-12. When you are guiding the requisitioning of supplies and controlling breakouts
and inventories, what is the most effective management tool you can use?

1. The AFRS
2. The Federal Supply Catalog
3. Your experience
4. Your planned menus

9-13. The NAVSUP Form 1343 is used to provide what information?

1. Foodservice suggestions
2. Recipe acceptability levels
3. Leftover documentation
4. Meal attendance history

9-14. In providing GM customer service, you should treat the customer as just one
of the crew so that no resentment may result.

1. True
2. False

9-15. The cost of food items used in preparing night meals is compensated for using
what method?

1. Claiming additional ration credit

2. Using a special allowance
3. Using a supplemental allowance
4. Including in the total cost of issues to the GM

9-16. Authorization to receive food items for picnics or recreation events may be
granted by what officer?

1. Commanding
2. Executive
3. Food service
4. Supply

9-17. Which of the following categories of personnel are NOT entitled to meals at
government expense?

1. Prisoners of war
2. Foreign government personnel not on invitational travel orders
3. Retired military personnel confined to a hospital
4. Reserve enlisted personnel in a duty status

349
9-18. The FSO is advised of the estimated number of personnel entitled to be fed
daily in the GM by what person?

1. Commanding officer
2. Duty officer
3. Duty supply officer
4. Executive officer

9–19. During at-sea periods, ration credit should be taken in what manner?

1. For each enlisted person attached to the ship only

2. For each enlisted person on board at that time only
3. For ship’s company
4. For those meals actually consumed

9–20. Under which of the following conditions may full ration credit be taken
aboard a ship during an in-port period?

1. The day is a holiday

2. The ship is moored in a foreign port
3. The ship is conducting simulated at-sea exercises overnight
4. The status of the GM is underissue

350
 APPENDIX: A
FOOD SERVICE FORMS

NAVSUP FORM 335 (Subsistence Ledger) (Front and ack)……………………352/353

NAVSUP FORM 338 (General Mess Control Record) (Front and Back)………354/355

NAVSUP FORM 367 (Record of Receipts and Expenditures)………………………356

NAVSUP FORM 470 (Cash Receipt Book)………………………………………….357

NAVSUP FORM 1046 (Sale of Enlisted Dining Facility Meals)…………………….358

NAVSUP FORM 1090 (Food Preparation Worksheet)……………………………….359

NAVSUP FORM 1105 (Meal Pass)…………………………………………………...360

NAVSUP FORM 1282 (Food Item Request/Issue Document)………………………..361

NAVSUP FORM 1291 (Meal Signature Record)……………………………………..362

NAVSUP FORM 1292 (Recapitulation of Meal Record)……………………………..363

NAVSUP FORM 1334 (Expenditure Log – Loss Without Survey)…………………..364

NAVSUP FORM 1359 (General Mess Summary Document)………………………..365

DD FORM 200 (Financial Liability Investigation of Property Loss)……………366/367

DD FORM 1155 (Order for Supply or Services)……………………………………..368

DD FORM 1149 (Requisition and Invoice/Shipping Document)……………………369

DD FORM 1544 (Cash Meal Payment Book)……………………………………….370

DD FORM 1608 (Unsatisfactory Material Report-Subsistence)…………………….371

351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
 GLOSSARY

ACIDITY—Sourness or tartness in a food product; a condition indicating excess

fermentation in yeast dough; with soda, generates carbon dioxide for leavening in cakes.

AEROBIC BACTERIA—Those that require the presence of free oxygen, such as found
in the air, for growth.

ALBUMEN—The major protein in egg whites.

ALMOND PASTE—A confection ingredient made of finely ground almonds and sugar.

ANAEROBIC BACTERIA—Those that grow in an absence of free oxygen, deriving

oxygen from solid or liquid materials and producing toxic substances.

ANTIPASTI—(or Antipasto) (Italian) An appetizer, or a spicy first course consisting of

relishes, cold sliced meats rolled with or without stuffings, fish, or other hors d’oeuvres
eaten with a fork.

APPETIZER—A small portion of food or drink before, or as the first course of, a meal.
These include a wide assortment of items ranging from cocktails, canapés, and hors
d’oeuvres to plain fruit juices. The function of an appetizer is to pep up the appetite.

ASPIC—(French) A molded jelly made from different preparations. The base is gelatin
which sets the mixture. Various liquids may be used, but tomato juice is most common.
Recipes may require chopped vegetables, fish, poultry, or meats in aspic.

BACTERIA—Microscopic, one-celled organisms found in soil, water, and most material

throughout nature. Some are responsible for disease and food spoilage, others are useful
in industrial fermentation.

BAKE—To cook by dry heat in an oven either covered or uncovered. Usually called
roasting when referring to meats.

BASTE—To moisten foods while cooking, especially while roasting meat. Melted fat,
meat drippings, stock, water and fat, or water may be used.

BATTER—A homogeneous mixture of ingredients with liquid to make a mass that is

semi liquid.

BAVARIAN CREAM—(German) A variation of soft custard into which gelatin and

whipped cream and sometimes egg whites and flavoring are folded.

BENCH PROOF—(Baking term) The property of dough to ferment at a rate slow

enough to prevent overfermentation while dough is being made up into units on the
bench.

372
BISQUE—(French) A thick soup usually made with a white sauce base and containing
fish, shellfish, chicken, or cooked meat. Ingredients are pureed. Also, a rich frozen
dessert, often containing powdered nuts or macaroons.

BLANCH—1. To partially cook in hot, deep fat for a short time until clear but not
brown. Used for potatoes. 2. To rinse with boiling water, drain, and rinse with cold water.
Used for rice, macaroni, and other pastas to prevent sticking. 3. A method used to remove
skins from almonds.

BLEND—To thoroughly mix two or more ingredients.

BOIL—To cook in a liquid that bubbles actively during the time of cooking. The boiling
temperature at sea level is 212°F.

BOTULINUS—A deadly bacterium that develops in canned foods that have been
improperly canned.

BOUILLON—(French) A clear soup made from beef or chicken stock. May be used as a
soup or gravy base. Obtainable in cubes or powder for reconstituting.

BOWL KNIFE—A spatula or flexible dull-edge knife used to scrape batter or dough
from bowl sides.

BRAISE—To brown meat or vegetables in a small amount of fat, then to cook slowly,
covered, at simmering temperature (185°F to 210°F) in a small amount of liquid. The
liquid may be juices from meat or added water, milk, or meat stock

BRAN—Skin or outer covering of the wheat kernel.

BROIL—To cook under or over direct heat; to grill. No liquid is added. Oven—to cook
in an oven, uncovered. Griddle-to cook uncovered on a hot griddle, removing grease as it
accumulates.

BROWN—To seal juices inside a piece of food by searing its surfaces on a hot griddle or
pan.

BUTTERFLY—A method of cutting double chops (usually pork) from boneless loin
strips. The double chops are joined by a thin layer of meat.

CANAPE—(French) An appetizer eaten with the fingers, served either hot or cold. Small
pieces of bread, toast, or crackers topped with a tasty spread.

CAPON—A young male bird that has been castrated at an early age, to improve the
flavor, and fattened.

373
CARAMELIZE—To heat sugar or food containing sugar until sugar melts and a brown
color and characteristic flavor develops.

CARBOHYDRATES—Sugars and starches derived chiefly from fruits and vegetable

sources that contain set amounts of carbon, hydrogen, and oxygen.

CARDAMON—Seed of an East Indian spice plant used for flavoring.

CARRIERS—Persons who harbor and send out germs without having symptoms of a
disease. The individual has either had the disease atone time and continues to excrete the
organism, or has never manifested symptoms because of good resistance to the disease.

CHIFFONADE—(or Chiffonade) (French) A method of cutting foods into fine strips to

be used as garnished. (See Julienne.)

CHILI—(Spanish) A pepper or its fruit. Dried chili peppers are ground into chili
powder.

CHOP—To cut food into irregular small pieces with a knife or chopper.

COAGULATE—To curdle, clot, congeal, or solidify.

COMPOUNDS—(Baking term) Certain mixtures of fats and oils.

CONDIMENTS—Substances that in themselves furnish little nourishment but have

stimulating flavor.

CONSOMME—(French) A clear soup made from two or more kinds of concentrated

meat stock.

CORN—A method of preserving and seasoning with salt brine and other preservatives.

CREAMING—The process of mixing and aerating shortening and another solid, such as
sugar or flour; to thoroughly blend.

CREAM PUFFS—Baked puffs of cream puff dough that are hollow; usually filled with
whipped cream or cooked custard.

CREOLE—A sauce cooked and used over poultry served with rice or a casserole dish of
poultry or seafood and rice cooked in such a sauce.

CRULLERS—Long, twisted, baking powder doughnuts.

CURRY—A powder made from many spices and used as a seasoning for Indian and
Oriental dishes (shrimp or chicken curry).

374
DANISH PASTRY—A flaky yeast dough having butter or shortening rolled into it.

DICE—To cut into cubes of approximately one-fourth inch.

DOCK—To punch a number of vertical impressions in a dough with a smooth round

stick about the size of a pencil to allow for expansion and permit gas to
escape during baking.

DREDGE—To coat food items with flour, sugar, or meal.

DUCHESS—(or Duchesses) A name given to various mixtures to which beaten whole

eggs (or whites only in some dessert items) are added. The mixture is shaped into balls
and baked. A method used most often with mashed potatoes.

DUSTING—Alight film of flour or starch that is placed on pans or workbench to prevent

dough from sticking.

ECLAIR—(French) A small filled pastry made from cream puff batter (or choux paste).
The filling varies, but usually is vanilla cream filling or whipped cream injected from a
special tube filler. The baked, filled shell is dusted with confectioners’ sugar or covered
with a thin layer of chocolate.

EMULSIFICATION—The process of blending together fat and water solutions to

produce a stable mixture that will not separate on standing.

FERMENTATION—The chemical change of an organic compound due to action of

living organisms (yeast or bacteria), usually producing a leavening gas.

FILET—(French) Designates a French method of dressing fish, poultry, or meat to

exclude bones and include whole muscle strips. The English term is fillet.

FILET MIGNON—May be tenderloin of beef, mutton, veal, or pork.

FINGER ROLL—A bun about 5 inches by 1 inch in size.

FOAM—Mass of beaten egg and sugar, as in sponge cake before the flour is added.

FRANCONIA—(German) An ancient German territory. In culinary sense, means

“browned,” as whole potatoes browned with roast.

FRENCHING—A method of preparing boneless veal or pork chops by flattening with a

cleaver.

FRICASSEE—To cook by braising; usually applied to poultry or veal cut into pieces.

375
FRITTERS—Originally a small portion of fruit dipped in batter and fried. The term now
includes plain fried balls of batter or balls containing chopped meat, poultry, fruit, or
vegetables.

FRIZZLE—To cook in a small amount of fat until food is crisp and curled at the edges;
a meat crimped, frizzed, or curled at the edges, as frizzled dried beef and scrambled eggs.

GELATINIZE—The swelling of starch particles in hot water.

GLAZE—A thin sugar syrup coating (or a thickened sugar mixture) used for coating
pastries, cakes, and meats.

GLUCOSE—A simple sugar made by action of acid on starch. It is made chiefly from
cornstarch and is usually referred to as corn syrup.

GLUTEN—The elastic protein mass that is formed when flour is mixed with water.
Composed of two proteins: gliadin for elasticity and glutenin for strength.

GRAHAM FLOUR—Finely ground whole wheat flour.

GRAINING—Refers to the formation of crystals in a cooled sugar solution after it has

been boiled. If cooling is slow, large crystals will form. Rapid cooling produces small
crystals. Small, fine crystallization, desired in making fondant, is accomplished by rapid
mixing during cooling.

HOLLANDAISE—A hot sauce made with egg yolks and butter and served with
vegetables.

INVERT SUGAR—A mixture of dextrose and levulose made by inverting sucrose with
acid or enzymes.

JAMBALAYA—A creole rice-tomato dish with fish, shellfish, or meat.

JARDINIERE—(French) A meat dish or a garnish, “garden” style, made of several

kinds of vegetables.

JELLY WREATH—A rolled ring of basic sweet dough containing jelly.

JULIENNE—(French) A way of cutting vegetables, meat, or poultry into fine strips or

shreds.

KNEAD—To alternately press and turn and fold dough with the hands for the purpose of
expelling gas and redistributing the yeast.

KOLACHES—(Czechoslovakia or Bohemia) A bun made from a soft dough topped

with fruit, nuts, fruit-nut, or seed fillings.

376
LACTOSE—The sugar found in milk.

LARDING—To cover uncooked lean meat or fish with strips of fat, or to insert strips of
fat with a skewer.

LEAVENING—Raising or lightening by air, steam, or gas (carbon dioxide). Usually,

the agent for generating gas in a dough or batter is yeast or baking
powder.

LEVULOSE—A simple sugar found in honey, fruits, and invert sugar.

LYONNAISE—(French) A seasoning with onions and parsley originating in Lyons,

France. Sautéed potatoes, green beans, and other vegetables are seasoned this way.

MARBLING—The intermingling of fat with lean in meat muscles. The presence or

absence of marbling can be seen on the surface of meat that has been cut across the grain.
The presence of marbling indicates quality and palatability of meat.

MARINATE—To cover food with a marinade (a preparation containing spices,

vegetables, herbs, and a liquid, usually acid) and let stand for a period of time to enhance
its flavor and improve its tenderness.

MARZIPAN—A confection of almonds reduced to a paste with sugar and used for
modeling, masking, and torte.

MASKING—To cover completely with a sauce, jelly aspic, mayonnaise, cream, icing, or
frosting.

MERINGUE—A white frothy mass of beaten egg whites and sugar.

MINCE—To cut or chop into very small pieces (finer than chopped).

MIREPOIX—A combination of chopped aromatic vegetables—usually two parts onion,

one part carrot, and one part celery—used to flavor stocks, soups, braises, and stews.

MISE EN PLACE—Literally, “put in place.” The preparation and assembly of

ingredients, pans, utensils, and plates or serving pieces needed for a particular dish or
service period.

MOUSSE—(French) The word means “froth.” Mousse is a cold entrée (meat, poultry, or
seafood mousse) or a frozen dessert. The basic ingredients are beaten eggs, whipped
cream, and gelatin.

NAPOLEON—A pastry made from choux (or puff paste rolled very thin, baked, cooled,
and layered with cream filling. Usually topped with icing or confectioners’ sugar.

377
NUTRIENT—A substance in food that the human is known to require to support life and
health.

OMELET—(or French: omelette) Eggs cooked with yolks and whites beaten together or
separately and blended, depending upon the type of omelet.

PANBROIL—To cook uncovered in a hot frying pan, pouring off fat as it accumulates.

PARASITES—Organisms that live in or on a living host that they usually do not

destroy.

PARBOIL—To boil in water until partially cooked.

PASTA—(or Paste) (Italian) A term referring to macaroni products, including spaghetti,

noodles, and other pastes made from hard wheat (durum or semolina).

PETIT FOURS—Small decorated squares of cake.

PILAF—(also Pilau) An Oriental or Turkish dish made of rice. The cooking liquid used
is beef or chicken stock, mildly flavored with onions.

POACH—Method of cooking food in a hot liquid that is kept just below the boiling
point.

POULTRY TERMS:

DRAWN— Killed and feathers and intestines feathers removed.

DRESSED— Killed and removed.

EVISCERATED—Dressed, drawn, and cut up ready to cook.

FIRST JOINT—Wing joint next to carcass.

GIBLETS—Heart, gizzard, and liver of poultry cooked and chopped for use in
gravy. The neck and wingtips may be also used as giblets.

OYSTER MUSCLE—Tender, oval dark meat that is found in recess on either

side of back, above the wings.

READY TO COOK—See Eviscerated.

SECOND JOINT—The portion Of the wing between the first joint and the
wingtip. Also the thigh portion of the leg.

378
PROVOLONI—(Italian) A cured hard cheese that has a smoky flavor.

PUREE—To press fruit, vegetables or other solid foods through a sieve, food mill, or
blender; also a soup made with pureed foods combined with white sauce, cream, or stock.

QUAHAUG—(or Quahog) Indian name for hard clam.

SANITIZE—Effective bactericidal treatment of clean surfaces of equipment and utensils

by an established process.

SATURATION—Absorption to the limit of capacity.

SAUTÉ—To panfry lightly and quickly in a very little hot fat, turning frequently.

SCALD—To heat a liquid to just below the boiling point.

SCALING—(Bating term) Apportioning batter or dough according to unit of weight.

SCALLOP—To bake food, usually cut in small pieces, with a sauce or other liquid.
Topping of crumbs or shredded cheese frequently used.

SCONE—A shortcake, containing raisins, that has an egg-milk wash and cinnamon
topping to give a colorful, rich crust.

SCORE—To cut shallow slits or gashes in surface of food with a knife, fork, or another
implement.

SEAR—To brown the surface of meat by a short application of intense heat.

SIMMER—To cook in liquid at a temperature just below the boiling point (190°F-
210°F); bubbles will form slowly and break below the surface.

SKIM—To remove floating matter from the surface of a liquid with a spoon, ladle, or
skimmer.

SMOTHER—To cook in a closed container or in a close mass as smothered onions.

SOUFFLÉ—(French) A delicate, spongy hot dish made principally of stiffly whipped

egg whites. Cheese is commonly used, but other soufflés include fish, meat, poultry, and
vegetables. Also prepared as a dessert.

STEW—To simmer in enough liquid to cover solid foods.

TARTS—Small pastries with heavy fruit or cream filling.

379
TEMPER—To remove from freezer and place under refrigeration for a period of time
sufficient to Facilitate separation and handling of frozen product. Internal temperature of
the food should be approximately 26°F to 28°F.

TOXIN—A waste product given off by a microorganism causing contamination of food

and subsequent illness in human beings.

TRUSS—To bind or fasten together. Usually refers to poultry.

VINAIGRETTE—(French) A mixture of oil and vinegar seasoned with salt, pepper, and
herbs that is used in sauces and dressings.

VIRUS—A group of submicroscopic organisms that grow in living tissue and may
produce disease in animals and plants. Viruses are smaller than bacteria and will pass
through membranes or filters.

YEAST—A microscopic plant that reproduces by budding and causes fermentation and
the giving off of carbon dioxide gas; leavening agent.

380